The Count of Monte Cristo

VOLUME ONE

On the 24th of February, 1815, the look-out at Notre-Dame de
la Garde signalled the three-master, the Pharaon from
Smyrna, Trieste, and Naples.

As usual, a pilot put off immediately, and rounding the
Chateau d’If, got on board the vessel between Cape Morgion
and Rion island.

Immediately, and according to custom, the ramparts of Fort
Saint-Jean were covered with spectators; it is always an
event at Marseilles for a ship to come into port, especially
when this ship, like the Pharaon, has been built, rigged,
and laden at the old Phocee docks, and belongs to an owner
of the city.

The ship drew on and had safely passed the strait, which
some volcanic shock has made between the Calasareigne and
Jaros islands; had doubled Pomegue, and approached the
harbor under topsails, jib, and spanker, but so slowly and
sedately that the idlers, with that instinct which is the
forerunner of evil, asked one another what misfortune could
have happened on board. However, those experienced in
navigation saw plainly that if any accident had occurred, it
was not to the vessel herself, for she bore down with all
the evidence of being skilfully handled, the anchor
a-cockbill, the jib-boom guys already eased off, and
standing by the side of the pilot, who was steering the
Pharaon towards the narrow entrance of the inner port, was a
young man, who, with activity and vigilant eye, watched
every motion of the ship, and repeated each direction of the
pilot.

The vague disquietude which prevailed among the spectators
had so much affected one of the crowd that he did not await
the arrival of the vessel in harbor, but jumping into a
small skiff, desired to be pulled alongside the Pharaon,
which he reached as she rounded into La Reserve basin.

When the young man on board saw this person approach, he
left his station by the pilot, and, hat in hand, leaned over
the ship’s bulwarks.

He was a fine, tall, slim young fellow of eighteen or
twenty, with black eyes, and hair as dark as a raven’s wing;
and his whole appearance bespoke that calmness and
resolution peculiar to men accustomed from their cradle to
contend with danger.

“Ah, is it you, Dantes?” cried the man in the skiff. “What’s
the matter? and why have you such an air of sadness aboard?”

“A great misfortune, M. Morrel,” replied the young man, —
“a great misfortune, for me especially! Off Civita Vecchia
we lost our brave Captain Leclere.”

“And the cargo?” inquired the owner, eagerly.

“Is all safe, M. Morrel; and I think you will be satisfied
on that head. But poor Captain Leclere — “

“What happened to him?” asked the owner, with an air of
considerable resignation. “What happened to the worthy
captain?”

“He died.”

“Fell into the sea?”

“No, sir, he died of brain-fever in dreadful agony.” Then
turning to the crew, he said, “Bear a hand there, to take in
sail!”

All hands obeyed, and at once the eight or ten seamen who
composed the crew, sprang to their respective stations at
the spanker brails and outhaul, topsail sheets and halyards,
the jib downhaul, and the topsail clewlines and buntlines.
The young sailor gave a look to see that his orders were
promptly and accurately obeyed, and then turned again to the
owner.

“And how did this misfortune occur?” inquired the latter,
resuming the interrupted conversation.

“Alas, sir, in the most unexpected manner. After a long talk
with the harbor-master, Captain Leclere left Naples greatly
disturbed in mind. In twenty-four hours he was attacked by a
fever, and died three days afterwards. We performed the
usual burial service, and he is at his rest, sewn up in his
hammock with a thirty-six pound shot at his head and his
heels, off El Giglio island. We bring to his widow his sword
and cross of honor. It was worth while, truly,” added the
young man with a melancholy smile, “to make war against the
English for ten years, and to die in his bed at last, like
everybody else.”

“Why, you see, Edmond,” replied the owner, who appeared more
comforted at every moment, “we are all mortal, and the old
must make way for the young. If not, why, there would be no
promotion; and since you assure me that the cargo — “

“Is all safe and sound, M. Morrel, take my word for it; and
I advise you not to take 25,000 francs for the profits of
the voyage.”

Then, as they were just passing the Round Tower, the young
man shouted: “Stand by there to lower the topsails and jib;
brail up the spanker!”

The order was executed as promptly as it would have been on
board a man-of-war.

“Let go — and clue up!” At this last command all the sails
were lowered, and the vessel moved almost imperceptibly
onwards.

“Now, if you will come on board, M. Morrel,” said Dantes,
observing the owner’s impatience, “here is your supercargo,
M. Danglars, coming out of his cabin, who will furnish you
with every particular. As for me, I must look after the
anchoring, and dress the ship in mourning.”

The owner did not wait for a second invitation. He seized a
rope which Dantes flung to him, and with an activity that
would have done credit to a sailor, climbed up the side of
the ship, while the young man, going to his task, left the
conversation to Danglars, who now came towards the owner. He
was a man of twenty-five or twenty-six years of age, of
unprepossessing countenance, obsequious to his superiors,
insolent to his subordinates; and this, in addition to his
position as responsible agent on board, which is always
obnoxious to the sailors, made him as much disliked by the
crew as Edmond Dantes was beloved by them.

“Well, M. Morrel,” said Danglars, “you have heard of the
misfortune that has befallen us?”

“Yes — yes: poor Captain Leclere! He was a brave and an
honest man.”

“And a first-rate seaman, one who had seen long and
honorable service, as became a man charged with the
interests of a house so important as that of Morrel & Son,”
replied Danglars.

“But,” replied the owner, glancing after Dantes, who was
watching the anchoring of his vessel, “it seems to me that a
sailor needs not be so old as you say, Danglars, to
understand his business, for our friend Edmond seems to
understand it thoroughly, and not to require instruction
from any one.”

“Yes,” said Danglars, darting at Edmond a look gleaming with
hate. “Yes, he is young, and youth is invariably
self-confident. Scarcely was the captain’s breath out of his
body when he assumed the command without consulting any one,
and he caused us to lose a day and a half at the Island of
Elba, instead of making for Marseilles direct.”

“As to taking command of the vessel,” replied Morrel, “that
was his duty as captain’s mate; as to losing a day and a
half off the Island of Elba, he was wrong, unless the vessel
needed repairs.”

“The vessel was in as good condition as I am, and as, I hope
you are, M. Morrel, and this day and a half was lost from
pure whim, for the pleasure of going ashore, and nothing
else.”

“Dantes,” said the shipowner, turning towards the young man,
“come this way!”

“In a moment, sir,” answered Dantes, “and I’m with you.”
Then calling to the crew, he said — “Let go!”

The anchor was instantly dropped, and the chain ran rattling
through the port-hole. Dantes continued at his post in spite
of the presence of the pilot, until this manoeuvre was
completed, and then he added, “Half-mast the colors, and
square the yards!”

“You see,” said Danglars, “he fancies himself captain
already, upon my word.”

“And so, in fact, he is,” said the owner.

“Except your signature and your partner’s, M. Morrel.”

“And why should he not have this?” asked the owner; “he is
young, it is true, but he seems to me a thorough seaman, and
of full experience.”

A cloud passed over Danglars’ brow. “Your pardon, M.
Morrel,” said Dantes, approaching, “the vessel now rides at
anchor, and I am at your service. You hailed me, I think?”

Danglars retreated a step or two. “I wished to inquire why
you stopped at the Island of Elba?”

“I do not know, sir; it was to fulfil the last instructions
of Captain Leclere, who, when dying, gave me a packet for
Marshal Bertrand.”

“Then did you see him, Edmond?”

“Who?”

“The marshal.”

“Yes.”

Morrel looked around him, and then, drawing Dantes on one
side, he said suddenly — “And how is the emperor?”

“Very well, as far as I could judge from the sight of him.”

“You saw the emperor, then?”

“He entered the marshal’s apartment while I was there.”

“And you spoke to him?”

“Why, it was he who spoke to me, sir,” said Dantes, with a
smile.

“And what did he say to you?”

“Asked me questions about the vessel, the time she left
Marseilles, the course she had taken, and what was her
cargo. I believe, if she had not been laden, and I had been
her master, he would have bought her. But I told him I was
only mate, and that she belonged to the firm of Morrel &
Son. `Ah, yes,’ he said, `I know them. The Morrels have been
shipowners from father to son; and there was a Morrel who
served in the same regiment with me when I was in garrison
at Valence.'”

“Pardieu, and that is true!” cried the owner, greatly
delighted. “And that was Policar Morrel, my uncle, who was
afterwards a captain. Dantes, you must tell my uncle that
the emperor remembered him, and you will see it will bring
tears into the old soldier’s eyes. Come, come,” continued
he, patting Edmond’s shoulder kindly, “you did very right,
Dantes, to follow Captain Leclere’s instructions, and touch
at Elba, although if it were known that you had conveyed a
packet to the marshal, and had conversed with the emperor,
it might bring you into trouble.”

“How could that bring me into trouble, sir?” asked Dantes;
“for I did not even know of what I was the bearer; and the
emperor merely made such inquiries as he would of the first
comer. But, pardon me, here are the health officers and the
customs inspectors coming alongside.” And the young man went
to the gangway. As he departed, Danglars approached, and
said, —

“Well, it appears that he has given you satisfactory reasons
for his landing at Porto-Ferrajo?”

“Yes, most satisfactory, my dear Danglars.”

“Well, so much the better,” said the supercargo; “for it is
not pleasant to think that a comrade has not done his duty.”

“Dantes has done his,” replied the owner, “and that is not
saying much. It was Captain Leclere who gave orders for this
delay.”

“Talking of Captain Leclere, has not Dantes given you a
letter from him?”

“To me? — no — was there one?”

“I believe that, besides the packet, Captain Leclere
confided a letter to his care.”

“Of what packet are you speaking, Danglars?”

“Why, that which Dantes left at Porto-Ferrajo.”

“How do you know he had a packet to leave at Porto-Ferrajo?”

Danglars turned very red.

“I was passing close to the door of the captain’s cabin,
which was half open, and I saw him give the packet and
letter to Dantes.”

“He did not speak to me of it,” replied the shipowner; “but
if there be any letter he will give it to me.”

Danglars reflected for a moment. “Then, M. Morrel, I beg of
you,” said he, “not to say a word to Dantes on the subject.
I may have been mistaken.”

At this moment the young man returned; Danglars withdrew.

“Well, my dear Dantes, are you now free?” inquired the
owner.

“Yes, sir.”

“You have not been long detained.”

“No. I gave the custom-house officers a copy of our bill of
lading; and as to the other papers, they sent a man off with
the pilot, to whom I gave them.”

“Then you have nothing more to do here?”

“No — everything is all right now.”

“Then you can come and dine with me?”

“I really must ask you to excuse me, M. Morrel. My first
visit is due to my father, though I am not the less grateful
for the honor you have done me.”

“Right, Dantes, quite right. I always knew you were a good
son.”

“And,” inquired Dantes, with some hesitation, “do you know
how my father is?”

“Well, I believe, my dear Edmond, though I have not seen him
lately.”

“Yes, he likes to keep himself shut up in his little room.”

“That proves, at least, that he has wanted for nothing
during your absence.”

Dantes smiled. “My father is proud, sir, and if he had not a
meal left, I doubt if he would have asked anything from
anyone, except from Heaven.”

“Well, then, after this first visit has been made we shall
count on you.”

“I must again excuse myself, M. Morrel, for after this first
visit has been paid I have another which I am most anxious
to pay.”

“True, Dantes, I forgot that there was at the Catalans some
one who expects you no less impatiently than your father —
the lovely Mercedes.”

Dantes blushed.

“Ah, ha,” said the shipowner, “I am not in the least
surprised, for she has been to me three times, inquiring if
there were any news of the Pharaon. Peste, Edmond, you have
a very handsome mistress!”

“She is not my mistress,” replied the young sailor, gravely;
“she is my betrothed.”

“Sometimes one and the same thing,” said Morrel, with a
smile.

“Not with us, sir,” replied Dantes.

“Well, well, my dear Edmond,” continued the owner, “don’t
let me detain you. You have managed my affairs so well that
I ought to allow you all the time you require for your own.
Do you want any money?”

“No, sir; I have all my pay to take — nearly three months’
wages.”

“You are a careful fellow, Edmond.”

“Say I have a poor father, sir.”

“Yes, yes, I know how good a son you are, so now hasten away
to see your father. I have a son too, and I should be very
wroth with those who detained him from me after a three
months’ voyage.”

“Then I have your leave, sir?”

“Yes, if you have nothing more to say to me.”

“Nothing.”

“Captain Leclere did not, before he died, give you a letter
for me?”

“He was unable to write, sir. But that reminds me that I
must ask your leave of absence for some days.”

“To get married?”

“Yes, first, and then to go to Paris.”

“Very good; have what time you require, Dantes. It will take
quite six weeks to unload the cargo, and we cannot get you
ready for sea until three months after that; only be back
again in three months, for the Pharaon,” added the owner,
patting the young sailor on the back, “cannot sail without
her captain.”

“Without her captain!” cried Dantes, his eyes sparkling with
animation; “pray mind what you say, for you are touching on
the most secret wishes of my heart. Is it really your
intention to make me captain of the Pharaon?”

“If I were sole owner we’d shake hands on it now, my dear
Dantes, and call it settled; but I have a partner, and you
know the Italian proverb — Chi ha compagno ha padrone —
`He who has a partner has a master.’ But the thing is at
least half done, as you have one out of two votes. Rely on
me to procure you the other; I will do my best.”

“Ah, M. Morrel,” exclaimed the young seaman, with tears in
his eyes, and grasping the owner’s hand, “M. Morrel, I thank
you in the name of my father and of Mercedes.”

“That’s all right, Edmond. There’s a providence that watches
over the deserving. Go to your father: go and see Mercedes,
and afterwards come to me.”

“Shall I row you ashore?”

“No, thank you; I shall remain and look over the accounts
with Danglars. Have you been satisfied with him this
voyage?”

“That is according to the sense you attach to the question,
sir. Do you mean is he a good comrade? No, for I think he
never liked me since the day when I was silly enough, after
a little quarrel we had, to propose to him to stop for ten
minutes at the island of Monte Cristo to settle the dispute
— a proposition which I was wrong to suggest, and he quite
right to refuse. If you mean as responsible agent when you
ask me the question, I believe there is nothing to say
against him, and that you will be content with the way in
which he has performed his duty.”

“But tell me, Dantes, if you had command of the Pharaon
should you be glad to see Danglars remain?”

“Captain or mate, M. Morrel, I shall always have the
greatest respect for those who possess the owners’
confidence.”

“That’s right, that’s right, Dantes! I see you are a
thoroughly good fellow, and will detain you no longer. Go,
for I see how impatient you are.”

“Then I have leave?”

“Go, I tell you.”

“May I have the use of your skiff?”

“Certainly.”

“Then, for the present, M. Morrel, farewell, and a thousand
thanks!”

“I hope soon to see you again, my dear Edmond. Good luck to
you.”

The young sailor jumped into the skiff, and sat down in the
stern sheets, with the order that he be put ashore at La
Canebiere. The two oarsmen bent to their work, and the
little boat glided away as rapidly as possible in the midst
of the thousand vessels which choke up the narrow way which
leads between the two rows of ships from the mouth of the
harbor to the Quai d’Orleans.

The shipowner, smiling, followed him with his eyes until he
saw him spring out on the quay and disappear in the midst of
the throng, which from five o’clock in the morning until
nine o’clock at night, swarms in the famous street of La
Canebiere, — a street of which the modern Phocaeans are so
proud that they say with all the gravity in the world, and
with that accent which gives so much character to what is
said, “If Paris had La Canebiere, Paris would be a second
Marseilles.” On turning round the owner saw Danglars behind
him, apparently awaiting orders, but in reality also
watching the young sailor, — but there was a great
difference in the expression of the two men who thus
followed the movements of Edmond Dantes.

We will leave Danglars struggling with the demon of hatred,
and endeavoring to insinuate in the ear of the shipowner
some evil suspicions against his comrade, and follow Dantes,
who, after having traversed La Canebiere, took the Rue de
Noailles, and entering a small house, on the left of the
Allees de Meillan, rapidly ascended four flights of a dark
staircase, holding the baluster with one hand, while with
the other he repressed the beatings of his heart, and paused
before a half-open door, from which he could see the whole
of a small room.

This room was occupied by Dantes’ father. The news of the
arrival of the Pharaon had not yet reached the old man, who,
mounted on a chair, was amusing himself by training with
trembling hand the nasturtiums and sprays of clematis that
clambered over the trellis at his window. Suddenly, he felt
an arm thrown around his body, and a well-known voice behind
him exclaimed, “Father — dear father!”

The old man uttered a cry, and turned round; then, seeing
his son, he fell into his arms, pale and trembling.

“What ails you, my dearest father? Are you ill?” inquired
the young man, much alarmed.

“No, no, my dear Edmond — my boy — my son! — no; but I
did not expect you; and joy, the surprise of seeing you so
suddenly — Ah, I feel as if I were going to die.”

“Come, come, cheer up, my dear father! ‘Tis I — really I!
They say joy never hurts, and so I came to you without any
warning. Come now, do smile, instead of looking at me so
solemnly. Here I am back again, and we are going to be
happy.”

“Yes, yes, my boy, so we will — so we will,” replied the
old man; “but how shall we be happy? Shall you never leave
me again? Come, tell me all the good fortune that has
befallen you.”

“God forgive me,” said the young man, “for rejoicing at
happiness derived from the misery of others, but, Heaven
knows, I did not seek this good fortune; it has happened,
and I really cannot pretend to lament it. The good Captain
Leclere is dead, father, and it is probable that, with the
aid of M. Morrel, I shall have his place. Do you understand,
father? Only imagine me a captain at twenty, with a hundred
louis pay, and a share in the profits! Is this not more than
a poor sailor like me could have hoped for?”

“Yes, my dear boy,” replied the old man, “it is very
fortunate.”

“Well, then, with the first money I touch, I mean you to
have a small house, with a garden in which to plant
clematis, nasturtiums, and honeysuckle. But what ails you,
father? Are you not well?”

“‘Tis nothing, nothing; it will soon pass away” — and as he
said so the old man’s strength failed him, and he fell
backwards.

“Come, come,” said the young man, “a glass of wine, father,
will revive you. Where do you keep your wine?”

“No, no; thanks. You need not look for it; I do not want
it,” said the old man.

“Yes, yes, father, tell me where it is,” and he opened two
or three cupboards.

“It is no use,” said the old man, “there is no wine.”

“What, no wine?” said Dantes, turning pale, and looking
alternately at the hollow cheeks of the old man and the
empty cupboards. “What, no wine? Have you wanted money,
father?”

“I want nothing now that I have you,” said the old man.

“Yet,” stammered Dantes, wiping the perspiration from his
brow, — “yet I gave you two hundred francs when I left,
three months ago.”

“Yes, yes, Edmond, that is true, but you forgot at that time
a little debt to our neighbor, Caderousse. He reminded me of
it, telling me if I did not pay for you, he would be paid by
M. Morrel; and so, you see, lest he might do you an injury”

“Well?”

“Why, I paid him.”

“But,” cried Dantes, “it was a hundred and forty francs I
owed Caderousse.”

“Yes,” stammered the old man.

“And you paid him out of the two hundred francs I left you?”

The old man nodded.

“So that you have lived for three months on sixty francs,”
muttered Edmond.

“You know how little I require,” said the old man.

“Heaven pardon me,” cried Edmond, falling on his knees
before his father.

“What are you doing?”

“You have wounded me to the heart.”

“Never mind it, for I see you once more,” said the old man;
“and now it’s all over — everything is all right again.”

“Yes, here I am,” said the young man, “with a promising
future and a little money. Here, father, here!” he said,
“take this — take it, and send for something immediately.”
And he emptied his pockets on the table, the contents
consisting of a dozen gold pieces, five or six five-franc
pieces, and some smaller coin. The countenance of old Dantes
brightened.

“Whom does this belong to?” he inquired.

“To me, to you, to us! Take it; buy some provisions; be
happy, and to-morrow we shall have more.”

“Gently, gently,” said the old man, with a smile; “and by
your leave I will use your purse moderately, for they would
say, if they saw me buy too many things at a time, that I
had been obliged to await your return, in order to be able
to purchase them.”

“Do as you please; but, first of all, pray have a servant,
father. I will not have you left alone so long. I have some
smuggled coffee and most capital tobacco, in a small chest
in the hold, which you shall have to-morrow. But, hush, here
comes somebody.”

“‘Tis Caderousse, who has heard of your arrival, and no
doubt comes to congratulate you on your fortunate return.”

“Ah, lips that say one thing, while the heart thinks
another,” murmured Edmond. “But, never mind, he is a
neighbor who has done us a service on a time, so he’s
welcome.”

As Edmond paused, the black and bearded head of Caderousse
appeared at the door. He was a man of twenty-five or six,
and held a piece of cloth, which, being a tailor, he was
about to make into a coat-lining.

“What, is it you, Edmond, back again?” said he, with a broad
Marseillaise accent, and a grin that displayed his
ivory-white teeth.

“Yes, as you see, neighbor Caderousse; and ready to be
agreeable to you in any and every way,” replied Dantes, but
ill-concealing his coldness under this cloak of civility.

“Thanks — thanks; but, fortunately, I do not want for
anything; and it chances that at times there are others who
have need of me.” Dantes made a gesture. “I do not allude to
you, my boy. No! — no! I lent you money, and you returned
it; that’s like good neighbors, and we are quits.”

“We are never quits with those who oblige us,” was Dantes’
reply; “for when we do not owe them money, we owe them
gratitude.”

“What’s the use of mentioning that? What is done is done.
Let us talk of your happy return, my boy. I had gone on the
quay to match a piece of mulberry cloth, when I met friend
Danglars. `You at Marseilles?’ — `Yes,’ says he.

“`I thought you were at Smyrna.’ — `I was; but am now back
again.’

“`And where is the dear boy, our little Edmond?’

“`Why, with his father, no doubt,’ replied Danglars. And so
I came,” added Caderousse, “as fast as I could to have the
pleasure of shaking hands with a friend.”

“Worthy Caderousse!” said the old man, “he is so much
attached to us.”

“Yes, to be sure I am. I love and esteem you, because honest
folks are so rare. But it seems you have come back rich, my
boy,” continued the tailor, looking askance at the handful
of gold and silver which Dantes had thrown on the table.

The young man remarked the greedy glance which shone in the
dark eyes of his neighbor. “Eh,” he said, negligently. “this
money is not mine. I was expressing to my father my fears
that he had wanted many things in my absence, and to
convince me he emptied his purse on the table. Come, father”
added Dantes, “put this money back in your box — unless
neighbor Caderousse wants anything, and in that case it is
at his service.”

“No, my boy, no,” said Caderousse. “I am not in any want,
thank God, my living is suited to my means. Keep your money
— keep it, I say; — one never has too much; — but, at the
same time, my boy, I am as much obliged by your offer as if
I took advantage of it.”

“It was offered with good will,” said Dantes.

“No doubt, my boy; no doubt. Well, you stand well with M.
Morrel I hear, — you insinuating dog, you!”

“M. Morrel has always been exceedingly kind to me,” replied
Dantes.

“Then you were wrong to refuse to dine with him.”

“What, did you refuse to dine with him?” said old Dantes;
“and did he invite you to dine?”

“Yes, my dear father,” replied Edmond, smiling at his
father’s astonishment at the excessive honor paid to his
son.

“And why did you refuse, my son?” inquired the old man.

“That I might the sooner see you again, my dear father,”
replied the young man. “I was most anxious to see you.”

“But it must have vexed M. Morrel, good, worthy man,” said
Caderousse. “And when you are looking forward to be captain,
it was wrong to annoy the owner.”

“But I explained to him the cause of my refusal,” replied
Dantes, “and I hope he fully understood it.”

“Yes, but to be captain one must do a little flattery to
one’s patrons.”

“I hope to be captain without that,” said Dantes.

“So much the better — so much the better! Nothing will give
greater pleasure to all your old friends; and I know one
down there behind the Saint Nicolas citadel who will not be
sorry to hear it.”

“Mercedes?” said the old man.

“Yes, my dear father, and with your permission, now I have
seen you, and know you are well and have all you require, I
will ask your consent to go and pay a visit to the
Catalans.”

“Go, my dear boy,” said old Dantes: “and heaven bless you in
your wife, as it has blessed me in my son!”

“His wife!” said Caderousse; “why, how fast you go on,
father Dantes; she is not his wife yet, as it seems to me.”

“So, but according to all probability she soon will be,”
replied Edmond.

“Yes — yes,” said Caderousse; “but you were right to return
as soon as possible, my boy.”

“And why?”

“Because Mercedes is a very fine girl, and fine girls never
lack followers; she particularly has them by dozens.”

“Really?” answered Edmond, with a smile which had in it
traces of slight uneasiness.

“Ah, yes,” continued Caderousse, “and capital offers, too;
but you know, you will be captain, and who could refuse you
then?”

“Meaning to say,” replied Dantes, with a smile which but
ill-concealed his trouble, “that if I were not a captain” —

“Eh — eh!” said Caderousse, shaking his head.

“Come, come,” said the sailor, “I have a better opinion than
you of women in general, and of Mercedes in particular; and
I am certain that, captain or not, she will remain ever
faithful to me.”

“So much the better — so much the better,” said Caderousse.
“When one is going to be married, there is nothing like
implicit confidence; but never mind that, my boy, — go and
announce your arrival, and let her know all your hopes and
prospects.”

“I will go directly,” was Edmond’s reply; and, embracing his
father, and nodding to Caderousse, he left the apartment.

Caderousse lingered for a moment, then taking leave of old
Dantes, he went downstairs to rejoin Danglars, who awaited
him at the corner of the Rue Senac.

“Well,” said Danglars, “did you see him?”

“I have just left him,” answered Caderousse.

“Did he allude to his hope of being captain?”

“He spoke of it as a thing already decided.”

“Indeed!” said Danglars, “he is in too much hurry, it
appears to me.”

“Why, it seems M. Morrel has promised him the thing.”

“So that he is quite elated about it?”

“Why, yes, he is actually insolent over the matter — has
already offered me his patronage, as if he were a grand
personage, and proffered me a loan of money, as though he
were a banker.”

“Which you refused?”

“Most assuredly; although I might easily have accepted it,
for it was I who put into his hands the first silver he ever
earned; but now M. Dantes has no longer any occasion for
assistance — he is about to become a captain.”

“Pooh!” said Danglars, “he is not one yet.”

“Ma foi, it will be as well if he is not,” answered
Caderousse; “for if he should be, there will be really no
speaking to him.”

“If we choose,” replied Danglars, “he will remain what he
is; and perhaps become even less than he is.”

“What do you mean?”

“Nothing — I was speaking to myself. And is he still in
love with the Catalane?”

“Over head and ears; but, unless I am much mistaken, there
will be a storm in that quarter.”

“Explain yourself.”

“Why should I?”

“It is more important than you think, perhaps. You do not
like Dantes?”

“I never like upstarts.”

“Then tell me all you know about the Catalane.”

“I know nothing for certain; only I have seen things which
induce me to believe, as I told you, that the future captain
will find some annoyance in the vicinity of the Vieilles
Infirmeries.”

“What have you seen? — come, tell me!”

“Well, every time I have seen Mercedes come into the city
she has been accompanied by a tall, strapping, black-eyed
Catalan, with a red complexion, brown skin, and fierce air,
whom she calls cousin.”

“Really; and you think this cousin pays her attentions?”

“I only suppose so. What else can a strapping chap of
twenty-one mean with a fine wench of seventeen?”

“And you say that Dantes has gone to the Catalans?”

“He went before I came down.”

“Let us go the same way; we will stop at La Reserve, and we
can drink a glass of La Malgue, whilst we wait for news.”

“Come along,” said Caderousse; “but you pay the score.”

“Of course,” replied Danglars; and going quickly to the
designated place, they called for a bottle of wine, and two
glasses.

Pere Pamphile had seen Dantes pass not ten minutes before;
and assured that he was at the Catalans, they sat down under
the budding foliage of the planes and sycamores, in the
branches of which the birds were singing their welcome to
one of the first days of spring.

Beyond a bare, weather-worn wall, about a hundred paces from
the spot where the two friends sat looking and listening as
they drank their wine, was the village of the Catalans. Long
ago this mysterious colony quitted Spain, and settled on the
tongue of land on which it is to this day. Whence it came no
one knew, and it spoke an unknown tongue. One of its chiefs,
who understood Provencal, begged the commune of Marseilles
to give them this bare and barren promontory, where, like
the sailors of old, they had run their boats ashore. The
request was granted; and three months afterwards, around the
twelve or fifteen small vessels which had brought these
gypsies of the sea, a small village sprang up. This village,
constructed in a singular and picturesque manner, half
Moorish, half Spanish, still remains, and is inhabited by
descendants of the first comers, who speak the language of
their fathers. For three or four centuries they have
remained upon this small promontory, on which they had
settled like a flight of seabirds, without mixing with the
Marseillaise population, intermarrying, and preserving their
original customs and the costume of their mother-country as
they have preserved its language.

Our readers will follow us along the only street of this
little village, and enter with us one of the houses, which
is sunburned to the beautiful dead-leaf color peculiar to
the buildings of the country, and within coated with
whitewash, like a Spanish posada. A young and beautiful
girl, with hair as black as jet, her eyes as velvety as the
gazelle’s, was leaning with her back against the wainscot,
rubbing in her slender delicately moulded fingers a bunch of
heath blossoms, the flowers of which she was picking off and
strewing on the floor; her arms, bare to the elbow, brown,
and modelled after those of the Arlesian Venus, moved with a
kind of restless impatience, and she tapped the earth with
her arched and supple foot, so as to display the pure and
full shape of her well-turned leg, in its red cotton, gray
and blue clocked, stocking. At three paces from her, seated
in a chair which he balanced on two legs, leaning his elbow
on an old worm-eaten table, was a tall young man of twenty,
or two-and-twenty, who was looking at her with an air in
which vexation and uneasiness were mingled. He questioned
her with his eyes, but the firm and steady gaze of the young
girl controlled his look.

“You see, Mercedes,” said the young man, “here is Easter
come round again; tell me, is this the moment for a
wedding?”

“I have answered you a hundred times, Fernand, and really
you must be very stupid to ask me again.”

“Well, repeat it, — repeat it, I beg of you, that I may at
last believe it! Tell me for the hundredth time that you
refuse my love, which had your mother’s sanction. Make me
understand once for all that you are trifling with my
happiness, that my life or death are nothing to you. Ah, to
have dreamed for ten years of being your husband, Mercedes,
and to lose that hope, which was the only stay of my
existence!”

“At least it was not I who ever encouraged you in that hope,
Fernand,” replied Mercedes; “you cannot reproach me with the
slightest coquetry. I have always said to you, `I love you
as a brother; but do not ask from me more than sisterly
affection, for my heart is another’s.’ Is not this true,
Fernand?”

“Yes, that is very true, Mercedes,” replied the young man,
“Yes, you have been cruelly frank with me; but do you forget
that it is among the Catalans a sacred law to intermarry?”

“You mistake, Fernand; it is not a law, but merely a custom,
and, I pray of you, do not cite this custom in your favor.
You are included in the conscription, Fernand, and are only
at liberty on sufferance, liable at any moment to be called
upon to take up arms. Once a soldier, what would you do with
me, a poor orphan, forlorn, without fortune, with nothing
but a half-ruined hut and a few ragged nets, the miserable
inheritance left by my father to my mother, and by my mother
to me? She has been dead a year, and you know, Fernand, I
have subsisted almost entirely on public charity. Sometimes
you pretend I am useful to you, and that is an excuse to
share with me the produce of your fishing, and I accept it,
Fernand, because you are the son of my father’s brother,
because we were brought up together, and still more because
it would give you so much pain if I refuse. But I feel very
deeply that this fish which I go and sell, and with the
produce of which I buy the flax I spin, — I feel very
keenly, Fernand, that this is charity.”

“And if it were, Mercedes, poor and lone as you are, you
suit me as well as the daughter of the first shipowner or
the richest banker of Marseilles! What do such as we desire
but a good wife and careful housekeeper, and where can I
look for these better than in you?”

“Fernand,” answered Mercedes, shaking her head, “a woman
becomes a bad manager, and who shall say she will remain an
honest woman, when she loves another man better than her
husband? Rest content with my friendship, for I say once
more that is all I can promise, and I will promise no more
than I can bestow.”

“I understand,” replied Fernand, “you can endure your own
wretchedness patiently, but you are afraid to share mine.
Well, Mercedes, beloved by you, I would tempt fortune; you
would bring me good luck, and I should become rich. I could
extend my occupation as a fisherman, might get a place as
clerk in a warehouse, and become in time a dealer myself.”

“You could do no such thing, Fernand; you are a soldier, and
if you remain at the Catalans it is because there is no war;
so remain a fisherman, and contented with my friendship, as
I cannot give you more.”

“Well, I will do better, Mercedes. I will be a sailor;
instead of the costume of our fathers, which you despise, I
will wear a varnished hat, a striped shirt, and a blue
jacket, with an anchor on the buttons. Would not that dress
please you?”

“What do you mean?” asked Mercedes, with an angry glance, —
“what do you mean? I do not understand you?”

“I mean, Mercedes, that you are thus harsh and cruel with
me, because you are expecting some one who is thus attired;
but perhaps he whom you await is inconstant, or if he is
not, the sea is so to him.”

“Fernand,” cried Mercedes, “I believed you were
good-hearted, and I was mistaken! Fernand, you are wicked to
call to your aid jealousy and the anger of God! Yes, I will
not deny it, I do await, and I do love him of whom you
speak; and, if he does not return, instead of accusing him
of the inconstancy which you insinuate, I will tell you that
he died loving me and me only.” The young girl made a
gesture of rage. “I understand you, Fernand; you would be
revenged on him because I do not love you; you would cross
your Catalan knife with his dirk. What end would that
answer? To lose you my friendship if he were conquered, and
see that friendship changed into hate if you were victor.
Believe me, to seek a quarrel with a man is a bad method of
pleasing the woman who loves that man. No, Fernand, you will
not thus give way to evil thoughts. Unable to have me for
your wife, you will content yourself with having me for your
friend and sister; and besides,” she added, her eyes
troubled and moistened with tears, “wait, wait, Fernand; you
said just now that the sea was treacherous, and he has been
gone four months, and during these four months there have
been some terrible storms.”

Fernand made no reply, nor did he attempt to check the tears
which flowed down the cheeks of Mercedes, although for each
of these tears he would have shed his heart’s blood; but
these tears flowed for another. He arose, paced a while up
and down the hut, and then, suddenly stopping before
Mercedes, with his eyes glowing and his hands clinched, —
“Say, Mercedes,” he said, “once for all, is this your final
determination?”

“I love Edmond Dantes,” the young girl calmly replied, “and
none but Edmond shall ever be my husband.”

“And you will always love him?”

“As long as I live.”

Fernand let fall his head like a defeated man, heaved a sigh
that was like a groan, and then suddenly looking her full in
the face, with clinched teeth and expanded nostrils, said,
— “But if he is dead” —

“If he is dead, I shall die too.”

“If he has forgotten you” —

“Mercedes!” called a joyous voice from without, —
“Mercedes!”

“Ah,” exclaimed the young girl, blushing with delight, and
fairly leaping in excess of love, “you see he has not
forgotten me, for here he is!” And rushing towards the door,
she opened it, saying, “Here, Edmond, here I am!”

Fernand, pale and trembling, drew back, like a traveller at
the sight of a serpent, and fell into a chair beside him.
Edmond and Mercedes were clasped in each other’s arms. The
burning Marseilles sun, which shot into the room through the
open door, covered them with a flood of light. At first they
saw nothing around them. Their intense happiness isolated
them from all the rest of the world, and they only spoke in
broken words, which are the tokens of a joy so extreme that
they seem rather the expression of sorrow. Suddenly Edmond
saw the gloomy, pale, and threatening countenance of
Fernand, as it was defined in the shadow. By a movement for
which he could scarcely account to himself, the young
Catalan placed his hand on the knife at his belt.

“Ah, your pardon,” said Dantes, frowning in his turn; “I did
not perceive that there were three of us.” Then, turning to
Mercedes, he inquired, “Who is this gentleman?”

“One who will be your best friend, Dantes, for he is my
friend, my cousin, my brother; it is Fernand — the man
whom, after you, Edmond, I love the best in the world. Do
you not remember him?”

“Yes!” said Dantes, and without relinquishing Mercedes hand
clasped in one of his own, he extended the other to the
Catalan with a cordial air. But Fernand, instead of
responding to this amiable gesture, remained mute and
trembling. Edmond then cast his eyes scrutinizingly at the
agitated and embarrassed Mercedes, and then again on the
gloomy and menacing Fernand. This look told him all, and his
anger waxed hot.

“I did not know, when I came with such haste to you, that I
was to meet an enemy here.”

“An enemy!” cried Mercedes, with an angry look at her
cousin. “An enemy in my house, do you say, Edmond! If I
believed that, I would place my arm under yours and go with
you to Marseilles, leaving the house to return to it no
more.”

Fernand’s eye darted lightning. “And should any misfortune
occur to you, dear Edmond,” she continued with the same
calmness which proved to Fernand that the young girl had
read the very innermost depths of his sinister thought, “if
misfortune should occur to you, I would ascend the highest
point of the Cape de Morgion and cast myself headlong from
it.”

Fernand became deadly pale. “But you are deceived, Edmond,”
she continued. “You have no enemy here — there is no one
but Fernand, my brother, who will grasp your hand as a
devoted friend.”

And at these words the young girl fixed her imperious look
on the Catalan, who, as if fascinated by it, came slowly
towards Edmond, and offered him his hand. His hatred, like a
powerless though furious wave, was broken against the strong
ascendancy which Mercedes exercised over him. Scarcely,
however, had he touched Edmond’s hand than he felt he had
done all he could do, and rushed hastily out of the house.

“Oh,” he exclaimed, running furiously and tearing his hair
— “Oh, who will deliver me from this man? Wretched —
wretched that I am!”

“Hallo, Catalan! Hallo, Fernand! where are you running to?”
exclaimed a voice.

The young man stopped suddenly, looked around him, and
perceived Caderousse sitting at table with Danglars, under
an arbor.

“Well”, said Caderousse, “why don’t you come? Are you really
in such a hurry that you have no time to pass the time of
day with your friends?”

“Particularly when they have still a full bottle before
them,” added Danglars. Fernand looked at them both with a
stupefied air, but did not say a word.

“He seems besotted,” said Danglars, pushing Caderousse with
his knee. “Are we mistaken, and is Dantes triumphant in
spite of all we have believed?”

“Why, we must inquire into that,” was Caderousse’s reply;
and turning towards the young man, said, “Well, Catalan,
can’t you make up your mind?”

Fernand wiped away the perspiration steaming from his brow,
and slowly entered the arbor, whose shade seemed to restore
somewhat of calmness to his senses, and whose coolness
somewhat of refreshment to his exhausted body.

“Good-day,” said he. “You called me, didn’t you?” And he
fell, rather than sat down, on one of the seats which
surrounded the table.

“I called you because you were running like a madman, and I
was afraid you would throw yourself into the sea,” said
Caderousse, laughing. “Why, when a man has friends, they are
not only to offer him a glass of wine, but, moreover, to
prevent his swallowing three or four pints of water
unnecessarily!”

Fernand gave a groan, which resembled a sob, and dropped his
head into his hands, his elbows leaning on the table.

“Well, Fernand, I must say,” said Caderousse, beginning the
conversation, with that brutality of the common people in
which curiosity destroys all diplomacy, “you look uncommonly
like a rejected lover;” and he burst into a hoarse laugh.

“Bah!” said Danglars, “a lad of his make was not born to be
unhappy in love. You are laughing at him, Caderousse.”

“No,” he replied, “only hark how he sighs! Come, come,
Fernand,” said Caderousse, “hold up your head, and answer
us. It’s not polite not to reply to friends who ask news of
your health.”

“My health is well enough,” said Fernand, clinching his
hands without raising his head.

“Ah, you see, Danglars,” said Caderousse, winking at his
friend, “this is how it is; Fernand, whom you see here, is a
good and brave Catalan, one of the best fishermen in
Marseilles, and he is in love with a very fine girl, named
Mercedes; but it appears, unfortunately, that the fine girl
is in love with the mate of the Pharaon; and as the Pharaon
arrived to-day — why, you understand!”

“No; I do not understand,” said Danglars.

“Poor Fernand has been dismissed,” continued Caderousse.

“Well, and what then?” said Fernand, lifting up his head,
and looking at Caderousse like a man who looks for some one
on whom to vent his anger; “Mercedes is not accountable to
any person, is she? Is she not free to love whomsoever she
will?”

“Oh, if you take it in that sense,” said Caderousse, “it is
another thing. But I thought you were a Catalan, and they
told me the Catalans were not men to allow themselves to be
supplanted by a rival. It was even told me that Fernand,
especially, was terrible in his vengeance.”

Fernand smiled piteously. “A lover is never terrible,” he
said.

“Poor fellow!” remarked Danglars, affecting to pity the
young man from the bottom of his heart. “Why, you see, he
did not expect to see Dantes return so suddenly — he
thought he was dead, perhaps; or perchance faithless! These
things always come on us more severely when they come
suddenly.”

“Ah, ma foi, under any circumstances,” said Caderousse, who
drank as he spoke, and on whom the fumes of the wine began
to take effect, — “under any circumstances Fernand is not
the only person put out by the fortunate arrival of Dantes;
is he, Danglars?”

“No, you are right — and I should say that would bring him
ill-luck.”

“Well, never mind,” answered Caderousse, pouring out a glass
of wine for Fernand, and filling his own for the eighth or
ninth time, while Danglars had merely sipped his. “Never
mind — in the meantime he marries Mercedes — the lovely
Mercedes — at least he returns to do that.”

During this time Danglars fixed his piercing glance on the
young man, on whose heart Caderousse’s words fell like
molten lead.

“And when is the wedding to be?” he asked.

“Oh, it is not yet fixed!” murmured Fernand.

“No, but it will be,” said Caderousse, “as surely as Dantes
will be captain of the Pharaon — eh, Danglars?”

Danglars shuddered at this unexpected attack, and turned to
Caderousse, whose countenance he scrutinized, to try and
detect whether the blow was premeditated; but he read
nothing but envy in a countenance already rendered brutal
and stupid by drunkenness.

“Well,” said he, filling the glasses, “let us drink to
Captain Edmond Dantes, husband of the beautiful Catalane!”

Caderousse raised his glass to his mouth with unsteady hand,
and swallowed the contents at a gulp. Fernand dashed his on
the ground.

“Eh, eh, eh!” stammered Caderousse. “What do I see down
there by the wall, in the direction of the Catalans? Look,
Fernand, your eyes are better than mine. I believe I see
double. You know wine is a deceiver; but I should say it was
two lovers walking side by side, and hand in hand. Heaven
forgive me, they do not know that we can see them, and they
are actually embracing!”

Danglars did not lose one pang that Fernand endured.

“Do you know them, Fernand?” he said.

“Yes,” was the reply, in a low voice. “It is Edmond and
Mercedes!”

“Ah, see there, now!” said Caderousse; “and I did not
recognize them! Hallo, Dantes! hello, lovely damsel! Come
this way, and let us know when the wedding is to be, for
Fernand here is so obstinate he will not tell us.”

“Hold your tongue, will you?” said Danglars, pretending to
restrain Caderousse, who, with the tenacity of drunkards,
leaned out of the arbor. “Try to stand upright, and let the
lovers make love without interruption. See, look at Fernand,
and follow his example; he is well-behaved!”

Fernand, probably excited beyond bearing, pricked by
Danglars, as the bull is by the bandilleros, was about to
rush out; for he had risen from his seat, and seemed to be
collecting himself to dash headlong upon his rival, when
Mercedes, smiling and graceful, lifted up her lovely head,
and looked at them with her clear and bright eyes. At this
Fernand recollected her threat of dying if Edmond died, and
dropped again heavily on his seat. Danglars looked at the
two men, one after the other, the one brutalized by liquor,
the other overwhelmed with love.

“I shall get nothing from these fools,” he muttered; “and I
am very much afraid of being here between a drunkard and a
coward. Here’s an envious fellow making himself boozy on
wine when he ought to be nursing his wrath, and here is a
fool who sees the woman he loves stolen from under his nose
and takes on like a big baby. Yet this Catalan has eyes that
glisten like those of the vengeful Spaniards, Sicilians, and
Calabrians, and the other has fists big enough to crush an
ox at one blow. Unquestionably, Edmond’s star is in the
ascendant, and he will marry the splendid girl — he will be
captain, too, and laugh at us all, unless” — a sinister
smile passed over Danglars’ lips — “unless I take a hand in
the affair,” he added.

“Hallo!” continued Caderousse, half-rising, and with his
fist on the table, “hallo, Edmond! do you not see your
friends, or are you too proud to speak to them?”

“No, my dear fellow!” replied Dantes, “I am not proud, but I
am happy, and happiness blinds, I think, more than pride.”

“Ah, very well, that’s an explanation!” said Caderousse.
“How do you do, Madame Dantes?”

Mercedes courtesied gravely, and said — “That is not my
name, and in my country it bodes ill fortune, they say, to
call a young girl by the name of her betrothed before he
becomes her husband. So call me Mercedes, if you please.”

“We must excuse our worthy neighbor, Caderousse,” said
Dantes, “he is so easily mistaken.”

“So, then, the wedding is to take place immediately, M.
Dantes,” said Danglars, bowing to the young couple.

“As soon as possible, M. Danglars; to-day all preliminaries
will be arranged at my father’s, and to-morrow, or next day
at latest, the wedding festival here at La Reserve. My
friends will be there, I hope; that is to say, you are
invited, M. Danglars, and you, Caderousse.”

“And Fernand,” said Caderousse with a chuckle; “Fernand,
too, is invited!”

“My wife’s brother is my brother,” said Edmond; “and we,
Mercedes and I, should be very sorry if he were absent at
such a time.”

Fernand opened his mouth to reply, but his voice died on his
lips, and he could not utter a word.

“To-day the preliminaries, to-morrow or next day the
ceremony! You are in a hurry, captain!”

“Danglars,” said Edmond, smiling, “I will say to you as
Mercedes said just now to Caderousse, `Do not give me a
title which does not belong to me’; that may bring me bad
luck.”

“Your pardon,” replied Danglars, “I merely said you seemed
in a hurry, and we have lots of time; the Pharaon cannot be
under weigh again in less than three months.”

“We are always in a hurry to be happy, M. Danglars; for when
we have suffered a long time, we have great difficulty in
believing in good fortune. But it is not selfishness alone
that makes me thus in haste; I must go to Paris.”

“Ah, really? — to Paris! and will it be the first time you
have ever been there, Dantes?”

“Yes.”

“Have you business there?”

“Not of my own; the last commission of poor Captain Leclere;
you know to what I allude, Danglars — it is sacred.
Besides, I shall only take the time to go and return.”

“Yes, yes, I understand,” said Danglars, and then in a low
tone, he added, “To Paris, no doubt to deliver the letter
which the grand marshal gave him. Ah, this letter gives me
an idea — a capital idea! Ah; Dantes, my friend, you are
not yet registered number one on board the good ship
Pharaon;” then turning towards Edmond, who was walking away,
“A pleasant journey,” he cried.

“Thank you,” said Edmond with a friendly nod, and the two
lovers continued on their way, as calm and joyous as if they
were the very elect of heaven.

Danglars followed Edmond and Mercedes with his eyes until
the two lovers disappeared behind one of the angles of Fort
Saint Nicolas, then turning round, he perceived Fernand, who
had fallen, pale and trembling, into his chair, while
Caderousse stammered out the words of a drinking-song.

“Well, my dear sir,” said Danglars to Fernand, “here is a
marriage which does not appear to make everybody happy.”

“It drives me to despair,” said Fernand.

“Do you, then, love Mercedes?”

“I adore her!”

“For long?”

“As long as I have known her — always.”

“And you sit there, tearing your hair, instead of seeking to
remedy your condition; I did not think that was the way of
your people.”

“What would you have me do?” said Fernand.

“How do I know? Is it my affair? I am not in love with
Mademoiselle Mercedes; but for you — in the words of the
gospel, seek, and you shall find.”

“I have found already.”

“What?”

“I would stab the man, but the woman told me that if any
misfortune happened to her betrothed, she would kill
herself.”

“Pooh! Women say those things, but never do them.”

“You do not know Mercedes; what she threatens she will do.”

“Idiot!” muttered Danglars; “whether she kill herself or
not, what matter, provided Dantes is not captain?”

“Before Mercedes should die,” replied Fernand, with the
accents of unshaken resolution, “I would die myself!”

“That’s what I call love!” said Caderousse with a voice more
tipsy than ever. “That’s love, or I don’t know what love
is.”

“Come,” said Danglars, “you appear to me a good sort of
fellow, and hang me, I should like to help you, but” —

“Yes,” said Caderousse, “but how?”

“My dear fellow,” replied Danglars, “you are three parts
drunk; finish the bottle, and you will be completely so.
Drink then, and do not meddle with what we are discussing,
for that requires all one’s wit and cool judgment.”

“I — drunk!” said Caderousse; “well that’s a good one! I
could drink four more such bottles; they are no bigger than
cologne flasks. Pere Pamphile, more wine!” and Caderousse
rattled his glass upon the table.

“You were saying, sir” — said Fernand, awaiting with great
anxiety the end of this interrupted remark.

“What was I saying? I forget. This drunken Caderousse has
made me lose the thread of my sentence.”

“Drunk, if you like; so much the worse for those who fear
wine, for it is because they have bad thoughts which they
are afraid the liquor will extract from their hearts;” and
Caderousse began to sing the two last lines of a song very
popular at the time, —

`Tous les mechants sont beuveurs d’eau;
C’est bien prouve par le deluge.’*

* “The wicked are great drinkers of water
As the flood proved once for all.”

“You said, sir, you would like to help me, but” —

“Yes; but I added, to help you it would be sufficient that
Dantes did not marry her you love; and the marriage may
easily be thwarted, methinks, and yet Dantes need not die.”

“Death alone can separate them,” remarked Fernand.

“You talk like a noodle, my friend,” said Caderousse; “and
here is Danglars, who is a wide-awake, clever, deep fellow,
who will prove to you that you are wrong. Prove it,
Danglars. I have answered for you. Say there is no need why
Dantes should die; it would, indeed, be a pity he should.
Dantes is a good fellow; I like Dantes. Dantes, your
health.”

Fernand rose impatiently. “Let him run on,” said Danglars,
restraining the young man; “drunk as he is, he is not much
out in what he says. Absence severs as well as death, and if
the walls of a prison were between Edmond and Mercedes they
would be as effectually separated as if he lay under a
tombstone.”

“Yes; but one gets out of prison,” said Caderousse, who,
with what sense was left him, listened eagerly to the
conversation, “and when one gets out and one’s name is
Edmond Dantes, one seeks revenge” —

“What matters that?” muttered Fernand.

“And why, I should like to know,” persisted Caderousse,
“should they put Dantes in prison? he has not robbed or
killed or murdered.”

“Hold your tongue!” said Danglars.

“I won’t hold my tongue!” replied Caderousse; “I say I want
to know why they should put Dantes in prison; I like Dantes;
Dantes, your health!” and he swallowed another glass of
wine.

Danglars saw in the muddled look of the tailor the progress
of his intoxication, and turning towards Fernand, said,
“Well, you understand there is no need to kill him.”

“Certainly not, if, as you said just now, you have the means
of having Dantes arrested. Have you that means?”

“It is to be found for the searching. But why should I
meddle in the matter? it is no affair of mine.”

“I know not why you meddle,” said Fernand, seizing his arm;
“but this I know, you have some motive of personal hatred
against Dantes, for he who himself hates is never mistaken
in the sentiments of others.”

“I! — motives of hatred against Dantes? None, on my word! I
saw you were unhappy, and your unhappiness interested me;
that’s all; but since you believe I act for my own account,
adieu, my dear friend, get out of the affair as best you
may;” and Danglars rose as if he meant to depart.

“No, no,” said Fernand, restraining him, “stay! It is of
very little consequence to me at the end of the matter
whether you have any angry feeling or not against Dantes. I
hate him! I confess it openly. Do you find the means, I will
execute it, provided it is not to kill the man, for Mercedes
has declared she will kill herself if Dantes is killed.”

Caderousse, who had let his head drop on the table, now
raised it, and looking at Fernand with his dull and fishy
eyes, he said, — “Kill Dantes! who talks of killing Dantes?
I won’t have him killed — I won’t! He’s my friend, and this
morning offered to share his money with me, as I shared mine
with him. I won’t have Dantes killed — I won’t!”

“And who has said a word about killing him, muddlehead?”
replied Danglars. “We were merely joking; drink to his
health,” he added, filling Caderousse’s glass, “and do not
interfere with us.”

“Yes, yes, Dantes’ good health!” said Caderousse, emptying
his glass, “here’s to his health! his health — hurrah!”

“But the means — the means?” said Fernand.

“Have you not hit upon any?” asked Danglars.

“No! — you undertook to do so.”

“True,” replied Danglars; “the French have the superiority
over the Spaniards, that the Spaniards ruminate, while the
French invent.”

“Do you invent, then,” said Fernand impatiently.

“Waiter,” said Danglars, “pen, ink, and paper.”

“Pen, ink, and paper,” muttered Fernand.

“Yes; I am a supercargo; pen, ink, and paper are my tools,
and without my tools I am fit for nothing.”

“Pen, ink, and paper, then,” called Fernand loudly.

“There’s what you want on that table,” said the waiter.

“Bring them here.” The waiter did as he was desired.

“When one thinks,” said Caderousse, letting his hand drop on
the paper, “there is here wherewithal to kill a man more
sure than if we waited at the corner of a wood to
assassinate him! I have always had more dread of a pen, a
bottle of ink, and a sheet of paper, than of a sword or
pistol.”

“The fellow is not so drunk as he appears to be,” said
Danglars. “Give him some more wine, Fernand.” Fernand filled
Caderousse’s glass, who, like the confirmed toper he was,
lifted his hand from the paper and seized the glass.

The Catalan watched him until Caderousse, almost overcome by
this fresh assault on his senses, rested, or rather dropped,
his glass upon the table.

“Well!” resumed the Catalan, as he saw the final glimmer of
Caderousse’s reason vanishing before the last glass of wine.

“Well, then, I should say, for instance,” resumed Danglars,
“that if after a voyage such as Dantes has just made, in
which he touched at the Island of Elba, some one were to
denounce him to the king’s procureur as a Bonapartist agent”

“I will denounce him!” exclaimed the young man hastily.

“Yes, but they will make you then sign your declaration, and
confront you with him you have denounced; I will supply you
with the means of supporting your accusation, for I know the
fact well. But Dantes cannot remain forever in prison, and
one day or other he will leave it, and the day when he comes
out, woe betide him who was the cause of his incarceration!”

“Oh, I should wish nothing better than that he would come
and seek a quarrel with me.”

“Yes, and Mercedes! Mercedes, who will detest you if you
have only the misfortune to scratch the skin of her dearly
beloved Edmond!”

“True!” said Fernand.

“No, no,” continued Danglars; “if we resolve on such a step,
it would be much better to take, as I now do, this pen, dip
it into this ink, and write with the left hand (that the
writing may not be recognized) the denunciation we propose.”
And Danglars, uniting practice with theory, wrote with his
left hand, and in a writing reversed from his usual style,
and totally unlike it, the following lines, which he handed
to Fernand, and which Fernand read in an undertone: —

“The honorable, the king’s attorney, is informed by a friend
of the throne and religion, that one Edmond Dantes, mate of
the ship Pharaon, arrived this morning from Smyrna, after
having touched at Naples and Porto-Ferrajo, has been
intrusted by Murat with a letter for the usurper, and by the
usurper with a letter for the Bonapartist committee in
Paris. Proof of this crime will be found on arresting him,
for the letter will be found upon him, or at his father’s,
or in his cabin on board the Pharaon.”

“Very good,” resumed Danglars; “now your revenge looks like
common-sense, for in no way can it revert to yourself, and
the matter will thus work its own way; there is nothing to
do now but fold the letter as I am doing, and write upon it,
`To the king’s attorney,’ and that’s all settled.” And
Danglars wrote the address as he spoke.

“Yes, and that’s all settled!” exclaimed Caderousse, who, by
a last effort of intellect, had followed the reading of the
letter, and instinctively comprehended all the misery which
such a denunciation must entail. “Yes, and that’s all
settled; only it will be an infamous shame;” and he
stretched out his hand to reach the letter.

“Yes,” said Danglars, taking it from beyond his reach; “and
as what I say and do is merely in jest, and I, amongst the
first and foremost, should be sorry if anything happened to
Dantes — the worthy Dantes — look here!” And taking the
letter, he squeezed it up in his hands and threw it into a
corner of the arbor.

“All right!” said Caderousse. “Dantes is my friend, and I
won’t have him ill-used.”

“And who thinks of using him ill? Certainly neither I nor
Fernand,” said Danglars, rising and looking at the young
man, who still remained seated, but whose eye was fixed on
the denunciatory sheet of paper flung into the corner.

“In this case,” replied Caderousse, “let’s have some more
wine. I wish to drink to the health of Edmond and the lovely
Mercedes.”

“You have had too much already, drunkard,” said Danglars;
“and if you continue, you will be compelled to sleep here,
because unable to stand on your legs.”

“I?” said Caderousse, rising with all the offended dignity
of a drunken man, “I can’t keep on my legs? Why, I’ll wager
I can go up into the belfry of the Accoules, and without
staggering, too!”

“Done!” said Danglars, “I’ll take your bet; but to-morrow —
to-day it is time to return. Give me your arm, and let us
go.”

“Very well, let us go,” said Caderousse; “but I don’t want
your arm at all. Come, Fernand, won’t you return to
Marseilles with us?”

“No,” said Fernand; “I shall return to the Catalans.”

“You’re wrong. Come with us to Marseilles — come along.”

“I will not.”

“What do you mean? you will not? Well, just as you like, my
prince; there’s liberty for all the world. Come along,
Danglars, and let the young gentleman return to the Catalans
if he chooses.”

Danglars took advantage of Caderousse’s temper at the
moment, to take him off towards Marseilles by the Porte
Saint-Victor, staggering as he went.

When they had advanced about twenty yards, Danglars looked
back and saw Fernand stoop, pick up the crumpled paper, and
putting it into his pocket then rush out of the arbor
towards Pillon.

“Well,” said Caderousse, “why, what a lie he told! He said
he was going to the Catalans, and he is going to the city.
Hallo, Fernand!”

“Oh, you don’t see straight,” said Danglars; “he’s gone
right enough.”

“Well,” said Caderousse, “I should have said not — how
treacherous wine is!”

“Come, come,” said Danglars to himself, “now the thing is at
work and it will effect its purpose unassisted.”

 

The morning’s sun rose clear and resplendent, touching the
foamy waves into a network of ruby-tinted light.

The feast had been made ready on the second floor at La
Reserve, with whose arbor the reader is already familiar.
The apartment destined for the purpose was spacious and
lighted by a number of windows, over each of which was
written in golden letters for some inexplicable reason the
name of one of the principal cities of France; beneath these
windows a wooden balcony extended the entire length of the
house. And although the entertainment was fixed for twelve
o’clock, an hour previous to that time the balcony was
filled with impatient and expectant guests, consisting of
the favored part of the crew of the Pharaon, and other
personal friends of the bride-groom, the whole of whom had
arrayed themselves in their choicest costumes, in order to
do greater honor to the occasion.

Various rumors were afloat to the effect that the owners of
the Pharaon had promised to attend the nuptial feast; but
all seemed unanimous in doubting that an act of such rare
and exceeding condescension could possibly be intended.

Danglars, however, who now made his appearance, accompanied
by Caderousse, effectually confirmed the report, stating
that he had recently conversed with M. Morrel, who had
himself assured him of his intention to dine at La Reserve.

In fact, a moment later M. Morrel appeared and was saluted
with an enthusiastic burst of applause from the crew of the
Pharaon, who hailed the visit of the shipowner as a sure
indication that the man whose wedding feast he thus
delighted to honor would ere long be first in command of the
ship; and as Dantes was universally beloved on board his
vessel, the sailors put no restraint on their tumultuous joy
at finding that the opinion and choice of their superiors so
exactly coincided with their own.

With the entrance of M. Morrel, Danglars and Caderousse were
despatched in search of the bride-groom to convey to him the
intelligence of the arrival of the important personage whose
coming had created such a lively sensation, and to beseech
him to make haste.

Danglars and Caderousse set off upon their errand at full
speed; but ere they had gone many steps they perceived a
group advancing towards them, composed of the betrothed
pair, a party of young girls in attendance on the bride, by
whose side walked Dantes’ father; the whole brought up by
Fernand, whose lips wore their usual sinister smile.

Neither Mercedes nor Edmond observed the strange expression
of his countenance; they were so happy that they were
conscious only of the sunshine and the presence of each
other.

Having acquitted themselves of their errand, and exchanged a
hearty shake of the hand with Edmond, Danglars and
Caderousse took their places beside Fernand and old Dantes,
— the latter of whom attracted universal notice. The old
man was attired in a suit of glistening watered silk,
trimmed with steel buttons, beautifully cut and polished.
His thin but wiry legs were arrayed in a pair of richly
embroidered clocked stockings, evidently of English
manufacture, while from his three-cornered hat depended a
long streaming knot of white and blue ribbons. Thus he came
along, supporting himself on a curiously carved stick, his
aged countenance lit up with happiness, looking for all the
world like one of the aged dandies of 1796, parading the
newly opened gardens of the Tuileries and Luxembourg. Beside
him glided Caderousse, whose desire to partake of the good
things provided for the wedding-party had induced him to
become reconciled to the Dantes, father and son, although
there still lingered in his mind a faint and unperfect
recollection of the events of the preceding night; just as
the brain retains on waking in the morning the dim and misty
outline of a dream.

As Danglars approached the disappointed lover, he cast on
him a look of deep meaning, while Fernand, as he slowly
paced behind the happy pair, who seemed, in their own
unmixed content, to have entirely forgotten that such a
being as himself existed, was pale and abstracted;
occasionally, however, a deep flush would overspread his
countenance, and a nervous contraction distort his features,
while, with an agitated and restless gaze, he would glance
in the direction of Marseilles, like one who either
anticipated or foresaw some great and important event.

Dantes himself was simply, but becomingly, clad in the dress
peculiar to the merchant service — a costume somewhat
between a military and a civil garb; and with his fine
countenance, radiant with joy and happiness, a more perfect
specimen of manly beauty could scarcely be imagined.

Lovely as the Greek girls of Cyprus or Chios, Mercedes
boasted the same bright flashing eyes of jet, and ripe,
round, coral lips. She moved with the light, free step of an
Arlesienne or an Andalusian. One more practiced in the arts
of great cities would have hid her blushes beneath a veil,
or, at least, have cast down her thickly fringed lashes, so
as to have concealed the liquid lustre of her animated eyes;
but, on the contrary, the delighted girl looked around her
with a smile that seemed to say: “If you are my friends,
rejoice with me, for I am very happy.”

As soon as the bridal party came in sight of La Reserve, M.
Morrel descended and came forth to meet it, followed by the
soldiers and sailors there assembled, to whom he had
repeated the promise already given, that Dantes should be
the successor to the late Captain Leclere. Edmond, at the
approach of his patron, respectfully placed the arm of his
affianced bride within that of M. Morrel, who, forthwith
conducting her up the flight of wooden steps leading to the
chamber in which the feast was prepared, was gayly followed
by the guests, beneath whose heavy tread the slight
structure creaked and groaned for the space of several
minutes.

“Father,” said Mercedes, stopping when she had reached the
centre of the table, “sit, I pray you, on my right hand; on
my left I will place him who has ever been as a brother to
me,” pointing with a soft and gentle smile to Fernand; but
her words and look seemed to inflict the direst torture on
him, for his lips became ghastly pale, and even beneath the
dark hue of his complexion the blood might be seen
retreating as though some sudden pang drove it back to the
heart.

During this time, Dantes, at the opposite side of the table,
had been occupied in similarly placing his most honored
guests. M. Morrel was seated at his right hand, Danglars at
his left; while, at a sign from Edmond, the rest of the
company ranged themselves as they found it most agreeable.

Then they began to pass around the dusky, piquant, Arlesian
sausages, and lobsters in their dazzling red cuirasses,
prawns of large size and brilliant color, the echinus with
its prickly outside and dainty morsel within, the clovis,
esteemed by the epicures of the South as more than rivalling
the exquisite flavor of the oyster, — all the delicacies,
in fact, that are cast up by the wash of waters on the sandy
beach, and styled by the grateful fishermen “fruits of the
sea.”

“A pretty silence truly!” said the old father of the
bride-groom, as he carried to his lips a glass of wine of
the hue and brightness of the topaz, and which had just been
placed before Mercedes herself. “Now, would anybody think
that this room contained a happy, merry party, who desire
nothing better than to laugh and dance the hours away?”

“Ah,” sighed Caderousse, “a man cannot always feel happy
because he is about to be married.”

“The truth is,” replied Dantes, “that I am too happy for
noisy mirth; if that is what you meant by your observation,
my worthy friend, you are right; joy takes a strange effect
at times, it seems to oppress us almost the same as sorrow.”

Danglars looked towards Fernand, whose excitable nature
received and betrayed each fresh impression.

“Why, what ails you?” asked he of Edmond. “Do you fear any
approaching evil? I should say that you were the happiest
man alive at this instant.”

“And that is the very thing that alarms me,” returned
Dantes. “Man does not appear to me to be intended to enjoy
felicity so unmixed; happiness is like the enchanted palaces
we read of in our childhood, where fierce, fiery dragons
defend the entrance and approach; and monsters of all shapes
and kinds, requiring to be overcome ere victory is ours. I
own that I am lost in wonder to find myself promoted to an
honor of which I feel myself unworthy — that of being the
husband of Mercedes.”

“Nay, nay!” cried Caderousse, smiling, “you have not
attained that honor yet. Mercedes is not yet your wife. Just
assume the tone and manner of a husband, and see how she
will remind you that your hour is not yet come!”

The bride blushed, while Fernand, restless and uneasy,
seemed to start at every fresh sound, and from time to time
wiped away the large drops of perspiration that gathered on
his brow.

“Well, never mind that, neighbor Caderousse; it is not worth
while to contradict me for such a trifle as that. ‘Tis true
that Mercedes is not actually my wife; but,” added he,
drawing out his watch, “in an hour and a half she will be.”

A general exclamation of surprise ran round the table, with
the exception of the elder Dantes, whose laugh displayed the
still perfect beauty of his large white teeth. Mercedes
looked pleased and gratified, while Fernand grasped the
handle of his knife with a convulsive clutch.

“In an hour?” inquired Danglars, turning pale. “How is that,
my friend?”

“Why, thus it is,” replied Dantes. “Thanks to the influence
of M. Morrel, to whom, next to my father, I owe every
blessing I enjoy, every difficulty his been removed. We have
purchased permission to waive the usual delay; and at
half-past two o’clock the mayor of Marseilles will be
waiting for us at the city hall. Now, as a quarter-past one
has already struck, I do not consider I have asserted too
much in saying, that, in another hour and thirty minutes
Mercedes will have become Madame Dantes.”

Fernand closed his eyes, a burning sensation passed across
his brow, and he was compelled to support himself by the
table to prevent his falling from his chair; but in spite of
all his efforts, he could not refrain from uttering a deep
groan, which, however, was lost amid the noisy felicitations
of the company.

“Upon my word,” cried the old man, “you make short work of
this kind of affair. Arrived here only yesterday morning,
and married to-day at three o’clock! Commend me to a sailor
for going the quick way to work!”

“But,” asked Danglars, in a timid tone, “how did you manage
about the other formalities — the contract — the
settlement?”

“The contract,” answered Dantes, laughingly, “it didn’t take
long to fix that. Mercedes has no fortune; I have none to
settle on her. So, you see, our papers were quickly written
out, and certainly do not come very expensive.” This joke
elicited a fresh burst of applause.

“So that what we presumed to be merely the betrothal feast
turns out to be the actual wedding dinner!” said Danglars.

“No, no,” answered Dantes; “don’t imagine I am going to put
you off in that shabby manner. To-morrow morning I start for
Paris; four days to go, and the same to return, with one day
to discharge the commission intrusted to me, is all the time
I shall be absent. I shall be back here by the first of
March, and on the second I give my real marriage feast.”

This prospect of fresh festivity redoubled the hilarity of
the guests to such a degree, that the elder Dantes, who, at
the commencement of the repast, had commented upon the
silence that prevailed, now found it difficult, amid the
general din of voices, to obtain a moment’s tranquillity in
which to drink to the health and prosperity of the bride and
bride-groom.

Dantes, perceiving the affectionate eagerness of his father,
responded by a look of grateful pleasure; while Mercedes
glanced at the clock and made an expressive gesture to
Edmond.

Around the table reigned that noisy hilarity which usually
prevails at such a time among people sufficiently free from
the demands of social position not to feel the trammels of
etiquette. Such as at the commencement of the repast had not
been able to seat themselves according to their inclination
rose unceremoniously, and sought out more agreeable
companions. Everybody talked at once, without waiting for a
reply and each one seemed to be contented with expressing
his or her own thoughts.

Fernand’s paleness appeared to have communicated itself to
Danglars. As for Fernand himself, he seemed to be enduring
the tortures of the damned; unable to rest, he was among the
first to quit the table, and, as though seeking to avoid the
hilarious mirth that rose in such deafening sounds, he
continued, in utter silence, to pace the farther end of the
salon.

Caderousse approached him just as Danglars, whom Fernand
seemed most anxious to avoid, had joined him in a corner of
the room.

“Upon my word,” said Caderousse, from whose mind the
friendly treatment of Dantes, united with the effect of the
excellent wine he had partaken of, had effaced every feeling
of envy or jealousy at Dantes’ good fortune, — “upon my
word, Dantes is a downright good fellow, and when I see him
sitting there beside his pretty wife that is so soon to be.
I cannot help thinking it would have been a great pity to
have served him that trick you were planning yesterday.”

“Oh, there was no harm meant,” answered Danglars; “at first
I certainly did feel somewhat uneasy as to what Fernand
might be tempted to do; but when I saw how completely he had
mastered his feelings, even so far as to become one of his
rival’s attendants, I knew there was no further cause for
apprehension.” Caderousse looked full at Fernand — he was
ghastly pale.

“Certainly,” continued Danglars, “the sacrifice was no
trifling one, when the beauty of the bride is concerned.
Upon my soul, that future captain of mine is a lucky dog!
Gad, I only wish he would let me take his place.”

“Shall we not set forth?” asked the sweet, silvery voice of
Mercedes; “two o’clock has just struck, and you know we are
expected in a quarter of an hour.”

“To be sure! — to be sure!” cried Dantes, eagerly quitting
the table; “let us go directly!”

His words were re-echoed by the whole party, with vociferous
cheers.

At this moment Danglars, who had been incessantly observing
every change in Fernand’s look and manner, saw him stagger
and fall back, with an almost convulsive spasm, against a
seat placed near one of the open windows. At the same
instant his ear caught a sort of indistinct sound on the
stairs, followed by the measured tread of soldiery, with the
clanking of swords and military accoutrements; then came a
hum and buzz as of many voices, so as to deaden even the
noisy mirth of the bridal party, among whom a vague feeling
of curiosity and apprehension quelled every disposition to
talk, and almost instantaneously the most deathlike
stillness prevailed.

The sounds drew nearer. Three blows were struck upon the
panel of the door. The company looked at each other in
consternation.

“I demand admittance,” said a loud voice outside the room,
“in the name of the law!” As no attempt was made to prevent
it, the door was opened, and a magistrate, wearing his
official scarf, presented himself, followed by four soldiers
and a corporal. Uneasiness now yielded to the most extreme
dread on the part of those present.

“May I venture to inquire the reason of this unexpected
visit?” said M. Morrel, addressing the magistrate, whom he
evidently knew; “there is doubtless some mistake easily
explained.”

“If it be so,” replied the magistrate, “rely upon every
reparation being made; meanwhile, I am the bearer of an
order of arrest, and although I most reluctantly perform the
task assigned me, it must, nevertheless, be fulfilled. Who
among the persons here assembled answers to the name of
Edmond Dantes?” Every eye was turned towards the young man
who, spite of the agitation he could not but feel, advanced
with dignity, and said, in a firm voice, “I am he; what is
your pleasure with me?”

“Edmond Dantes,” replied the magistrate, “I arrest you in
the name of the law!”

“Me!” repeated Edmond, slightly changing color, “and
wherefore, I pray?”

“I cannot inform you, but you will be duly acquainted with
the reasons that have rendered such a step necessary at the
preliminary examination.”

M. Morrel felt that further resistance or remonstrance was
useless. He saw before him an officer delegated to enforce
the law, and perfectly well knew that it would be as
unavailing to seek pity from a magistrate decked with his
official scarf, as to address a petition to some cold marble
effigy. Old Dantes, however, sprang forward. There are
situations which the heart of a father or a mother cannot be
made to understand. He prayed and supplicated in terms so
moving, that even the officer was touched, and, although
firm in his duty, he kindly said, “My worthy friend, let me
beg of you to calm your apprehensions. Your son has probably
neglected some prescribed form or attention in registering
his cargo, and it is more than probable he will be set at
liberty directly he has given the information required,
whether touching the health of his crew, or the value of his
freight.”

“What is the meaning of all this?” inquired Caderousse,
frowningly, of Danglars, who had assumed an air of utter
surprise.

“How can I tell you?” replied he; “I am, like yourself,
utterly bewildered at all that is going on, and cannot in
the least make out what it is about.” Caderousse then looked
around for Fernand, but he had disappeared.

The scene of the previous night now came back to his mind
with startling clearness. The painful catastrophe he had
just witnessed appeared effectually to have rent away the
veil which the intoxication of the evening before had raised
between himself and his memory.

“So, so,” said he, in a hoarse and choking voice, to
Danglars, “this, then, I suppose, is a part of the trick you
were concerting yesterday? All I can say is, that if it be
so, ’tis an ill turn, and well deserves to bring double evil
on those who have projected it.”

“Nonsense,” returned Danglars, “I tell you again I have
nothing whatever to do with it; besides, you know very well
that I tore the paper to pieces.”

“No, you did not!” answered Caderousse, “you merely threw it
by — I saw it lying in a corner.”

“Hold your tongue, you fool! — what should you know about
it? — why, you were drunk!”

“Where is Fernand?” inquired Caderousse.

“How do I know?” replied Danglars; “gone, as every prudent
man ought to be, to look after his own affairs, most likely.
Never mind where he is, let you and I go and see what is to
be done for our poor friends.”

During this conversation, Dantes, after having exchanged a
cheerful shake of the hand with all his sympathizing
friends, had surrendered himself to the officer sent to
arrest him, merely saying, “Make yourselves quite easy, my
good fellows, there is some little mistake to clear up,
that’s all, depend upon it; and very likely I may not have
to go so far as the prison to effect that.”

“Oh, to be sure!” responded Danglars, who had now approached
the group, “nothing more than a mistake, I feel quite
certain.”

Dantes descended the staircase, preceded by the magistrate,
and followed by the soldiers. A carriage awaited him at the
door; he got in, followed by two soldiers and the
magistrate, and the vehicle drove off towards Marseilles.

“Adieu, adieu, dearest Edmond!” cried Mercedes, stretching
out her arms to him from the balcony.

The prisoner heard the cry, which sounded like the sob of a
broken heart, and leaning from the coach he called out,
“Good-by, Mercedes — we shall soon meet again!” Then the
vehicle disappeared round one of the turnings of Fort Saint
Nicholas.

“Wait for me here, all of you!” cried M. Morrel; “I will
take the first conveyance I find, and hurry to Marseilles,
whence I will bring you word how all is going on.”

“That’s right!” exclaimed a multitude of voices, “go, and
return as quickly as you can!”

This second departure was followed by a long and fearful
state of terrified silence on the part of those who were
left behind. The old father and Mercedes remained for some
time apart, each absorbed in grief; but at length the two
poor victims of the same blow raised their eyes, and with a
simultaneous burst of feeling rushed into each other’s arms.

Meanwhile Fernand made his appearance, poured out for
himself a glass of water with a trembling hand; then hastily
swallowing it, went to sit down at the first vacant place,
and this was, by mere chance, placed next to the seat on
which poor Mercedes had fallen half fainting, when released
from the warm and affectionate embrace of old Dantes.
Instinctively Fernand drew back his chair.

“He is the cause of all this misery — I am quite sure of
it,” whispered Caderousse, who had never taken his eyes off
Fernand, to Danglars.

“I don’t think so,” answered the other; he’s too stupid to
imagine such a scheme. I only hope the mischief will fall
upon the head of whoever wrought it.”

“You don’t mention those who aided and abetted the deed,”
said Caderousse.

“Surely,” answered Danglars, “one cannot be held responsible
for every chance arrow shot into the air.”

“You can, indeed, when the arrow lights point downward on
somebody’s head.”

Meantime the subject of the arrest was being canvassed in
every different form.

“What think you, Danglars,” said one of the party, turning
towards him, “of this event?”

“Why,” replied he, “I think it just possible Dantes may have
been detected with some trifling article on board ship
considered here as contraband.”

“But how could he have done so without your knowledge,
Danglars, since you are the ship’s supercargo?”

“Why, as for that, I could only know what I was told
respecting the merchandise with which the vessel was laden.
I know she was loaded with cotton, and that she took in her
freight at Alexandria from Pastret’s warehouse, and at
Smyrna from Pascal’s; that is all I was obliged to know, and
I beg I may not be asked for any further particulars.”

“Now I recollect,” said the afflicted old father; “my poor
boy told me yesterday he had got a small case of coffee, and
another of tobacco for me!”

“There, you see,” exclaimed Danglars. “Now the mischief is
out; depend upon it the custom-house people went rummaging
about the ship in our absence, and discovered poor Dantes’
hidden treasures.”

Mercedes, however, paid no heed to this explanation of her
lover’s arrest. Her grief, which she had hitherto tried to
restrain, now burst out in a violent fit of hysterical
sobbing.

“Come, come,” said the old man, “be comforted, my poor
child; there is still hope!”

“Hope!” repeated Danglars.

“Hope!” faintly murmured Fernand, but the word seemed to die
away on his pale agitated lips, and a convulsive spasm
passed over his countenance.

“Good news! good news!” shouted forth one of the party
stationed in the balcony on the lookout. “Here comes M.
Morrel back. No doubt, now, we shall hear that our friend is
released!”

Mercedes and the old man rushed to meet the shipowner and
greeted him at the door. He was very pale.

“What news?” exclaimed a general burst of voices.

“Alas, my friends,” replied M. Morrel, with a mournful shake
of his head, “the thing has assumed a more serious aspect
than I expected.”

“Oh, indeed — indeed, sir, he is innocent!” sobbed forth
Mercedes.

“That I believe!” answered M. Morrel; “but still he is
charged” —

“With what?” inquired the elder Dantes.

“With being an agent of the Bonapartist faction!” Many of
our readers may be able to recollect how formidable such an
accusation became in the period at which our story is dated.

A despairing cry escaped the pale lips of Mercedes; the old
man sank into a chair.

“Ah, Danglars!” whispered Caderousse, “you have deceived me
— the trick you spoke of last night has been played; but I
cannot suffer a poor old man or an innocent girl to die of
grief through your fault. I am determined to tell them all
about it.”

“Be silent, you simpleton!” cried Danglars, grasping him by
the arm, “or I will not answer even for your own safety. Who
can tell whether Dantes be innocent or guilty? The vessel
did touch at Elba, where he quitted it, and passed a whole
day in the island. Now, should any letters or other
documents of a compromising character be found upon him,
will it not be taken for granted that all who uphold him are
his accomplices?”

With the rapid instinct of selfishness, Caderousse readily
perceived the solidity of this mode of reasoning; he gazed,
doubtfully, wistfully, on Danglars, and then caution
supplanted generosity.

“Suppose we wait a while, and see what comes of it,” said
he, casting a bewildered look on his companion.

“To be sure!” answered Danglars. “Let us wait, by all means.
If he be innocent, of course he will be set at liberty; if
guilty, why, it is no use involving ourselves in a
conspiracy.”

“Let us go, then. I cannot stay here any longer.”

“With all my heart!” replied Danglars, pleased to find the
other so tractable. “Let us take ourselves out of the way,
and leave things for the present to take their course.”

After their departure, Fernand, who had now again become the
friend and protector of Mercedes, led the girl to her home,
while the friends of Dantes conducted the now half-fainting
man back to his abode.

The rumor of Edmond’s arrest as a Bonapartist agent was not
slow in circulating throughout the city.

“Could you ever have credited such a thing, my dear
Danglars?” asked M. Morrel, as, on his return to the port
for the purpose of gleaning fresh tidings of Dantes, from M.
de Villefort, the assistant procureur, he overtook his
supercargo and Caderousse. “Could you have believed such a
thing possible?”

“Why, you know I told you,” replied Danglars, “that I
considered the circumstance of his having anchored at the
Island of Elba as a very suspicious circumstance.”

“And did you mention these suspicions to any person beside
myself?”

“Certainly not!” returned Danglars. Then added in a low
whisper, “You understand that, on account of your uncle, M.
Policar Morrel, who served under the other government, and
who does not altogether conceal what he thinks on the
subject, you are strongly suspected of regretting the
abdication of Napoleon. I should have feared to injure both
Edmond and yourself, had I divulged my own apprehensions to
a soul. I am too well aware that though a subordinate, like
myself, is bound to acquaint the shipowner with everything
that occurs, there are many things he ought most carefully
to conceal from all else.”

“‘Tis well, Danglars — ’tis well!” replied M. Morrel. “You
are a worthy fellow; and I had already thought of your
interests in the event of poor Edmond having become captain
of the Pharaon.”

“Is it possible you were so kind?”

“Yes, indeed; I had previously inquired of Dantes what was
his opinion of you, and if he should have any reluctance to
continue you in your post, for somehow I have perceived a
sort of coolness between you.”

“And what was his reply?”

“That he certainly did think he had given you offence in an
affair which he merely referred to without entering into
particulars, but that whoever possessed the good opinion and
confidence of the ship’s owner would have his preference
also.”

“The hypocrite!” murmured Danglars.

“Poor Dantes!” said Caderousse. “No one can deny his being a
noble-hearted young fellow.”

“But meanwhile,” continued M. Morrel, “here is the Pharaon
without a captain.”

“Oh,” replied Danglars, “since we cannot leave this port for
the next three months, let us hope that ere the expiration
of that period Dantes will be set at liberty.”

“No doubt; but in the meantime?”

“I am entirely at your service, M. Morrel,” answered
Danglars. “You know that I am as capable of managing a ship
as the most experienced captain in the service; and it will
be so far advantageous to you to accept my services, that
upon Edmond’s release from prison no further change will be
requisite on board the Pharaon than for Dantes and myself
each to resume our respective posts.”

“Thanks, Danglars — that will smooth over all difficulties.
I fully authorize you at once to assume the command of the
Pharaon, and look carefully to the unloading of her freight.
Private misfortunes must never be allowed to interfere with
business.”

“Be easy on that score, M. Morrel; but do you think we shall
be permitted to see our poor Edmond?”

“I will let you know that directly I have seen M. de
Villefort, whom I shall endeavor to interest in Edmond’s
favor. I am aware he is a furious royalist; but, in spite of
that, and of his being king’s attorney, he is a man like
ourselves, and I fancy not a bad sort of one.”

“Perhaps not,” replied Danglars; “but I hear that he is
ambitious, and that’s rather against him.”

“Well, well,” returned M. Morrel, “we shall see. But now
hasten on board, I will join you there ere long.” So saying,
the worthy shipowner quitted the two allies, and proceeded
in the direction of the Palais de Justice.

“You see,” said Danglars, addressing Caderousse, “the turn
things have taken. Do you still feel any desire to stand up
in his defence?”

“Not the slightest, but yet it seems to me a shocking thing
that a mere joke should lead to such consequences.”

“But who perpetrated that joke, let me ask? neither you nor
myself, but Fernand; you knew very well that I threw the
paper into a corner of the room — indeed, I fancied I had
destroyed it.”

“Oh, no,” replied Caderousse, “that I can answer for, you
did not. I only wish I could see it now as plainly as I saw
it lying all crushed and crumpled in a corner of the arbor.”

“Well, then, if you did, depend upon it, Fernand picked it
up, and either copied it or caused it to be copied; perhaps,
even, he did not take the trouble of recopying it. And now I
think of it, by Heavens, he may have sent the letter itself!
Fortunately, for me, the handwriting was disguised.”

“Then you were aware of Dantes being engaged in a
conspiracy?”

“Not I. As I before said, I thought the whole thing was a
joke, nothing more. It seems, however, that I have
unconsciously stumbled upon the truth.”

“Still,” argued Caderousse, “I would give a great deal if
nothing of the kind had happened; or, at least, that I had
had no hand in it. You will see, Danglars, that it will turn
out an unlucky job for both of us.”

“Nonsense! If any harm come of it, it should fall on the
guilty person; and that, you know, is Fernand. How can we be
implicated in any way? All we have got to do is, to keep our
own counsel, and remain perfectly quiet, not breathing a
word to any living soul; and you will see that the storm
will pass away without in the least affecting us.”

“Amen!” responded Caderousse, waving his hand in token of
adieu to Danglars, and bending his steps towards the Allees
de Meillan, moving his head to and fro, and muttering as he
went, after the manner of one whose mind was overcharged
with one absorbing idea.

“So far, then,” said Danglars, mentally, “all has gone as I
would have it. I am, temporarily, commander of the Pharaon,
with the certainty of being permanently so, if that fool of
a Caderousse can be persuaded to hold his tongue. My only
fear is the chance of Dantes being released. But, there, he
is in the hands of Justice; and,” added he with a smile,
“she will take her own.” So saying, he leaped into a boat,
desiring to be rowed on board the Pharaon, where M. Morrel
had agreed to meet him.

In one of the aristocratic mansions built by Puget in the
Rue du Grand Cours opposite the Medusa fountain, a second
marriage feast was being celebrated, almost at the same hour
with the nuptial repast given by Dantes. In this case,
however, although the occasion of the entertainment was
similar, the company was strikingly dissimilar. Instead of a
rude mixture of sailors, soldiers, and those belonging to
the humblest grade of life, the present assembly was
composed of the very flower of Marseilles society, —
magistrates who had resigned their office during the
usurper’s reign; officers who had deserted from the imperial
army and joined forces with Conde; and younger members of
families, brought up to hate and execrate the man whom five
years of exile would convert into a martyr, and fifteen of
restoration elevate to the rank of a god.

The guests were still at table, and the heated and energetic
conversation that prevailed betrayed the violent and
vindictive passions that then agitated each dweller of the
South, where unhappily, for five centuries religious strife
had long given increased bitterness to the violence of party
feeling.

The emperor, now king of the petty Island of Elba, after
having held sovereign sway over one-half of the world,
counting as his subjects a small population of five or six
thousand souls, — after having been accustomed to hear the
“Vive Napoleons” of a hundred and twenty millions of human
beings, uttered in ten different languages, — was looked
upon here as a ruined man, separated forever from any fresh
connection with France or claim to her throne.

The magistrates freely discussed their political views; the
military part of the company talked unreservedly of Moscow
and Leipsic, while the women commented on the divorce of
Josephine. It was not over the downfall of the man, but over
the defeat of the Napoleonic idea, that they rejoiced, and
in this they foresaw for themselves the bright and cheering
prospect of a revivified political existence.

An old man, decorated with the cross of Saint Louis, now
rose and proposed the health of King Louis XVIII. It was the
Marquis de Saint-Meran. This toast, recalling at once the
patient exile of Hartwell and the peace-loving King of
France, excited universal enthusiasm; glasses were elevated
in the air a l’Anglais, and the ladies, snatching their
bouquets from their fair bosoms, strewed the table with
their floral treasures. In a word, an almost poetical fervor
prevailed.

“Ah,” said the Marquise de Saint-Meran, a woman with a
stern, forbidding eye, though still noble and distinguished
in appearance, despite her fifty years — “ah, these
revolutionists, who have driven us from those very
possessions they afterwards purchased for a mere trifle
during the Reign of Terror, would be compelled to own, were
they here, that all true devotion was on our side, since we
were content to follow the fortunes of a falling monarch,
while they, on the contrary, made their fortune by
worshipping the rising sun; yes, yes, they could not help
admitting that the king, for whom we sacrificed rank,
wealth, and station was truly our `Louis the well-beloved,’
while their wretched usurper his been, and ever will be, to
them their evil genius, their `Napoleon the accursed.’ Am I
not right, Villefort?”

“I beg your pardon, madame. I really must pray you to excuse
me, but — in truth — I was not attending to the
conversation.”

“Marquise, marquise!” interposed the old nobleman who had
proposed the toast, “let the young people alone; let me tell
you, on one’s wedding day there are more agreeable subjects
of conversation than dry politics.”

“Never mind, dearest mother,” said a young and lovely girl,
with a profusion of light brown hair, and eyes that seemed
to float in liquid crystal, “’tis all my fault for seizing
upon M. de Villefort, so as to prevent his listening to what
you said. But there — now take him — he is your own for as
long as you like. M. Villefort, I beg to remind you my
mother speaks to you.”

“If the marquise will deign to repeat the words I but
imperfectly caught, I shall be delighted to answer,” said M.
de Villefort.

“Never mind, Renee,” replied the marquise, with a look of
tenderness that seemed out of keeping with her harsh dry
features; but, however all other feelings may be withered in
a woman’s nature, there is always one bright smiling spot in
the desert of her heart, and that is the shrine of maternal
love. “I forgive you. What I was saying, Villefort, was,
that the Bonapartists had not our sincerity, enthusiasm, or
devotion.”

“They had, however, what supplied the place of those fine
qualities,” replied the young man, “and that was fanaticism.
Napoleon is the Mahomet of the West, and is worshipped by
his commonplace but ambitions followers, not only as a
leader and lawgiver, but also as the personification of
equality.”

“He!” cried the marquise: “Napoleon the type of equality!
For mercy’s sake, then, what would you call Robespierre?
Come, come, do not strip the latter of his just rights to
bestow them on the Corsican, who, to my mind, has usurped
quite enough.”

“Nay, madame; I would place each of these heroes on his
right pedestal — that of Robespierre on his scaffold in the
Place Louis Quinze; that of Napoleon on the column of the
Place Vendome. The only difference consists in the opposite
character of the equality advocated by these two men; one is
the equality that elevates, the other is the equality that
degrades; one brings a king within reach of the guillotine,
the other elevates the people to a level with the throne.
Observe,” said Villefort, smiling, “I do not mean to deny
that both these men were revolutionary scoundrels, and that
the 9th Thermidor and the 4th of April, in the year 1814,
were lucky days for France, worthy of being gratefully
remembered by every friend to monarchy and civil order; and
that explains how it comes to pass that, fallen, as I trust
he is forever, Napoleon has still retained a train of
parasitical satellites. Still, marquise, it has been so with
other usurpers — Cromwell, for instance, who was not half
so bad as Napoleon, had his partisans and advocates.”

“Do you know, Villefort, that you are talking in a most
dreadfully revolutionary strain? But I excuse it, it is
impossible to expect the son of a Girondin to be free from a
small spice of the old leaven.” A deep crimson suffused the
countenance of Villefort.

“‘Tis true, madame,” answered he, “that my father was a
Girondin, but he was not among the number of those who voted
for the king’s death; he was an equal sufferer with yourself
during the Reign of Terror, and had well-nigh lost his head
on the same scaffold on which your father perished.”

“True,” replied the marquise, without wincing in the
slightest degree at the tragic remembrance thus called up;
“but bear in mind, if you please, that our respective
parents underwent persecution and proscription from
diametrically opposite principles; in proof of which I may
remark, that while my family remained among the stanchest
adherents of the exiled princes, your father lost no time in
joining the new government; and that while the Citizen
Noirtier was a Girondin, the Count Noirtier became a
senator.”

“Dear mother,” interposed Renee, “you know very well it was
agreed that all these disagreeable reminiscences should
forever be laid aside.”

“Suffer me, also, madame,” replied Villefort, “to add my
earnest request to Mademoiselle de Saint-Meran’s, that you
will kindly allow the veil of oblivion to cover and conceal
the past. What avails recrimination over matters wholly past
recall? For my own part, I have laid aside even the name of
my father, and altogether disown his political principles.
He was — nay, probably may still be — a Bonapartist, and
is called Noirtier; I, on the contrary, am a stanch
royalist, and style myself de Villefort. Let what may remain
of revolutionary sap exhaust itself and die away with the
old trunk, and condescend only to regard the young shoot
which has started up at a distance from the parent tree,
without having the power, any more than the wish, to
separate entirely from the stock from which it sprung.”

“Bravo, Villefort!” cried the marquis; “excellently well
said! Come, now, I have hopes of obtaining what I have been
for years endeavoring to persuade the marquise to promise;
namely, a perfect amnesty and forgetfulness of the past.”

“With all my heart,” replied the marquise; “let the past be
forever forgotten. I promise you it affords me as little
pleasure to revive it as it does you. All I ask is, that
Villefort will be firm and inflexible for the future in his
political principles. Remember, also, Villefort, that we
have pledged ourselves to his majesty for your fealty and
strict loyalty, and that at our recommendation the king
consented to forget the past, as I do” (and here she
extended to him her hand) — “as I now do at your entreaty.
But bear in mind, that should there fall in your way any one
guilty of conspiring against the government, you will be so
much the more bound to visit the offence with rigorous
punishment, as it is known you belong to a suspected
family.”

“Alas, madame,” returned Villefort, “my profession, as well
as the times in which we live, compels me to be severe. I
have already successfully conducted several public
prosecutions, and brought the offenders to merited
punishment. But we have not done with the thing yet.”

“Do you, indeed, think so?” inquired the marquise.

“I am, at least, fearful of it. Napoleon, in the Island of
Elba, is too near France, and his proximity keeps up the
hopes of his partisans. Marseilles is filled with half-pay
officers, who are daily, under one frivolous pretext or
other, getting up quarrels with the royalists; from hence
arise continual and fatal duels among the higher classes of
persons, and assassinations in the lower.”

“You have heard, perhaps,” said the Comte de Salvieux, one
of M. de Saint-Meran’s oldest friends, and chamberlain to
the Comte d’Artois, “that the Holy Alliance purpose removing
him from thence?”

“Yes; they were talking about it when we left Paris,” said
M. de Saint-Meran; “and where is it decided to transfer
him?”

“To Saint Helena.”

“For heaven’s sake, where is that?” asked the marquise.

“An island situated on the other side of the equator, at
least two thousand leagues from here,” replied the count.

“So much the better. As Villefort observes, it is a great
act of folly to have left such a man between Corsica, where
he was born, and Naples, of which his brother-in-law is
king, and face to face with Italy, the sovereignty of which
he coveted for his son.”

“Unfortunately,” said Villefort, “there are the treaties of
1814, and we cannot molest Napoleon without breaking those
compacts.”

“Oh, well, we shall find some way out of it,” responded M.
de Salvieux. “There wasn’t any trouble over treaties when it
was a question of shooting the poor Duc d’Enghien.”

“Well,” said the marquise, “it seems probable that, by the
aid of the Holy Alliance, we shall be rid of Napoleon; and
we must trust to the vigilance of M. de Villefort to purify
Marseilles of his partisans. The king is either a king or no
king; if he be acknowledged as sovereign of France, he
should be upheld in peace and tranquillity; and this can
best be effected by employing the most inflexible agents to
put down every attempt at conspiracy — ’tis the best and
surest means of preventing mischief.”

“Unfortunately, madame,” answered Villefort, “the strong arm
of the law is not called upon to interfere until the evil
has taken place.”

“Then all he has got to do is to endeavor to repair it.”

“Nay, madame, the law is frequently powerless to effect
this; all it can do is to avenge the wrong done.”

“Oh, M. de Villefort,” cried a beautiful young creature,
daughter to the Comte de Salvieux, and the cherished friend
of Mademoiselle de Saint-Meran, “do try and get up some
famous trial while we are at Marseilles. I never was in a
law-court; I am told it is so very amusing!”

“Amusing, certainly,” replied the young man, “inasmuch as,
instead of shedding tears as at the fictitious tale of woe
produced at a theatre, you behold in a law-court a case of
real and genuine distress — a drama of life. The prisoner
whom you there see pale, agitated, and alarmed, instead of
— as is the case when a curtain falls on a tragedy — going
home to sup peacefully with his family, and then retiring to
rest, that he may recommence his mimic woes on the morrow,
— is removed from your sight merely to be reconducted to
his prison and delivered up to the executioner. I leave you
to judge how far your nerves are calculated to bear you
through such a scene. Of this, however, be assured, that
should any favorable opportunity present itself, I will not
fail to offer you the choice of being present.”

“For shame, M. de Villefort!” said Renee, becoming quite
pale; “don’t you see how you are frightening us? — and yet
you laugh.”

“What would you have? ‘Tis like a duel. I have already
recorded sentence of death, five or six times, against the
movers of political conspiracies, and who can say how many
daggers may be ready sharpened, and only waiting a favorable
opportunity to be buried in my heart?”

“Gracious heavens, M. de Villefort,” said Renee, becoming
more and more terrified; “you surely are not in earnest.”

“Indeed I am,” replied the young magistrate with a smile;
“and in the interesting trial that young lady is anxious to
witness, the case would only be still more aggravated.
Suppose, for instance, the prisoner, as is more than
probable, to have served under Napoleon — well, can you
expect for an instant, that one accustomed, at the word of
his commander, to rush fearlessly on the very bayonets of
his foe, will scruple more to drive a stiletto into the
heart of one he knows to be his personal enemy, than to
slaughter his fellow-creatures, merely because bidden to do
so by one he is bound to obey? Besides, one requires the
excitement of being hateful in the eyes of the accused, in
order to lash one’s self into a state of sufficient
vehemence and power. I would not choose to see the man
against whom I pleaded smile, as though in mockery of my
words. No; my pride is to see the accused pale, agitated,
and as though beaten out of all composure by the fire of my
eloquence.” Renee uttered a smothered exclamation.

“Bravo!” cried one of the guests; “that is what I call
talking to some purpose.”

“Just the person we require at a time like the present,”
said a second.

“What a splendid business that last case of yours was, my
dear Villefort!” remarked a third; “I mean the trial of the
man for murdering his father. Upon my word, you killed him
ere the executioner had laid his hand upon him.”

“Oh, as for parricides, and such dreadful people as that,”
interposed Renee, “it matters very little what is done to
them; but as regards poor unfortunate creatures whose only
crime consists in having mixed themselves up in political
intrigues” —

“Why, that is the very worst offence they could possibly
commit; for, don’t you see, Renee, the king is the father of
his people, and he who shall plot or contrive aught against
the life and safety of the parent of thirty-two millions of
souls, is a parricide upon a fearfully great scale?”

“I don’t know anything about that,” replied Renee; “but, M.
de Villefort, you have promised me — have you not? —
always to show mercy to those I plead for.”

“Make yourself quite easy on that point,” answered
Villefort, with one of his sweetest smiles; “you and I will
always consult upon our verdicts.”

“My love,” said the marquise, “attend to your doves, your
lap-dogs, and embroidery, but do not meddle with what you do
not understand. Nowadays the military profession is in
abeyance and the magisterial robe is the badge of honor.
There is a wise Latin proverb that is very much in point.”

“Cedant arma togae,” said Villefort with a bow.

“I cannot speak Latin,” responded the marquise.

“Well,” said Renee, “I cannot help regretting you had not
chosen some other profession than your own — a physician,
for instance. Do you know I always felt a shudder at the
idea of even a destroying angel?”

“Dear, good Renee,” whispered Villefort, as he gazed with
unutterable tenderness on the lovely speaker.

“Let us hope, my child,” cried the marquis, “that M. de
Villefort may prove the moral and political physician of
this province; if so, he will have achieved a noble work.”

“And one which will go far to efface the recollection of his
father’s conduct,” added the incorrigible marquise.

“Madame,” replied Villefort, with a mournful smile, “I have
already had the honor to observe that my father has — at
least, I hope so — abjured his past errors, and that he is,
at the present moment, a firm and zealous friend to religion
and order — a better royalist, possibly, than his son; for
he has to atone for past dereliction, while I have no other
impulse than warm, decided preference and conviction.”
Having made this well-turned speech, Villefort looked
carefully around to mark the effect of his oratory, much as
he would have done had he been addressing the bench in open
court.

“Do you know, my dear Villefort,” cried the Comte de
Salvieux, “that is exactly what I myself said the other day
at the Tuileries, when questioned by his majesty’s principal
chamberlain touching the singularity of an alliance between
the son of a Girondin and the daughter of an officer of the
Duc de Conde; and I assure you he seemed fully to comprehend
that this mode of reconciling political differences was
based upon sound and excellent principles. Then the king,
who, without our suspecting it, had overheard our
conversation, interrupted us by saying, `Villefort’ —
observe that the king did not pronounce the word Noirtier,
but, on the contrary, placed considerable emphasis on that
of Villefort — `Villefort,’ said his majesty, `is a young
man of great judgment and discretion, who will be sure to
make a figure in his profession; I like him much, and it
gave me great pleasure to hear that he was about to become
the son-in-law of the Marquis and Marquise de Saint-Meran. I
should myself have recommended the match, had not the noble
marquis anticipated my wishes by requesting my consent to
it.'”

“Is it possible the king could have condescended so far as
to express himself so favorably of me?” asked the enraptured
Villefort.

“I give you his very words; and if the marquis chooses to be
candid, he will confess that they perfectly agree with what
his majesty said to him, when he went six months ago to
consult him upon the subject of your espousing his
daughter.”

“That is true,” answered the marquis.

“How much do I owe this gracious prince! What is there I
would not do to evince my earnest gratitude!”

“That is right,” cried the marquise. “I love to see you
thus. Now, then, were a conspirator to fall into your hands,
he would be most welcome.”

“For my part, dear mother.” interposed Renee, “I trust your
wishes will not prosper, and that Providence will only
permit petty offenders, poor debtors, and miserable cheats
to fall into M. de Villefort’s hands, — then I shall be
contented.”

“Just the same as though you prayed that a physician might
only be called upon to prescribe for headaches, measles, and
the stings of wasps, or any other slight affection of the
epidermis. If you wish to see me the king’s attorney, you
must desire for me some of those violent and dangerous
diseases from the cure of which so much honor redounds to
the physician.”

At this moment, and as though the utterance of Villefort’s
wish had sufficed to effect its accomplishment, a servant
entered the room, and whispered a few words in his ear.
Villefort immediately rose from table and quitted the room
upon the plea of urgent business; he soon, however,
returned, his whole face beaming with delight. Renee
regarded him with fond affection; and certainly his handsome
features, lit up as they then were with more than usual fire
and animation, seemed formed to excite the innocent
admiration with which she gazed on her graceful and
intelligent lover.

“You were wishing just now,” said Villefort, addressing her,
“that I were a doctor instead of a lawyer. Well, I at least
resemble the disciples of Esculapius in one thing — that of
not being able to call a day my own, not even that of my
betrothal.”

“And wherefore were you called away just now?” asked
Mademoiselle de Saint-Meran, with an air of deep interest.

“For a very serious matter, which bids fair to make work for
the executioner.”

“How dreadful!” exclaimed Renee, turning pale.

“Is it possible?” burst simultaneously from all who were
near enough to the magistrate to hear his words.

“Why, if my information prove correct, a sort of Bonaparte
conspiracy has just been discovered.”

“Can I believe my ears?” cried the marquise.

“I will read you the letter containing the accusation, at
least,” said Villefort: —

“`The king’s attorney is informed by a friend to the throne
and the religions institutions of his country, that one
named Edmond Dantes, mate of the ship Pharaon, this day
arrived from Smyrna, after having touched at Naples and
Porto-Ferrajo, has been the bearer of a letter from Murat to
the usurper, and again taken charge of another letter from
the usurper to the Bonapartist club in Paris. Ample
corroboration of this statement may be obtained by arresting
the above-mentioned Edmond Dantes, who either carries the
letter for Paris about with him, or has it at his father’s
abode. Should it not be found in the possession of father or
son, then it will assuredly be discovered in the cabin
belonging to the said Dantes on board the Pharaon.'”

“But,” said Renee, “this letter, which, after all, is but an
anonymous scrawl, is not even addressed to you, but to the
king’s attorney.”

“True; but that gentleman being absent, his secretary, by
his orders, opened his letters; thinking this one of
importance, he sent for me, but not finding me, took upon
himself to give the necessary orders for arresting the
accused party.”

“Then the guilty person is absolutely in custody?” said the
marquise.

“Nay, dear mother, say the accused person. You know we
cannot yet pronounce him guilty.”

“He is in safe custody,” answered Villefort; “and rely upon
it, if the letter is found, he will not be likely to be
trusted abroad again, unless he goes forth under the
especial protection of the headsman.”

“And where is the unfortunate being?” asked Renee.

“He is at my house.”

“Come, come, my friend,” interrupted the marquise, “do not
neglect your duty to linger with us. You are the king’s
servant, and must go wherever that service calls you.”

“O Villefort!” cried Renee, clasping her hands, and looking
towards her lover with piteous earnestness, “be merciful on
this the day of our betrothal.”

The young man passed round to the side of the table where
the fair pleader sat, and leaning over her chair said
tenderly, —

“To give you pleasure, my sweet Renee, I promise to show all
the lenity in my power; but if the charges brought against
this Bonapartist hero prove correct, why, then, you really
must give me leave to order his head to be cut off.” Renee
shuddered.

“Never mind that foolish girl, Villefort,” said the
marquise. “She will soon get over these things.” So saying,
Madame de Saint-Meran extended her dry bony hand to
Villefort, who, while imprinting a son-in-law’s respectful
salute on it, looked at Renee, as much as to say, “I must
try and fancy ’tis your dear hand I kiss, as it should have
been.”

“These are mournful auspices to accompany a betrothal,”
sighed poor Renee.

“Upon my word, child!” exclaimed the angry marquise, “your
folly exceeds all bounds. I should be glad to know what
connection there can possibly be between your sickly
sentimentality and the affairs of the state!”

“O mother!” murmured Renee.

“Nay, madame, I pray you pardon this little traitor. I
promise you that to make up for her want of loyalty, I will
be most inflexibly severe;” then casting an expressive
glance at his betrothed, which seemed to say, “Fear not, for
your dear sake my justice shall be tempered with mercy,” and
receiving a sweet and approving smile in return, Villefort
quitted the room.

No sooner had Villefort left the salon, than he assumed the
grave air of a man who holds the balance of life and death
in his hands. Now, in spite of the mobility of his
countenance, the command of which, like a finished actor, he
had carefully studied before the glass, it was by no means
easy for him to assume an air of judicial severity. Except
the recollection of the line of politics his father had
adopted, and which might interfere, unless he acted with the
greatest prudence, with his own career, Gerard de Villefort
was as happy as a man could be. Already rich, he held a high
official situation, though only twenty-seven. He was about
to marry a young and charming woman, whom he loved, not
passionately, but reasonably, as became a deputy attorney of
the king; and besides her personal attractions, which were
very great, Mademoiselle de Saint-Meran’s family possessed
considerable political influence, which they would, of
course, exert in his favor. The dowry of his wife amounted
to fifty thousand crowns, and he had, besides, the prospect
of seeing her fortune increased to half a million at her
father’s death. These considerations naturally gave
Villefort a feeling of such complete felicity that his mind
was fairly dazzled in its contemplation.

At the door he met the commissary of police, who was waiting
for him. The sight of this officer recalled Villefort from
the third heaven to earth; he composed his face, as we have
before described, and said, “I have read the letter, sir,
and you have acted rightly in arresting this man; now inform
me what you have discovered concerning him and the
conspiracy.”

“We know nothing as yet of the conspiracy, monsieur; all the
papers found have been sealed up and placed on your desk.
The prisoner himself is named Edmond Dantes, mate on board
the three-master the Pharaon, trading in cotton with
Alexandria and Smyrna, and belonging to Morrel & Son, of
Marseilles.”

“Before he entered the merchant service, had he ever served
in the marines?”

“Oh, no, monsieur, he is very young.”

“How old?”

“Nineteen or twenty at the most.”

At this moment, and as Villefort had arrived at the corner
of the Rue des Conseils, a man, who seemed to have been
waiting for him, approached; it was M. Morrel.

“Ah, M. de Villefort,” cried he, “I am delighted to see you.
Some of your people have committed the strangest mistake —
they have just arrested Edmond Dantes, mate of my vessel.”

“I know it, monsieur,” replied Villefort, “and I am now
going to examine him.”

“Oh,” said Morrel, carried away by his friendship, “you do
not know him, and I do. He is the most estimable, the most
trustworthy creature in the world, and I will venture to
say, there is not a better seaman in all the merchant
service. Oh, M. de Villefort, I beseech your indulgence for
him.”

Villefort, as we have seen, belonged to the aristocratic
party at Marseilles, Morrel to the plebeian; the first was a
royalist, the other suspected of Bonapartism. Villefort
looked disdainfully at Morrel, and replied, —

“You are aware, monsieur, that a man may be estimable and
trustworthy in private life, and the best seaman in the
merchant service, and yet be, politically speaking, a great
criminal. Is it not true?”

The magistrate laid emphasis on these words, as if he wished
to apply them to the owner himself, while his eyes seemed to
plunge into the heart of one who, interceding for another,
had himself need of indulgence. Morrel reddened, for his own
conscience was not quite clear on politics; besides, what
Dantes had told him of his interview with the grand-marshal,
and what the emperor had said to him, embarrassed him. He
replied, however, —

“I entreat you, M. de Villefort, be, as you always are, kind
and equitable, and give him back to us soon.” This give us
sounded revolutionary in the deputy’s ears.

“Ah, ah,” murmured he, “is Dantes then a member of some
Carbonari society, that his protector thus employs the
collective form? He was, if I recollect, arrested in a
tavern, in company with a great many others.” Then he added,
“Monsieur, you may rest assured I shall perform my duty
impartially, and that if he be innocent you shall not have
appealed to me in vain; should he, however, be guilty, in
this present epoch, impunity would furnish a dangerous
example, and I must do my duty.”

As he had now arrived at the door of his own house, which
adjoined the Palais de Justice, he entered, after having,
coldly saluted the shipowner, who stood, as if petrified, on
the spot where Villefort had left him. The ante-chamber was
full of police agents and gendarmes, in the midst of whom,
carefully watched, but calm and smiling, stood the prisoner.
Villefort traversed the ante-chamber, cast a side glance at
Dantes, and taking a packet which a gendarme offered him,
disappeared, saying, “Bring in the prisoner.”

Rapid as had been Villefort’s glance, it had served to give
him an idea of the man he was about to interrogate. He had
recognized intelligence in the high forehead, courage in the
dark eye and bent brow, and frankness in the thick lips that
showed a set of pearly teeth. Villefort’s first impression
was favorable; but he had been so often warned to mistrust
first impulses, that he applied the maxim to the impression,
forgetting the difference between the two words. He stifled,
therefore, the feelings of compassion that were rising,
composed his features, and sat down, grim and sombre, at his
desk. An instant after Dantes entered. He was pale, but calm
and collected, and saluting his judge with easy politeness,
looked round for a seat, as if he had been in M. Morrel’s
salon. It was then that he encountered for the first time
Villefort’s look, — that look peculiar to the magistrate,
who, while seeming to read the thoughts of others, betrays
nothing of his own.

“Who and what are you?” demanded Villefort, turning over a
pile of papers, containing information relative to the
prisoner, that a police agent had given to him on his entry,
and that, already, in an hour’s time, had swelled to
voluminous proportions, thanks to the corrupt espionage of
which “the accused” is always made the victim.

“My name is Edmond Dantes,” replied the young man calmly; “I
am mate of the Pharaon, belonging to Messrs. Morrel & Son.”

“Your age?” continued Villefort.

“Nineteen,” returned Dantes.

“What were you doing at the moment you were arrested?”

“I was at the festival of my marriage, monsieur,” said the
young man, his voice slightly tremulous, so great was the
contrast between that happy moment and the painful ceremony
he was now undergoing; so great was the contrast between the
sombre aspect of M. de Villefort and the radiant face of
Mercedes.

“You were at the festival of your marriage?” said the
deputy, shuddering in spite of himself.

“Yes, monsieur; I am on the point of marrying a young girl I
have been attached to for three years.” Villefort, impassive
as he was, was struck with this coincidence; and the
tremulous voice of Dantes, surprised in the midst of his
happiness, struck a sympathetic chord in his own bosom — he
also was on the point of being married, and he was summoned
from his own happiness to destroy that of another. “This
philosophic reflection,” thought he, “will make a great
sensation at M. de Saint-Meran’s;” and he arranged mentally,
while Dantes awaited further questions, the antithesis by
which orators often create a reputation for eloquence. When
this speech was arranged, Villefort turned to Dantes.

“Go on, sir,” said he.

“What would you have me say?”

“Give all the information in your power.”

“Tell me on which point you desire information, and I will
tell all I know; only,” added he, with a smile, “I warn you
I know very little.”

“Have you served under the usurper?”

“I was about to be mustered into the Royal Marines when he
fell.”

“It is reported your political opinions are extreme,” said
Villefort, who had never heard anything of the kind, but was
not sorry to make this inquiry, as if it were an accusation.

“My political opinions!” replied Dantes. “Alas, sir, I never
had any opinions. I am hardly nineteen; I know nothing; I
have no part to play. If I obtain the situation I desire, I
shall owe it to M. Morrel. Thus all my opinions — I will
not say public, but private — are confined to these three
sentiment, — I love my father, I respect M. Morrel, and I
adore Mercedes. This, sir, is all I can tell you, and you
see how uninteresting it is.” As Dantes spoke, Villefort
gazed at his ingenuous and open countenance, and recollected
the words of Renee, who, without knowing who the culprit
was, had besought his indulgence for him. With the deputy’s
knowledge of crime and criminals, every word the young man
uttered convinced him more and more of his innocence. This
lad, for he was scarcely a man, — simple, natural, eloquent
with that eloquence of the heart never found when sought
for; full of affection for everybody, because he was happy,
and because happiness renders even the wicked good —
extended his affection even to his judge, spite of
Villefort’s severe look and stern accent. Dantes seemed full
of kindness.

“Pardieu,” said Villefort, “he is a noble fellow. I hope I
shall gain Renee’s favor easily by obeying the first command
she ever imposed on me. I shall have at least a pressure of
the hand in public, and a sweet kiss in private.” Full of
this idea, Villefort’s face became so joyous, that when he
turned to Dantes, the latter, who had watched the change on
his physiognomy, was smiling also.

“Sir,” said Villefort, “have you any enemies, at least, that
you know.”

“I have enemies?” replied Dantes; “my position is not
sufficiently elevated for that. As for my disposition, that
is, perhaps, somewhat too hasty; but I have striven to
repress it. I have had ten or twelve sailors under me, and
if you question them, they will tell you that they love and
respect me, not as a father, for I am too young, but as an
elder brother.”

“But you may have excited jealousy. You are about to become
captain at nineteen — an elevated post; you are about to
marry a pretty girl, who loves you; and these two pieces of
good fortune may have excited the envy of some one.”

“You are right; you know men better than I do, and what you
say may possibly be the case, I confess; but if such persons
are among my acquaintances I prefer not to know it, because
then I should be forced to hate them.”

“You are wrong; you should always strive to see clearly
around you. You seem a worthy young man; I will depart from
the strict line of my duty to aid you in discovering the
author of this accusation. Here is the paper; do you know
the writing?” As he spoke, Villefort drew the letter from
his pocket, and presented it to Dantes. Dantes read it. A
cloud passed over his brow as he said, —

“No, monsieur, I do not know the writing, and yet it is
tolerably plain. Whoever did it writes well. I am very
fortunate,” added he, looking gratefully at Villefort, “to
be examined by such a man as you; for this envious person is
a real enemy.” And by the rapid glance that the young man’s
eyes shot forth, Villefort saw how much energy lay hid
beneath this mildness.

“Now,” said the deputy, “answer me frankly, not as a
prisoner to a judge, but as one man to another who takes an
interest in him, what truth is there in the accusation
contained in this anonymous letter?” And Villefort threw
disdainfully on his desk the letter Dantes had just given
back to him.

“None at all. I will tell you the real facts. I swear by my
honor as a sailor, by my love for Mercedes, by the life of
my father” —

“Speak, monsieur,” said Villefort. Then, internally, “If
Renee could see me, I hope she would be satisfied, and would
no longer call me a decapitator.”

“Well, when we quitted Naples, Captain Leclere was attacked
with a brain fever. As we had no doctor on board, and he was
so anxious to arrive at Elba, that he would not touch at any
other port, his disorder rose to such a height, that at the
end of the third day, feeling he was dying, he called me to
him. `My dear Dantes,’ said he, `swear to perform what I am
going to tell you, for it is a matter of the deepest
importance.’

“`I swear, captain,’ replied I.

“`Well, as after my death the command devolves on you as
mate, assume the command, and bear up for the Island of
Elba, disembark at Porto-Ferrajo, ask for the grand-marshal,
give him this letter — perhaps they will give you another
letter, and charge you with a commission. You will
accomplish what I was to have done, and derive all the honor
and profit from it.’

“`I will do it, captain; but perhaps I shall not be admitted
to the grand marshal’s presence as easily as you expect?’

“`Here is a ring that will obtain audience of him, and
remove every difficulty,’ said the captain. At these words
he gave me a ring. It was time — two hours after he was
delirious; the next day he died.”

“And what did you do then?”

“What I ought to have done, and what every one would have
done in my place. Everywhere the last requests of a dying
man are sacred; but with a sailor the last requests of his
superior are commands. I sailed for the Island of Elba,
where I arrived the next day; I ordered everybody to remain
on board, and went on shore alone. As I had expected, I
found some difficulty in obtaining access to the
grand-marshal; but I sent the ring I had received from the
captain to him, and was instantly admitted. He questioned me
concerning Captain Leclere’s death; and, as the latter had
told me, gave me a letter to carry on to a person in Paris.
I undertook it because it was what my captain had bade me
do. I landed here, regulated the affairs of the vessel, and
hastened to visit my affianced bride, whom I found more
lovely than ever. Thanks to M. Morrel, all the forms were
got over; in a word I was, as I told you, at my
marriage-feast; and I should have been married in an hour,
and to-morrow I intended to start for Paris, had I not been
arrested on this charge which you as well as I now see to be
unjust.”

“Ah,” said Villefort, “this seems to me the truth. If you
have been culpable, it was imprudence, and this imprudence
was in obedience to the orders of your captain. Give up this
letter you have brought from Elba, and pass your word you
will appear should you be required, and go and rejoin your
friends.

“I am free, then, sir?” cried Dantes joyfully.

“Yes; but first give me this letter.”

“You have it already, for it was taken from me with some
others which I see in that packet.”

“Stop a moment,” said the deputy, as Dantes took his hat and
gloves. “To whom is it addressed?”

“To Monsieur Noirtier, Rue Coq-Heron, Paris.” Had a
thunderbolt fallen into the room, Villefort could not have
been more stupefied. He sank into his seat, and hastily
turning over the packet, drew forth the fatal letter, at
which he glanced with an expression of terror.

“M. Noirtier, Rue Coq-Heron, No. 13,” murmured he, growing
still paler.

“Yes,” said Dantes; “do you know him?”

“No,” replied Villefort; “a faithful servant of the king
does not know conspirators.”

“It is a conspiracy, then?” asked Dantes, who after
believing himself free, now began to feel a tenfold alarm.
“I have, however, already told you, sir, I was entirely
ignorant of the contents of the letter.”

“Yes; but you knew the name of the person to whom it was
addressed,” said Villefort.

“I was forced to read the address to know to whom to give
it.”

“Have you shown this letter to any one?” asked Villefort,
becoming still more pale.

“To no one, on my honor.”

“Everybody is ignorant that you are the bearer of a letter
from the Island of Elba, and addressed to M. Noirtier?”

“Everybody, except the person who gave it to me.”

“And that was too much, far too much,” murmured Villefort.
Villefort’s brow darkened more and more, his white lips and
clinched teeth filled Dantes with apprehension. After
reading the letter, Villefort covered his face with his
hands.

“Oh,” said Dantes timidly, “what is the matter?” Villefort
made no answer, but raised his head at the expiration of a
few seconds, and again perused the letter.

“And you say that you are ignorant of the contents of this
letter?”

“I give you my word of honor, sir,” said Dantes; “but what
is the matter? You are ill — shall I ring for assistance?
— shall I call?”

“No,” said Villefort, rising hastily; “stay where you are.
It is for me to give orders here, and not you.”

“Monsieur,” replied Dantes proudly, “it was only to summon
assistance for you.”

“I want none; it was a temporary indisposition. Attend to
yourself; answer me.” Dantes waited, expecting a question,
but in vain. Villefort fell back on his chair, passed his
hand over his brow, moist with perspiration, and, for the
third time, read the letter.

“Oh, if he knows the contents of this!” murmured he, “and
that Noirtier is the father of Villefort, I am lost!” And he
fixed his eyes upon Edmond as if he would have penetrated
his thoughts.

“Oh, it is impossible to doubt it,” cried he, suddenly.

“In heaven’s name!” cried the unhappy young man, “if you
doubt me, question me; I will answer you.” Villefort made a
violent effort, and in a tone he strove to render firm, —

“Sir,” said he, “I am no longer able, as I had hoped, to
restore you immediately to liberty; before doing so, I must
consult the trial justice; what my own feeling is you
already know.”

“Oh, monsieur,” cried Dantes, “you have been rather a friend
than a judge.”

“Well, I must detain you some time longer, but I will strive
to make it as short as possible. The principal charge
against you is this letter, and you see” — Villefort
approached the fire, cast it in, and waited until it was
entirely consumed.

“You see, I destroy it?”

“Oh,” exclaimed Dantes, “you are goodness itself.”

“Listen,” continued Villefort; “you can now have confidence
in me after what I have done.”

“Oh, command, and I will obey.”

“Listen; this is not a command, but advice I give you.”

“Speak, and I will follow your advice.”

“I shall detain you until this evening in the Palais de
Justice. Should any one else interrogate you, say to him
what you have said to me, but do not breathe a word of this
letter.”

“I promise.” It was Villefort who seemed to entreat, and the
prisoner who reassured him.

“You see,” continued he, glancing toward the grate, where
fragments of burnt paper fluttered in the flames, “the
letter is destroyed; you and I alone know of its existence;
should you, therefore, be questioned, deny all knowledge of
it — deny it boldly, and you are saved.”

“Be satisfied; I will deny it.”

“It was the only letter you had?”

“It was.”

“Swear it.”

“I swear it.”

Villefort rang. A police agent entered. Villefort whispered
some words in his ear, to which the officer replied by a
motion of his head.

“Follow him,” said Villefort to Dantes. Dantes saluted
Villefort and retired. Hardly had the door closed when
Villefort threw himself half-fainting into a chair.

“Alas, alas,” murmured he, “if the procureur himself had
been at Marseilles I should have been ruined. This accursed
letter would have destroyed all my hopes. Oh, my father,
must your past career always interfere with my successes?”
Suddenly a light passed over his face, a smile played round
his set mouth, and his haggard eyes were fixed in thought.

“This will do,” said he, “and from this letter, which might
have ruined me, I will make my fortune. Now to the work I
have in hand.” And after having assured himself that the
prisoner was gone, the deputy procureur hastened to the
house of his betrothed.

The commissary of police, as he traversed the ante-chamber,
made a sign to two gendarmes, who placed themselves one on
Dantes’ right and the other on his left. A door that
communicated with the Palais de Justice was opened, and they
went through a long range of gloomy corridors, whose
appearance might have made even the boldest shudder. The
Palais de Justice communicated with the prison, — a sombre
edifice, that from its grated windows looks on the
clock-tower of the Accoules. After numberless windings,
Dantes saw a door with an iron wicket. The commissary took
up an iron mallet and knocked thrice, every blow seeming to
Dantes as if struck on his heart. The door opened, the two
gendarmes gently pushed him forward, and the door closed
with a loud sound behind him. The air he inhaled was no
longer pure, but thick and mephitic, — he was in prison. He
was conducted to a tolerably neat chamber, but grated and
barred, and its appearance, therefore, did not greatly alarm
him; besides, the words of Villefort, who seemed to interest
himself so much, resounded still in his ears like a promise
of freedom. It was four o’clock when Dantes was placed in
this chamber. It was, as we have said, the 1st of March, and
the prisoner was soon buried in darkness. The obscurity
augmented the acuteness of his hearing; at the slightest
sound he rose and hastened to the door, convinced they were
about to liberate him, but the sound died away, and Dantes
sank again into his seat. At last, about ten o’clock, and
just as Dantes began to despair, steps were heard in the
corridor, a key turned in the lock, the bolts creaked, the
massy oaken door flew open, and a flood of light from two
torches pervaded the apartment. By the torchlight Dantes saw
the glittering sabres and carbines of four gendarmes. He had
advanced at first, but stopped at the sight of this display
of force.

“Are you come to fetch me?” asked he.

“Yes,” replied a gendarme.

“By the orders of the deputy procureur?”

“I believe so.” The conviction that they came from M. de
Villefort relieved all Dantes’ apprehensions; he advanced
calmly, and placed himself in the centre of the escort. A
carriage waited at the door, the coachman was on the box,
and a police officer sat beside him.

“Is this carriage for me?” said Dantes.

“It is for you,” replied a gendarme.

Dantes was about to speak; but feeling himself urged
forward, and having neither the power nor the intention to
resist, he mounted the steps, and was in an instant seated
inside between two gendarmes; the two others took their
places opposite, and the carriage rolled heavily over the
stones.

The prisoner glanced at the windows — they were grated; he
had changed his prison for another that was conveying him he
knew not whither. Through the grating, however, Dantes saw
they were passing through the Rue Caisserie, and by the Rue
Saint-Laurent and the Rue Taramis, to the port. Soon he saw
the lights of La Consigne.

The carriage stopped, the officer descended, approached the
guardhouse, a dozen soldiers came out and formed themselves
in order; Dantes saw the reflection of their muskets by the
light of the lamps on the quay.

“Can all this force be summoned on my account?” thought he.

The officer opened the door, which was locked, and, without
speaking a word, answered Dantes’ question; for he saw
between the ranks of the soldiers a passage formed from the
carriage to the port. The two gendarmes who were opposite to
him descended first, then he was ordered to alight and the
gendarmes on each side of him followed his example. They
advanced towards a boat, which a custom-house officer held
by a chain, near the quay.

The soldiers looked at Dantes with an air of stupid
curiosity. In an instant he was placed in the stern-sheets
of the boat, between the gendarmes, while the officer
stationed himself at the bow; a shove sent the boat adrift,
and four sturdy oarsmen impelled it rapidly towards the
Pilon. At a shout from the boat, the chain that closes the
mouth of the port was lowered and in a second they were, as
Dantes knew, in the Frioul and outside the inner harbor.

The prisoner’s first feeling was of joy at again breathing
the pure air — for air is freedom; but he soon sighed, for
he passed before La Reserve, where he had that morning been
so happy, and now through the open windows came the laughter
and revelry of a ball. Dantes folded his hands, raised his
eyes to heaven, and prayed fervently.

The boat continued her voyage. They had passed the Tete de
Morte, were now off the Anse du Pharo, and about to double
the battery. This manoeuvre was incomprehensible to Dantes.

“Whither are you taking me?” asked he.

“You will soon know.”

“But still” —

“We are forbidden to give you any explanation.” Dantes,
trained in discipline, knew that nothing would be more
absurd than to question subordinates, who were forbidden to
reply; and so he remained silent.

The most vague and wild thoughts passed through his mind.
The boat they were in could not make a long voyage; there
was no vessel at anchor outside the harbor; he thought,
perhaps, they were going to leave him on some distant point.
He was not bound, nor had they made any attempt to handcuff
him; this seemed a good augury. Besides, had not the deputy,
who had been so kind to him, told him that provided he did
not pronounce the dreaded name of Noirtier, he had nothing
to apprehend? Had not Villefort in his presence destroyed
the fatal letter, the only proof against him?

He waited silently, striving to pierce through the darkness.

They had left the Ile Ratonneau, where the lighthouse stood,
on the right, and were now opposite the Point des Catalans.
It seemed to the prisoner that he could distinguish a
feminine form on the beach, for it was there Mercedes dwelt.
How was it that a presentiment did not warn Mercedes that
her lover was within three hundred yards of her?

One light alone was visible; and Dantes saw that it came
from Mercedes’ chamber. Mercedes was the only one awake in
the whole settlement. A loud cry could be heard by her. But
pride restrained him and he did not utter it. What would his
guards think if they heard him shout like a madman?

He remained silent, his eyes fixed upon the light; the boat
went on, but the prisoner thought only of Mercedes. An
intervening elevation of land hid the light. Dantes turned
and perceived that they had got out to sea. While he had
been absorbed in thought, they had shipped their oars and
hoisted sail; the boat was now moving with the wind.

In spite of his repugnance to address the guards, Dantes
turned to the nearest gendarme, and taking his hand, —

“Comrade,” said he, “I adjure you, as a Christian and a
soldier, to tell me where we are going. I am Captain Dantes,
a loyal Frenchman, thought accused of treason; tell me where
you are conducting me, and I promise you on my honor I will
submit to my fate.”

The gendarme looked irresolutely at his companion, who
returned for answer a sign that said, “I see no great harm
in telling him now,” and the gendarme replied, —

“You are a native of Marseilles, and a sailor, and yet you
do not know where you are going?”

“On my honor, I have no idea.”

“Have you no idea whatever?”

“None at all.”

“That is impossible.”

“I swear to you it is true. Tell me, I entreat.”

“But my orders.”

“Your orders do not forbid your telling me what I must know
in ten minutes, in half an hour, or an hour. You see I
cannot escape, even if I intended.”

“Unless you are blind, or have never been outside the
harbor, you must know.”

“I do not.”

“Look round you then.” Dantes rose and looked forward, when
he saw rise within a hundred yards of him the black and
frowning rock on which stands the Chateau d’If. This gloomy
fortress, which has for more than three hundred years
furnished food for so many wild legends, seemed to Dantes
like a scaffold to a malefactor.

“The Chateau d’If?” cried he, “what are we going there for?”
The gendarme smiled.

“I am not going there to be imprisoned,” said Dantes; “it is
only used for political prisoners. I have committed no
crime. Are there any magistrates or judges at the Chateau
d’If?”

“There are only,” said the gendarme, “a governor, a
garrison, turnkeys, and good thick walls. Come, come, do not
look so astonished, or you will make me think you are
laughing at me in return for my good nature.” Dantes pressed
the gendarme’s hand as though he would crush it.

“You think, then,” said he, “that I am taken to the Chateau
d’If to be imprisoned there?”

“It is probable; but there is no occasion to squeeze so
hard.”

“Without any inquiry, without any formality?”

“All the formalities have been gone through; the inquiry is
already made.”

“And so, in spite of M. de Villefort’s promises?”

“I do not know what M. de Villefort promised you,” said the
gendarme, “but I know we are taking you to the Chateau d’If.
But what are you doing? Help, comrades, help!”

By a rapid movement, which the gendarme’s practiced eye had
perceived, Dantes sprang forward to precipitate himself into
the sea; but four vigorous arms seized him as his feet
quitted the bottom of the boat. He fell back cursing with
rage.

“Good!” said the gendarme, placing his knee on his chest;
“believe soft-spoken gentlemen again! Harkye, my friend, I
have disobeyed my first order, but I will not disobey the
second; and if you move, I will blow your brains out.” And
he levelled his carbine at Dantes, who felt the muzzle
against his temple.

For a moment the idea of struggling crossed his mind, and of
so ending the unexpected evil that had overtaken him. But he
bethought him of M. de Villefort’s promise; and, besides,
death in a boat from the hand of a gendarme seemed too
terrible. He remained motionless, but gnashing his teeth and
wringing his hands with fury.

At this moment the boat came to a landing with a violent
shock. One of the sailors leaped on shore, a cord creaked as
it ran through a pulley, and Dantes guessed they were at the
end of the voyage, and that they were mooring the boat.

His guards, taking him by the arms and coat-collar, forced
him to rise, and dragged him towards the steps that lead to
the gate of the fortress, while the police officer carrying
a musket with fixed bayonet followed behind.

Dantes made no resistance; he was like a man in a dream: he
saw soldiers drawn up on the embankment; he knew vaguely
that he was ascending a flight of steps; he was conscious
that he passed through a door, and that the door closed
behind him; but all this indistinctly as through a mist. He
did not even see the ocean, that terrible barrier against
freedom, which the prisoners look upon with utter despair.

They halted for a minute, during which he strove to collect
his thoughts. He looked around; he was in a court surrounded
by high walls; he heard the measured tread of sentinels, and
as they passed before the light he saw the barrels of their
muskets shine.

They waited upwards of ten minutes. Certain Dantes could not
escape, the gendarmes released him. They seemed awaiting
orders. The orders came.

“Where is the prisoner?” said a voice.

“Here,” replied the gendarmes.

“Let him follow me; I will take him to his cell.”

“Go!” said the gendarmes, thrusting Dantes forward.

The prisoner followed his guide, who led him into a room
almost under ground, whose bare and reeking walls seemed as
though impregnated with tears; a lamp placed on a stool
illumined the apartment faintly, and showed Dantes the
features of his conductor, an under-jailer, ill-clothed, and
of sullen appearance.

“Here is your chamber for to-night,” said he. “It is late,
and the governor is asleep. To-morrow, perhaps, he may
change you. In the meantime there is bread, water, and fresh
straw; and that is all a prisoner can wish for. Goodnight.”
And before Dantes could open his mouth — before he had
noticed where the jailer placed his bread or the water —
before he had glanced towards the corner where the straw
was, the jailer disappeared, taking with him the lamp and
closing the door, leaving stamped upon the prisoner’s mind
the dim reflection of the dripping walls of his dungeon.

Dantes was alone in darkness and in silence — cold as the
shadows that he felt breathe on his burning forehead. With
the first dawn of day the jailer returned, with orders to
leave Dantes where he was. He found the prisoner in the same
position, as if fixed there, his eyes swollen with weeping.
He had passed the night standing, and without sleep. The
jailer advanced; Dantes appeared not to perceive him. He
touched him on the shoulder. Edmond started.

“Have you not slept?” said the jailer.

“I do not know,” replied Dantes. The jailer stared.

“Are you hungry?” continued he.

“I do not know.”

“Do you wish for anything?”

“I wish to see the governor.” The jailer shrugged his
shoulders and left the chamber.

Dantes followed him with his eyes, and stretched forth his
hands towards the open door; but the door closed. All his
emotion then burst forth; he cast himself on the ground,
weeping bitterly, and asking himself what crime he had
committed that he was thus punished.

The day passed thus; he scarcely tasted food, but walked
round and round the cell like a wild beast in its cage. One
thought in particular tormented him: namely, that during his
journey hither he had sat so still, whereas he might, a
dozen times, have plunged into the sea, and, thanks to his
powers of swimming, for which he was famous, have gained the
shore, concealed himself until the arrival of a Genoese or
Spanish vessel, escaped to Spain or Italy, where Mercedes
and his father could have joined him. He had no fears as to
how he should live — good seamen are welcome everywhere. He
spoke Italian like a Tuscan, and Spanish like a Castilian;
he would have been free, and happy with Mercedes and his
father, whereas he was now confined in the Chateau d’If,
that impregnable fortress, ignorant of the future destiny of
his father and Mercedes; and all this because he had trusted
to Villefort’s promise. The thought was maddening, and
Dantes threw himself furiously down on his straw. The next
morning at the same hour, the jailer came again.

“Well,” said the jailer, “are you more reasonable to-day?”
Dantes made no reply.

“Come, cheer up; is there anything that I can do for you?”

“I wish to see the governor.”

“I have already told you it was impossible.”

“Why so?”

“Because it is against prison rules, and prisoners must not
even ask for it.”

“What is allowed, then?”

“Better fare, if you pay for it, books, and leave to walk
about.”

“I do not want books, I am satisfied with my food, and do
not care to walk about; but I wish to see the governor.”

“If you worry me by repeating the same thing, I will not
bring you any more to eat.”

“Well, then,” said Edmond, “if you do not, I shall die of
hunger — that is all.”

The jailer saw by his tone he would be happy to die; and as
every prisoner is worth ten sous a day to his jailer, he
replied in a more subdued tone.

“What you ask is impossible; but if you are very well
behaved you will be allowed to walk about, and some day you
will meet the governor, and if he chooses to reply, that is
his affair.”

“But,” asked Dantes, “how long shall I have to wait?”

“Ah, a month — six months — a year.”

“It is too long a time. I wish to see him at once.”

“Ah,” said the jailer, “do not always brood over what is
impossible, or you will be mad in a fortnight.”

“You think so?”

“Yes; we have an instance here; it was by always offering a
million of francs to the governor for his liberty that an
abbe became mad, who was in this chamber before you.”

“How long has he left it?”

“Two years.”

“Was he liberated, then?”

“No; he was put in a dungeon.”

“Listen!” said Dantes. “I am not an abbe, I am not mad;
perhaps I shall be, but at present, unfortunately, I am not.
I will make you another offer.”

“What is that?”

“I do not offer you a million, because I have it not; but I
will give you a hundred crowns if, the first time you go to
Marseilles, you will seek out a young girl named Mercedes,
at the Catalans, and give her two lines from me.”

“If I took them, and were detected, I should lose my place,
which is worth two thousand francs a year; so that I should
be a great fool to run such a risk for three hundred.”

“Well,” said Dantes, “mark this; if you refuse at least to
tell Mercedes I am here, I will some day hide myself behind
the door, and when you enter I will dash out your brains
with this stool.”

“Threats!” cried the jailer, retreating and putting himself
on the defensive; “you are certainly going mad. The abbe
began like you, and in three days you will be like him, mad
enough to tie up; but, fortunately, there are dungeons
here.” Dantes whirled the stool round his head.

“All right, all right,” said the jailer; “all right, since
you will have it so. I will send word to the governor.”

“Very well,” returned Dantes, dropping the stool and sitting
on it as if he were in reality mad. The jailer went out, and
returned in an instant with a corporal and four soldiers.

“By the governor’s orders,” said he, “conduct the prisoner
to the tier beneath.”

“To the dungeon, then,” said the corporal.

“Yes; we must put the madman with the madmen.” The soldiers
seized Dantes, who followed passively.

He descended fifteen steps, and the door of a dungeon was
opened, and he was thrust in. The door closed, and Dantes
advanced with outstretched hands until he touched the wall;
he then sat down in the corner until his eyes became
accustomed to the darkness. The jailer was right; Dantes
wanted but little of being utterly mad.

Villefort had, as we have said, hastened back to Madame de
Saint-Meran’s in the Place du Grand Cours, and on entering
the house found that the guests whom he had left at table
were taking coffee in the salon. Renee was, with all the
rest of the company, anxiously awaiting him, and his
entrance was followed by a general exclamation.

“Well, Decapitator, Guardian of the State, Royalist, Brutus,
what is the matter?” said one. “Speak out.”

“Are we threatened with a fresh Reign of Terror?” asked
another.

“Has the Corsican ogre broken loose?” cried a third.

“Marquise,” said Villefort, approaching his future
mother-in-law, “I request your pardon for thus leaving you.
Will the marquis honor me by a few moments’ private
conversation?”

“Ah, it is really a serious matter, then?” asked the
marquis, remarking the cloud on Villefort’s brow.

“So serious that I must take leave of you for a few days;
so,” added he, turning to Renee, “judge for yourself if it
be not important.”

“You are going to leave us?” cried Renee, unable to hide her
emotion at this unexpected announcement.

“Alas,” returned Villefort, “I must!”

“Where, then, are you going?” asked the marquise.

“That, madame, is an official secret; but if you have any
commissions for Paris, a friend of mine is going there
to-night, and will with pleasure undertake them.” The guests
looked at each other.

“You wish to speak to me alone?” said the marquis.

“Yes, let us go to the library, please.” The marquis took
his arm, and they left the salon.

“Well,” asked he, as soon as they were by themselves, “tell
me what it is?”

“An affair of the greatest importance, that demands my
immediate presence in Paris. Now, excuse the indiscretion,
marquis, but have you any landed property?”

“All my fortune is in the funds; seven or eight hundred
thousand francs.”

“Then sell out — sell out, marquis, or you will lose it
all.”

“But how can I sell out here?”

“You have a broker, have you not?”

“Yes.”

“Then give me a letter to him, and tell him to sell out
without an instant’s delay, perhaps even now I shall arrive
too late.”

“The deuce you say!” replied the marquis, “let us lose no
time, then!”

And, sitting down, he wrote a letter to his broker, ordering
him to sell out at the market price.

“Now, then,” said Villefort, placing the letter in his
pocketbook, “I must have another!”

“To whom?”

“To the king.”

“To the king?”

“Yes.”

“I dare not write to his majesty.”

“I do not ask you to write to his majesty, but ask M. de
Salvieux to do so. I want a letter that will enable me to
reach the king’s presence without all the formalities of
demanding an audience; that would occasion a loss of
precious time.”

“But address yourself to the keeper of the seals; he has the
right of entry at the Tuileries, and can procure you
audience at any hour of the day or night.”

“Doubtless; but there is no occasion to divide the honors of
my discovery with him. The keeper would leave me in the
background, and take all the glory to himself. I tell you,
marquis, my fortune is made if I only reach the Tuileries
the first, for the king will not forget the service I do
him.”

“In that case go and get ready. I will call Salvieux and
make him write the letter.”

“Be as quick as possible, I must be on the road in a quarter
of an hour.”

“Tell your coachman to stop at the door.”

“You will present my excuses to the marquise and
Mademoiselle Renee, whom I leave on such a day with great
regret.”

“You will find them both here, and can make your farewells
in person.”

“A thousand thanks — and now for the letter.”

The marquis rang, a servant entered.

“Say to the Comte de Salvieux that I would like to see him.”

“Now, then, go,” said the marquis.

“I shall be gone only a few moments.”

Villefort hastily quitted the apartment, but reflecting that
the sight of the deputy procureur running through the
streets would be enough to throw the whole city into
confusion, he resumed his ordinary pace. At his door he
perceived a figure in the shadow that seemed to wait for
him. It was Mercedes, who, hearing no news of her lover, had
come unobserved to inquire after him.

As Villefort drew near, she advanced and stood before him.
Dantes had spoken of Mercedes, and Villefort instantly
recognized her. Her beauty and high bearing surprised him,
and when she inquired what had become of her lover, it
seemed to him that she was the judge, and he the accused.

“The young man you speak of,” said Villefort abruptly, “is a
great criminal. and I can do nothing for him, mademoiselle.”
Mercedes burst into tears, and, as Villefort strove to pass
her, again addressed him.

“But, at least, tell me where he is, that I may know whether
he is alive or dead,” said she.

“I do not know; he is no longer in my hands,” replied
Villefort.

And desirous of putting an end to the interview, he pushed
by her, and closed the door, as if to exclude the pain he
felt. But remorse is not thus banished; like Virgil’s
wounded hero, he carried the arrow in his wound, and,
arrived at the salon, Villefort uttered a sigh that was
almost a sob, and sank into a chair.

Then the first pangs of an unending torture seized upon his
heart. The man he sacrificed to his ambition, that innocent
victim immolated on the altar of his father’s faults,
appeared to him pale and threatening, leading his affianced
bride by the hand, and bringing with him remorse, not such
as the ancients figured, furious and terrible, but that slow
and consuming agony whose pangs are intensified from hour to
hour up to the very moment of death. Then he had a moment’s
hesitation. He had frequently called for capital punishment
on criminals, and owing to his irresistible eloquence they
had been condemned, and yet the slightest shadow of remorse
had never clouded Villefort’s brow, because they were
guilty; at least, he believed so; but here was an innocent
man whose happiness he had destroyed: in this case he was
not the judge, but the executioner.

As he thus reflected, he felt the sensation we have
described, and which had hitherto been unknown to him, arise
in his bosom, and fill him with vague apprehensions. It is
thus that a wounded man trembles instinctively at the
approach of the finger to his wound until it be healed, but
Villefort’s was one of those that never close, or if they
do, only close to reopen more agonizing than ever. If at
this moment the sweet voice of Renee had sounded in his ears
pleading for mercy, or the fair Mercedes had entered and
said, “In the name of God, I conjure you to restore me my
affianced husband,” his cold and trembling hands would have
signed his release; but no voice broke the stillness of the
chamber, and the door was opened only by Villefort’s valet,
who came to tell him that the travelling carriage was in
readiness.

Villefort rose, or rather sprang, from his chair, hastily
opened one of the drawers of his desk, emptied all the gold
it contained into his pocket, stood motionless an instant,
his hand pressed to his head, muttered a few inarticulate
sounds, and then, perceiving that his servant had placed his
cloak on his shoulders, he sprang into the carriage,
ordering the postilions to drive to M. de Saint-Meran’s. The
hapless Dantes was doomed.

As the marquis had promised, Villefort found the marquise
and Renee in waiting. He started when he saw Renee, for he
fancied she was again about to plead for Dantes. Alas, her
emotions were wholly personal: she was thinking only of
Villefort’s departure.

She loved Villefort, and he left her at the moment he was
about to become her husband. Villefort knew not when he
should return, and Renee, far from pleading for Dantes,
hated the man whose crime separated her from her lover.

Meanwhile what of Mercedes? She had met Fernand at the
corner of the Rue de la Loge; she had returned to the
Catalans, and had despairingly cast herself on her couch.
Fernand, kneeling by her side, took her hand, and covered it
with kisses that Mercedes did not even feel. She passed the
night thus. The lamp went out for want of oil, but she paid
no heed to the darkness, and dawn came, but she knew not
that it was day. Grief had made her blind to all but one
object — that was Edmond.

“Ah, you are there,” said she, at length, turning towards
Fernand.

“I have not quitted you since yesterday,” returned Fernand
sorrowfully.

M. Morrel had not readily given up the fight. He had learned
that Dantes had been taken to prison, and he had gone to all
his friends, and the influential persons of the city; but
the report was already in circulation that Dantes was
arrested as a Bonapartist agent; and as the most sanguine
looked upon any attempt of Napoleon to remount the throne as
impossible, he met with nothing but refusal, and had
returned home in despair, declaring that the matter was
serious and that nothing more could be done.

Caderousse was equally restless and uneasy, but instead of
seeking, like M. Morrel, to aid Dantes, he had shut himself
up with two bottles of black currant brandy, in the hope of
drowning reflection. But he did not succeed, and became too
intoxicated to fetch any more drink, and yet not so
intoxicated as to forget what had happened. With his elbows
on the table he sat between the two empty bottles, while
spectres danced in the light of the unsnuffed candle —
spectres such as Hoffmann strews over his punch-drenched
pages, like black, fantastic dust.

Danglars alone was content and joyous — he had got rid of
an enemy and made his own situation on the Pharaon secure.
Danglars was one of those men born with a pen behind the
ear, and an inkstand in place of a heart. Everything with
him was multiplication or subtraction. The life of a man was
to him of far less value than a numeral, especially when, by
taking it away, he could increase the sum total of his own
desires. He went to bed at his usual hour, and slept in
peace.

Villefort, after having received M. de Salvieux’ letter,
embraced Renee, kissed the marquise’s hand, and shaken that
of the marquis, started for Paris along the Aix road.

Old Dantes was dying with anxiety to know what had become of
Edmond. But we know very well what had become of Edmond.

 

We will leave Villefort on the road to Paris, travelling —
thanks to trebled fees — with all speed, and passing
through two or three apartments, enter at the Tuileries the
little room with the arched window, so well known as having
been the favorite closet of Napoleon and Louis XVIII., and
now of Louis Philippe.

There, seated before a walnut table he had brought with him
from Hartwell, and to which, from one of those fancies not
uncommon to great people, he was particularly attached, the
king, Louis XVIII., was carelessly listening to a man of
fifty or fifty-two years of age, with gray hair,
aristocratic bearing, and exceedingly gentlemanly attire,
and meanwhile making a marginal note in a volume of
Gryphius’s rather inaccurate, but much sought-after, edition
of Horace — a work which was much indebted to the sagacious
observations of the philosophical monarch.

“You say, sir” — said the king.

“That I am exceedingly disquieted, sire.”

“Really, have you had a vision of the seven fat kine and the
seven lean kine?”

“No, sire, for that would only betoken for us seven years of
plenty and seven years of scarcity; and with a king as full
of foresight as your majesty, scarcity is not a thing to be
feared.”

“Then of what other scourge are you afraid, my dear Blacas?”

“Sire, I have every reason to believe that a storm is
brewing in the south.”

“Well, my dear duke,” replied Louis XVIII., “I think you are
wrongly informed, and know positively that, on the contrary,
it is very fine weather in that direction.” Man of ability
as he was, Louis XVIII. liked a pleasant jest.

“Sire,” continued M. de Blacas, “if it only be to reassure a
faithful servant, will your majesty send into Languedoc,
Provence, and Dauphine, trusty men, who will bring you back
a faithful report as to the feeling in these three
provinces?”

“Caninus surdis,” replied the king, continuing the
annotations in his Horace.

“Sire,” replied the courtier, laughing, in order that he
might seem to comprehend the quotation, “your majesty may be
perfectly right in relying on the good feeling of France,
but I fear I am not altogether wrong in dreading some
desperate attempt.”

“By whom?”

“By Bonaparte, or, at least, by his adherents.”

“My dear Blacas,” said the king, “you with your alarms
prevent me from working.”

“And you, sire, prevent me from sleeping with your
security.”

“Wait, my dear sir, wait a moment; for I have such a
delightful note on the Pastor quum traheret — wait, and I
will listen to you afterwards.”

There was a brief pause, during which Louis XVIII. wrote, in
a hand as small as possible, another note on the margin of
his Horace, and then looking at the duke with the air of a
man who thinks he has an idea of his own, while he is only
commenting upon the idea of another, said, —

“Go on, my dear duke, go on — I listen.”

“Sire,” said Blacas, who had for a moment the hope of
sacrificing Villefort to his own profit, “I am compelled to
tell you that these are not mere rumors destitute of
foundation which thus disquiet me; but a serious-minded man,
deserving all my confidence, and charged by me to watch over
the south” (the duke hesitated as he pronounced these
words), “has arrived by post to tell me that a great peril
threatens the king, and so I hastened to you, sire.”

“Mala ducis avi domum,” continued Louis XVIII., still
annotating.

“Does your majesty wish me to drop the subject?”

“By no means, my dear duke; but just stretch out your hand.”

“Which?”

“Whichever you please — there to the left.”

“Here, sire?”

“I tell you to the left, and you are looking to the right; I
mean on my left — yes, there. You will find yesterday’s
report of the minister of police. But here is M. Dandre
himself;” and M. Dandre, announced by the
chamberlain-in-waiting, entered.

“Come in,” said Louis XVIII., with repressed smile, “come
in, Baron, and tell the duke all you know — the latest news
of M. de Bonaparte; do not conceal anything, however
serious, — let us see, the Island of Elba is a volcano, and
we may expect to have issuing thence flaming and bristling
war — bella, horrida bella.” M. Dandre leaned very
respectfully on the back of a chair with his two hands, and
said, —

“Has your majesty perused yesterday’s report?”

“Yes, yes; but tell the duke himself, who cannot find
anything, what the report contains — give him the
particulars of what the usurper is doing in his islet.”

“Monsieur,” said the baron to the duke, “all the servants of
his majesty must approve of the latest intelligence which we
have from the Island of Elba. Bonaparte” — M. Dandre looked
at Louis XVIII., who, employed in writing a note, did not
even raise his head. “Bonaparte,” continued the baron, “is
mortally wearied, and passes whole days in watching his
miners at work at Porto-Longone.”

“And scratches himself for amusement,” added the king.

“Scratches himself?” inquired the duke, “what does your
majesty mean?”

“Yes, indeed, my dear duke. Did you forget that this great
man, this hero, this demigod, is attacked with a malady of
the skin which worries him to death, prurigo?”

“And, moreover, my dear duke,” continued the minister of
police, “we are almost assured that, in a very short time,
the usurper will be insane.”

“Insane?”

“Raving mad; his head becomes weaker. Sometimes he weeps
bitterly, sometimes laughs boisterously, at other time he
passes hours on the seashore, flinging stones in the water
and when the flint makes `duck-and-drake’ five or six times,
he appears as delighted as if he had gained another Marengo
or Austerlitz. Now, you must agree that these are
indubitable symptoms of insanity.”

“Or of wisdom, my dear baron — or of wisdom,” said Louis
XVIII., laughing; “the greatest captains of antiquity amused
themselves by casting pebbles into the ocean — see
Plutarch’s life of Scipio Africanus.”

M. de Blacas pondered deeply between the confident monarch
and the truthful minister. Villefort, who did not choose to
reveal the whole secret, lest another should reap all the
benefit of the disclosure, had yet communicated enough to
cause him the greatest uneasiness.

“Well, well, Dandre,” said Louis XVIII., “Blacas is not yet
convinced; let us proceed, therefore, to the usurper’s
conversion.” The minister of police bowed.

“The usurper’s conversion!” murmured the duke, looking at
the king and Dandre, who spoke alternately, like Virgil’s
shepherds. “The usurper converted!”

“Decidedly, my dear duke.”

“In what way converted?”

“To good principles. Tell him all about it, baron.”

“Why, this is the way of it,” said the minister, with the
gravest air in the world: “Napoleon lately had a review, and
as two or three of his old veterans expressed a desire to
return to France, he gave them their dismissal, and exhorted
them to `serve the good king.’ These were his own words, of
that I am certain.”

“Well, Blacas, what think you of this?” inquired the king
triumphantly, and pausing for a moment from the voluminous
scholiast before him.

“I say, sire, that the minister of police is greatly
deceived or I am; and as it is impossible it can be the
minister of police as he has the guardianship of the safety
and honor of your majesty, it is probable that I am in
error. However, sire, if I might advise, your majesty will
interrogate the person of whom I spoke to you, and I will
urge your majesty to do him this honor.”

“Most willingly, duke; under your auspices I will receive
any person you please, but you must not expect me to be too
confiding. Baron, have you any report more recent than this
dated the 20th February. — this is the 4th of March?”

“No, sire, but I am hourly expecting one; it may have
arrived since I left my office.”

“Go thither, and if there be none — well, well,” continued
Louis XVIII., “make one; that is the usual way, is it not?”
and the king laughed facetiously.

“Oh, sire,” replied the minister, “we have no occasion to
invent any; every day our desks are loaded with most
circumstantial denunciations, coming from hosts of people
who hope for some return for services which they seek to
render, but cannot; they trust to fortune, and rely upon
some unexpected event in some way to justify their
predictions.”

“Well, sir, go”; said Louis XVIII., “and remember that I am
waiting for you.”

“I will but go and return, sire; I shall be back in ten
minutes.”

“And I, sire,” said M. de Blacas, “will go and find my
messenger.”

“Wait, sir, wait,” said Louis XVIII. “Really, M. de Blacas,
I must change your armorial bearings; I will give you an
eagle with outstretched wings, holding in its claws a prey
which tries in vain to escape, and bearing this device —
Tenax.”

“Sire, I listen,” said De Blacas, biting his nails with
impatience.

“I wish to consult you on this passage, `Molli fugiens
anhelitu,’ you know it refers to a stag flying from a wolf.
Are you not a sportsman and a great wolf-hunter? Well, then,
what do you think of the molli anhelitu?”

“Admirable, sire; but my messenger is like the stag you
refer to, for he has posted two hundred and twenty leagues
in scarcely three days.”

“Which is undergoing great fatigue and anxiety, my dear
duke, when we have a telegraph which transmits messages in
three or four hours, and that without getting in the least
out of breath.”

“Ah, sire, you recompense but badly this poor young man, who
has come so far, and with so much ardor, to give your
majesty useful information. If only for the sake of M. de
Salvieux, who recommends him to me, I entreat your majesty
to receive him graciously.”

“M. de Salvieux, my brother’s chamberlain?”

“Yes, sire.”

“He is at Marseilles.”

“And writes me thence.”

“Does he speak to you of this conspiracy?”

“No; but strongly recommends M. de Villefort, and begs me to
present him to your majesty.”

“M. de Villefort!” cried the king, “is the messenger’s name
M. de Villefort?”

“Yes, sire.”

“And he comes from Marseilles?”

“In person.”

“Why did you not mention his name at once?” replied the
king, betraying some uneasiness.

“Sire, I thought his name was unknown to your majesty.”

“No, no, Blacas; he is a man of strong and elevated
understanding, ambitious, too, and, pardieu, you know his
father’s name!”

“His father?”

“Yes, Noirtier.”

“Noirtier the Girondin? — Noirtier the senator?”

“He himself.”

“And your majesty has employed the son of such a man?”

“Blacas, my friend, you have but limited comprehension. I
told you Villefort was ambitious, and to attain this
ambition Villefort would sacrifice everything, even his
father.”

“Then, sire, may I present him?”

“This instant, duke! Where is he?”

“Waiting below, in my carriage.”

“Seek him at once.”

“I hasten to do so.” The duke left the royal presence with
the speed of a young man; his really sincere royalism made
him youthful again. Louis XVIII. remained alone, and turning
his eyes on his half-opened Horace, muttered, —

“Justum et tenacem propositi virum.”

M. de Blacas returned as speedily as he had departed, but in
the ante-chamber he was forced to appeal to the king’s
authority. Villefort’s dusty garb, his costume, which was
not of courtly cut, excited the susceptibility of M. de
Breze, who was all astonishment at finding that this young
man had the audacity to enter before the king in such
attire. The duke, however, overcame all difficulties with a
word — his majesty’s order; and, in spite of the
protestations which the master of ceremonies made for the
honor of his office and principles, Villefort was
introduced.

The king was seated in the same place where the duke had
left him. On opening the door, Villefort found himself
facing him, and the young magistrate’s first impulse was to
pause.

“Come in, M. de Villefort,” said the king, “come in.”
Villefort bowed, and advancing a few steps, waited until the
king should interrogate him.

“M. de Villefort,” said Louis XVIII., “the Duc de Blacas
assures me you have some interesting information to
communicate.”

“Sire, the duke is right, and I believe your majesty will
think it equally important.”

“In the first place, and before everything else, sir, is the
news as bad in your opinion as I am asked to believe?”

“Sire, I believe it to be most urgent, but I hope, by the
speed I have used, that it is not irreparable.”

“Speak as fully as you please, sir,” said the king, who
began to give way to the emotion which had showed itself in
Blacas’s face and affected Villefort’s voice. “Speak, sir,
and pray begin at the beginning; I like order in
everything.”

“Sire,” said Villefort, “I will render a faithful report to
your majesty, but I must entreat your forgiveness if my
anxiety leads to some obscurity in my language.” A glance at
the king after this discreet and subtle exordium, assured
Villefort of the benignity of his august auditor, and he
went on: —

“Sire, I have come as rapidly to Paris as possible, to
inform your majesty that I have discovered, in the exercise
of my duties, not a commonplace and insignificant plot, such
as is every day got up in the lower ranks of the people and
in the army, but an actual conspiracy — a storm which
menaces no less than your majesty’s throne. Sire, the
usurper is arming three ships, he meditates some project,
which, however mad, is yet, perhaps, terrible. At this
moment he will have left Elba, to go whither I know not, but
assuredly to attempt a landing either at Naples, or on the
coast of Tuscany, or perhaps on the shores of France. Your
majesty is well aware that the sovereign of the Island of
Elba has maintained his relations with Italy and France?”

“I am, sir,” said the king, much agitated; “and recently we
have had information that the Bonapartist clubs have had
meetings in the Rue Saint-Jacques. But proceed, I beg of
you. How did you obtain these details?”

“Sire, they are the results of an examination which I have
made of a man of Marseilles, whom I have watched for some
time, and arrested on the day of my departure. This person,
a sailor, of turbulent character, and whom I suspected of
Bonapartism, has been secretly to the Island of Elba. There
he saw the grand-marshal, who charged him with an oral
message to a Bonapartist in Paris, whose name I could not
extract from him; but this mission was to prepare men’s
minds for a return (it is the man who says this, sire) — a
return which will soon occur.”

“And where is this man?”

“In prison, sire.”

“And the matter seems serious to you?”

“So serious, sire, that when the circumstance surprised me
in the midst of a family festival, on the very day of my
betrothal, I left my bride and friends, postponing
everything, that I might hasten to lay at your majesty’s
feet the fears which impressed me, and the assurance of my
devotion.”

“True,” said Louis XVIII., “was there not a marriage
engagement between you and Mademoiselle de Saint-Meran?”

“Daughter of one of your majesty’s most faithful servants.”

“Yes, yes; but let us talk of this plot, M. de Villefort.”

“Sire, I fear it is more than a plot; I fear it is a
conspiracy.”

“A conspiracy in these times,” said Louis XVIII., smiling,
“is a thing very easy to meditate, but more difficult to
conduct to an end, inasmuch as, re-established so recently
on the throne of our ancestors, we have our eyes open at
once upon the past, the present, and the future. For the
last ten months my ministers have redoubled their vigilance,
in order to watch the shore of the Mediterranean. If
Bonaparte landed at Naples, the whole coalition would be on
foot before he could even reach Piomoino; if he land in
Tuscany, he will be in an unfriendly territory; if he land
in France, it must be with a handful of men, and the result
of that is easily foretold, execrated as he is by the
population. Take courage, sir; but at the same time rely on
our royal gratitude.”

“Ah, here is M. Dandre!” cried de Blacas. At this instant
the minister of police appeared at the door, pale,
trembling, and as if ready to faint. Villefort was about to
retire, but M. de Blacas, taking his hand, restrained him.

At the sight of this agitation Louis XVIII. pushed from him
violently the table at which he was sitting.

“What ails you, baron?” he exclaimed. “You appear quite
aghast. Has your uneasiness anything to do with what M. de
Blacas has told me, and M. de Villefort has just confirmed?”
M. de Blacas moved suddenly towards the baron, but the
fright of the courtier pleaded for the forbearance of the
statesman; and besides, as matters were, it was much more to
his advantage that the prefect of police should triumph over
him than that he should humiliate the prefect.

“Sire” — stammered the baron.

“Well, what is it?” asked Louis XVIII. The minister of
police, giving way to an impulse of despair, was about to
throw himself at the feet of Louis XVIII., who retreated a
step and frowned.

“Will you speak?” he said.

“Oh, sire, what a dreadful misfortune! I am, indeed, to be
pitied. I can never forgive myself!”

“Monsieur,” said Louis XVIII., “I command you to speak.”

“Well, sire, the usurper left Elba on the 26th February, and
landed on the 1st of March.”

“And where? In Italy?” asked the king eagerly.

“In France, sire, — at a small port, near Antibes, in the
Gulf of Juan.”

“The usurper landed in France, near Antibes, in the Gulf of
Juan, two hundred and fifty leagues from Paris, on the 1st
of March, and you only acquired this information to-day, the
4th of March! Well, sir, what you tell me is impossible. You
must have received a false report, or you have gone mad.”

“Alas, sire, it is but too true!” Louis made a gesture of
indescribable anger and alarm, and then drew himself up as
if this sudden blow had struck him at the same moment in
heart and countenance.

“In France!” he cried, “the usurper in France! Then they did
not watch over this man. Who knows? they were, perhaps, in
league with him.”

“Oh, sire,” exclaimed the Duc de Blacas, “M. Dandre is not a
man to be accused of treason! Sire, we have all been blind,
and the minister of police has shared the general blindness,
that is all.”

“But” — said Villefort, and then suddenly checking himself,
he was silent; then he continued, “Your pardon, sire,” he
said, bowing, “my zeal carried me away. Will your majesty
deign to excuse me?”

“Speak, sir, speak boldly,” replied Louis. “You alone
forewarned us of the evil; now try and aid us with the
remedy.”

“Sire,” said Villefort, “the usurper is detested in the
south; and it seems to me that if he ventured into the
south, it would be easy to raise Languedoc and Provence
against him.”

“Yes, assuredly,” replied the minister; “but he is advancing
by Gap and Sisteron.”

“Advancing — he is advancing!” said Louis XVIII. “Is he
then advancing on Paris?” The minister of police maintained
a silence which was equivalent to a complete avowal.

“And Dauphine, sir?” inquired the king, of Villefort. “Do
you think it possible to rouse that as well as Provence?”

“Sire, I am sorry to tell your majesty a cruel fact; but the
feeling in Dauphine is quite the reverse of that in Provence
or Languedoc. The mountaineers are Bonapartists, sire.”

“Then,” murmured Louis, “he was well informed. And how many
men had he with him?”

“I do not know, sire,” answered the minister of police.

“What, you do not know! Have you neglected to obtain
information on that point? Of course it is of no
consequence,” he added, with a withering smile.

“Sire, it was impossible to learn; the despatch simply
stated the fact of the landing and the route taken by the
usurper.”

“And how did this despatch reach you?” inquired the king.
The minister bowed his head, and while a deep color
overspread his cheeks, he stammered out, —

“By the telegraph, sire.” — Louis XVIII. advanced a step,
and folded his arms over his chest as Napoleon would have
done.

“So then,” he exclaimed, turning pale with anger, “seven
conjoined and allied armies overthrew that man. A miracle of
heaven replaced me on the throne of my fathers after
five-and-twenty years of exile. I have, during those
five-and-twenty years, spared no pains to understand the
people of France and the interests which were confided to
me; and now, when I see the fruition of my wishes almost
within reach, the power I hold in my hands bursts, and
shatters me to atoms!”

“Sire, it is fatality!” murmured the minister, feeling that
the pressure of circumstances, however light a thing to
destiny, was too much for any human strength to endure.

“What our enemies say of us is then true. We have learnt
nothing, forgotten nothing! If I were betrayed as he was, I
would console myself; but to be in the midst of persons
elevated by myself to places of honor, who ought to watch
over me more carefully than over themselves, — for my
fortune is theirs — before me they were nothing — after me
they will be nothing, and perish miserably from incapacity
— ineptitude! Oh, yes, sir, you are right — it is
fatality!”

The minister quailed before this outburst of sarcasm. M. de
Blacas wiped the moisture from his brow. Villefort smiled
within himself, for he felt his increased importance.

“To fall,” continued King Louis, who at the first glance had
sounded the abyss on which the monarchy hung suspended, —
“to fall, and learn of that fall by telegraph! Oh, I would
rather mount the scaffold of my brother, Louis XVI., than
thus descend the staircase at the Tuileries driven away by
ridicule. Ridicule, sir — why, you know not its power in
France, and yet you ought to know it!”

“Sire, sire,” murmured the minister, “for pity’s” —

“Approach, M. de Villefort,” resumed the king, addressing
the young man, who, motionless and breathless, was listening
to a conversation on which depended the destiny of a
kingdom. “Approach, and tell monsieur that it is possible to
know beforehand all that he has not known.”

“Sire, it was really impossible to learn secrets which that
man concealed from all the world.”

“Really impossible! Yes — that is a great word, sir.
Unfortunately, there are great words, as there are great
men; I have measured them. Really impossible for a minister
who has an office, agents, spies, and fifteen hundred
thousand francs for secret service money, to know what is
going on at sixty leagues from the coast of France! Well,
then, see, here is a gentleman who had none of these
resources at his disposal — a gentleman, only a simple
magistrate, who learned more than you with all your police,
and who would have saved my crown, if, like you, he had the
power of directing a telegraph.” The look of the minister of
police was turned with concentrated spite on Villefort, who
bent his head in modest triumph.

“I do not mean that for you, Blacas,” continued Louis
XVIII.; “for if you have discovered nothing, at least you
have had the good sense to persevere in your suspicions. Any
other than yourself would have considered the disclosure of
M. de Villefort insignificant, or else dictated by venal
ambition,” These words were an allusion to the sentiments
which the minister of police had uttered with so much
confidence an hour before.

Villefort understood the king’s intent. Any other person
would, perhaps, have been overcome by such an intoxicating
draught of praise; but he feared to make for himself a
mortal enemy of the police minister, although he saw that
Dandre was irrevocably lost. In fact, the minister, who, in
the plenitude of his power, had been unable to unearth
Napoleon’s secret, might in despair at his own downfall
interrogate Dantes and so lay bare the motives of
Villefort’s plot. Realizing this, Villefort came to the
rescue of the crest-fallen minister, instead of aiding to
crush him.

“Sire,” said Villefort, “the suddenness of this event must
prove to your majesty that the issue is in the hands of
Providence; what your majesty is pleased to attribute to me
as profound perspicacity is simply owing to chance, and I
have profited by that chance, like a good and devoted
servant — that’s all. Do not attribute to me more than I
deserve, sire, that your majesty may never have occasion to
recall the first opinion you have been pleased to form of
me.” The minister of police thanked the young man by an
eloquent look, and Villefort understood that he had
succeeded in his design; that is to say, that without
forfeiting the gratitude of the king, he had made a friend
of one on whom, in case of necessity, he might rely.

“‘Tis well,” resumed the king. “And now, gentlemen,” he
continued, turning towards M. de Blacas and the minister of
police, “I have no further occasion for you, and you may
retire; what now remains to do is in the department of the
minister of war.”

“Fortunately, sire,” said M. de Blacas, “we can rely on the
army; your majesty knows how every report confirms their
loyalty and attachment.”

“Do not mention reports, duke, to me, for I know now what
confidence to place in them. Yet, speaking of reports,
baron, what have you learned with regard to the affair in
the Rue Saint-Jacques?”

“The affair in the Rue Saint-Jacques!” exclaimed Villefort,
unable to repress an exclamation. Then, suddenly pausing, he
added, “Your pardon, sire, but my devotion to your majesty
has made me forget, not the respect I have, for that is too
deeply engraved in my heart, but the rules of etiquette.”

“Go on, go on, sir,” replied the king; “you have to-day
earned the right to make inquiries here.”

“Sire,” interposed the minister of police, “I came a moment
ago to give your majesty fresh information which I had
obtained on this head, when your majesty’s attention was
attracted by the terrible event that has occurred in the
gulf, and now these facts will cease to interest your
majesty.”

“On the contrary, sir, — on the contrary,” said Louis
XVIII., “this affair seems to me to have a decided
connection with that which occupies our attention, and the
death of General Quesnel will, perhaps, put us on the direct
track of a great internal conspiracy.” At the name of
General Quesnel, Villefort trembled.

“Everything points to the conclusion, sire,” said the
minister of police, “that death was not the result of
suicide, as we first believed, but of assassination. General
Quesnel, it appears, had just left a Bonapartist club when
he disappeared. An unknown person had been with him that
morning, and made an appointment with him in the Rue
Saint-Jacques; unfortunately, the general’s valet, who was
dressing his hair at the moment when the stranger entered,
heard the street mentioned, but did not catch the number.”
As the police minister related this to the king, Villefort,
who looked as if his very life hung on the speaker’s lips,
turned alternately red and pale. The king looked towards
him.

“Do you not think with me, M. de Villefort, that General
Quesnel, whom they believed attached to the usurper, but who
was really entirely devoted to me, has perished the victim
of a Bonapartist ambush?”

“It is probable, sire,” replied Villefort. “But is this all
that is known?”

“They are on the track of the man who appointed the meeting
with him.”

“On his track?” said Villefort.

“Yes, the servant has given his description. He is a man of
from fifty to fifty-two years of age, dark, with black eyes
covered with shaggy eyebrows, and a thick mustache. He was
dressed in a blue frock-coat, buttoned up to the chin, and
wore at his button-hole the rosette of an officer of the
Legion of Honor. Yesterday a person exactly corresponding
with this description was followed, but he was lost sight of
at the corner of the Rue de la Jussienne and the Rue
Coq-Heron.” Villefort leaned on the back of an arm-chair,
for as the minister of police went on speaking he felt his
legs bend under him; but when he learned that the unknown
had escaped the vigilance of the agent who followed him, he
breathed again.

“Continue to seek for this man, sir,” said the king to the
minister of police; “for if, as I am all but convinced,
General Quesnel, who would have been so useful to us at this
moment, has been murdered, his assassins, Bonapartists or
not, shall be cruelly punished.” It required all Villefort’s
coolness not to betray the terror with which this
declaration of the king inspired him.

“How strange,” continued the king, with some asperity; “the
police think that they have disposed of the whole matter
when they say, `A murder has been committed,’ and especially
so when they can add, `And we are on the track of the guilty
persons.'”

“Sire, your majesty will, I trust, be amply satisfied on
this point at least.”

“We shall see. I will no longer detain you, M. de Villefort,
for you must be fatigued after so long a journey; go and
rest. Of course you stopped at your father’s?” A feeling of
faintness came over Villefort.

“No, sire,” he replied, “I alighted at the Hotel de Madrid,
in the Rue de Tournon.”

“But you have seen him?”

“Sire, I went straight to the Duc de Blacas.”

“But you will see him, then?”

“I think not, sire.”

“Ah, I forgot,” said Louis, smiling in a manner which proved
that all these questions were not made without a motive; “I
forgot you and M. Noirtier are not on the best terms
possible, and that is another sacrifice made to the royal
cause, and for which you should be recompensed.”

“Sire, the kindness your majesty deigns to evince towards me
is a recompense which so far surpasses my utmost ambition
that I have nothing more to ask for.”

“Never mind, sir, we will not forget you; make your mind
easy. In the meanwhile” (the king here detached the cross of
the Legion of Honor which he usually wore over his blue
coat, near the cross of St. Louis, above the order of
Notre-Dame-du-Mont-Carmel and St. Lazare, and gave it to
Villefort) — “in the meanwhile take this cross.”

“Sire,” said Villefort, “your majesty mistakes; this is an
officer’s cross.”

“Ma foi,” said Louis XVIII., “take it, such as it is, for I
have not the time to procure you another. Blacas, let it be
your care to see that the brevet is made out and sent to M.
de Villefort.” Villefort’s eyes were filled with tears of
joy and pride; he took the cross and kissed it.

“And now,” he said, “may I inquire what are the orders with
which your majesty deigns to honor me?”

“Take what rest you require, and remember that if you are
not able to serve me here in Paris, you may be of the
greatest service to me at Marseilles.”

“Sire,” replied Villefort, bowing, “in an hour I shall have
quitted Paris.”

“Go, sir,” said the king; “and should I forget you (kings’
memories are short), do not be afraid to bring yourself to
my recollection. Baron, send for the minister of war.
Blacas, remain.”

“Ah, sir,” said the minister of police to Villefort, as they
left the Tuileries, “you entered by luck’s door — your
fortune is made.”

“Will it be long first?” muttered Villefort, saluting the
minister, whose career was ended, and looking about him for
a hackney-coach. One passed at the moment, which he hailed;
he gave his address to the driver, and springing in, threw
himself on the seat, and gave loose to dreams of ambition.

Ten minutes afterwards Villefort reached his hotel, ordered
horses to be ready in two hours, and asked to have his
breakfast brought to him. He was about to begin his repast
when the sound of the bell rang sharp and loud. The valet
opened the door, and Villefort heard some one speak his
name.

“Who could know that I was here already?” said the young
man. The valet entered.

“Well,” said Villefort, “what is it? — Who rang? — Who
asked for me?”

“A stranger who will not send in his name.”

“A stranger who will not send in his name! What can he want
with me?”

“He wishes to speak to you.”

“To me?”

“Yes.”

“Did he mention my name?”

“Yes.”

“What sort of person is he?”

“Why, sir, a man of about fifty.”

“Short or tall?”

“About your own height, sir.”

“Dark or fair?”

“Dark, — very dark; with black eyes, black hair, black
eyebrows.”

“And how dressed?” asked Villefort quickly.

“In a blue frock-coat, buttoned up close, decorated with the
Legion of Honor.”

“It is he!” said Villefort, turning pale.

“Eh, pardieu,” said the individual whose description we have
twice given, entering the door, “what a great deal of
ceremony! Is it the custom in Marseilles for sons to keep
their fathers waiting in their anterooms?”

“Father!” cried Villefort, “then I was not deceived; I felt
sure it must be you.”

“Well, then, if you felt so sure,” replied the new-comer,
putting his cane in a corner and his hat on a chair, “allow
me to say, my dear Gerard, that it was not very filial of
you to keep me waiting at the door.”

“Leave us, Germain,” said Villefort. The servant quitted the
apartment with evident signs of astonishment.

M. Noirtier — for it was, indeed, he who entered — looked
after the servant until the door was closed, and then,
fearing, no doubt, that he might be overheard in the
ante-chamber, he opened the door again, nor was the
precaution useless, as appeared from the rapid retreat of
Germain, who proved that he was not exempt from the sin
which ruined our first parents. M. Noirtier then took the
trouble to close and bolt the ante-chamber door, then that
of the bed-chamber, and then extended his hand to Villefort,
who had followed all his motions with surprise which he
could not conceal.

“Well, now, my dear Gerard,” said he to the young man, with
a very significant look, “do you know, you seem as if you
were not very glad to see me?”

“My dear father,” said Villefort, “I am, on the contrary,
delighted; but I so little expected your visit, that it has
somewhat overcome me.”

“But, my dear fellow,” replied M. Noirtier, seating himself,
“I might say the same thing to you, when you announce to me
your wedding for the 28th of February, and on the 3rd of
March you turn up here in Paris.”

“And if I have come, my dear father,” said Gerard, drawing
closer to M. Noirtier, “do not complain, for it is for you
that I came, and my journey will be your salvation.”

“Ah, indeed!” said M. Noirtier, stretching himself out at
his ease in the chair. “Really, pray tell me all about it,
for it must be interesting.”

“Father, you have heard speak of a certain Bonapartist club
in the Rue Saint-Jacques?”

“No. 53; yes, I am vice-president.”

“Father, your coolness makes me shudder.”

“Why, my dear boy, when a man has been proscribed by the
mountaineers, has escaped from Paris in a hay-cart, been
hunted over the plains of Bordeaux by Robespierre’s
bloodhounds, he becomes accustomed to most things. But go
on, what about the club in the Rue Saint-Jacques?”

“Why, they induced General Quesnel to go there, and General
Quesnel, who quitted his own house at nine o’clock in the
evening, was found the next day in the Seine.”

“And who told you this fine story?”

“The king himself.”

“Well, then, in return for your story,” continued Noirtier,
“I will tell you another.”

“My dear father, I think I already know what you are about
to tell me.”

“Ah, you have heard of the landing of the emperor?”

“Not so loud, father, I entreat of you — for your own sake
as well as mine. Yes, I heard this news, and knew it even
before you could; for three days ago I posted from
Marseilles to Paris with all possible speed, half-desperate
at the enforced delay.”

“Three days ago? You are crazy. Why, three days ago the
emperor had not landed.”

“No matter, I was aware of his intention.”

“How did you know about it?”

“By a letter addressed to you from the Island of Elba.”

“To me?”

“To you; and which I discovered in the pocket-book of the
messenger. Had that letter fallen into the hands of another,
you, my dear father, would probably ere this have been
shot.” Villefort’s father laughed.

“Come, come,” said he, “will the Restoration adopt imperial
methods so promptly? Shot, my dear boy? What an idea! Where
is the letter you speak of? I know you too well to suppose
you would allow such a thing to pass you.”

“I burnt it, for fear that even a fragment should remain;
for that letter must have led to your condemnation.”

“And the destruction of your future prospects,” replied
Noirtier; “yes, I can easily comprehend that. But I have
nothing to fear while I have you to protect me.”

“I do better than that, sir — I save you.”

“You do? Why, really, the thing becomes more and more
dramatic — explain yourself.”

“I must refer again to the club in the Rue Saint-Jacques.”

“It appears that this club is rather a bore to the police.
Why didn’t they search more vigilantly? they would have
found” —

“They have not found; but they are on the track.”

“Yes, that the usual phrase; I am quite familiar with it.
When the police is at fault, it declares that it is on the
track; and the government patiently awaits the day when it
comes to say, with a sneaking air, that the track is lost.”

“Yes, but they have found a corpse; the general has been
killed, and in all countries they call that a murder.”

“A murder do you call it? why, there is nothing to prove
that the general was murdered. People are found every day in
the Seine, having thrown themselves in, or having been
drowned from not knowing how to swim.”

“Father, you know very well that the general was not a man
to drown himself in despair, and people do not bathe in the
Seine in the month of January. No, no, do not be deceived;
this was murder in every sense of the word.”

“And who thus designated it?”

“The king himself.”

“The king! I thought he was philosopher enough to allow that
there was no murder in politics. In politics, my dear
fellow, you know, as well as I do, there are no men, but
ideas — no feelings, but interests; in politics we do not
kill a man, we only remove an obstacle, that is all. Would
you like to know how matters have progressed? Well, I will
tell you. It was thought reliance might be placed in General
Quesnel; he was recommended to us from the Island of Elba;
one of us went to him, and invited him to the Rue
Saint-Jacques, where he would find some friends. He came
there, and the plan was unfolded to him for leaving Elba,
the projected landing, etc. When he had heard and
comprehended all to the fullest extent, he replied that he
was a royalist. Then all looked at each other, — he was
made to take an oath, and did so, but with such an ill grace
that it was really tempting Providence to swear him, and
yet, in spite of that, the general was allowed to depart
free — perfectly free. Yet he did not return home. What
could that mean? why, my dear fellow, that on leaving us he
lost his way, that’s all. A murder? really, Villefort, you
surprise me. You, a deputy procureur, to found an accusation
on such bad premises! Did I ever say to you, when you were
fulfilling your character as a royalist, and cut off the
head of one of my party, `My son, you have committed a
murder?’ No, I said, `Very well, sir, you have gained the
victory; to-morrow, perchance, it will be our turn.'”

“But, father, take care; when our turn comes, our revenge
will be sweeping.”

“I do not understand you.”

“You rely on the usurper’s return?”

“We do.”

“You are mistaken; he will not advance two leagues into the
interior of France without being followed, tracked, and
caught like a wild beast.”

“My dear fellow, the emperor is at this moment on the way to
Grenoble; on the 10th or 12th he will be at Lyons, and on
the 20th or 25th at Paris.”

“The people will rise.”

“Yes, to go and meet him.”

“He has but a handful of men with him, and armies will be
despatched against him.”

“Yes, to escort him into the capital. Really, my dear
Gerard, you are but a child; you think yourself well
informed because the telegraph has told you, three days
after the landing, `The usurper has landed at Cannes with
several men. He is pursued.’ But where is he? what is he
doing? You do not know at all, and in this way they will
chase him to Paris, without drawing a trigger.”

“Grenoble and Lyons are faithful cities, and will oppose to
him an impassable barrier.”

“Grenoble will open her gates to him with enthusiasm — all
Lyons will hasten to welcome him. Believe me, we are as well
informed as you, and our police are as good as your own.
Would you like a proof of it? well, you wished to conceal
your journey from me, and yet I knew of your arrival half an
hour after you had passed the barrier. You gave your
direction to no one but your postilion, yet I have your
address, and in proof I am here the very instant you are
going to sit at table. Ring, then, if you please, for a
second knife, fork, and plate, and we will dine together.”

“Indeed!” replied Villefort, looking at his father with
astonishment, “you really do seem very well informed.”

“Eh? the thing is simple enough. You who are in power have
only the means that money produces — we who are in
expectation, have those which devotion prompts.”

“Devotion!” said Villefort, with a sneer.

“Yes, devotion; for that is, I believe, the phrase for
hopeful ambition.”

And Villefort’s father extended his hand to the bell-rope,
to summon the servant whom his son had not called. Villefort
caught his arm.

“Wait, my dear father,” said the young man, “one word more.”

“Say on.”

“However stupid the royalist police may be, they do know one
terrible thing.”

“What is that?”

“The description of the man who, on the morning of the day
when General Quesnel disappeared, presented himself at his
house.”

“Oh, the admirable police have found that out, have they?
And what may be that description?”

“Dark complexion; hair, eyebrows, and whiskers, black; blue
frock-coat, buttoned up to the chin; rosette of an officer
of the Legion of Honor in his button-hole; a hat with wide
brim, and a cane.”

“Ah, ha, that’s it, is it?” said Noirtier; “and why, then,
have they not laid hands on him?”

“Because yesterday, or the day before, they lost sight of
him at the corner of the Rue Coq-Heron.”

“Didn’t I say that your police were good for nothing?”

“Yes; but they may catch him yet.”

“True,” said Noirtier, looking carelessly around him, “true,
if this person were not on his guard, as he is;” and he
added with a smile, “He will consequently make a few changes
in his personal appearance.” At these words he rose, and put
off his frock-coat and cravat, went towards a table on which
lay his son’s toilet articles, lathered his face, took a
razor, and, with a firm hand, cut off the compromising
whiskers. Villefort watched him with alarm not devoid of
admiration.

His whiskers cut off, Noirtier gave another turn to his
hair; took, instead of his black cravat, a colored
neckerchief which lay at the top of an open portmanteau; put
on, in lieu of his blue and high-buttoned frock-coat, a coat
of Villefort’s of dark brown, and cut away in front; tried
on before the glass a narrow-brimmed hat of his son’s, which
appeared to fit him perfectly, and, leaving his cane in the
corner where he had deposited it, he took up a small bamboo
switch, cut the air with it once or twice, and walked about
with that easy swagger which was one of his principal
characteristics.

“Well,” he said, turning towards his wondering son, when
this disguise was completed, “well, do you think your police
will recognize me now.”

“No, father,” stammered Villefort; “at least, I hope not.”

“And now, my dear boy,” continued Noirtier, “I rely on your
prudence to remove all the things which I leave in your
care.”

“Oh, rely on me,” said Villefort.

“Yes, yes; and now I believe you are right, and that you
have really saved my life; be assured I will return the
favor hereafter.” Villefort shook his head.

“You are not convinced yet?”

“I hope at least, that you may be mistaken.”

“Shall you see the king again?”

“Perhaps.”

“Would you pass in his eyes for a prophet?”

“Prophets of evil are not in favor at the court, father.”

“True, but some day they do them justice; and supposing a
second restoration, you would then pass for a great man.”

“Well, what should I say to the king?”

“Say this to him: `Sire, you are deceived as to the feeling
in France, as to the opinions of the towns, and the
prejudices of the army; he whom in Paris you call the
Corsican ogre, who at Nevers is styled the usurper, is
already saluted as Bonaparte at Lyons, and emperor at
Grenoble. You think he is tracked, pursued, captured; he is
advancing as rapidly as his own eagles. The soldiers you
believe to be dying with hunger, worn out with fatigue,
ready to desert, gather like atoms of snow about the rolling
ball as it hastens onward. Sire, go, leave France to its
real master, to him who acquired it, not by purchase, but by
right of conquest; go, sire, not that you incur any risk,
for your adversary is powerful enough to show you mercy, but
because it would be humiliating for a grandson of Saint
Louis to owe his life to the man of Arcola, Marengo,
Austerlitz.’ Tell him this, Gerard; or, rather, tell him
nothing. Keep your journey a secret; do not boast of what
you have come to Paris to do, or have done; return with all
speed; enter Marseilles at night, and your house by the
back-door, and there remain, quiet, submissive, secret, and,
above all, inoffensive; for this time, I swear to you, we
shall act like powerful men who know their enemies. Go, my
son — go, my dear Gerard, and by your obedience to my
paternal orders, or, if you prefer it, friendly counsels, we
will keep you in your place. This will be,” added Noirtier,
with a smile, “one means by which you may a second time save
me, if the political balance should some day take another
turn, and cast you aloft while hurling me down. Adieu, my
dear Gerard, and at your next journey alight at my door.”
Noirtier left the room when he had finished, with the same
calmness that had characterized him during the whole of this
remarkable and trying conversation. Villefort, pale and
agitated, ran to the window, put aside the curtain, and saw
him pass, cool and collected, by two or three ill-looking
men at the corner of the street, who were there, perhaps, to
arrest a man with black whiskers, and a blue frock-coat, and
hat with broad brim.

Villefort stood watching, breathless, until his father had
disappeared at the Rue Bussy. Then he turned to the various
articles he had left behind him, put the black cravat and
blue frock-coat at the bottom of the portmanteau, threw the
hat into a dark closet, broke the cane into small bits and
flung it in the fire, put on his travelling-cap, and calling
his valet, checked with a look the thousand questions he was
ready to ask, paid his bill, sprang into his carriage, which
was ready, learned at Lyons that Bonaparte had entered
Grenoble, and in the midst of the tumult which prevailed
along the road, at length reached Marseilles, a prey to all
the hopes and fears which enter into the heart of man with
ambition and its first successes.

 

M. Noirtier was a true prophet, and things progressed
rapidly, as he had predicted. Every one knows the history of
the famous return from Elba, a return which was
unprecedented in the past, and will probably remain without
a counterpart in the future.

Louis XVIII. made but a faint attempt to parry this
unexpected blow; the monarchy he had scarcely reconstructed
tottered on its precarious foundation, and at a sign from
the emperor the incongruous structure of ancient prejudices
and new ideas fell to the ground. Villefort, therefore,
gained nothing save the king’s gratitude (which was rather
likely to injure him at the present time) and the cross of
the Legion of Honor, which he had the prudence not to wear,
although M. de Blacas had duly forwarded the brevet.

Napoleon would, doubtless, have deprived Villefort of his
office had it not been for Noirtier, who was all powerful at
court, and thus the Girondin of ’93 and the Senator of 1806
protected him who so lately had been his protector. All
Villefort’s influence barely enabled him to stifle the
secret Dantes had so nearly divulged. The king’s procureur
alone was deprived of his office, being suspected of
royalism.

However, scarcely was the imperial power established — that
is, scarcely had the emperor re-entered the Tuileries and
begun to issue orders from the closet into which we have
introduced our readers, — he found on the table there Louis
XVIII.’s half-filled snuff-box, — scarcely had this
occurred when Marseilles began, in spite of the authorities,
to rekindle the flames of civil war, always smouldering in
the south, and it required but little to excite the populace
to acts of far greater violence than the shouts and insults
with which they assailed the royalists whenever they
ventured abroad.

Owing to this change, the worthy shipowner became at that
moment — we will not say all powerful, because Morrel was a
prudent and rather a timid man, so much so, that many of the
most zealous partisans of Bonaparte accused him of
“moderation” — but sufficiently influential to make a
demand in favor of Dantes.

Villefort retained his place, but his marriage was put off
until a more favorable opportunity. If the emperor remained
on the throne, Gerard required a different alliance to aid
his career; if Louis XVIII. returned, the influence of M. de
Saint-Meran, like his own, could be vastly increased, and
the marriage be still more suitable. The deputy-procureur
was, therefore, the first magistrate of Marseilles, when one
morning his door opened, and M. Morrel was announced.

Any one else would have hastened to receive him; but
Villefort was a man of ability, and he knew this would be a
sign of weakness. He made Morrel wait in the ante-chamber,
although he had no one with him, for the simple reason that
the king’s procureur always makes every one wait, and after
passing a quarter of an hour in reading the papers, he
ordered M. Morrel to be admitted.

Morrel expected Villefort would be dejected; he found him as
he had found him six weeks before, calm, firm, and full of
that glacial politeness, that most insurmountable barrier
which separates the well-bred from the vulgar man.

He had entered Villefort’s office expecting that the
magistrate would tremble at the sight of him; on the
contrary, he felt a cold shudder all over him when he saw
Villefort sitting there with his elbow on his desk, and his
head leaning on his hand. He stopped at the door; Villefort
gazed at him as if he had some difficulty in recognizing
him; then, after a brief interval, during which the honest
shipowner turned his hat in his hands, —

“M. Morrel, I believe?” said Villefort.

“Yes, sir.”

“Come nearer,” said the magistrate, with a patronizing wave
of the hand, “and tell me to what circumstance I owe the
honor of this visit.”

“Do you not guess, monsieur?” asked Morrel.

“Not in the least; but if I can serve you in any way I shall
be delighted.”

“Everything depends on you.”

“Explain yourself, pray.”

“Monsieur,” said Morrel, recovering his assurance as he
proceeded, “do you recollect that a few days before the
landing of his majesty the emperor, I came to intercede for
a young man, the mate of my ship, who was accused of being
concerned in correspondence with the Island of Elba? What
was the other day a crime is to-day a title to favor. You
then served Louis XVIII., and you did not show any favor —
it was your duty; to-day you serve Napoleon, and you ought
to protect him — it is equally your duty; I come,
therefore, to ask what has become of him?”

Villefort by a strong effort sought to control himself.
“What is his name?” said he. “Tell me his name.”

“Edmond Dantes.”

Villefort would probably have rather stood opposite the
muzzle of a pistol at five-and-twenty paces than have heard
this name spoken; but he did not blanch.

“Dantes,” repeated he, “Edmond Dantes.”

“Yes, monsieur.” Villefort opened a large register, then
went to a table, from the table turned to his registers, and
then, turning to Morrel, —

“Are you quite sure you are not mistaken, monsieur?” said
he, in the most natural tone in the world.

Had Morrel been a more quick-sighted man, or better versed
in these matters, he would have been surprised at the king’s
procureur answering him on such a subject, instead of
referring him to the governors of the prison or the prefect
of the department. But Morrel, disappointed in his
expectations of exciting fear, was conscious only of the
other’s condescension. Villefort had calculated rightly.

“No,” said Morrel; “I am not mistaken. I have known him for
ten years, the last four of which he was in my service. Do
not you recollect, I came about six weeks ago to plead for
clemency, as I come to-day to plead for justice. You
received me very coldly. Oh, the royalists were very severe
with the Bonapartists in those days.”

“Monsieur,” returned Villefort, “I was then a royalist,
because I believed the Bourbons not only the heirs to the
throne, but the chosen of the nation. The miraculous return
of Napoleon has conquered me, the legitimate monarch is he
who is loved by his people.”

“That’s right!” cried Morrel. “I like to hear you speak
thus, and I augur well for Edmond from it.”

“Wait a moment,” said Villefort, turning over the leaves of
a register; “I have it — a sailor, who was about to marry a
young Catalan girl. I recollect now; it was a very serious
charge.”

“How so?”

“You know that when he left here he was taken to the Palais
de Justice.”

“Well?”

“I made my report to the authorities at Paris, and a week
after he was carried off.”

“Carried off!” said Morrel. “What can they have done with
him?”

“Oh, he has been taken to Fenestrelles, to Pignerol, or to
the Sainte-Marguerite islands. Some fine morning he will
return to take command of your vessel.”

“Come when he will, it shall be kept for him. But how is it
he is not already returned? It seems to me the first care of
government should be to set at liberty those who have
suffered for their adherence to it.”

“Do not be too hasty, M. Morrel,” replied Villefort. “The
order of imprisonment came from high authority, and the
order for his liberation must proceed from the same source;
and, as Napoleon has scarcely been reinstated a fortnight,
the letters have not yet been forwarded.”

“But,” said Morrel, “is there no way of expediting all these
formalities — of releasing him from arrest?”

“There has been no arrest.”

“How?”

“It is sometimes essential to government to cause a man’s
disappearance without leaving any traces, so that no written
forms or documents may defeat their wishes.”

“It might be so under the Bourbons, but at present” —

“It has always been so, my dear Morrel, since the reign of
Louis XIV. The emperor is more strict in prison discipline
than even Louis himself, and the number of prisoners whose
names are not on the register is incalculable.” Had Morrel
even any suspicions, so much kindness would have dispelled
them.

“Well, M. de Villefort, how would you advise me to act?”
asked he.

“Petition the minister.”

“Oh, I know what that is; the minister receives two hundred
petitions every day, and does not read three.”

“That is true; but he will read a petition countersigned and
presented by me.”

“And will you undertake to deliver it?”

“With the greatest pleasure. Dantes was then guilty, and now
he is innocent, and it is as much my duty to free him as it
was to condemn him.” Villefort thus forestalled any danger
of an inquiry, which, however improbable it might be, if it
did take place would leave him defenceless.

“But how shall I address the minister?”

“Sit down there,” said Villefort, giving up his place to
Morrel, “and write what I dictate.”

“Will you be so good?”

“Certainly. But lose no time; we have lost too much
already.”

“That is true. Only think what the poor fellow may even now
be suffering.” Villefort shuddered at the suggestion; but he
had gone too far to draw back. Dantes must be crushed to
gratify Villefort’s ambition.

Villefort dictated a petition, in which, from an excellent
intention, no doubt, Dantes’ patriotic services were
exaggerated, and he was made out one of the most active
agents of Napoleon’s return. It was evident that at the
sight of this document the minister would instantly release
him. The petition finished, Villefort read it aloud.

“That will do,” said he; “leave the rest to me.”

“Will the petition go soon?”

“To-day.”

“Countersigned by you?”

“The best thing I can do will be to certify the truth of the
contents of your petition.” And, sitting down, Villefort
wrote the certificate at the bottom.

“What more is to be done?”

“I will do whatever is necessary.” This assurance delighted
Morrel, who took leave of Villefort, and hastened to
announce to old Dantes that he would soon see his son.

As for Villefort, instead of sending to Paris, he carefully
preserved the petition that so fearfully compromised Dantes,
in the hopes of an event that seemed not unlikely, — that
is, a second restoration. Dantes remained a prisoner, and
heard not the noise of the fall of Louis XVIII.’s throne, or
the still more tragic destruction of the empire.

Twice during the Hundred Days had Morrel renewed his demand,
and twice had Villefort soothed him with promises. At last
there was Waterloo, and Morrel came no more; he had done all
that was in his power, and any fresh attempt would only
compromise himself uselessly.

Louis XVIII. remounted the throne; Villefort, to whom
Marseilles had become filled with remorseful memories,
sought and obtained the situation of king’s procureur at
Toulouse, and a fortnight afterwards he married Mademoiselle
de Saint-Meran, whose father now stood higher at court than
ever.

And so Dantes, after the Hundred Days and after Waterloo,
remained in his dungeon, forgotten of earth and heaven.
Danglars comprehended the full extent of the wretched fate
that overwhelmed Dantes; and, when Napoleon returned to
France, he, after the manner of mediocre minds, termed the
coincidence, “a decree of Providence.” But when Napoleon
returned to Paris, Danglars’ heart failed him, and he lived
in constant fear of Dantes’ return on a mission of
vengeance. He therefore informed M. Morrel of his wish to
quit the sea, and obtained a recommendation from him to a
Spanish merchant, into whose service he entered at the end
of March, that is, ten or twelve days after Napoleon’s
return. He then left for Madrid, and was no more heard of.

Fernand understood nothing except that Dantes was absent.
What had become of him he cared not to inquire. Only, during
the respite the absence of his rival afforded him, he
reflected, partly on the means of deceiving Mercedes as to
the cause of his absence, partly on plans of emigration and
abduction, as from time to time he sat sad and motionless on
the summit of Cape Pharo, at the spot from whence Marseilles
and the Catalans are visible, watching for the apparition of
a young and handsome man, who was for him also the messenger
of vengeance. Fernand’s mind was made up; he would shoot
Dantes, and then kill himself. But Fernand was mistaken; a
man of his disposition never kills himself, for he
constantly hopes.

During this time the empire made its last conscription, and
every man in France capable of bearing arms rushed to obey
the summons of the emperor. Fernand departed with the rest,
bearing with him the terrible thought that while he was
away, his rival would perhaps return and marry Mercedes. Had
Fernand really meant to kill himself, he would have done so
when he parted from Mercedes. His devotion, and the
compassion he showed for her misfortunes, produced the
effect they always produce on noble minds — Mercedes had
always had a sincere regard for Fernand, and this was now
strengthened by gratitude.

“My brother,” said she as she placed his knapsack on his
shoulders, “be careful of yourself, for if you are killed, I
shall be alone in the world.” These words carried a ray of
hope into Fernand’s heart. Should Dantes not return,
Mercedes might one day be his.

Mercedes was left alone face to face with the vast plain
that had never seemed so barren, and the sea that had never
seemed so vast. Bathed in tears she wandered about the
Catalan village. Sometimes she stood mute and motionless as
a statue, looking towards Marseilles, at other times gazing
on the sea, and debating as to whether it were not better to
cast herself into the abyss of the ocean, and thus end her
woes. It was not want of courage that prevented her putting
this resolution into execution; but her religious feelings
came to her aid and saved her. Caderousse was, like Fernand,
enrolled in the army, but, being married and eight years
older, he was merely sent to the frontier. Old Dantes, who
was only sustained by hope, lost all hope at Napoleon’s
downfall. Five months after he had been separated from his
son, and almost at the hour of his arrest, he breathed his
last in Mercedes’ arms. M. Morrel paid the expenses of his
funeral, and a few small debts the poor old man had
contracted.

There was more than benevolence in this action; there was
courage; the south was aflame, and to assist, even on his
death-bed, the father of so dangerous a Bonapartist as
Dantes, was stigmatized as a crime.

A year after Louis XVIII.’s restoration, a visit was made by
the inspector-general of prisons. Dantes in his cell heard
the noise of preparation, — sounds that at the depth where
he lay would have been inaudible to any but the ear of a
prisoner, who could hear the splash of the drop of water that
every hour fell from the roof of his dungeon. He guessed
something uncommon was passing among the living; but he had
so long ceased to have any intercourse with the world, that
he looked upon himself as dead.

The inspector visited, one after another, the cells and
dungeons of several of the prisoners, whose good behavior or
stupidity recommended them to the clemency of the
government. He inquired how they were fed, and if they had
any request to make. The universal response was, that the
fare was detestable, and that they wanted to be set free.

The inspector asked if they had anything else to ask for.
They shook their heads. What could they desire beyond their
liberty? The inspector turned smilingly to the governor.

“I do not know what reason government can assign for these
useless visits; when you see one prisoner, you see all, —
always the same thing, — ill fed and innocent. Are there
any others?”

“Yes; the dangerous and mad prisoners are in the dungeons.”

“Let us visit them,” said the inspector with an air of
fatigue. “We must play the farce to the end. Let us see the
dungeons.”

“Let us first send for two soldiers,” said the governor.
“The prisoners sometimes, through mere uneasiness of life,
and in order to be sentenced to death, commit acts of
useless violence, and you might fall a victim.”

“Take all needful precautions,” replied the inspector.

Two soldiers were accordingly sent for, and the inspector
descended a stairway, so foul, so humid, so dark, as to be
loathsome to sight, smell, and respiration.

“Oh,” cried the inspector, “who can live here?”

“A most dangerous conspirator, a man we are ordered to keep
the most strict watch over, as he is daring and resolute.”

“He is alone?”

“Certainly.”

“How long his he been there?”

“Nearly a year.”

“Was he placed here when he first arrived?”

“No; not until he attempted to kill the turnkey, who took
his food to him.”

“To kill the turnkey?”

“Yes, the very one who is lighting us. Is it not true,
Antoine?” asked the governor.

“True enough; he wanted to kill me!” returned the turnkey.

“He must be mad,” said the inspector.

“He is worse than that, — he is a devil!” returned the
turnkey.

“Shall I complain of him?” demanded the inspector.

“Oh, no; it is useless. Besides, he is almost mad now, and
in another year he will be quite so.”

“So much the better for him, — he will suffer less,” said
the inspector. He was, as this remark shows, a man full of
philanthropy, and in every way fit for his office.

“You are right, sir,” replied the governor; “and this remark
proves that you have deeply considered the subject. Now we
have in a dungeon about twenty feet distant, and to which
you descend by another stair, an abbe, formerly leader of a
party in Italy, who has been here since 1811, and in 1813 he
went mad, and the change is astonishing. He used to weep, he
now laughs; he grew thin, he now grows fat. You had better
see him, for his madness is amusing.”

“I will see them both,” returned the inspector; “I must
conscientiously perform my duty.” This was the inspector’s
first visit; he wished to display his authority.

“Let us visit this one first,” added he.

“By all means,” replied the governor, and he signed to the
turnkey to open the door. At the sound of the key turning in
the lock, and the creaking of the hinges, Dantes, who was
crouched in a corner of the dungeon, whence he could see the
ray of light that came through a narrow iron grating above,
raised his head. Seeing a stranger, escorted by two turnkeys
holding torches and accompanied by two soldiers, and to whom
the governor spoke bareheaded, Dantes, who guessed the
truth, and that the moment to address himself to the
superior authorities was come, sprang forward with clasped
hands.

The soldiers interposed their bayonets, for they thought
that he was about to attack the inspector, and the latter
recoiled two or three steps. Dantes saw that he was looked
upon as dangerous. Then, infusing all the humility he
possessed into his eyes and voice, he addressed the
inspector, and sought to inspire him with pity.

The inspector listened attentively; then, turning to the
governor, observed, “He will become religious — he is
already more gentle; he is afraid, and retreated before the
bayonets — madmen are not afraid of anything; I made some
curious observations on this at Charenton.” Then, turning to
the prisoner, “What is it you want?” said he.

“I want to know what crime I have committed — to be tried;
and if I am guilty, to be shot; if innocent, to be set at
liberty.”

“Are you well fed?” said the inspector.

“I believe so; I don’t know; it’s of no consequence. What
matters really, not only to me, but to officers of justice
and the king, is that an innocent man should languish in
prison, the victim of an infamous denunciation, to die here
cursing his executioners.”

“You are very humble to-day,” remarked the governor; “you
are not so always; the other day, for instance, when you
tried to kill the turnkey.”

“It is true, sir, and I beg his pardon, for he his always
been very good to me, but I was mad.”

“And you are not so any longer?”

“No; captivity has subdued me — I have been here so long.”

“So long? — when were you arrested, then?” asked the
inspector.

“The 28th of February, 1815, at half-past two in the
afternoon.”

“To-day is the 30th of July, 1816, — why it is but
seventeen months.”

“Only seventeen months,” replied Dantes. “Oh, you do not
know what is seventeen months in prison! — seventeen ages
rather, especially to a man who, like me, had arrived at the
summit of his ambition — to a man, who, like me, was on the
point of marrying a woman he adored, who saw an honorable
career opened before him, and who loses all in an instant —
who sees his prospects destroyed, and is ignorant of the
fate of his affianced wife, and whether his aged father be
still living! Seventeen months captivity to a sailor
accustomed to the boundless ocean, is a worse punishment
than human crime ever merited. Have pity on me, then, and
ask for me, not intelligence, but a trial; not pardon, but a
verdict — a trial, sir, I ask only for a trial; that,
surely, cannot be denied to one who is accused!”

“We shall see,” said the inspector; then, turning to the
governor, “On my word, the poor devil touches me. You must
show me the proofs against him.”

“Certainly; but you will find terrible charges.”

“Monsieur,” continued Dantes, “I know it is not in your
power to release me; but you can plead for me — you can
have me tried — and that is all I ask. Let me know my
crime, and the reason why I was condemned. Uncertainty is
worse than all.”

“Go on with the lights,” said the inspector.

“Monsieur,” cried Dantes, “I can tell by your voice you are
touched with pity; tell me at least to hope.”

“I cannot tell you that,” replied the inspector; “I can only
promise to examine into your case.”

“Oh, I am free — then I am saved!”

“Who arrested you?”

“M. Villefort. See him, and hear what he says.”

“M. Villefort is no longer at Marseilles; he is now at
Toulouse.”

“I am no longer surprised at my detention,” murmured Dantes,
“since my only protector is removed.”

“Had M. de Villefort any cause of personal dislike to you?”

“None; on the contrary, he was very kind to me.”

“I can, then, rely on the notes he has left concerning you?”

“Entirely.”

“That is well; wait patiently, then.” Dantes fell on his
knees, and prayed earnestly. The door closed; but this time
a fresh inmate was left with Dantes — hope.

“Will you see the register at once,” asked the governor, “or
proceed to the other cell?”

“Let us visit them all,” said the inspector. “If I once went
up those stairs. I should never have the courage to come
down again.”

“Ah, this one is not like the other, and his madness is less
affecting than this one’s display of reason.”

“What is his folly?”

“He fancies he possesses an immense treasure. The first year
he offered government a million of francs for his release;
the second, two; the third, three; and so on progressively.
He is now in his fifth year of captivity; he will ask to
speak to you in private, and offer you five millions.”

“How curious! — what is his name?”

“The Abbe Faria.”

“No. 27,” said the inspector.

“It is here; unlock the door, Antoine.” The turnkey obeyed,
and the inspector gazed curiously into the chamber of the
“mad abbe.”

In the centre of the cell, in a circle traced with a
fragment of plaster detached from the wall, sat a man whose
tattered garments scarcely covered him. He was drawing in
this circle geometrical lines, and seemed as much absorbed
in his problem as Archimedes was when the soldier of
Marcellus slew him.

He did not move at the sound of the door, and continued his
calculations until the flash of the torches lighted up with
an unwonted glare the sombre walls of his cell; then,
raising his head, he perceived with astonishment the number
of persons present. He hastily seized the coverlet of his
bed, and wrapped it round him.

“What is it you want?” said the inspector.

“I, monsieur,” replied the abbe with an air of surprise —
“I want nothing.”

“You do not understand,” continued the inspector; “I am sent
here by government to visit the prison, and hear the
requests of the prisoners.”

“Oh, that is different,” cried the abbe; “and we shall
understand each other, I hope.”

“There, now,” whispered the governor, “it is just as I told
you.”

“Monsieur,” continued the prisoner, “I am the Abbe Faria,
born at Rome. I was for twenty years Cardinal Spada’s
secretary; I was arrested, why, I know not, toward the
beginning of the year 1811; since then I have demanded my
liberty from the Italian and French government.”

“Why from the French government?”

“Because I was arrested at Piombino, and I presume that,
like Milan and Florence, Piombino has become the capital of
some French department.”

“Ah,” said the inspector, “you have not the latest news from
Italy?”

“My information dates from the day on which I was arrested,”
returned the Abbe Faria; “and as the emperor had created the
kingdom of Rome for his infant son, I presume that he has
realized the dream of Machiavelli and Caesar Borgia, which
was to make Italy a united kingdom.”

“Monsieur,” returned the inspector, “providence has changed
this gigantic plan you advocate so warmly.”

“It is the only means of rendering Italy strong, happy, and
independent.”

“Very possibly; only I am not come to discuss politics, but
to inquire if you have anything to ask or to complain of.”

“The food is the same as in other prisons, — that is, very
bad; the lodging is very unhealthful, but, on the whole,
passable for a dungeon; but it is not that which I wish to
speak of, but a secret I have to reveal of the greatest
importance.”

“We are coming to the point,” whispered the governor.

“It is for that reason I am delighted to see you,” continued
the abbe, “although you have disturbed me in a most
important calculation, which, if it succeeded, would
possibly change Newton’s system. Could you allow me a few
words in private.”

“What did I tell you?” said the governor.

“You knew him,” returned the inspector with a smile.

“What you ask is impossible, monsieur,” continued he,
addressing Faria.

“But,” said the abbe, “I would speak to you of a large sum,
amounting to five millions.”

“The very sum you named,” whispered the inspector in his
turn.

“However,” continued Faria, seeing that the inspector was
about to depart, “it is not absolutely necessary for us to
be alone; the governor can be present.”

“Unfortunately,” said the governor, “I know beforehand what
you are about to say; it concerns your treasures, does it
not?” Faria fixed his eyes on him with an expression that
would have convinced any one else of his sanity.

“Of course,” said he; “of what else should I speak?”

“Mr. Inspector,” continued the governor, “I can tell you the
story as well as he, for it has been dinned in my ears for
the last four or five years.”

“That proves,” returned the abbe, “that you are like those
of Holy Writ, who having ears hear not, and having eyes see
not.”

“My dear sir, the government is rich and does not want your
treasures,” replied the inspector; “keep them until you are
liberated.” The abbe’s eyes glistened; he seized the
inspector’s hand.

“But what if I am not liberated,” cried he, “and am detained
here until my death? this treasure will be lost. Had not
government better profit by it? I will offer six millions,
and I will content myself with the rest, if they will only
give me my liberty.”

“On my word,” said the inspector in a low tone, “had I not
been told beforehand that this man was mad, I should believe
what he says.”

“I am not mad,” replied Faria, with that acuteness of
hearing peculiar to prisoners. “The treasure I speak of
really exists, and I offer to sign an agreement with you, in
which I promise to lead you to the spot where you shall dig;
and if I deceive you, bring me here again, — I ask no
more.”

The governor laughed. “Is the spot far from here?”

“A hundred leagues.”

“It is not ill-planned,” said the governor. “If all the
prisoners took it into their heads to travel a hundred
leagues, and their guardians consented to accompany them,
they would have a capital chance of escaping.”

“The scheme is well known,” said the inspector; “and the
abbe’s plan has not even the merit of originality.”

Then turning to Faria — “I inquired if you are well fed?”
said he.

“Swear to me,” replied Faria, “to free me if what I tell you
prove true, and I will stay here while you go to the spot.”

“Are you well fed?” repeated the inspector.

“Monsieur, you run no risk, for, as I told you, I will stay
here; so there is no chance of my escaping.”

“You do not reply to my question,” replied the inspector
impatiently.

“Nor you to mine,” cried the abbe. “You will not accept my
gold; I will keep it for myself. You refuse me my liberty;
God will give it me.” And the abbe, casting away his
coverlet, resumed his place, and continued his calculations.

“What is he doing there?” said the inspector.

“Counting his treasures,” replied the governor.

Faria replied to this sarcasm with a glance of profound
contempt. They went out. The turnkey closed the door behind
them.

“He was wealthy once, perhaps?” said the inspector.

“Or dreamed he was, and awoke mad.”

“After all,” said the inspector, “if he had been rich, he
would not have been here.” So the matter ended for the Abbe
Faria. He remained in his cell, and this visit only
increased the belief in his insanity.

Caligula or Nero, those treasure-seekers, those desirers of
the impossible, would have accorded to the poor wretch, in
exchange for his wealth, the liberty he so earnestly prayed
for. But the kings of modern times, restrained by the limits
of mere probability, have neither courage nor desire. They
fear the ear that hears their orders, and the eye that
scrutinizes their actions. Formerly they believed themselves
sprung from Jupiter, and shielded by their birth; but
nowadays they are not inviolable.

It has always been against the policy of despotic
governments to suffer the victims of their persecutions to
reappear. As the Inquisition rarely allowed its victims to
be seen with their limbs distorted and their flesh lacerated
by torture, so madness is always concealed in its cell, from
whence, should it depart, it is conveyed to some gloomy
hospital, where the doctor has no thought for man or mind in
the mutilated being the jailer delivers to him. The very
madness of the Abbe Faria, gone mad in prison, condemned him
to perpetual captivity.

The inspector kept his word with Dantes; he examined the
register, and found the following note concerning him: —

Edmond Dantes:

Violent Bonapartist; took an active part in the return from
Elba.

The greatest watchfulness and care to be exercised.

This note was in a different hand from the rest, which
showed that it had been added since his confinement. The
inspector could not contend against this accusation; he
simply wrote, — “Nothing to be done.”

This visit had infused new vigor into Dantes; he had, till
then, forgotten the date; but now, with a fragment of
plaster, he wrote the date, 30th July, 1816, and made a mark
every day, in order not to lose his reckoning again. Days
and weeks passed away, then months — Dantes still waited;
he at first expected to be freed in a fortnight. This
fortnight expired, he decided that the inspector would do
nothing until his return to Paris, and that he would not
reach there until his circuit was finished, he therefore
fixed three months; three months passed away, then six more.
Finally ten months and a half had gone by and no favorable
change had taken place, and Dantes began to fancy the
inspector’s visit but a dream, an illusion of the brain.

At the expiration of a year the governor was transferred; he
had obtained charge of the fortress at Ham. He took with him
several of his subordinates, and amongst them Dantes’
jailer. A new governor arrived; it would have been too
tedious to acquire the names of the prisoners; he learned
their numbers instead. This horrible place contained fifty
cells; their inhabitants were designated by the numbers of
their cell, and the unhappy young man was no longer called
Edmond Dantes — he was now number 34.

 

Dantes passed through all the stages of torture natural to
prisoners in suspense. He was sustained at first by that
pride of conscious innocence which is the sequence to hope;
then he began to doubt his own innocence, which justified in
some measure the governor’s belief in his mental alienation;
and then, relaxing his sentiment of pride, he addressed his
supplications, not to God, but to man. God is always the
last resource. Unfortunates, who ought to begin with God, do
not have any hope in him till they have exhausted all other
means of deliverance.

Dantes asked to be removed from his present dungeon into
another; for a change, however disadvantageous, was still a
change, and would afford him some amusement. He entreated to
be allowed to walk about, to have fresh air, books, and
writing materials. His requests were not granted, but he
went on asking all the same. He accustomed himself to
speaking to the new jailer, although the latter was, if
possible, more taciturn than the old one; but still, to
speak to a man, even though mute, was something. Dantes
spoke for the sake of hearing his own voice; he had tried to
speak when alone, but the sound of his voice terrified him.
Often, before his captivity, Dantes’ mind had revolted at
the idea of assemblages of prisoners, made up of thieves,
vagabonds, and murderers. He now wished to be amongst them,
in order to see some other face besides that of his jailer;
he sighed for the galleys, with the infamous costume, the
chain, and the brand on the shoulder. The galley-slaves
breathed the fresh air of heaven, and saw each other. They
were very happy. He besought the jailer one day to let him
have a companion, were it even the mad abbe.

The jailer, though rough and hardened by the constant sight
of so much suffering, was yet a man. At the bottom of his
heart he had often had a feeling of pity for this unhappy
young man who suffered so; and he laid the request of number
34 before the governor; but the latter sapiently imagined
that Dantes wished to conspire or attempt an escape, and
refused his request. Dantes had exhausted all human
resources, and he then turned to God.

All the pious ideas that had been so long forgotten,
returned; he recollected the prayers his mother had taught
him, and discovered a new meaning in every word; for in
prosperity prayers seem but a mere medley of words, until
misfortune comes and the unhappy sufferer first understands
the meaning of the sublime language in which he invokes the
pity of heaven! He prayed, and prayed aloud, no longer
terrified at the sound of his own voice, for he fell into a
sort of ecstasy. He laid every action of his life before the
Almighty, proposed tasks to accomplish, and at the end of
every prayer introduced the entreaty oftener addressed to
man than to God: “Forgive us our trespasses as we forgive
them that trespass against us.” Yet in spite of his earnest
prayers, Dantes remained a prisoner.

Then gloom settled heavily upon him. Dantes was a man of
great simplicity of thought, and without education; he could
not, therefore, in the solitude of his dungeon, traverse in
mental vision the history of the ages, bring to life the
nations that had perished, and rebuild the ancient cities so
vast and stupendous in the light of the imagination, and
that pass before the eye glowing with celestial colors in
Martin’s Babylonian pictures. He could not do this, he whose
past life was so short, whose present so melancholy, and his
future so doubtful. Nineteen years of light to reflect upon
in eternal darkness! No distraction could come to his aid;
his energetic spirit, that would have exalted in thus
revisiting the past, was imprisoned like an eagle in a cage.
He clung to one idea — that of his happiness, destroyed,
without apparent cause, by an unheard-of fatality; he
considered and reconsidered this idea, devoured it (so to
speak), as the implacable Ugolino devours the skull of
Archbishop Roger in the Inferno of Dante.

Rage supplanted religious fervor. Dantes uttered blasphemies
that made his jailer recoil with horror, dashed himself
furiously against the walls of his prison, wreaked his anger
upon everything, and chiefly upon himself, so that the least
thing, — a grain of sand, a straw, or a breath of air that
annoyed him, led to paroxysms of fury. Then the letter that
Villefort had showed to him recurred to his mind, and every
line gleamed forth in fiery letters on the wall like the
mene tekel upharsin of Belshazzar. He told himself that it
was the enmity of man, and not the vengeance of heaven, that
had thus plunged him into the deepest misery. He consigned
his unknown persecutors to the most horrible tortures he
could imagine, and found them all insufficient, because
after torture came death, and after death, if not repose, at
least the boon of unconsciousness.

By dint of constantly dwelling on the idea that tranquillity
was death, and if punishment were the end in view other
tortures than death must be invented, he began to reflect on
suicide. Unhappy he, who, on the brink of misfortune, broods
over ideas like these!

Before him is a dead sea that stretches in azure calm before
the eye; but he who unwarily ventures within its embrace
finds himself struggling with a monster that would drag him
down to perdition. Once thus ensnared, unless the protecting
hand of God snatch him thence, all is over, and his
struggles but tend to hasten his destruction. This state of
mental anguish is, however, less terrible than the
sufferings that precede or the punishment that possibly will
follow. There is a sort of consolation at the contemplation
of the yawning abyss, at the bottom of which lie darkness
and obscurity.

Edmond found some solace in these ideas. All his sorrows,
all his sufferings, with their train of gloomy spectres,
fled from his cell when the angel of death seemed about to
enter. Dantes reviewed his past life with composure, and,
looking forward with terror to his future existence, chose
that middle line that seemed to afford him a refuge.

“Sometimes,” said he, “in my voyages, when I was a man and
commanded other men, I have seen the heavens overcast, the
sea rage and foam, the storm arise, and, like a monstrous
bird, beating the two horizons with its wings. Then I felt
that my vessel was a vain refuge, that trembled and shook
before the tempest. Soon the fury of the waves and the sight
of the sharp rocks announced the approach of death, and
death then terrified me, and I used all my skill and
intelligence as a man and a sailor to struggle against the
wrath of God. But I did so because I was happy, because I
had not courted death, because to be cast upon a bed of
rocks and seaweed seemed terrible, because I was unwilling
that I, a creature made for the service of God, should serve
for food to the gulls and ravens. But now it is different; I
have lost all that bound me to life, death smiles and
invites me to repose; I die after my own manner, I die
exhausted and broken-spirited, as I fall asleep when I have
paced three thousand times round my cell.”

No sooner had this idea taken possession of him than he
became more composed, arranged his couch to the best of his
power, ate little and slept less, and found existence almost
supportable, because he felt that he could throw it off at
pleasure, like a worn-out garment. Two methods of
self-destruction were at his disposal. He could hang himself
with his handkerchief to the window bars, or refuse food and
die of starvation. But the first was repugnant to him.
Dantes had always entertained the greatest horror of
pirates, who are hung up to the yard-arm; he would not die
by what seemed an infamous death. He resolved to adopt the
second, and began that day to carry out his resolve. Nearly
four years had passed away; at the end of the second he had
ceased to mark the lapse of time.

Dantes said, “I wish to die,” and had chosen the manner of
his death, and fearful of changing his mind, he had taken an
oath to die. “When my morning and evening meals are
brought,” thought he, “I will cast them out of the window,
and they will think that I have eaten them.”

He kept his word; twice a day he cast out, through the
barred aperture, the provisions his jailer brought him — at
first gayly, then with deliberation, and at last with
regret. Nothing but the recollection of his oath gave him
strength to proceed. Hunger made viands once repugnant, now
acceptable; he held the plate in his hand for an hour at a
time, and gazed thoughtfully at the morsel of bad meat, of
tainted fish, of black and mouldy bread. It was the last
yearning for life contending with the resolution of despair;
then his dungeon seemed less sombre, his prospects less
desperate. He was still young — he was only four or five
and twenty — he had nearly fifty years to live. What
unforseen events might not open his prison door, and restore
him to liberty? Then he raised to his lips the repast that,
like a voluntary Tantalus, he refused himself; but he
thought of his oath, and he would not break it. He persisted
until, at last, he had not sufficient strength to rise and
cast his supper out of the loophole. The next morning he
could not see or hear; the jailer feared he was dangerously
ill. Edmond hoped he was dying.

Thus the day passed away. Edmond felt a sort of stupor
creeping over him which brought with it a feeling almost of
content; the gnawing pain at his stomach had ceased; his
thirst had abated; when he closed his eyes he saw myriads of
lights dancing before them like the will-o’-the-wisps that
play about the marshes. It was the twilight of that
mysterious country called Death!

Suddenly, about nine o’clock in the evening, Edmond heard a
hollow sound in the wall against which he was lying.

So many loathsome animals inhabited the prison, that their
noise did not, in general, awake him; but whether abstinence
had quickened his faculties, or whether the noise was really
louder than usual, Edmond raised his head and listened. It
was a continual scratching, as if made by a huge claw, a
powerful tooth, or some iron instrument attacking the
stones.

Although weakened, the young man’s brain instantly responded
to the idea that haunts all prisoners — liberty! It seemed
to him that heaven had at length taken pity on him, and had
sent this noise to warn him on the very brink of the abyss.
Perhaps one of those beloved ones he had so often thought of
was thinking of him, and striving to diminish the distance
that separated them.

No, no, doubtless he was deceived, and it was but one of
those dreams that forerun death!

Edmond still heard the sound. It lasted nearly three hours;
he then heard a noise of something falling, and all was
silent.

Some hours afterwards it began again, nearer and more
distinct. Edmond was intensely interested. Suddenly the
jailer entered.

For a week since he had resolved to die, and during the four
days that he had been carrying out his purpose, Edmond had
not spoken to the attendant, had not answered him when he
inquired what was the matter with him, and turned his face
to the wall when he looked too curiously at him; but now the
jailer might hear the noise and put an end to it, and so
destroy a ray of something like hope that soothed his last
moments.

The jailer brought him his breakfast. Dantes raised himself
up and began to talk about everything; about the bad quality
of the food, about the coldness of his dungeon, grumbling
and complaining, in order to have an excuse for speaking
louder, and wearying the patience of his jailer, who out of
kindness of heart had brought broth and white bread for his
prisoner.

Fortunately, he fancied that Dantes was delirious; and
placing the food on the rickety table, he withdrew. Edmond
listened, and the sound became more and more distinct.

“There can be no doubt about it,” thought he; “it is some
prisoner who is striving to obtain his freedom. Oh, if I
were only there to help him!” Suddenly another idea took
possession of his mind, so used to misfortune, that it was
scarcely capable of hope — the idea that the noise was made
by workmen the governor had ordered to repair the
neighboring dungeon.

It was easy to ascertain this; but how could he risk the
question? It was easy to call his jailer’s attention to the
noise, and watch his countenance as he listened; but might
he not by this means destroy hopes far more important than
the short-lived satisfaction of his own curiosity?
Unfortunately, Edmond’s brain was still so feeble that he
could not bend his thoughts to anything in particular.

He saw but one means of restoring lucidity and clearness to
his judgment. He turned his eyes towards the soup which the
jailer had brought, rose, staggered towards it, raised the
vessel to his lips, and drank off the contents with a
feeling of indescribable pleasure. He had often heard that
shipwrecked persons had died through having eagerly devoured
too much food. Edmond replaced on the table the bread he was
about to devour, and returned to his couch — he did not
wish to die. He soon felt that his ideas became again
collected — he could think, and strengthen his thoughts by
reasoning. Then he said to himself, “I must put this to the
test, but without compromising anybody. If it is a workman,
I need but knock against the wall, and he will cease to
work, in order to find out who is knocking, and why he does
so; but as his occupation is sanctioned by the governor, he
will soon resume it. If, on the contrary, it is a prisoner,
the noise I make will alarm him, he will cease, and not
begin again until he thinks every one is asleep.”

Edmond rose again, but this time his legs did not tremble,
and his sight was clear; he went to a corner of his dungeon,
detached a stone, and with it knocked against the wall where
the sound came. He struck thrice. At the first blow the
sound ceased, as if by magic.

Edmond listened intently; an hour passed, two hours passed,
and no sound was heard from the wall — all was silent
there.

Full of hope, Edmond swallowed a few mouthfuls of bread and
water, and, thanks to the vigor of his constitution, found
himself well-nigh recovered.

The day passed away in utter silence — night came without
recurrence of the noise.

“It is a prisoner,” said Edmond joyfully. The night passed
in perfect silence. Edmond did not close his eyes.

In the morning the jailer brought him fresh provisions — he
had already devoured those of the previous day; he ate these
listening anxiously for the sound, walking round and round
his cell, shaking the iron bars of the loophole, restoring
vigor and agility to his limbs by exercise, and so preparing
himself for his future destiny. At intervals he listened to
learn if the noise had not begun again, and grew impatient
at the prudence of the prisoner, who did not guess he had
been disturbed by a captive as anxious for liberty as
himself.

Three days passed — seventy-two long tedious hours which he
counted off by minutes!

At length one evening, as the jailer was visiting him for
the last time that night, Dantes, with his ear for the
hundredth time at the wall, fancied he heard an almost
imperceptible movement among the stones. He moved away,
walked up and down his cell to collect his thoughts, and
then went back and listened.

The matter was no longer doubtful. Something was at work on
the other side of the wall; the prisoner had discovered the
danger, and had substituted a lever for a chisel.

Encouraged by this discovery, Edmond determined to assist
the indefatigable laborer. He began by moving his bed, and
looked around for anything with which he could pierce the
wall, penetrate the moist cement, and displace a stone.

He saw nothing, he had no knife or sharp instrument, the
window grating was of iron, but he had too often assured
himself of its solidity. All his furniture consisted of a
bed, a chair, a table, a pail, and a jug. The bed had iron
clamps, but they were screwed to the wood, and it would have
required a screw-driver to take them off. The table and
chair had nothing, the pail had once possessed a handle, but
that had been removed.

Dantes had but one resource, which was to break the jug, and
with one of the sharp fragments attack the wall. He let the
jug fall on the floor, and it broke in pieces.

Dantes concealed two or three of the sharpest fragments in
his bed, leaving the rest on the floor. The breaking of his
jug was too natural an accident to excite suspicion. Edmond
had all the night to work in, but in the darkness he could
not do much, and he soon felt that he was working against
something very hard; he pushed back his bed, and waited for
day.

All night he heard the subterranean workman, who continued
to mine his way. Day came, the jailer entered. Dantes told
him that the jug had fallen from his hands while he was
drinking, and the jailer went grumblingly to fetch another,
without giving himself the trouble to remove the fragments
of the broken one. He returned speedily, advised the
prisoner to be more careful, and departed.

Dantes heard joyfully the key grate in the lock; he listened
until the sound of steps died away, and then, hastily
displacing his bed, saw by the faint light that penetrated
into his cell, that he had labored uselessly the previous
evening in attacking the stone instead of removing the
plaster that surrounded it.

The damp had rendered it friable, and Dantes was able to
break it off — in small morsels, it is true, but at the end
of half an hour he had scraped off a handful; a
mathematician might have calculated that in two years,
supposing that the rock was not encountered, a passage
twenty feet long and two feet broad, might be formed.

The prisoner reproached himself with not having thus
employed the hours he had passed in vain hopes, prayer, and
despondency. During the six years that he had been
imprisoned, what might he not have accomplished?

In three days he had succeeded, with the utmost precaution,
in removing the cement, and exposing the stone-work. The
wall was built of rough stones, among which, to give
strength to the structure, blocks of hewn stone were at
intervals imbedded. It was one of these he had uncovered,
and which he must remove from its socket.

Dantes strove to do this with his nails, but they were too
weak. The fragments of the jug broke, and after an hour of
useless toil, he paused.

Was he to be thus stopped at the beginning, and was he to
wait inactive until his fellow workman had completed his
task? Suddenly an idea occurred to him — he smiled, and the
perspiration dried on his forehead.

The jailer always brought Dantes’ soup in an iron saucepan;
this saucepan contained soup for both prisoners, for Dantes
had noticed that it was either quite full, or half empty,
according as the turnkey gave it to him or to his companion
first.

The handle of this saucepan was of iron; Dantes would have
given ten years of his life in exchange for it.

The jailer was accustomed to pour the contents of the
saucepan into Dantes’ plate, and Dantes, after eating his
soup with a wooden spoon, washed the plate, which thus
served for every day. Now when evening came Dantes put his
plate on the ground near the door; the jailer, as he
entered, stepped on it and broke it.

This time he could not blame Dantes. He was wrong to leave
it there, but the jailer was wrong not to have looked before
him.

The jailer, therefore, only grumbled. Then he looked about
for something to pour the soup into; Dantes’ entire dinner
service consisted of one plate — there was no alternative.

“Leave the saucepan,” said Dantes; “you can take it away
when you bring me my breakfast.” This advice was to the
jailer’s taste, as it spared him the necessity of making
another trip. He left the saucepan.

Dantes was beside himself with joy. He rapidly devoured his
food, and after waiting an hour, lest the jailer should
change his mind and return, he removed his bed, took the
handle of the saucepan, inserted the point between the hewn
stone and rough stones of the wall, and employed it as a
lever. A slight oscillation showed Dantes that all went
well. At the end of an hour the stone was extricated from
the wall, leaving a cavity a foot and a half in diameter.

Dantes carefully collected the plaster, carried it into the
corner of his cell, and covered it with earth. Then, wishing
to make the best use of his time while he had the means of
labor, he continued to work without ceasing. At the dawn of
day he replaced the stone, pushed his bed against the wall,
and lay down. The breakfast consisted of a piece of bread;
the jailer entered and placed the bread on the table.

“Well, don’t you intend to bring me another plate?” said
Dantes.

“No,” replied the turnkey; “you destroy everything. First
you break your jug, then you make me break your plate; if
all the prisoners followed your example, the government
would be ruined. I shall leave you the saucepan, and pour
your soup into that. So for the future I hope you will not
be so destructive.”

Dantes raised his eyes to heaven and clasped his hands
beneath the coverlet. He felt more gratitude for the
possession of this piece of iron than he had ever felt for
anything. He had noticed, however, that the prisoner on the
other side had ceased to labor; no matter, this was a
greater reason for proceeding — if his neighbor would not
come to him, he would go to his neighbor. All day he toiled
on untiringly, and by the evening he had succeeded in
extracting ten handfuls of plaster and fragments of stone.
When the hour for his jailer’s visit arrived, Dantes
straightened the handle of the saucepan as well as he could,
and placed it in its accustomed place. The turnkey poured
his ration of soup into it, together with the fish — for
thrice a week the prisoners were deprived of meat. This
would have been a method of reckoning time, had not Dantes
long ceased to do so. Having poured out the soup, the
turnkey retired. Dantes wished to ascertain whether his
neighbor had really ceased to work. He listened — all was
silent, as it had been for the last three days. Dantes
sighed; it was evident that his neighbor distrusted him.
However, he toiled on all the night without being
discouraged; but after two or three hours he encountered an
obstacle. The iron made no impression, but met with a smooth
surface; Dantes touched it, and found that it was a beam.
This beam crossed, or rather blocked up, the hole Dantes had
made; it was necessary, therefore, to dig above or under it.
The unhappy young man had not thought of this. “O my God, my
God!” murmured he, “I have so earnestly prayed to you, that
I hoped my prayers had been heard. After having deprived me
of my liberty, after having deprived me of death, after
having recalled me to existence, my God, have pity on me,
and do not let me die in despair!”

“Who talks of God and despair at the same time?” said a
voice that seemed to come from beneath the earth, and,
deadened by the distance, sounded hollow and sepulchral in
the young man’s ears. Edmond’s hair stood on end, and he
rose to his knees.

“Ah,” said he, “I hear a human voice.” Edmond had not heard
any one speak save his jailer for four or five years; and a
jailer is no man to a prisoner — he is a living door, a
barrier of flesh and blood adding strength to restraints of
oak and iron.

“In the name of heaven,” cried Dantes, “speak again, though
the sound of your voice terrifies me. Who are you?”

“Who are you?” said the voice.

“An unhappy prisoner,” replied Dantes, who made no
hesitation in answering.

“Of what country?”

“A Frenchman.”

“Your name?”

“Edmond Dantes.”

“Your profession?”

“A sailor.”

“How long have you been here?”

“Since the 28th of February, 1815.”

“Your crime?”

“I am innocent.”

“But of what are you accused?”

“Of having conspired to aid the emperor’s return.”

“What! For the emperor’s return? — the emperor is no longer
on the throne, then?”

“He abdicated at Fontainebleau in 1814, and was sent to the
Island of Elba. But how long have you been here that you are
ignorant of all this?”

“Since 1811.”

Dantes shuddered; this man had been four years longer than
himself in prison.

“Do not dig any more,” said the voice; “only tell me how
high up is your excavation?”

“On a level with the floor.”

“How is it concealed?”

“Behind my bed.”

“Has your bed been moved since you have been a prisoner?”

“No.”

“What does your chamber open on?”

“A corridor.”

“And the corridor?”

“On a court.”

“Alas!” murmured the voice.

“Oh, what is the matter?” cried Dantes.

“I have made a mistake owing to an error in my plans. I took
the wrong angle, and have come out fifteen feet from where I
intended. I took the wall you are mining for the outer wall
of the fortress.”

“But then you would be close to the sea?”

“That is what I hoped.”

“And supposing you had succeeded?”

“I should have thrown myself into the sea, gained one of the
islands near here — the Isle de Daume or the Isle de
Tiboulen — and then I should have been safe.”

“Could you have swum so far?”

“Heaven would have given me strength; but now all is lost.”

“All?”

“Yes; stop up your excavation carefully, do not work any
more, and wait until you hear from me.”

“Tell me, at least, who you are?”

“I am — I am No. 27.”

“You mistrust me, then,” said Dantes. Edmond fancied he
heard a bitter laugh resounding from the depths.

“Oh, I am a Christian,” cried Dantes, guessing instinctively
that this man meant to abandon him. “I swear to you by him
who died for us that naught shall induce me to breathe one
syllable to my jailers; but I conjure you do not abandon me.
If you do, I swear to you, for I have got to the end of my
strength, that I will dash my brains out against the wall,
and you will have my death to reproach yourself with.”

“How old are you? Your voice is that of a young man.”

“I do not know my age, for I have not counted the years I
have been here. All I do know is, that I was just nineteen
when I was arrested, the 28th of February, 1815.”

“Not quite twenty-six!” murmured the voice; “at that age he
cannot be a traitor.”

“Oh, no, no,” cried Dantes. “I swear to you again, rather
than betray you, I would allow myself to be hacked in
pieces!”

“You have done well to speak to me, and ask for my
assistance, for I was about to form another plan, and leave
you; but your age reassures me. I will not forget you.
Wait.”

“How long?”

“I must calculate our chances; I will give you the signal.”

“But you will not leave me; you will come to me, or you will
let me come to you. We will escape, and if we cannot escape
we will talk; you of those whom you love, and I of those
whom I love. You must love somebody?”

“No, I am alone in the world.”

“Then you will love me. If you are young, I will be your
comrade; if you are old, I will be your son. I have a father
who is seventy if he yet lives; I only love him and a young
girl called Mercedes. My father has not yet forgotten me, I
am sure, but God alone knows if she loves me still; I shall
love you as I loved my father.”

“It is well,” returned the voice; “to-morrow.”

These few words were uttered with an accent that left no
doubt of his sincerity; Dantes rose, dispersed the fragments
with the same precaution as before, and pushed his bed back
against the wall. He then gave himself up to his happiness.
He would no longer be alone. He was, perhaps, about to
regain his liberty; at the worst, he would have a companion,
and captivity that is shared is but half captivity. Plaints
made in common are almost prayers, and prayers where two or
three are gathered together invoke the mercy of heaven.

All day Dantes walked up and down his cell. He sat down
occasionally on his bed, pressing his hand on his heart. At
the slightest noise he bounded towards the door. Once or
twice the thought crossed his mind that he might be
separated from this unknown, whom he loved already; and then
his mind was made up — when the jailer moved his bed and
stooped to examine the opening, he would kill him with his
water jug. He would be condemned to die, but he was about to
die of grief and despair when this miraculous noise recalled
him to life.

The jailer came in the evening. Dantes was on his bed. It
seemed to him that thus he better guarded the unfinished
opening. Doubtless there was a strange expression in his
eyes, for the jailer said, “Come, are you going mad again?”

Dantes did not answer; he feared that the emotion of his
voice would betray him. The jailer went away shaking his
head. Night came; Dantes hoped that his neighbor would
profit by the silence to address him, but he was mistaken.
The next morning, however, just as he removed his bed from
the wall, he heard three knocks; he threw himself on his
knees.

“Is it you?” said he; “I am here.”

“Is your jailer gone?”

“Yes,” said Dantes; “he will not return until the evening;
so that we have twelve hours before us.”

“I can work, then?” said the voice.

“Oh, yes, yes; this instant, I entreat you.”

In a moment that part of the floor on which Dantes was
resting his two hands, as he knelt with his head in the
opening, suddenly gave way; he drew back smartly, while a
mass of stones and earth disappeared in a hole that opened
beneath the aperture he himself had formed. Then from the
bottom of this passage, the depth of which it was impossible
to measure, he saw appear, first the head, then the
shoulders, and lastly the body of a man, who sprang lightly
into his cell.

Seizing in his arms the friend so long and ardently desired,
Dantes almost carried him towards the window, in order to
obtain a better view of his features by the aid of the
imperfect light that struggled through the grating.

He was a man of small stature, with hair blanched rather by
suffering and sorrow than by age. He had a deep-set,
penetrating eye, almost buried beneath the thick gray
eyebrow, and a long (and still black) beard reaching down to
his breast. His thin face, deeply furrowed by care, and the
bold outline of his strongly marked features, betokened a
man more accustomed to exercise his mental faculties than
his physical strength. Large drops of perspiration were now
standing on his brow, while the garments that hung about him
were so ragged that one could only guess at the pattern upon
which they had originally been fashioned.

The stranger might have numbered sixty or sixty-five years;
but a certain briskness and appearance of vigor in his
movements made it probable that he was aged more from
captivity than the course of time. He received the
enthusiastic greeting of his young acquaintance with evident
pleasure, as though his chilled affections were rekindled
and invigorated by his contact with one so warm and ardent.
He thanked him with grateful cordiality for his kindly
welcome, although he must at that moment have been suffering
bitterly to find another dungeon where he had fondly
reckoned on discovering a means of regaining his liberty.

“Let us first see,” said he, “whether it is possible to
remove the traces of my entrance here — our future
tranquillity depends upon our jailers being entirely
ignorant of it.” Advancing to the opening, he stooped and
raised the stone easily in spite of its weight; then,
fitting it into its place, he said, —

“You removed this stone very carelessly; but I suppose you
had no tools to aid you.”

“Why,” exclaimed Dantes, with astonishment, “do you possess
any?”

“I made myself some; and with the exception of a file, I
have all that are necessary, — a chisel, pincers, and
lever.”

“Oh, how I should like to see these products of your
industry and patience.”

“Well, in the first place, here is my chisel.” So saying, he
displayed a sharp strong blade, with a handle made of
beechwood.

“And with what did you contrive to make that?” inquired
Dantes.

“With one of the clamps of my bedstead; and this very tool
has sufficed me to hollow out the road by which I came
hither, a distance of about fifty feet.”

“Fifty feet!” responded Dantes, almost terrified.

“Do not speak so loud, young man — don’t speak so loud. It
frequently occurs in a state prison like this, that persons
are stationed outside the doors of the cells purposely to
overhear the conversation of the prisoners.”

“But they believe I am shut up alone here.”

“That makes no difference.”

“And you say that you dug your way a distance of fifty feet
to get here?”

“I do; that is about the distance that separates your
chamber from mine; only, unfortunately, I did not curve
aright; for want of the necessary geometrical instruments to
calculate my scale of proportion, instead of taking an
ellipsis of forty feet, I made it fifty. I expected, as I
told you, to reach the outer wall, pierce through it, and
throw myself into the sea; I have, however, kept along the
corridor on which your chamber opens, instead of going
beneath it. My labor is all in vain, for I find that the
corridor looks into a courtyard filled with soldiers.”

“That’s true,” said Dantes; “but the corridor you speak of
only bounds one side of my cell; there are three others —
do you know anything of their situation?”

“This one is built against the solid rock, and it would take
ten experienced miners, duly furnished with the requisite
tools, as many years to perforate it. This adjoins the lower
part of the governor’s apartments, and were we to work our
way through, we should only get into some lock-up cellars,
where we must necessarily be recaptured. The fourth and last
side of your cell faces on — faces on — stop a minute, now
where does it face?”

The wall of which he spoke was the one in which was fixed
the loophole by which light was admitted to the chamber.
This loophole, which gradually diminished in size as it
approached the outside, to an opening through which a child
could not have passed, was, for better security, furnished
with three iron bars, so as to quiet all apprehensions even
in the mind of the most suspicious jailer as to the
possibility of a prisoner’s escape. As the stranger asked
the question, he dragged the table beneath the window.

“Climb up,” said he to Dantes. The young man obeyed, mounted
on the table, and, divining the wishes of his companion,
placed his back securely against the wall and held out both
hands. The stranger, whom as yet Dantes knew only by the
number of his cell, sprang up with an agility by no means to
be expected in a person of his years, and, light and steady
on his feet as a cat or a lizard, climbed from the table to
the outstretched hands of Dantes, and from them to his
shoulders; then, bending double, for the ceiling of the
dungeon prevented him from holding himself erect, he managed
to slip his head between the upper bars of the window, so as
to be able to command a perfect view from top to bottom.

An instant afterwards he hastily drew back his head, saying,
“I thought so!” and sliding from the shoulders of Dantes as
dextrously as he had ascended, he nimbly leaped from the
table to the ground.

“What was it that you thought?” asked the young man
anxiously, in his turn descending from the table.

The elder prisoner pondered the matter. “Yes,” said he at
length, “it is so. This side of your chamber looks out upon
a kind of open gallery, where patrols are continually
passing, and sentries keep watch day and night.”

“Are you quite sure of that?”

“Certain. I saw the soldier’s shape and the top of his
musket; that made me draw in my head so quickly, for I was
fearful he might also see me.”

“Well?” inquired Dantes.

“You perceive then the utter impossibility of escaping
through your dungeon?”

“Then,” pursued the young man eagerly —

“Then,” answered the elder prisoner, “the will of God be
done!” and as the old man slowly pronounced those words, an
air of profound resignation spread itself over his careworn
countenance. Dantes gazed on the man who could thus
philosophically resign hopes so long and ardently nourished
with an astonishment mingled with admiration.

“Tell me, I entreat of you, who and what you are?” said he
at length; “never have I met with so remarkable a person as
yourself.”

“Willingly,” answered the stranger; “if, indeed, you feel
any curiosity respecting one, now, alas, powerless to aid
you in any way.”

“Say not so; you can console and support me by the strength
of your own powerful mind. Pray let me know who you really
are?”

The stranger smiled a melancholy smile. “Then listen,” said
he. “I am the Abbe Faria, and have been imprisoned as you
know in this Chateau d’If since the year 1811; previously to
which I had been confined for three years in the fortress of
Fenestrelle. In the year 1811 I was transferred to Piedmont
in France. It was at this period I learned that the destiny
which seemed subservient to every wish formed by Napoleon,
had bestowed on him a son, named king of Rome even in his
cradle. I was very far then from expecting the change you
have just informed me of; namely, that four years
afterwards, this colossus of power would be overthrown. Then
who reigns in France at this moment — Napoleon II.?”

“No, Louis XVIII.”

“The brother of Louis XVII.! How inscrutable are the ways of
providence — for what great and mysterious purpose has it
pleased heaven to abase the man once so elevated, and raise
up him who was so abased?”

Dantes’ whole attention was riveted on a man who could thus
forget his own misfortunes while occupying himself with the
destinies of others.

“Yes, yes,” continued he, “‘Twill be the same as it was in
England. After Charles I., Cromwell; after Cromwell, Charles
II., and then James II., and then some son-in-law or
relation, some Prince of Orange, a stadtholder who becomes a
king. Then new concessions to the people, then a
constitution, then liberty. Ah, my friend!” said the abbe,
turning towards Dantes, and surveying him with the kindling
gaze of a prophet, “you are young, you will see all this
come to pass.”

“Probably, if ever I get out of prison!”

“True,” replied Faria, “we are prisoners; but I forget this
sometimes, and there are even moments when my mental vision
transports me beyond these walls, and I fancy myself at
liberty.”

“But wherefore are you here?”

“Because in 1807 I dreamed of the very plan Napoleon tried
to realize in 1811; because, like Machiavelli, I desired to
alter the political face of Italy, and instead of allowing
it to be split up into a quantity of petty principalities,
each held by some weak or tyrannical ruler, I sought to form
one large, compact, and powerful empire; and, lastly,
because I fancied I had found my Caesar Borgia in a crowned
simpleton, who feigned to enter into my views only to betray
me. It was the plan of Alexander VI. and Clement VII., but
it will never succeed now, for they attempted it
fruitlessly, and Napoleon was unable to complete his work.
Italy seems fated to misfortune.” And the old man bowed his
head.

Dantes could not understand a man risking his life for such
matters. Napoleon certainly he knew something of, inasmuch
as he had seen and spoken with him; but of Clement VII. and
Alexander VI. he knew nothing.

“Are you not,” he asked, “the priest who here in the Chateau
d’If is generally thought to be — ill?”

“Mad, you mean, don’t you?”

“I did not like to say so,” answered Dantes, smiling.

“Well, then,” resumed Faria with a bitter smile, “let me
answer your question in full, by acknowledging that I am the
poor mad prisoner of the Chateau d’If, for many years
permitted to amuse the different visitors with what is said
to be my insanity; and, in all probability, I should be
promoted to the honor of making sport for the children, if
such innocent beings could be found in an abode devoted like
this to suffering and despair.”

Dantes remained for a short time mute and motionless; at
length he said, — “Then you abandon all hope of escape?”

“I perceive its utter impossibility; and I consider it
impious to attempt that which the Almighty evidently does
not approve.”

“Nay, be not discouraged. Would it not be expecting too much
to hope to succeed at your first attempt? Why not try to
find an opening in another direction from that which has so
unfortunately failed?”

“Alas, it shows how little notion you can have of all it has
cost me to effect a purpose so unexpectedly frustrated, that
you talk of beginning over again. In the first place, I was
four years making the tools I possess, and have been two
years scraping and digging out earth, hard as granite
itself; then what toil and fatigue has it not been to remove
huge stones I should once have deemed impossible to loosen.
Whole days have I passed in these Titanic efforts,
considering my labor well repaid if, by night-time I had
contrived to carry away a square inch of this hard-bound
cement, changed by ages into a substance unyielding as the
stones themselves; then to conceal the mass of earth and
rubbish I dug up, I was compelled to break through a
staircase, and throw the fruits of my labor into the hollow
part of it; but the well is now so completely choked up,
that I scarcely think it would be possible to add another
handful of dust without leading to discovery. Consider also
that I fully believed I had accomplished the end and aim of
my undertaking, for which I had so exactly husbanded my
strength as to make it just hold out to the termination of
my enterprise; and now, at the moment when I reckoned upon
success, my hopes are forever dashed from me. No, I repeat
again, that nothing shall induce me to renew attempts
evidently at variance with the Almighty’s pleasure.”

Dantes held down his head, that the other might not see how
joy at the thought of having a companion outweighed the
sympathy he felt for the failure of the abbe’s plans.

The abbe sank upon Edmond’s bed, while Edmond himself
remained standing. Escape had never once occurred to him.
There are, indeed, some things which appear so impossible
that the mind does not dwell on them for an instant. To
undermine the ground for fifty feet — to devote three years
to a labor which, if successful, would conduct you to a
precipice overhanging the sea — to plunge into the waves
from the height of fifty, sixty, perhaps a hundred feet, at
the risk of being dashed to pieces against the rocks, should
you have been fortunate enough to have escaped the fire of
the sentinels; and even, supposing all these perils past,
then to have to swim for your life a distance of at least
three miles ere you could reach the shore — were
difficulties so startling and formidable that Dantes had
never even dreamed of such a scheme, resigning himself
rather to death. But the sight of an old man clinging to
life with so desperate a courage, gave a fresh turn to his
ideas, and inspired him with new courage. Another, older and
less strong than he, had attempted what he had not had
sufficient resolution to undertake, and had failed only
because of an error in calculation. This same person, with
almost incredible patience and perseverance, had contrived
to provide himself with tools requisite for so unparalleled
an attempt. Another had done all this; why, then, was it
impossible to Dantes? Faria had dug his way through fifty
feet, Dantes would dig a hundred; Faria, at the age of
fifty, had devoted three years to the task; he, who was but
half as old, would sacrifice six; Faria, a priest and
savant, had not shrunk from the idea of risking his life by
trying to swim a distance of three miles to one of the
islands — Daume, Rattonneau, or Lemaire; should a hardy
sailer, an experienced diver, like himself, shrink from a
similar task; should he, who had so often for mere
amusement’s sake plunged to the bottom of the sea to fetch
up the bright coral branch, hesitate to entertain the same
project? He could do it in an hour, and how many times had
he, for pure pastime, continued in the water for more than
twice as long! At once Dantes resolved to follow the brave
example of his energetic companion, and to remember that
what has once been done may be done again.

After continuing some time in profound meditation, the young
man suddenly exclaimed, “I have found what you were in
search of!”

Faria started: “Have you, indeed?” cried he, raising his
head with quick anxiety; “pray, let me know what it is you
have discovered?”

“The corridor through which you have bored your way from the
cell you occupy here, extends in the same direction as the
outer gallery, does it not?”

“It does.”

“And is not above fifteen feet from it?”

“About that.”

“Well, then, I will tell you what we must do. We must pierce
through the corridor by forming a side opening about the
middle, as it were the top part of a cross. This time you
will lay your plans more accurately; we shall get out into
the gallery you have described; kill the sentinel who guards
it, and make our escape. All we require to insure success is
courage, and that you possess, and strength, which I am not
deficient in; as for patience, you have abundantly proved
yours — you shall now see me prove mine.”

“One instant, my dear friend,” replied the abbe; “it is
clear you do not understand the nature of the courage with
which I am endowed, and what use I intend making of my
strength. As for patience, I consider that I have abundantly
exercised that in beginning every morning the task of the
night before, and every night renewing the task of the day.
But then, young man (and I pray of you to give me your full
attention), then I thought I could not be doing anything
displeasing to the Almighty in trying to set an innocent
being at liberty — one who had committed no offence, and
merited not condemnation.”

“And have your notions changed?” asked Dantes with much
surprise; “do you think yourself more guilty in making the
attempt since you have encountered me?”

“No; neither do I wish to incur guilt. Hitherto I have
fancied myself merely waging war against circumstances, not
men. I have thought it no sin to bore through a wall, or
destroy a staircase; but I cannot so easily persuade myself
to pierce a heart or take away a life.” A slight movement of
surprise escaped Dantes.

“Is it possible,” said he, “that where your liberty is at
stake you can allow any such scruple to deter you from
obtaining it?”

“Tell me,” replied Faria, “what has hindered you from
knocking down your jailer with a piece of wood torn from
your bedstead, dressing yourself in his clothes, and
endeavoring to escape?”

“Simply the fact that the idea never occurred to me,”
answered Dantes.

“Because,” said the old man, “the natural repugnance to the
commission of such a crime prevented you from thinking of
it; and so it ever is because in simple and allowable things
our natural instincts keep us from deviating from the strict
line of duty. The tiger, whose nature teaches him to delight
in shedding blood, needs but the sense of smell to show him
when his prey is within his reach, and by following this
instinct he is enabled to measure the leap necessary to
permit him to spring on his victim; but man, on the
contrary, loathes the idea of blood — it is not alone that
the laws of social life inspire him with a shrinking dread
of taking life; his natural construction and physiological
formation” —

Dantes was confused and silent at this explanation of the
thoughts which had unconsciously been working in his mind,
or rather soul; for there are two distinct sorts of ideas,
those that proceed from the head and those that emanate from
the heart.

“Since my imprisonment,” said Faria, “I have thought over
all the most celebrated cases of escape on record. They have
rarely been successful. Those that have been crowned with
full success have been long meditated upon, and carefully
arranged; such, for instance, as the escape of the Duc de
Beaufort from the Chateau de Vincennes, that of the Abbe
Dubuquoi from For l’Eveque; of Latude from the Bastille.
Then there are those for which chance sometimes affords
opportunity, and those are the best of all. Let us,
therefore, wait patiently for some favorable moment, and
when it presents itself, profit by it.”

“Ah,” said Dantes, “you might well endure the tedious delay;
you were constantly employed in the task you set yourself,
and when weary with toil, you had your hopes to refresh and
encourage you.”

“I assure you,” replied the old man, “I did not turn to that
source for recreation or support.”

“What did you do then?”

“I wrote or studied.”

“Were you then permitted the use of pens, ink, and paper?”

“Oh, no,” answered the abbe; “I had none but what I made for
myself.”

“You made paper, pens and ink?”

“Yes.”

Dantes gazed with admiration, but he had some difficulty in
believing. Faria saw this.

“When you pay me a visit in my cell, my young friend,” said
he, “I will show you an entire work, the fruits of the
thoughts and reflections of my whole life; many of them
meditated over in the shades of the Coloseum at Rome, at the
foot of St. Mark’s column at Venice, and on the borders of
the Arno at Florence, little imagining at the time that they
would be arranged in order within the walls of the Chateau
d’If. The work I speak of is called `A Treatise on the
Possibility of a General Monarchy in Italy,’ and will make
one large quarto volume.”

“And on what have you written all this?”

“On two of my shirts. I invented a preparation that makes
linen as smooth and as easy to write on as parchment.”

“You are, then, a chemist?”

“Somewhat; I know Lavoisier, and was the intimate friend of
Cabanis.”

“But for such a work you must have needed books — had you
any?”

“I had nearly five thousand volumes in my library at Rome;
but after reading them over many times, I found out that
with one hundred and fifty well-chosen books a man
possesses, if not a complete summary of all human knowledge,
at least all that a man need really know. I devoted three
years of my life to reading and studying these one hundred
and fifty volumes, till I knew them nearly by heart; so that
since I have been in prison, a very slight effort of memory
has enabled me to recall their contents as readily as though
the pages were open before me. I could recite you the whole
of Thucydides, Xenophon, Plutarch, Titus Livius, Tacitus,
Strada, Jornandes, Dante, Montaigne, Shakespeare, Spinoza,
Machiavelli, and Bossuet. I name only the most important.”

“You are, doubtless, acquainted with a variety of languages,
so as to have been able to read all these?”

“Yes, I speak five of the modern tongues — that is to say,
German, French, Italian, English, and Spanish; by the aid of
ancient Greek I learned modern Greek — I don’t speak it so
well as I could wish, but I am still trying to improve
myself.”

“Improve yourself!” repeated Dantes; “why, how can you
manage to do so?”

“Why, I made a vocabulary of the words I knew; turned,
returned, and arranged them, so as to enable me to express
my thoughts through their medium. I know nearly one thousand
words, which is all that is absolutely necessary, although I
believe there are nearly one hundred thousand in the
dictionaries. I cannot hope to be very fluent, but I
certainly should have no difficulty in explaining my wants
and wishes; and that would be quite as much as I should ever
require.”

Stronger grew the wonder of Dantes, who almost fancied he
had to do with one gifted with supernatural powers; still
hoping to find some imperfection which might bring him down
to a level with human beings, he added, “Then if you were
not furnished with pens, how did you manage to write the
work you speak of?”

“I made myself some excellent ones, which would be
universally preferred to all others if once known. You are
aware what huge whitings are served to us on maigre days.
Well, I selected the cartilages of the heads of these
fishes, and you can scarcely imagine the delight with which
I welcomed the arrival of each Wednesday, Friday, and
Saturday, as affording me the means of increasing my stock
of pens; for I will freely confess that my historical labors
have been my greatest solace and relief. While retracing the
past, I forget the present; and traversing at will the path
of history I cease to remember that I am myself a prisoner.”

“But the ink,” said Dantes; “of what did you make your ink?”

“There was formerly a fireplace in my dungeon,” replied
Faria, “but it was closed up long ere I became an occupant
of this prison. Still, it must have been many years in use,
for it was thickly covered with a coating of soot; this soot
I dissolved in a portion of the wine brought to me every
Sunday, and I assure you a better ink cannot be desired. For
very important notes, for which closer attention is
required, I pricked one of my fingers, and wrote with my own
blood.”

“And when,” asked Dantes, “may I see all this?”

“Whenever you please,” replied the abbe.

“Oh, then let it be directly!” exclaimed the young man.

“Follow me, then,” said the abbe, as he re-entered the
subterranean passage, in which he soon disappeared, followed
by Dantes.

 

After having passed with tolerable ease through the
subterranean passage, which, however, did not admit of their
holding themselves erect, the two friends reached the
further end of the corridor, into which the abbe’s cell
opened; from that point the passage became much narrower,
and barely permitted one to creep through on hands and
knees. The floor of the abbe’s cell was paved, and it had
been by raising one of the stones in the most obscure corner
that Faria had to been able to commence the laborious task
of which Dantes had witnessed the completion.

As he entered the chamber of his friend, Dantes cast around
one eager and searching glance in quest of the expected
marvels, but nothing more than common met his view.

“It is well,” said the abbe; “we have some hours before us
— it is now just a quarter past twelve o’clock.”
Instinctively Dantes turned round to observe by what watch
or clock the abbe had been able so accurately to specify the
hour.

“Look at this ray of light which enters by my window,” said
the abbe, “and then observe the lines traced on the wall.
Well, by means of these lines, which are in accordance with
the double motion of the earth, and the ellipse it describes
round the sun, I am enabled to ascertain the precise hour
with more minuteness than if I possessed a watch; for that
might be broken or deranged in its movements, while the sun
and earth never vary in their appointed paths.”

This last explanation was wholly lost upon Dantes, who had
always imagined, from seeing the sun rise from behind the
mountains and set in the Mediterranean, that it moved, and
not the earth. A double movement of the globe he inhabited,
and of which he could feel nothing, appeared to him
perfectly impossible. Each word that fell from his
companion’s lips seemed fraught with the mysteries of
science, as worthy of digging out as the gold and diamonds
in the mines of Guzerat and Golconda, which he could just
recollect having visited during a voyage made in his
earliest youth.

“Come,” said he to the abbe, “I am anxious to see your
treasures.”

The abbe smiled, and, proceeding to the disused fireplace,
raised, by the help of his chisel, a long stone, which had
doubtless been the hearth, beneath which was a cavity of
considerable depth, serving as a safe depository of the
articles mentioned to Dantes.

“What do you wish to see first?” asked the abbe.

“Oh, your great work on the monarchy of Italy!”

Faria then drew forth from his hiding-place three or four
rolls of linen, laid one over the other, like folds of
papyrus. These rolls consisted of slips of cloth about four
inches wide and eighteen long; they were all carefully
numbered and closely covered with writing, so legible that
Dantes could easily read it, as well as make out the sense
— it being in Italian, a language he, as a Provencal,
perfectly understood.

“There,” said he, “there is the work complete. I wrote the
word finis at the end of the sixty-eighth strip about a week
ago. I have torn up two of my shirts, and as many
handkerchiefs as I was master of, to complete the precious
pages. Should I ever get out of prison and find in all Italy
a printer courageous enough to publish what I have composed,
my literary reputation is forever secured.”

“I see,” answered Dantes. “Now let me behold the curious
pens with which you have written your work.”

“Look!” said Faria, showing to the young man a slender stick
about six inches long, and much resembling the size of the
handle of a fine painting-brush, to the end of which was
tied, by a piece of thread, one of those cartilages of which
the abbe had before spoken to Dantes; it was pointed, and
divided at the nib like an ordinary pen. Dantes examined it
with intense admiration, then looked around to see the
instrument with which it had been shaped so correctly into
form.

“Ah, yes,” said Faria; “the penknife. That’s my masterpiece.
I made it, as well as this larger knife, out of an old iron
candlestick.” The penknife was sharp and keen as a razor; as
for the other knife, it would serve a double purpose, and
with it one could cut and thrust.

Dantes examined the various articles shown to him with the
same attention that he had bestowed on the curiosities and
strange tools exhibited in the shops at Marseilles as the
works of the savages in the South Seas from whence they had
been brought by the different trading vessels.

“As for the ink,” said Faria, “I told you how I managed to
obtain that — and I only just make it from time to time, as
I require it.”

“One thing still puzzles me,” observed Dantes, “and that is
how you managed to do all this by daylight?”

“I worked at night also,” replied Faria.

“Night! — why, for heaven’s sake, are your eyes like cats’,
that you can see to work in the dark?”

“Indeed they are not; but God his supplied man with the
intelligence that enables him to overcome the limitations of
natural conditions. I furnished myself with a light.”

“You did? Pray tell me how.”

“I separated the fat from the meat served to me, melted it,
and so made oil — here is my lamp.” So saying, the abbe
exhibited a sort of torch very similar to those used in
public illuminations.

“But light?”

“Here are two flints and a piece of burnt linen.”

“And matches?”

“I pretended that I had a disorder of the skin, and asked
for a little sulphur, which was readily supplied.” Dantes
laid the different things he had been looking at on the
table, and stood with his head drooping on his breast, as
though overwhelmed by the perseverance and strength of
Faria’s mind.

“You have not seen all yet,” continued Faria, “for I did not
think it wise to trust all my treasures in the same
hiding-place. Let us shut this one up.” They put the stone
back in its place; the abbe sprinkled a little dust over it
to conceal the traces of its having been removed, rubbed his
foot well on it to make it assume the same appearance as the
other, and then, going towards his bed, he removed it from
the spot it stood in. Behind the head of the bed, and
concealed by a stone fitting in so closely as to defy all
suspicion, was a hollow space, and in this space a ladder of
cords between twenty-five and thirty feet in length. Dantes
closely and eagerly examined it; he found it firm, solid,
and compact enough to bear any weight.

“Who supplied you with the materials for making this
wonderful work?”

“I tore up several of my shirts, and ripped out the seams in
the sheets of my bed, during my three years’ imprisonment at
Fenestrelle; and when I was removed to the Chateau d’If, I
managed to bring the ravellings with me, so that I have been
able to finish my work here.”

“And was it not discovered that your sheets were unhemmed?”

“Oh, no, for when I had taken out the thread I required, I
hemmed the edges over again.”

“With what?”

“With this needle,” said the abbe, as, opening his ragged
vestments, he showed Dantes a long, sharp fish-bone, with a
small perforated eye for the thread, a small portion of
which still remained in it. “I once thought,” continued
Faria, “of removing these iron bars, and letting myself down
from the window, which, as you see, is somewhat wider than
yours, although I should have enlarged it still more
preparatory to my flight; however, I discovered that I
should merely have dropped into a sort of inner court, and I
therefore renounced the project altogether as too full of
risk and danger. Nevertheless, I carefully preserved my
ladder against one of those unforeseen opportunities of
which I spoke just now, and which sudden chance frequently
brings about.” While affecting to be deeply engaged in
examining the ladder, the mind of Dantes was, in fact,
busily occupied by the idea that a person so intelligent,
ingenious, and clear-sighted as the abbe might probably be
able to solve the dark mystery of his own misfortunes, where
he himself could see nothing.

“What are you thinking of?” asked the abbe smilingly,
imputing the deep abstraction in which his visitor was
plunged to the excess of his awe and wonder.

“I was reflecting, in the first place,” replied Dantes,
“upon the enormous degree of intelligence and ability you
must have employed to reach the high perfection to which you
have attained. What would you not have accomplished if you
had been free?”

“Possibly nothing at all; the overflow of my brain would
probably, in a state of freedom, have evaporated in a
thousand follies; misfortune is needed to bring to light the
treasures of the human intellect. Compression is needed to
explode gunpowder. Captivity has brought my mental faculties
to a focus; and you are well aware that from the collision
of clouds electricity is produced — from electricity,
lightning, from lightning, illumination.”

“No,” replied Dantes. “I know nothing. Some of your words
are to me quite empty of meaning. You must be blessed indeed
to possess the knowledge you have.”

The abbe smiled. “Well,” said he, “but you had another
subject for your thoughts; did you not say so just now?”

“I did!”

“You have told me as yet but one of them — let me hear the
other.”

“It was this, — that while you had related to me all the
particulars of your past life, you were perfectly
unacquainted with mine.”

“Your life, my young friend, has not been of sufficient
length to admit of your having passed through any very
important events.”

“It has been long enough to inflict on me a great and
undeserved misfortune. I would fain fix the source of it on
man that I may no longer vent reproaches upon heaven.”

“Then you profess ignorance of the crime with which you are
charged?”

“I do, indeed; and this I swear by the two beings most dear
to me upon earth, — my father and Mercedes.”

“Come,” said the abbe, closing his hiding-place, and pushing
the bed back to its original situation, “let me hear your
story.”

Dantes obeyed, and commenced what he called his history, but
which consisted only of the account of a voyage to India,
and two or three voyages to the Levant until he arrived at
the recital of his last cruise, with the death of Captain
Leclere, and the receipt of a packet to be delivered by
himself to the grand marshal; his interview with that
personage, and his receiving, in place of the packet
brought, a letter addressed to a Monsieur Noirtier — his
arrival at Marseilles, and interview with his father — his
affection for Mercedes, and their nuptual feast — his
arrest and subsequent examination, his temporary detention
at the Palais de Justice, and his final imprisonment in the
Chateau d’If. From this point everything was a blank to
Dantes — he knew nothing more, not even the length of time
he had been imprisoned. His recital finished, the abbe
reflected long and earnestly.

“There is,” said he, at the end of his meditations, “a
clever maxim, which bears upon what I was saying to you some
little while ago, and that is, that unless wicked ideas take
root in a naturally depraved mind, human nature, in a right
and wholesome state, revolts at crime. Still, from an
artificial civilization have originated wants, vices, and
false tastes, which occasionally become so powerful as to
stifle within us all good feelings, and ultimately to lead
us into guilt and wickedness. From this view of things,
then, comes the axiom that if you visit to discover the
author of any bad action, seek first to discover the person
to whom the perpetration of that bad action could be in any
way advantageous. Now, to apply it in your case, — to whom
could your disappearance have been serviceable?”

“To no one, by heaven! I was a very insignificant person.”

“Do not speak thus, for your reply evinces neither logic nor
philosophy; everything is relative, my dear young friend,
from the king who stands in the way of his successor, to the
employee who keeps his rival out of a place. Now, in the
event of the king’s death, his successor inherits a crown,
— when the employee dies, the supernumerary steps into his
shoes, and receives his salary of twelve thousand livres.
Well, these twelve thousand livres are his civil list, and
are as essential to him as the twelve millions of a king.
Every one, from the highest to the lowest degree, has his
place on the social ladder, and is beset by stormy passions
and conflicting interests, as in Descartes’ theory of
pressure and impulsion. But these forces increase as we go
higher, so that we have a spiral which in defiance of reason
rests upon the apex and not on the base. Now let us return
to your particular world. You say you were on the point of
being made captain of the Pharaon?”

“Yes.”

“And about to become the husband of a young and lovely
girl?”

“Yes.”

“Now, could any one have had any interest in preventing the
accomplishment of these two things? But let us first settle
the question as to its being the interest of any one to
hinder you from being captain of the Pharaon. What say you?”

“I cannot believe such was the case. I was generally liked
on board, and had the sailors possessed the right of
selecting a captain themselves, I feel convinced their
choice would have fallen on me. There was only one person
among the crew who had any feeling of ill-will towards me. I
had quarelled with him some time previously, and had even
challenged him to fight me; but he refused.”

“Now we are getting on. And what was this man’s name?”

“Danglars.”

“What rank did he hold on board?”

“He was supercargo.”

“And had you been captain, should you have retained him in
his employment?”

“Not if the choice had remained with me, for I had
frequently observed inaccuracies in his accounts.”

“Good again! Now then, tell me, was any person present
during your last conversation with Captain Leclere?”

“No; we were quite alone.”

“Could your conversation have been overheard by any one?”

“It might, for the cabin door was open — and — stay; now I
recollect, — Danglars himself passed by just as Captain
Leclere was giving me the packet for the grand marshal.”

“That’s better,” cried the abbe; “now we are on the right
scent. Did you take anybody with you when you put into the
port of Elba?”

“Nobody.”

“Somebody there received your packet, and gave you a letter
in place of it, I think?”

“Yes; the grand marshal did.”

“And what did you do with that letter?”

“Put it into my portfolio.”

“You had your portfolio with you, then? Now, how could a
sailor find room in his pocket for a portfolio large enough
to contain an official letter?”

“You are right; it was left on board.”

“Then it was not till your return to the ship that you put
the letter in the portfolio?”

“No.”

“And what did you do with this same letter while returning
from Porto-Ferrajo to the vessel?”

“I carried it in my hand.”

“So that when you went on board the Pharaon, everybody could
see that you held a letter in your hand?”

“Yes.”

“Danglars, as well as the rest?”

“Danglars, as well as others.”

“Now, listen to me, and try to recall every circumstance
attending your arrest. Do you recollect the words in which
the information against you was formulated?”

“Oh yes, I read it over three times, and the words sank
deeply into my memory.”

“Repeat it to me.”

Dantes paused a moment, then said, “This is it, word for
word: `The king’s attorney is informed by a friend to the
throne and religion, that one Edmond Dantes, mate on board
the Pharaon, this day arrived from Smyrna, after having
touched at Naples and Porto-Ferrajo, has been intrusted by
Murat with a packet for the usurper; again, by the usurper,
with a letter for the Bonapartist Club in Paris. This proof
of his guilt may be procured by his immediate arrest, as the
letter will be found either about his person, at his
father’s residence, or in his cabin on board the Pharaon.'”
The abbe shrugged his shoulders. “The thing is clear as
day,” said he; “and you must have had a very confiding
nature, as well as a good heart, not to have suspected the
origin of the whole affair.”

“Do you really think so? Ah, that would indeed be infamous.”

“How did Danglars usually write?”

“In a handsome, running hand.”

“And how was the anonymous letter written?”

“Backhanded.” Again the abbe smiled. “Disguised.”

“It was very boldly written, if disguised.”

“Stop a bit,” said the abbe, taking up what he called his
pen, and, after dipping it into the ink, he wrote on a piece
of prepared linen, with his left hand, the first two or
three words of the accusation. Dantes drew back, and gazed
on the abbe with a sensation almost amounting to terror.

“How very astonishing!” cried he at length. “Why your
writing exactly resembles that of the accusation.”

“Simply because that accusation had been written with the
left hand; and I have noticed that” —

“What?”

“That while the writing of different persons done with the
right hand varies, that performed with the left hand is
invariably uniform.”

“You have evidently seen and observed everything.”

“Let us proceed.”

“Oh, yes, yes!”

“Now as regards the second question.”

“I am listening.”

“Was there any person whose interest it was to prevent your
marriage with Mercedes?”

“Yes; a young man who loved her.”

“And his name was” —

“Fernand.”

“That is a Spanish name, I think?”

“He was a Catalan.”

“You imagine him capable of writing the letter?”

“Oh, no; he would more likely have got rid of me by sticking
a knife into me.”

“That is in strict accordance with the Spanish character; an
assassination they will unhesitatingly commit, but an act of
cowardice, never.”

“Besides,” said Dantes, “the various circumstances mentioned
in the letter were wholly unknown to him.”

“You had never spoken of them yourself to any one?”

“To no one.”

“Not even to your mistress?”

“No, not even to my betrothed.”

“Then it is Danglars.”

“I feel quite sure of it now.”

“Wait a little. Pray, was Danglars acquainted with Fernand?”

“No — yes, he was. Now I recollect” —

“What?”

“To have seen them both sitting at table together under an
arbor at Pere Pamphile’s the evening before the day fixed
for my wedding. They were in earnest conversation. Danglars
was joking in a friendly way, but Fernand looked pale and
agitated.”

“Were they alone?”

“There was a third person with them whom I knew perfectly
well, and who had, in all probability made their
acquaintance; he was a tailor named Caderousse, but he was
very drunk. Stay! — stay! — How strange that it should not
have occurred to me before! Now I remember quite well, that
on the table round which they were sitting were pens, ink,
and paper. Oh, the heartless, treacherous scoundrels!”
exclaimed Dantes, pressing his hand to his throbbing brows.

“Is there anything else I can assist you in discovering,
besides the villany of your friends?” inquired the abbe with
a laugh.

“Yes, yes,” replied Dantes eagerly; “I would beg of you, who
see so completely to the depths of things, and to whom the
greatest mystery seems but an easy riddle, to explain to me
how it was that I underwent no second examination, was never
brought to trial, and, above all, was condemned without ever
having had sentence passed on me?”

“That is altogether a different and more serious matter,”
responded the abbe. “The ways of justice are frequently too
dark and mysterious to be easily penetrated. All we have
hitherto done in the matter has been child’s play. If you
wish me to enter upon the more difficult part of the
business, you must assist me by the most minute information
on every point.”

“Pray ask me whatever questions you please; for, in good
truth, you see more clearly into my life than I do myself.”

“In the first place, then, who examined you, — the king’s
attorney, his deputy, or a magistrate?”

“The deputy.”

“Was he young or old?”

“About six or seven and twenty years of age, I should say.”

“So,” answered the abbe. “Old enough to be ambitions, but
too young to be corrupt. And how did he treat you?”

“With more of mildness than severity.”

“Did you tell him your whole story?”

“I did.”

“And did his conduct change at all in the course of your
examination?”

“He did appear much disturbed when he read the letter that
had brought me into this scrape. He seemed quite overcome by
my misfortune.”

“By your misfortune?”

“Yes.”

“Then you feel quite sure that it was your misfortune he
deplored?”

“He gave me one great proof of his sympathy, at any rate.”

“And that?”

“He burnt the sole evidence that could at all have
criminated me.”

“What? the accusation?”

“No; the letter.”

“Are you sure?”

“I saw it done.”

“That alters the case. This man might, after all, be a
greater scoundrel than you have thought possible.”

“Upon my word,” said Dantes, “you make me shudder. Is the
world filled with tigers and crocodiles?”

“Yes; and remember that two-legged tigers and crocodiles are
more dangerous than the others.”

“Never mind; let us go on.”

“With all my heart! You tell me he burned the letter?”

“He did; saying at the same time, `You see I thus destroy
the only proof existing against you.'”

“This action is somewhat too sublime to be natural.”

“You think so?”

“I am sure of it. To whom was this letter addressed?”

“To M. Noirtier, No. 13 Coq-Heron, Paris.”

“Now can you conceive of any interest that your heroic
deputy could possibly have had in the destruction of that
letter?”

“Why, it is not altogether impossible he might have had, for
he made me promise several times never to speak of that
letter to any one, assuring me he so advised me for my own
interest; and, more than this, he insisted on my taking a
solemn oath never to utter the name mentioned in the
address.”

“Noirtier!” repeated the abbe; “Noirtier! — I knew a person
of that name at the court of the Queen of Etruria, — a
Noirtier, who had been a Girondin during the Revolution!
What was your deputy called?”

“De Villefort!” The abbe burst into a fit of laughter, while
Dantes gazed on him in utter astonishment.

“What ails you?” said he at length.

“Do you see that ray of sunlight?”

“I do.”

“Well, the whole thing is more clear to me than that sunbeam
is to you. Poor fellow! poor young man! And you tell me this
magistrate expressed great sympathy and commiseration for
you?”

“He did.”

“And the worthy man destroyed your compromising letter?”

“Yes.”

“And then made you swear never to utter the name of
Noirtier?”

“Yes.”

“Why, you poor short-sighted simpleton, can you not guess
who this Noirtier was, whose very name he was so careful to
keep concealed? Noirtier was his father.”

Had a thunderbolt fallen at the feet of Dantes, or hell
opened its yawning gulf before him, he could not have been
more completely transfixed with horror than he was at the
sound of these unexpected words. Starting up, he clasped his
hands around his head as though to prevent his very brain
from bursting, and exclaimed, “His father! his father!”

“Yes, his father,” replied the abbe; “his right name was
Noirtier de Villefort.” At this instant a bright light shot
through the mind of Dantes, and cleared up all that had been
dark and obscure before. The change that had come over
Villefort during the examination, the destruction of the
letter, the exacted promise, the almost supplicating tones
of the magistrate, who seemed rather to implore mercy than
to pronounce punishment, — all returned with a stunning
force to his memory. He cried out, and staggered against the
wall like a drunken man, then he hurried to the opening that
led from the abbe’s cell to his own, and said, “I must be
alone, to think over all this.”

When he regained his dungeon, he threw himself on his bed,
where the turnkey found him in the evening visit, sitting
with fixed gaze and contracted features, dumb and motionless
as a statue. During these hours of profound meditation,
which to him had seemed only minutes, he had formed a
fearful resolution, and bound himself to its fulfilment by a
solemn oath.

Dantes was at length roused from his revery by the voice of
Faria, who, having also been visited by his jailer, had come
to invite his fellow-sufferer to share his supper. The
reputation of being out of his mind, though harmlessly and
even amusingly so, had procured for the abbe unusual
privileges. He was supplied with bread of a finer, whiter
quality than the usual prison fare, and even regaled each
Sunday with a small quantity of wine. Now this was a Sunday,
and the abbe had come to ask his young companion to share
the luxuries with him. Dantes followed; his features were no
longer contracted, and now wore their usual expression, but
there was that in his whole appearance that bespoke one who
had come to a fixed and desperate resolve. Faria bent on him
his penetrating eye: “I regret now,” said he, “having helped
you in your late inquiries, or having given you the
information I did.”

“Why so?” inquired Dantes.

“Because it has instilled a new passion in your heart —
that of vengeance.”

Dantes smiled. “Let us talk of something else,” said he.

Again the abbe looked at him, then mournfully shook his
head; but in accordance with Dantes’ request, he began to
speak of other matters. The elder prisoner was one of those
persons whose conversation, like that of all who have
experienced many trials, contained many useful and important
hints as well as sound information; but it was never
egotistical, for the unfortunate man never alluded to his
own sorrows. Dantes listened with admiring attention to all
he said; some of his remarks corresponded with what he
already knew, or applied to the sort of knowledge his
nautical life had enabled him to acquire. A part of the good
abbe’s words, however, were wholly incomprehensible to him;
but, like the aurora which guides the navigator in northern
latitudes, opened new vistas to the inquiring mind of the
listener, and gave fantastic glimpses of new horizons,
enabling him justly to estimate the delight an intellectual
mind would have in following one so richly gifted as Faria
along the heights of truth, where he was so much at home.

“You must teach me a small part of what you know,” said
Dantes, “if only to prevent your growing weary of me. I can
well believe that so learned a person as yourself would
prefer absolute solitude to being tormented with the company
of one as ignorant and uninformed as myself. If you will
only agree to my request, I promise you never to mention
another word about escaping.” The abbe smiled. “Alas, my
boy,” said he, “human knowledge is confined within very
narrow limits; and when I have taught you mathematics,
physics, history, and the three or four modern languages
with which I am acquainted, you will know as much as I do
myself. Now, it will scarcely require two years for me to
communicate to you the stock of learning I possess.”

“Two years!” exclaimed Dantes; “do you really believe I can
acquire all these things in so short a time?”

“Not their application, certainly, but their principles you
may; to learn is not to know; there are the learners and the
learned. Memory makes the one, philosophy the other.”

“But cannot one learn philosophy?”

“Philosophy cannot be taught; it is the application of the
sciences to truth; it is like the golden cloud in which the
Messiah went up into heaven.”

“Well, then,” said Dantes, “What shall you teach me first? I
am in a hurry to begin. I want to learn.”

“Everything,” said the abbe. And that very evening the
prisoners sketched a plan of education, to be entered upon
the following day. Dantes possessed a prodigious memory,
combined with an astonishing quickness and readiness of
conception; the mathematical turn of his mind rendered him
apt at all kinds of calculation, while his naturally
poetical feelings threw a light and pleasing veil over the
dry reality of arithmetical computation, or the rigid
severity of geometry. He already knew Italian, and had also
picked up a little of the Romaic dialect during voyages to
the East; and by the aid of these two languages he easily
comprehended the construction of all the others, so that at
the end of six months he began to speak Spanish, English,
and German. In strict accordance with the promise made to
the abbe, Dantes spoke no more of escape. Perhaps the
delight his studies afforded him left no room for such
thoughts; perhaps the recollection that he had pledged his
word (on which his sense of honor was keen) kept him from
referring in any way to the possibilities of flight. Days,
even months, passed by unheeded in one rapid and instructive
course. At the end of a year Dantes was a new man. Dantes
observed, however, that Faria, in spite of the relief his
society afforded, daily grew sadder; one thought seemed
incessantly to harass and distract his mind. Sometimes he
would fall into long reveries, sigh heavily and
involuntarily, then suddenly rise, and, with folded arms,
begin pacing the confined space of his dungeon. One day he
stopped all at once, and exclaimed, “Ah, if there were no
sentinel!”

“There shall not be one a minute longer than you please,”
said Dantes, who had followed the working of his thoughts as
accurately as though his brain were enclosed in crystal so
clear as to display its minutest operations.

“I have already told you,” answered the abbe, “that I loathe
the idea of shedding blood.”

“And yet the murder, if you choose to call it so, would be
simply a measure of self-preservation.”

“No matter! I could never agree to it.”

“Still, you have thought of it?”

“Incessantly, alas!” cried the abbe.

“And you have discovered a means of regaining our freedom,
have you not?” asked Dantes eagerly.

“I have; if it were only possible to place a deaf and blind
sentinel in the gallery beyond us.”

“He shall be both blind and deaf,” replied the young man,
with an air of determination that made his companion
shudder.

“No, no,” cried the abbe; “impossible!” Dantes endeavored to
renew the subject; the abbe shook his head in token of
disapproval, and refused to make any further response. Three
months passed away.

“Are you strong?” the abbe asked one day of Dantes. The
young man, in reply, took up the chisel, bent it into the
form of a horseshoe, and then as readily straightened it.

“And will you engage not to do any harm to the sentry,
except as a last resort?”

“I promise on my honor.”

“Then,” said the abbe, “we may hope to put our design into
execution.”

“And how long shall we be in accomplishing the necessary
work?”

“At least a year.”

“And shall we begin at once?”

“At once.”

“We have lost a year to no purpose!” cried Dantes.

“Do you consider the last twelve months to have been
wasted?” asked the abbe.

“Forgive me!” cried Edmond, blushing deeply.

“Tut, tut!” answered the abbe, “man is but man after all,
and you are about the best specimen of the genus I have ever
known. Come, let me show you my plan.” The abbe then showed
Dantes the sketch he had made for their escape. It consisted
of a plan of his own cell and that of Dantes, with the
passage which united them. In this passage he proposed to
drive a level as they do in mines; this level would bring
the two prisoners immediately beneath the gallery where the
sentry kept watch; once there, a large excavation would be
made, and one of the flag-stones with which the gallery was
paved be so completely loosened that at the desired moment
it would give way beneath the feet of the soldier, who,
stunned by his fall, would be immediately bound and gagged
by Dantes before he had power to offer any resistance. The
prisoners were then to make their way through one of the
gallery windows, and to let themselves down from the outer
walls by means of the abbe’s ladder of cords. Dantes’ eyes
sparkled with joy, and he rubbed his hands with delight at
the idea of a plan so simple, yet apparently so certain to
succeed.

That very day the miners began their labors, with a vigor
and alacrity proportionate to their long rest from fatigue
and their hopes of ultimate success. Nothing interrupted the
progress of the work except the necessity that each was
under of returning to his cell in anticipation of the
turnkey’s visits. They had learned to distinguish the almost
imperceptible sound of his footsteps as he descended towards
their dungeons, and happily, never failed of being prepared
for his coming. The fresh earth excavated during their
present work, and which would have entirely blocked up the
old passage, was thrown, by degrees and with the utmost
precaution, out of the window in either Faria’s or Dantes’
cell, the rubbish being first pulverized so finely that the
night wind carried it far away without permitting the
smallest trace to remain. More than a year had been consumed
in this undertaking, the only tools for which had been a
chisel, a knife, and a wooden lever; Faria still continuing
to instruct Dantes by conversing with him, sometimes in one
language, sometimes in another; at others, relating to him
the history of nations and great men who from time to time
have risen to fame and trodden the path of glory.

The abbe was a man of the world, and had, moreover, mixed in
the first society of the day; he wore an air of melancholy
dignity which Dantes, thanks to the imitative powers
bestowed on him by nature, easily acquired, as well as that
outward polish and politeness he had before been wanting in,
and which is seldom possessed except by those who have been
placed in constant intercourse with persons of high birth
and breeding. At the end of fifteen months the level was
finished, and the excavation completed beneath the gallery,
and the two workmen could distinctly hear the measured tread
of the sentinel as he paced to and fro over their heads.

Compelled, as they were, to await a night sufficiently dark
to favor their flight, they were obliged to defer their
final attempt till that auspicious moment should arrive;
their greatest dread now was lest the stone through which
the sentry was doomed to fall should give way before its
right time, and this they had in some measure provided
against by propping it up with a small beam which they had
discovered in the walls through which they had worked their
way. Dantes was occupied in arranging this piece of wood
when he heard Faria, who had remained in Edmond’s cell for
the purpose of cutting a peg to secure their rope-ladder,
call to him in a tone indicative of great suffering. Dantes
hastened to his dungeon, where he found him standing in the
middle of the room, pale as death, his forehead streaming
with perspiration, and his hands clinched tightly together.

“Gracious heavens!” exclaimed Dantes, “what is the matter?
what has happened?”

“Quick! quick!” returned the abbe, “listen to what I have to
say.” Dantes looked in fear and wonder at the livid
countenance of Faria, whose eyes, already dull and sunken,
were surrounded by purple circles, while his lips were white
as those of a corpse, and his very hair seemed to stand on
end.

“Tell me, I beseech you, what ails you?” cried Dantes,
letting his chisel fall to the floor.

“Alas,” faltered out the abbe, “all is over with me. I am
seized with a terrible, perhaps mortal illness; I can feel
that the paroxysm is fast approaching. I had a similar
attack the year previous to my imprisonment. This malady
admits but of one remedy; I will tell you what that is. Go
into my cell as quickly as you can; draw out one of the feet
that support the bed; you will find it has been hollowed out
for the purpose of containing a small phial you will see
there half-filled with a red-looking fluid. Bring it to me
— or rather — no, no! — I may be found here, therefore
help me back to my room while I have the strength to drag
myself along. Who knows what may happen, or how long the
attack may last?”

In spite of the magnitude of the misfortune which thus
suddenly frustrated his hopes, Dantes did not lose his
presence of mind, but descended into the passage, dragging
his unfortunate companion with him; then, half-carrying,
half-supporting him, he managed to reach the abbe’s chamber,
when he immediately laid the sufferer on his bed.

“Thanks,” said the poor abbe, shivering as though his veins
were filled with ice. “I am about to be seized with a fit of
catalepsy; when it comes to its height I shall probably lie
still and motionless as though dead, uttering neither sigh
nor groan. On the other hand, the symptoms may be much more
violent, and cause me to fall into fearful convulsions, foam
at the mouth, and cry out loudly. Take care my cries are not
heard, for if they are it is more than probable I should be
removed to another part of the prison, and we be separated
forever. When I become quite motionless, cold, and rigid as
a corpse, then, and not before, — be careful about this, —
force open my teeth with the knife, pour from eight to ten
drops of the liquor contained in the phial down my throat,
and I may perhaps revive.”

“Perhaps!” exclaimed Dantes in grief-stricken tones.

“Help! help!” cried the abbe, “I — I — die — I” —

So sudden and violent was the fit that the unfortunate
prisoner was unable to complete the sentence; a violent
convulsion shook his whole frame, his eyes started from
their sockets, his mouth was drawn on one side, his cheeks
became purple, he struggled, foamed, dashed himself about,
and uttered the most dreadful cries, which, however, Dantes
prevented from being heard by covering his head with the
blanket. The fit lasted two hours; then, more helpless than
an infant, and colder and paler than marble, more crushed
and broken than a reed trampled under foot, he fell back,
doubled up in one last convulsion, and became as rigid as a
corpse.

Edmond waited till life seemed extinct in the body of his
friend, then, taking up the knife, he with difficulty forced
open the closely fixed jaws, carefully administered the
appointed number of drops, and anxiously awaited the result.
An hour passed away and the old man gave no sign of
returning animation. Dantes began to fear he had delayed too
long ere he administered the remedy, and, thrusting his
hands into his hair, continued gazing on the lifeless
features of his friend. At length a slight color tinged the
livid cheeks, consciousness returned to the dull, open
eyeballs, a faint sigh issued from the lips, and the
sufferer made a feeble effort to move.

“He is saved! he is saved!” cried Dantes in a paroxysm of
delight.

The sick man was not yet able to speak, but he pointed with
evident anxiety towards the door. Dantes listened, and
plainly distinguished the approaching steps of the jailer.
It was therefore near seven o’clock; but Edmond’s anxiety
had put all thoughts of time out of his head. The young man
sprang to the entrance, darted through it, carefully drawing
the stone over the opening, and hurried to his cell. He had
scarcely done so before the door opened, and the jailer saw
the prisoner seated as usual on the side of his bed. Almost
before the key had turned in the lock, and before the
departing steps of the jailer had died away in the long
corridor he had to traverse, Dantes, whose restless anxiety
concerning his friend left him no desire to touch the food
brought him, hurried back to the abbe’s chamber, and raising
the stone by pressing his head against it, was soon beside
the sick man’s couch. Faria had now fully regained his
consciousness, but he still lay helpless and exhausted.

“I did not expect to see you again,” said he feebly, to
Dantes.

“And why not?” asked the young man. “Did you fancy yourself
dying?”

“No, I had no such idea; but, knowing that all was ready for
flight, I thought you might have made your escape.” The deep
glow of indignation suffused the cheeks of Dantes.

“Without you? Did you really think me capable of that?”

“At least,” said the abbe, “I now see how wrong such an
opinion would have been. Alas, alas! I am fearfully
exhausted and debilitated by this attack.”

“Be of good cheer,” replied Dantes; “your strength will
return.” And as he spoke he seated himself near the bed
beside Faria, and took his hands. The abbe shook his head.

“The last attack I had,” said he, “lasted but half an hour,
and after it I was hungry, and got up without help; now I
can move neither my right arm nor leg, and my head seems
uncomfortable, which shows that there has been a suffusion
of blood on the brain. The third attack will either carry me
off, or leave me paralyzed for life.”

“No, no,” cried Dantes; “you are mistaken — you will not
die! And your third attack (if, indeed, you should have
another) will find you at liberty. We shall save you another
time, as we have done this, only with a better chance of
success, because we shall be able to command every requisite
assistance.”

“My good Edmond,” answered the abbe, “be not deceived. The
attack which has just passed away, condemns me forever to
the walls of a prison. None can fly from a dungeon who
cannot walk.”

“Well, we will wait, — a week, a month, two months, if need
be, — and meanwhile your strength will return. Everything
is in readiness for our flight, and we can select any time
we choose. As soon as you feel able to swim we will go.”

“I shall never swim again,” replied Faria. “This arm is
paralyzed; not for a time, but forever. Lift it, and judge
if I am mistaken.” The young man raised the arm, which fell
back by its own weight, perfectly inanimate and helpless. A
sigh escaped him.

“You are convinced now, Edmond, are you not?” asked the
abbe. “Depend upon it, I know what I say. Since the first
attack I experienced of this malady, I have continually
reflected on it. Indeed, I expected it, for it is a family
inheritance; both my father and grandfather died of it in a
third attack. The physician who prepared for me the remedy I
have twice successfully taken, was no other than the
celebrated Cabanis, and he predicted a similar end for me.”

“The physician may be mistaken!” exclaimed Dantes. “And as
for your poor arm, what difference will that make? I can
take you on my shoulders, and swim for both of us.”

“My son,” said the abbe, “you, who are a sailor and a
swimmer, must know as well as I do that a man so loaded
would sink before he had done fifty strokes. Cease, then, to
allow yourself to be duped by vain hopes, that even your own
excellent heart refuses to believe in. Here I shall remain
till the hour of my deliverance arrives, and that, in all
human probability, will be the hour of my death. As for you,
who are young and active, delay not on my account, but fly
— go-I give you back your promise.”

“It is well,” said Dantes. “Then I shall also remain.” Then,
rising and extending his hand with an air of solemnity over
the old man’s head, he slowly added, “By the blood of Christ
I swear never to leave you while you live.”

Faria gazed fondly on his noble-minded, single-hearted,
high-principled young friend, and read in his countenance
ample confirmation of the sincerity of his devotion and the
loyalty of his purpose.

“Thanks,” murmured the invalid, extending one hand. “I
accept. You may one of these days reap the reward of your
disinterested devotion. But as I cannot, and you will not,
quit this place, it becomes necessary to fill up the
excavation beneath the soldier’s gallery; he might, by
chance, hear the hollow sound of his footsteps, and call the
attention of his officer to the circumstance. That would
bring about a discovery which would inevitably lead to our
being separated. Go, then, and set about this work, in
which, unhappily, I can offer you no assistance; keep at it
all night, if necessary, and do not return here to-morrow
till after the jailer his visited me. I shall have something
of the greatest importance to communicate to you.”

Dantes took the hand of the abbe in his, and affectionately
pressed it. Faria smiled encouragingly on him, and the young
man retired to his task, in the spirit of obedience and
respect which he had sworn to show towards his aged friend.

 

When Dantes returned next morning to the chamber of his
companion in captivity, he found Faria seated and looking
composed. In the ray of light which entered by the narrow
window of his cell, he held open in his left hand, of which
alone, it will be recollected, he retained the use, a sheet
of paper, which, from being constantly rolled into a small
compass, had the form of a cylinder, and was not easily kept
open. He did not speak, but showed the paper to Dantes.

“What is that?” he inquired.

“Look at it,” said the abbe with a smile.

“I have looked at it with all possible attention,” said
Dantes, “and I only see a half-burnt paper, on which are
traces of Gothic characters inscribed with a peculiar kind
of ink.”

“This paper, my friend,” said Faria, “I may now avow to you,
since I have the proof of your fidelity — this paper is my
treasure, of which, from this day forth, one-half belongs to
you.”

The sweat started forth on Dantes brow. Until this day and
for how long a time! — he had refrained from talking of the
treasure, which had brought upon the abbe the accusation of
madness. With his instinctive delicacy Edmond had preferred
avoiding any touch on this painful chord, and Faria had been
equally silent. He had taken the silence of the old man for
a return to reason; and now these few words uttered by
Faria, after so painful a crisis, seemed to indicate a
serious relapse into mental alienation.

“Your treasure?” stammered Dantes. Faria smiled.

“Yes,” said he. “You have, indeed, a noble nature, Edmond,
and I see by your paleness and agitation what is passing in
your heart at this moment. No, be assured, I am not mad.
This treasure exists, Dantes, and if I have not been allowed
to possess it, you will. Yes — you. No one would listen or
believe me, because everyone thought me mad; but you, who
must know that I am not, listen to me, and believe me so
afterwards if you will.”

“Alas,” murmured Edmond to himself, “this is a terrible
relapse! There was only this blow wanting.” Then he said
aloud, “My dear friend, your attack has, perhaps, fatigued
you; had you not better repose awhile? To-morrow, if you
will, I will hear your narrative; but to-day I wish to nurse
you carefully. Besides,” he said, “a treasure is not a thing
we need hurry about.”

“On the contrary, it is a matter of the utmost importance,
Edmond!” replied the old man. “Who knows if to-morrow, or
the next day after, the third attack may not come on? and
then must not all be over? Yes, indeed, I have often thought
with a bitter joy that these riches, which would make the
wealth of a dozen families, will be forever lost to those
men who persecute me. This idea was one of vengeance to me,
and I tasted it slowly in the night of my dungeon and the
despair of my captivity. But now I have forgiven the world
for the love of you; now that I see you, young and with a
promising future, — now that I think of all that may result
to you in the good fortune of such a disclosure, I shudder
at any delay, and tremble lest I should not assure to one as
worthy as yourself the possession of so vast an amount of
hidden wealth.” Edmond turned away his head with a sigh.

“You persist in your incredulity, Edmond,” continued Faria.
“My words have not convinced you. I see you require proofs.
Well, then, read this paper, which I have never shown to any
one.”

“To-morrow, my dear friend,” said Edmond, desirous of not
yielding to the old man’s madness. “I thought it was
understood that we should not talk of that until to-morrow.”

“Then we will not talk of it until to-morrow; but read this
paper to-day.”

“I will not irritate him,” thought Edmond, and taking the
paper, of which half was wanting, — having been burnt, no
doubt, by some accident, — he read: —

“This treasure, which may amount to two…
of Roman crowns in the most distant a…
of the second opening wh…
declare to belong to him alo…
heir.
“25th April, 149-“

“Well!” said Faria, when the young man had finished reading
it.

“Why,” replied Dantes, “I see nothing but broken lines and
unconnected words, which are rendered illegible by fire.”

“Yes, to you, my friend, who read them for the first time;
but not for me, who have grown pale over them by many
nights’ study, and have reconstructed every phrase,
completed every thought.”

“And do you believe you have discovered the hidden meaning?”

“I am sure I have, and you shall judge for yourself; but
first listen to the history of this paper.”

“Silence!” exclaimed Dantes. “Steps approach — I go —
adieu.”

And Dantes, happy to escape the history and explanation
which would be sure to confirm his belief in his friend’s
mental instability, glided like a snake along the narrow
passage; while Faria, restored by his alarm to a certain
amount of activity, pushed the stone into place with his
foot, and covered it with a mat in order the more
effectually to avoid discovery.

It was the governor, who, hearing of Faria’s illness from
the jailer, had come in person to see him.

Faria sat up to receive him, avoiding all gestures in order
that he might conceal from the governor the paralysis that
had already half stricken him with death. His fear was lest
the governor, touched with pity, might order him to be
removed to better quarters, and thus separate him from his
young companion. But fortunately this was not the case, and
the governor left him, convinced that the poor madman, for
whom in his heart he felt a kind of affection, was only
troubled with a slight indisposition.

During this time, Edmond, seated on his bed with his head in
his hands, tried to collect his scattered thoughts. Faria,
since their first acquaintance, had been on all points so
rational and logical, so wonderfully sagacious, in fact,
that he could not understand how so much wisdom on all
points could be allied with madness. Was Faria deceived as
to his treasure, or was all the world deceived as to Faria?

Dantes remained in his cell all day, not daring to return to
his friend, thinking thus to defer the moment when he should
be convinced, once for all, that the abbe was mad — such a
conviction would be so terrible!

But, towards the evening after the hour for the customary
visit had gone by, Faria, not seeing the young man appear,
tried to move and get over the distance which separated
them. Edmond shuddered when he heard the painful efforts
which the old man made to drag himself along; his leg was
inert, and he could no longer make use of one arm. Edmond
was obliged to assist him, for otherwise he would not have
been able to enter by the small aperture which led to
Dantes’ chamber.

“Here I am, pursuing you remorselessly,” he said with a
benignant smile. “You thought to escape my munificence, but
it is in vain. Listen to me.”

Edmond saw there was no escape, and placing the old man on
his bed, he seated himself on the stool beside him.

“You know,” said the abbe, “that I was the secretary and
intimate friend of Cardinal Spada, the last of the princes
of that name. I owe to this worthy lord all the happiness I
ever knew. He was not rich, although the wealth of his
family had passed into a proverb, and I heard the phrase
very often, `As rich as a Spada.’ But he, like public rumor,
lived on this reputation for wealth; his palace was my
paradise. I was tutor to his nephews, who are dead; and when
he was alone in the world, I tried by absolute devotion to
his will, to make up to him all he had done for me during
ten years of unremitting kindness. The cardinal’s house had
no secrets for me. I had often seen my noble patron
annotating ancient volumes, and eagerly searching amongst
dusty family manuscripts. One day when I was reproaching him
for his unavailing searches, and deploring the prostration
of mind that followed them, he looked at me, and, smiling
bitterly, opened a volume relating to the History of the
City of Rome. There, in the twentieth chapter of the Life of
Pope Alexander VI., were the following lines, which I can
never forget: —

“`The great wars of Romagna had ended; Caesar Borgia, who
had completed his conquest, had need of money to purchase
all Italy. The pope had also need of money to bring matters
to an end with Louis XII. King of France, who was formidable
still in spite of his recent reverses; and it was necessary,
therefore, to have recourse to some profitable scheme, which
was a matter of great difficulty in the impoverished
condition of exhausted Italy. His holiness had an idea. He
determined to make two cardinals.’

“By choosing two of the greatest personages of Rome,
especially rich men — this was the return the holy father
looked for. In the first place, he could sell the great
appointments and splendid offices which the cardinals
already held; and then he had the two hats to sell besides.
There was a third point in view, which will appear
hereafter. The pope and Caesar Borgia first found the two
future cardinals; they were Giovanni Rospigliosi, who held
four of the highest dignities of the Holy See, and Caesar
Spada, one of the noblest and richest of the Roman nobility;
both felt the high honor of such a favor from the pope. They
were ambitious, and Caesar Borgia soon found purchasers for
their appointments. The result was, that Rospigliosi and
Spada paid for being cardinals, and eight other persons paid
for the offices the cardinals held before their elevation,
and thus eight hundred thousand crowns entered into the
coffers of the speculators.

“It is time now to proceed to the last part of the
speculation. The pope heaped attentions upon Rospigliosi and
Spada, conferred upon them the insignia of the cardinalate,
and induced them to arrange their affairs and take up their
residence at Rome. Then the pope and Caesar Borgia invited
the two cardinals to dinner. This was a matter of dispute
between the holy father and his son. Caesar thought they
could make use of one of the means which he always had ready
for his friends, that is to say, in the first place, the
famous key which was given to certain persons with the
request that they go and open a designated cupboard. This
key was furnished with a small iron point, — a negligence
on the part of the locksmith. When this was pressed to
effect the opening of the cupboard, of which the lock was
difficult, the person was pricked by this small point, and
died next day. Then there was the ring with the lion’s head,
which Caesar wore when he wanted to greet his friends with a
clasp of the hand. The lion bit the hand thus favored, and
at the end of twenty-four hours, the bite was mortal. Caesar
proposed to his father, that they should either ask the
cardinals to open the cupboard, or shake hands with them;
but Alexander VI., replied: `Now as to the worthy cardinals,
Spada and Rospigliosi, let us ask both of them to dinner,
something tells me that we shall get that money back.
Besides, you forget, Caesar, an indigestion declares itself
immediately, while a prick or a bite occasions a delay of a
day or two.’ Caesar gave way before such cogent reasoning,
and the cardinals were consequently invited to dinner.

“The table was laid in a vineyard belonging to the pope,
near San Pierdarena, a charming retreat which the cardinals
knew very well by report. Rospigliosi, quite set up with his
new dignities, went with a good appetite and his most
ingratiating manner. Spada, a prudent man, and greatly
attached to his only nephew, a young captain of the highest
promise, took paper and pen, and made his will. He then sent
word to his nephew to wait for him near the vineyard; but it
appeared the servant did not find him.

“Spada knew what these invitations meant; since
Christianity, so eminently civilizing, had made progress in
Rome, it was no longer a centurion who came from the tyrant
with a message, `Caesar wills that you die.’ but it was a
legate a latere, who came with a smile on his lips to say
from the pope, `His holiness requests you to dine with him.’

“Spada set out about two o’clock to San Pierdarena. The pope
awaited him. The first sight that attracted the eyes of
Spada was that of his nephew, in full costume, and Caesar
Borgia paying him most marked attentions. Spada turned pale,
as Caesar looked at him with an ironical air, which proved
that he had anticipated all, and that the snare was well
spread. They began dinner and Spada was only able to inquire
of his nephew if he had received his message. The nephew
replied no; perfectly comprehending the meaning of the
question. It was too late, for he had already drunk a glass
of excellent wine, placed for him expressly by the pope’s
butler. Spada at the same moment saw another bottle approach
him, which he was pressed to taste. An hour afterwards a
physician declared they were both poisoned through eating
mushrooms. Spada died on the threshold of the vineyard; the
nephew expired at his own door, making signs which his wife
could not comprehend.

“Then Caesar and the pope hastened to lay hands on the
heritage, under presence of seeking for the papers of the
dead man. But the inheritance consisted in this only, a
scrap of paper on which Spada had written: — `I bequeath to
my beloved nephew my coffers, my books, and, amongst others,
my breviary with the gold corners, which I beg he will
preserve in remembrance of his affectionate uncle.’

“The heirs sought everywhere, admired the breviary, laid
hands on the furniture, and were greatly astonished that
Spada, the rich man, was really the most miserable of uncles
— no treasures — unless they were those of science,
contained in the library and laboratories. That was all.
Caesar and his father searched, examined, scrutinized, but
found nothing, or at least very little; not exceeding a few
thousand crowns in plate, and about the same in ready money;
but the nephew had time to say to his wife before he
expired: `Look well among my uncle’s papers; there is a
will.’

“They sought even more thoroughly than the august heirs had
done, but it was fruitless. There were two palaces and a
vineyard behind the Palatine Hill; but in these days landed
property had not much value, and the two palaces and the
vineyard remained to the family since they were beneath the
rapacity of the pope and his son. Months and years rolled
on. Alexander VI. died, poisoned, — you know by what
mistake. Caesar, poisoned at the same time, escaped by
shedding his skin like a snake; but the new skin was spotted
by the poison till it looked like a tiger’s. Then, compelled
to quit Rome, he went and got himself obscurely killed in a
night skirmish, scarcely noticed in history. After the
pope’s death and his son’s exile, it was supposed that the
Spada family would resume the splendid position they had
held before the cardinal’s time; but this was not the case.
The Spadas remained in doubtful ease, a mystery hung over
this dark affair, and the public rumor was, that Caesar, a
better politician than his father, had carried off from the
pope the fortune of the two cardinals. I say the two,
because Cardinal Rospigliosi, who had not taken any
precaution, was completely despoiled.

“Up to this point,” said Faria, interrupting the thread of
his narrative, “this seems to you very meaningless, no
doubt, eh?”

“Oh, my friend,” cried Dantes, “on the contrary, it seems as
if I were reading a most interesting narrative; go on, I beg
of you.”

“I will.”

“The family began to get accustomed to their obscurity.
Years rolled on, and amongst the descendants some were
soldiers, others diplomatists; some churchmen, some bankers;
some grew rich, and some were ruined. I come now to the last
of the family, whose secretary I was — the Count of Spada.
I had often heard him complain of the disproportion of his
rank with his fortune; and I advised him to invest all he
had in an annuity. He did so, and thus doubled his income.
The celebrated breviary remained in the family, and was in
the count’s possession. It had been handed down from father
to son; for the singular clause of the only will that had
been found, had caused it to be regarded as a genuine relic,
preserved in the family with superstitious veneration. It
was an illuminated book, with beautiful Gothic characters,
and so weighty with gold, that a servant always carried it
before the cardinal on days of great solemnity.

“At the sight of papers of all sorts, — titles, contracts,
parchments, which were kept in the archives of the family,
all descending from the poisoned cardinal, I in my turn
examined the immense bundles of documents, like twenty
servitors, stewards, secretaries before me; but in spite of
the most exhaustive researches, I found — nothing. Yet I
had read, I had even written a precise history of the Borgia
family, for the sole purpose of assuring myself whether any
increase of fortune had occurred to them on the death of the
Cardinal Caesar Spada; but could only trace the acquisition
of the property of the Cardinal Rospigliosi, his companion
in misfortune.

“I was then almost assured that the inheritance had neither
profited the Borgias nor the family, but had remained
unpossessed like the treasures of the Arabian Nights, which
slept in the bosom of the earth under the eyes of the genie.
I searched, ransacked, counted, calculated a thousand and a
thousand times the income and expenditure of the family for
three hundred years. It was useless. I remained in my
ignorance, and the Count of Spada in his poverty. My patron
died. He had reserved from his annuity his family papers,
his library, composed of five thousand volumes, and his
famous breviary. All these he bequeathed to me, with a
thousand Roman crowns, which he had in ready money, on
condition that I would have anniversary masses said for the
repose of his soul, and that I would draw up a genealogical
tree and history of his house. All this I did scrupulously.
Be easy, my dear Edmond, we are near the conclusion.

“In 1807, a month before I was arrested, and a fortnight
after the death of the Count of Spada, on the 25th of
December (you will see presently how the date became fixed
in my memory), I was reading, for the thousandth time, the
papers I was arranging, for the palace was sold to a
stranger, and I was going to leave Rome and settle at
Florence, intending to take with me twelve thousand francs I
possessed, my library, and the famous breviary, when, tired
with my constant labor at the same thing, and overcome by a
heavy dinner I had eaten, my head dropped on my hands, and I
fell asleep about three o’clock in the afternoon. I awoke as
the clock was striking six. I raised my head; I was in utter
darkness. I rang for a light, but as no one came, I
determined to find one for myself. It was indeed but
anticipating the simple manners which I should soon be under
the necessity of adopting. I took a wax-candle in one hand,
and with the other groped about for a piece of paper (my
match-box being empty), with which I proposed to get a light
from the small flame still playing on the embers. Fearing,
however, to make use of any valuable piece of paper, I
hesitated for a moment, then recollected that I had seen in
the famous breviary, which was on the table beside me, an
old paper quite yellow with age, and which had served as a
marker for centuries, kept there by the request of the
heirs. I felt for it, found it, twisted it up together, and
putting it into the expiring flame, set light to it.

“But beneath my fingers, as if by magic, in proportion as
the fire ascended, I saw yellowish characters appear on the
paper. I grasped it in my hand, put out the flame as quickly
as I could, lighted my taper in the fire itself, and opened
the crumpled paper with inexpressible emotion, recognizing,
when I had done so, that these characters had been traced in
mysterious and sympathetic ink, only appearing when exposed
to the fire; nearly one-third of the paper had been consumed
by the flame. It was that paper you read this morning; read
it again, Dantes, and then I will complete for you the
incomplete words and unconnected sense.”

Faria, with an air of triumph, offered the paper to Dantes,
who this time read the following words, traced with an ink
of a reddish color resembling rust: —

“This 25th day of April, 1498, be…
Alexander VI., and fearing that not…
he may desire to become my heir, and re…
and Bentivoglio, who were poisoned,…
my sole heir, that I have bu…
and has visited with me, that is, in…
Island of Monte Cristo, all I poss…
jewels, diamonds, gems; that I alone…
may amount to nearly two mil…
will find on raising the twentieth ro…
creek to the east in a right line. Two open…
in these caves; the treasure is in the furthest a…
which treasure I bequeath and leave en…
as my sole heir.
“25th April, 1498.
“Caes…

“And now,” said the abbe, “read this other paper;” and he
presented to Dantes a second leaf with fragments of lines
written on it, which Edmond read as follows: —

“…ing invited to dine by his Holiness
…content with making me pay for my hat,
…serves for me the fate of Cardinals Caprara
…I declare to my nephew, Guido Spada
…ried in a place he knows
…the caves of the small
…essed of ingots, gold, money,
…know of the existence of this treasure, which
…lions of Roman crowns, and which he
…ck from the small
…ings have been made
…ngle in the second;
…tire to him
…ar Spada.”

Faria followed him with an excited look. “and now,” he said,
when he saw that Dantes had read the last line, “put the two
fragments together, and judge for yourself.” Dantes obeyed,
and the conjointed pieces gave the following: —

“This 25th day of April, 1498, be…ing invited to dine by
his Holiness Alexander VI., and fearing that not…content
with making me pay for my hat, he may desire to become my
heir, and re…serves for me the fate of Cardinals Caprara
and Bentivoglio, who were poisoned…I declare to my nephew,
Guido Spada, my sole heir, that I have bu…ried in a place
he knows and has visited with me, that is, in…the caves of
the small Island of Monte Cristo all I poss…ssed of
ingots, gold, money, jewels, diamonds, gems; that I
alone…know of the existence of this treasure, which may
amount to nearly two mil…lions of Roman crowns, and which
he will find on raising the twentieth ro…ck from the small
creek to the east in a right line. Two open…ings have been
made in these caves; the treasure is in the furthest
a…ngle in the second; which treasure I bequeath and leave
en…tire to him as my sole heir.
“25th April, 1498.
“Caes…ar Spada.”

“Well, do you comprehend now?” inquired Faria.

“It is the declaration of Cardinal Spada, and the will so
long sought for,” replied Edmond, still incredulous.

“Yes; a thousand times, yes!”

“And who completed it as it now is?”

“I did. Aided by the remaining fragment, I guessed the rest;
measuring the length of the lines by those of the paper, and
divining the hidden meaning by means of what was in part
revealed, as we are guided in a cavern by the small ray of
light above us.”

“And what did you do when you arrived at this conclusion?”

“I resolved to set out, and did set out at that very
instant, carrying with me the beginning of my great work,
the unity of the Italian kingdom; but for some time the
imperial police (who at this period, quite contrary to what
Napoleon desired so soon as he had a son born to him, wished
for a partition of provinces) had their eyes on me; and my
hasty departure, the cause of which they were unable to
guess, having aroused their suspicions, I was arrested at
the very moment I was leaving Piombino.

“Now,” continued Faria, addressing Dantes with an almost
paternal expression, “now, my dear fellow, you know as much
as I do myself. If we ever escape together, half this
treasure is yours; if I die here, and you escape alone, the
whole belongs to you.”

“But,” inquired Dantes hesitating, “has this treasure no
more legitimate possessor in the world than ourselves?”

“No, no, be easy on that score; the family is extinct. The
last Count of Spada, moreover, made me his heir, bequeathing
to me this symbolic breviary, he bequeathed to me all it
contained; no, no, make your mind satisfied on that point.
If we lay hands on this fortune, we may enjoy it without
remorse.”

“And you say this treasure amounts to” —

“Two millions of Roman crowns; nearly thirteen millions of
our money.”*

* $2,600,000 in 1894.

“Impossible!” said Dantes, staggered at the enormous amount.

“Impossible? and why?” asked the old man. “The Spada family
was one of the oldest and most powerful families of the
fifteenth century; and in those times, when other
opportunities for investment were wanting, such
accumulations of gold and jewels were by no means rare;
there are at this day Roman families perishing of hunger,
though possessed of nearly a million in diamonds and jewels,
handed down by entail, and which they cannot touch.” Edmond
thought he was in a dream — he wavered between incredulity
and joy.

“I have only kept this secret so long from you,” continued
Faria, “that I might test your character, and then surprise
you. Had we escaped before my attack of catalepsy, I should
have conducted you to Monte Cristo; now,” he added, with a
sigh, “it is you who will conduct me thither. Well, Dantes,
you do not thank me?”

“This treasure belongs to you, my dear friend,” replied
Dantes, “and to you only. I have no right to it. I am no
relation of yours.”

“You are my son, Dantes,” exclaimed the old man. “You are
the child of my captivity. My profession condemns me to
celibacy. God has sent you to me to console, at one and the
same time, the man who could not be a father, and the
prisoner who could not get free.” And Faria extended the arm
of which alone the use remained to him to the young man who
threw himself upon his neck and wept.

 

 

Now that this treasure, which had so long been the object of
the abbe’s meditations, could insure the future happiness of
him whom Faria really loved as a son, it had doubled its
value in his eyes, and every day he expatiated on the
amount, explaining to Dantes all the good which, with
thirteen or fourteen millions of francs, a man could do in
these days to his friends; and then Dantes’ countenance
became gloomy, for the oath of vengeance he had taken
recurred to his memory, and he reflected how much ill, in
these times, a man with thirteen or fourteen millions could
do to his enemies.

The abbe did not know the Island of Monte Cristo; but Dantes
knew it, and had often passed it, situated twenty-five miles
from Pianosa, between Corsica and the Island of Elba, and
had once touched there. This island was, always had been,
and still is, completely deserted. It is a rock of almost
conical form, which looks as though it had been thrust up by
volcanic force from the depth to the surface of the ocean.
Dantes drew a plan of the island for Faria, and Faria gave
Dantes advice as to the means he should employ to recover
the treasure. But Dantes was far from being as enthusiastic
and confident as the old man. It was past a question now
that Faria was not a lunatic, and the way in which he had
achieved the discovery, which had given rise to the
suspicion of his madness, increased Edmond’s admiration of
him; but at the same time Dantes could not believe that the
deposit, supposing it had ever existed, still existed; and
though he considered the treasure as by no means chimerical,
he yet believed it was no longer there.

However, as if fate resolved on depriving the prisoners of
their last chance, and making them understand that they were
condemned to perpetual imprisonment, a new misfortune befell
them; the gallery on the sea side, which had long been in
ruins, was rebuilt. They had repaired it completely, and
stopped up with vast masses of stone the hole Dantes had
partly filled in. But for this precaution, which, it will be
remembered, the abbe had made to Edmond, the misfortune
would have been still greater, for their attempt to escape
would have been detected, and they would undoubtedly have
been separated. Thus a new, a stronger, and more inexorable
barrier was interposed to cut off the realization of their
hopes.

“You see,” said the young man, with an air of sorrowful
resignation, to Faria, “that God deems it right to take from
me any claim to merit for what you call my devotion to you.
I have promised to remain forever with you, and now I could
not break my promise if I would. The treasure will be no
more mine than yours, and neither of us will quit this
prison. But my real treasure is not that, my dear friend,
which awaits me beneath the sombre rocks of Monte Cristo, it
is your presence, our living together five or six hours a
day, in spite of our jailers; it is the rays of intelligence
you have elicited from my brain, the languages you have
implanted in my memory, and which have taken root there with
all their philological ramifications. These different
sciences that you have made so easy to me by the depth of
the knowledge you possess of them, and the clearness of the
principles to which you have reduced them — this is my
treasure, my beloved friend, and with this you have made me
rich and happy. Believe me, and take comfort, this is better
for me than tons of gold and cases of diamonds, even were
they not as problematical as the clouds we see in the
morning floating over the sea, which we take for terra
firma, and which evaporate and vanish as we draw near to
them. To have you as long as possible near me, to hear your
eloquent speech, — which embellishes my mind, strengthens
my soul, and makes my whole frame capable of great and
terrible things, if I should ever be free, — so fills my
whole existence, that the despair to which I was just on the
point of yielding when I knew you, has no longer any hold
over me; and this — this is my fortune — not chimerical,
but actual. I owe you my real good, my present happiness;
and all the sovereigns of the earth, even Caesar Borgia
himself, could not deprive me of this.”

Thus, if not actually happy, yet the days these two
unfortunates passed together went quickly. Faria, who for so
long a time had kept silence as to the treasure, now
perpetually talked of it. As he had prophesied would be the
case, he remained paralyzed in the right arm and the left
leg, and had given up all hope of ever enjoying it himself.
But he was continually thinking over some means of escape
for his young companion, and anticipating the pleasure he
would enjoy. For fear the letter might be some day lost or
stolen, he compelled Dantes to learn it by heart; and Dantes
knew it from the first to the last word. Then he destroyed
the second portion, assured that if the first were seized,
no one would be able to discover its real meaning. Whole
hours sometimes passed while Faria was giving instructions
to Dantes, — instructions which were to serve him when he
was at liberty. Then, once free, from the day and hour and
moment when he was so, he could have but one only thought,
which was, to gain Monte Cristo by some means, and remain
there alone under some pretext which would arouse no
suspicions; and once there, to endeavor to find the
wonderful caverns, and search in the appointed spot, — the
appointed spot, be it remembered, being the farthest angle
in the second opening.

In the meanwhile the hours passed, if not rapidly, at least
tolerably. Faria, as we have said, without having recovered
the use of his hand and foot, had regained all the clearness
of his understanding, and had gradually, besides the moral
instructions we have detailed, taught his youthful companion
the patient and sublime duty of a prisoner, who learns to
make something from nothing. They were thus perpetually
employed, — Faria, that he might not see himself grow old;
Dantes, for fear of recalling the almost extinct past which
now only floated in his memory like a distant light
wandering in the night. So life went on for them as it does
for those who are not victims of misfortune and whose
activities glide along mechanically and tranquilly beneath
the eye of providence.

But beneath this superficial calm there were in the heart of
the young man, and perhaps in that of the old man, many
repressed desires, many stifled sighs, which found vent when
Faria was left alone, and when Edmond returned to his cell.
One night Edmond awoke suddenly, believing that he heard
some one calling him. He opened his eyes upon utter
darkness. His name, or rather a plaintive voice which
essayed to pronounce his name, reached him. He sat up in bed
and a cold sweat broke out upon his brow. Undoubtedly the
call came from Faria’s dungeon. “Alas,” murmured Edmond;
“can it be?”

He moved his bed, drew up the stone, rushed into the
passage, and reached the opposite extremity; the secret
entrance was open. By the light of the wretched and wavering
lamp, of which we have spoken, Dantes saw the old man, pale,
but yet erect, clinging to the bedstead. His features were
writhing with those horrible symptoms which he already knew,
and which had so seriously alarmed him when he saw them for
the first time.

“Alas, my dear friend,” said Faria in a resigned tone, “you
understand, do you not, and I need not attempt to explain to
you?”

Edmond uttered a cry of agony, and, quite out of his senses,
rushed towards the door, exclaiming, “Help, help!” Faria had
just sufficient strength to restrain him.

“Silence,” he said, “or you are lost. We must now only think
of you, my dear friend, and so act as to render your
captivity supportable or your flight possible. It would
require years to do again what I have done here, and the
results would be instantly destroyed if our jailers knew we
had communicated with each other. Besides, be assured, my
dear Edmond, the dungeon I am about to leave will not long
remain empty; some other unfortunate being will soon take my
place, and to him you will appear like an angel of
salvation. Perhaps he will be young, strong, and enduring,
like yourself, and will aid you in your escape, while I have
been but a hindrance. You will no longer have half a dead
body tied to you as a drag to all your movements. At length
providence has done something for you; he restores to you
more than he takes away, and it was time I should die.”

Edmond could only clasp his hands and exclaim, “Oh, my
friend, my friend, speak not thus!” and then resuming all
his presence of mind, which had for a moment staggered under
this blow, and his strength, which had failed at the words
of the old man, he said, “Oh, I have saved you once, and I
will save you a second time!” And raising the foot of the
bed, he drew out the phial, still a third filled with the
red liquor.

“See,” he exclaimed, “there remains still some of the magic
draught. Quick, quick! tell me what I must do this time; are
there any fresh instructions? Speak, my friend; I listen.”

“There is not a hope,” replied Faria, shaking his head, “but
no matter; God wills it that man whom he has created, and in
whose heart he has so profoundly rooted the love of life,
should do all in his power to preserve that existence,
which, however painful it may be, is yet always so dear.”

“Oh, yes, yes!” exclaimed Dantes; “and I tell you that I
will save you yet.”

“Well, then, try. The cold gains upon me. I feel the blood
flowing towards my brain. These horrible chills, which make
my teeth chatter and seem to dislocate my bones, begin to
pervade my whole frame; in five minutes the malady will
reach its height, and in a quarter of an hour there will be
nothing left of me but a corpse.”

“Oh!” exclaimed Dantes, his heart wrung with anguish.

“Do as you did before, only do not wait so long, all the
springs of life are now exhausted in me, and death,” he
continued, looking at his paralyzed arm and leg, “has but
half its work to do. If, after having made me swallow twelve
drops instead of ten, you see that I do not recover, then
pour the rest down my throat. Now lift me on my bed, for I
can no longer support myself.”

Edmond took the old man in his arms, and laid him on the
bed.

“And now, my dear friend,” said Faria, “sole consolation of
my wretched existence, — you whom heaven gave me somewhat
late, but still gave me, a priceless gift, and for which I
am most grateful, — at the moment of separating from you
forever, I wish you all the happiness and all the prosperity
you so well deserve. My son, I bless thee!” The young man
cast himself on his knees, leaning his head against the old
man’s bed.

“Listen, now, to what I say in this my dying moment. The
treasure of the Spadas exists. God grants me the boon of
vision unrestricted by time or space. I see it in the depths
of the inner cavern. My eyes pierce the inmost recesses of
the earth, and are dazzled at the sight of so much riches.
If you do escape, remember that the poor abbe, whom all the
world called mad, was not so. Hasten to Monte Cristo —
avail yourself of the fortune — for you have indeed
suffered long enough.” A violent convulsion attacked the old
man. Dantes raised his head and saw Faria’s eyes injected
with blood. It seemed as if a flow of blood had ascended
from the chest to the head.

“Adieu, adieu!” murmured the old man, clasping Edmond’s hand
convulsively — “adieu!”

“Oh, no, — no, not yet,” he cried; “do not forsake me! Oh,
succor him! Help — help — help!”

“Hush — hush!” murmured the dying man, “that they may not
separate us if you save me!”

“You are right. Oh, yes, yes; be assured I shall save you!
Besides, although you suffer much, you do not seem to be in
such agony as you were before.”

“Do not mistake. I suffer less because there is in me less
strength to endure. At your age we have faith in life; it is
the privilege of youth to believe and hope, but old men see
death more clearly. Oh, ’tis here — ’tis here — ’tis over
— my sight is gone — my senses fail! Your hand, Dantes!
Adieu — adieu!” And raising himself by a final effort, in
which he summoned all his faculties, he said, — “Monte
Cristo, forget not Monte Cristo!” And he fell back on the
bed. The crisis was terrible, and a rigid form with twisted
limbs, swollen eyelids, and lips flecked with bloody foam,
lay on the bed of torture, in place of the intellectual
being who so lately rested there.

Dantes took the lamp, placed it on a projecting stone above
the bed, whence its tremulous light fell with strange and
fantastic ray on the distorted countenance and motionless,
stiffened body. With steady gaze he awaited confidently the
moment for administering the restorative.

When he believed that the right moment had arrived, he took
the knife, pried open the teeth, which offered less
resistance than before, counted one after the other twelve
drops, and watched; the phial contained, perhaps, twice as
much more. He waited ten minutes, a quarter of an hour, half
an hour, — no change took place. Trembling, his hair erect,
his brow bathed with perspiration, he counted the seconds by
the beating of his heart. Then he thought it was time to
make the last trial, and he put the phial to the purple lips
of Faria, and without having occasion to force open his
jaws, which had remained extended, he poured the whole of
the liquid down his throat.

The draught produced a galvanic effect, a violent trembling
pervaded the old man’s limbs, his eyes opened until it was
fearful to gaze upon them, he heaved a sigh which resembled
a shriek, and then his convulsed body returned gradually to
its former immobility, the eyes remaining open.

Half an hour, an hour, an hour and a half elapsed, and
during this period of anguish, Edmond leaned over his
friend, his hand applied to his heart, and felt the body
gradually grow cold, and the heart’s pulsation become more
and more deep and dull, until at length it stopped; the last
movement of the heart ceased, the face became livid, the
eyes remained open, but the eyeballs were glazed. It was six
o’clock in the morning, the dawn was just breaking, and its
feeble ray came into the dungeon, and paled the ineffectual
light of the lamp. Strange shadows passed over the
countenance of the dead man, and at times gave it the
appearance of life. While the struggle between day and night
lasted, Dantes still doubted; but as soon as the daylight
gained the pre-eminence, he saw that he was alone with a
corpse. Then an invincible and extreme terror seized upon
him, and he dared not again press the hand that hung out of
bed, he dared no longer to gaze on those fixed and vacant
eyes, which he tried many times to close, but in vain —
they opened again as soon as shut. He extinguished the lamp,
carefully concealed it, and then went away, closing as well
as he could the entrance to the secret passage by the large
stone as he descended.

It was time, for the jailer was coming. On this occasion he
began his rounds at Dantes’ cell, and on leaving him he went
on to Faria’s dungeon, taking thither breakfast and some
linen. Nothing betokened that the man know anything of what
had occurred. He went on his way.

Dantes was then seized with an indescribable desire to know
what was going on in the dungeon of his unfortunate friend.
He therefore returned by the subterraneous gallery, and
arrived in time to hear the exclamations of the turnkey, who
called out for help. Other turnkeys came, and then was heard
the regular tramp of soldiers. Last of all came the
governor.

Edmond heard the creaking of the bed as they moved the
corpse, heard the voice of the governor, who asked them to
throw water on the dead man’s face; and seeing that, in
spite of this application, the prisoner did not recover,
they sent for the doctor. The governor then went out, and
words of pity fell on Dantes’ listening ears, mingled with
brutal laughter.

“Well, well,” said one, “the madman has gone to look after
his treasure. Good journey to him!”

“With all his millions, he will not have enough to pay for
his shroud!” said another.

“Oh,” added a third voice, “the shrouds of the Chateau d’If
are not dear!”

“Perhaps,” said one of the previous speakers, “as he was a
churchman, they may go to some expense in his behalf.”

“They may give him the honors of the sack.”

Edmond did not lose a word, but comprehended very little of
what was said. The voices soon ceased, and it seemed to him
as if every one had left the cell. Still he dared not to
enter, as they might have left some turnkey to watch the
dead. He remained, therefore, mute and motionless, hardly
venturing to breathe. At the end of an hour, he heard a
faint noise, which increased. It was the governor who
returned, followed by the doctor and other attendants. There
was a moment’s silence, — it was evident that the doctor
was examining the dead body. The inquiries soon commenced.

The doctor analyzed the symptoms of the malady to which the
prisoner had succumbed, and declared that he was dead.
Questions and answers followed in a nonchalant manner that
made Dantes indignant, for he felt that all the world should
have for the poor abbe a love and respect equal to his own.

“I am very sorry for what you tell me,” said the governor,
replying to the assurance of the doctor, “that the old man
is really dead; for he was a quiet, inoffensive prisoner,
happy in his folly, and required no watching.”

“Ah,” added the turnkey, “there was no occasion for watching
him: he would have stayed here fifty years, I’ll answer for
it, without any attempt to escape.”

“Still,” said the governor, “I believe it will be requisite,
notwithstanding your certainty, and not that I doubt your
science, but in discharge of my official duty, that we
should be perfectly assured that the prisoner is dead.”
There was a moment of complete silence, during which Dantes,
still listening, knew that the doctor was examining the
corpse a second time.

“You may make your mind easy,” said the doctor; “he is dead.
I will answer for that.”

“You know, sir,” said the governor, persisting, “that we are
not content in such cases as this with such a simple
examination. In spite of all appearances, be so kind,
therefore, as to finish your duty by fulfilling the
formalities described by law.”

“Let the irons be heated,” said the doctor; “but really it
is a useless precaution.” This order to heat the irons made
Dantes shudder. He heard hasty steps, the creaking of a
door, people going and coming, and some minutes afterwards a
turnkey entered, saying, —

“Here is the brazier, lighted.” There was a moment’s
silence, and then was heard the crackling of burning flesh,
of which the peculiar and nauseous smell penetrated even
behind the wall where Dantes was listening in horror. The
perspiration poured forth upon the young man’s brow, and he
felt as if he should faint.

“You see, sir, he is really dead,” said the doctor; “this
burn in the heel is decisive. The poor fool is cured of his
folly, and delivered from his captivity.”

“Wasn’t his name Faria?” inquired one of the officers who
accompanied the governor.

“Yes, sir; and, as he said, it was an ancient name. He was,
too, very learned, and rational enough on all points which
did not relate to his treasure; but on that, indeed, he was
intractable.”

“It is the sort of malady which we call monomania,” said the
doctor.

“You had never anything to complain of?” said the governor
to the jailer who had charge of the abbe.

“Never, sir,” replied the jailer, “never; on the contrary,
he sometimes amused me very much by telling me stories. One
day, too, when my wife was ill, he gave me a prescription
which cured her.”

“Ah, ah!” said the doctor, “I did not know that I had a
rival; but I hope, governor, that you will show him all
proper respect.”

“Yes, yes, make your mind easy, he shall be decently
interred in the newest sack we can find. Will that satisfy
you?”

“Must this last formality take place in your presence, sir?”
inquired a turnkey.

“Certainly. But make haste — I cannot stay here all day.”
Other footsteps, going and coming, were now heard, and a
moment afterwards the noise of rustling canvas reached
Dantes’ ears, the bed creaked, and the heavy footfall of a
man who lifts a weight sounded on the floor; then the bed
again creaked under the weight deposited upon it.

“This evening,” said the governor.

“Will there be any mass?” asked one of the attendants.

“That is impossible,” replied the governor. “The chaplain of
the chateau came to me yesterday to beg for leave of
absence, in order to take a trip to Hyeres for a week. I
told him I would attend to the prisoners in his absence. If
the poor abbe had not been in such a hurry, he might have
had his requiem.”

“Pooh, pooh;” said the doctor, with the impiety usual in
persons of his profession; “he is a churchman. God will
respect his profession, and not give the devil the wicked
delight of sending him a priest.” A shout of laughter
followed this brutal jest. Meanwhile the operation of
putting the body in the sack was going on.

“This evening,” said the governor, when the task was ended.

“At what hour?” inquired a turnkey.

“Why, about ten or eleven o’clock.”

“Shall we watch by the corpse?”

“Of what use would it be? Shut the dungeon as if he were
alive — that is all.” Then the steps retreated, and the
voices died away in the distance; the noise of the door,
with its creaking hinges and bolts ceased, and a silence
more sombre than that of solitude ensued, — the silence of
death, which was all-pervasive, and struck its icy chill to
the very soul of Dantes. Then he raised the flag-stone
cautiously with his head, and looked carefully around the
chamber. It was empty, and Dantes emerged from the tunnel.

 

On the bed, at full length, and faintly illuminated by the
pale light that came from the window, lay a sack of canvas,
and under its rude folds was stretched a long and stiffened
form; it was Faria’s last winding-sheet, — a winding-sheet
which, as the turnkey said, cost so little. Everything was
in readiness. A barrier had been placed between Dantes and
his old friend. No longer could Edmond look into those
wide-open eyes which had seemed to be penetrating the
mysteries of death; no longer could he clasp the hand which
had done so much to make his existence blessed. Faria, the
beneficent and cheerful companion, with whom he was
accustomed to live so intimately, no longer breathed. He
seated himself on the edge of that terrible bed, and fell
into melancholy and gloomy revery.

Alone — he was alone again — again condemned to silence —
again face to face with nothingness! Alone! — never again
to see the face, never again to hear the voice of the only
human being who united him to earth! Was not Faria’s fate
the better, after all — to solve the problem of life at its
source, even at the risk of horrible suffering? The idea of
suicide, which his friend had driven away and kept away by
his cheerful presence, now hovered like a phantom over the
abbe’s dead body.

“If I could die,” he said, “I should go where he goes, and
should assuredly find him again. But how to die? It is very
easy,” he went on with a smile; “I will remain here, rush on
the first person that opens the door, strangle him, and then
they will guillotine me.” But excessive grief is like a
storm at sea, where the frail bark is tossed from the depths
to the top of the wave. Dantes recoiled from the idea of so
infamous a death, and passed suddenly from despair to an
ardent desire for life and liberty.

“Die? oh, no,” he exclaimed — “not die now, after having
lived and suffered so long and so much! Die? yes, had I died
years ago; but now to die would be, indeed, to give way to
the sarcasm of destiny. No, I want to live; I shall struggle
to the very last; I will yet win back the happiness of which
I have been deprived. Before I die I must not forget that I
have my executioners to punish, and perhaps, too, who knows,
some friends to reward. Yet they will forget me here, and I
shall die in my dungeon like Faria.” As he said this, he
became silent and gazed straight before him like one
overwhelmed with a strange and amazing thought. Suddenly he
arose, lifted his hand to his brow as if his brain wore
giddy, paced twice or thrice round the dungeon, and then
paused abruptly by the bed.

“Just God!” he muttered, “whence comes this thought? Is it
from thee? Since none but the dead pass freely from this
dungeon, let me take the place of the dead!” Without giving
himself time to reconsider his decision, and, indeed, that
he might not allow his thoughts to be distracted from his
desperate resolution, he bent over the appalling shroud,
opened it with the knife which Faria had made, drew the
corpse from the sack, and bore it along the tunnel to his
own chamber, laid it on his couch, tied around its head the
rag he wore at night around his own, covered it with his
counterpane, once again kissed the ice-cold brow, and tried
vainly to close the resisting eyes, which glared horribly,
turned the head towards the wall, so that the jailer might,
when he brought the evening meal, believe that he was
asleep, as was his frequent custom; entered the tunnel
again, drew the bed against the wall, returned to the other
cell, took from the hiding-place the needle and thread,
flung off his rags, that they might feel only naked flesh
beneath the coarse canvas, and getting inside the sack,
placed himself in the posture in which the dead body had
been laid, and sewed up the mouth of the sack from the
inside.

He would have been discovered by the beating of his heart,
if by any mischance the jailers had entered at that moment.
Dantes might have waited until the evening visit was over,
but he was afraid that the governor would change his mind,
and order the dead body to be removed earlier. In that case
his last hope would have been destroyed. Now his plans were
fully made, and this is what he intended to do. If while he
was being carried out the grave-diggers should discover that
they were bearing a live instead of a dead body, Dantes did
not intend to give them time to recognize him, but with a
sudden cut of the knife, he meant to open the sack from top
to bottom, and, profiting by their alarm, escape; if they
tried to catch him, he would use his knife to better
purpose.

If they took him to the cemetery and laid him in a grave, he
would allow himself to be covered with earth, and then, as
it was night, the grave-diggers could scarcely have turned
their backs before he would have worked his way through the
yielding soil and escaped. He hoped that the weight of earth
would not be so great that he could not overcome it. If he
was detected in this and the earth proved too heavy, he
would be stifled, and then — so much the better, all would
be over. Dantes had not eaten since the preceding evening,
but he had not thought of hunger, nor did he think of it
now. His situation was too precarious to allow him even time
to reflect on any thought but one.

The first risk that Dantes ran was, that the jailer, when he
brought him his supper at seven o’clock, might perceive the
change that had been made; fortunately, twenty times at
least, from misanthropy or fatigue, Dantes had received his
jailer in bed, and then the man placed his bread and soup on
the table, and went away without saying a word. This time
the jailer might not be as silent as usual, but speak to
Dantes, and seeing that he received no reply, go to the bed,
and thus discover all.

When seven o’clock came, Dantes’ agony really began. His
hand placed upon his heart was unable to redress its
throbbings, while, with the other he wiped the perspiration
from his temples. From time to time chills ran through his
whole body, and clutched his heart in a grasp of ice. Then
he thought he was going to die. Yet the hours passed on
without any unusual disturbance, and Dantes knew that he had
escaped the first peril. It was a good augury. At length,
about the hour the governor had appointed, footsteps were
heard on the stairs. Edmond felt that the moment had
arrived, summoned up all his courage, held his breath, and
would have been happy if at the same time he could have
repressed the throbbing of his veins. The footsteps — they
were double — paused at the door — and Dantes guessed that
the two grave-diggers had come to seek him — this idea was
soon converted into certainty, when he heard the noise they
made in putting down the hand-bier. The door opened, and a
dim light reached Dantes’ eyes through the coarse sack that
covered him; he saw two shadows approach his bed, a third
remaining at the door with a torch in its hand. The two men,
approaching the ends of the bed, took the sack by its
extremities.

“He’s heavy though for an old and thin man,” said one, as he
raised the head.

“They say every year adds half a pound to the weight of the
bones,” said another, lifting the feet.

“Have you tied the knot?” inquired the first speaker.

“What would be the use of carrying so much more weight?” was
the reply, “I can do that when we get there.”

“Yes, you’re right,” replied the companion.

“What’s the knot for?” thought Dantes.

They deposited the supposed corpse on the bier. Edmond
stiffened himself in order to play the part of a dead man,
and then the party, lighted by the man with the torch, who
went first, ascended the stairs. Suddenly he felt the fresh
and sharp night air, and Dantes knew that the mistral was
blowing. It was a sensation in which pleasure and pain were
strangely mingled. The bearers went on for twenty paces,
then stopped, putting the bier down on the ground. One of
them went away, and Dantes heard his shoes striking on the
pavement.

“Where am I?” he asked himself.

“Really, he is by no means a light load!” said the other
bearer, sitting on the edge of the hand-barrow. Dantes’
first impulse was to escape, but fortunately he did not
attempt it.

“Give us a light,” said the other bearer, “or I shall never
find what I am looking for.” The man with the torch
complied, although not asked in the most polite terms.

“What can he be looking for?” thought Edmond. “The spade,
perhaps.” An exclamation of satisfaction indicated that the
grave-digger had found the object of his search. “Here it is
at last,” he said, “not without some trouble though.”

“Yes,” was the answer, “but it has lost nothing by waiting.”

As he said this, the man came towards Edmond, who heard a
heavy metallic substance laid down beside him, and at the
same moment a cord was fastened round his feet with sudden
and painful violence.

“Well, have you tied the knot?” inquired the grave-digger,
who was looking on.

“Yes, and pretty tight too, I can tell you,” was the answer.

“Move on, then.” And the bier was lifted once more, and they
proceeded.

They advanced fifty paces farther, and then stopped to open
a door, then went forward again. The noise of the waves
dashing against the rocks on which the chateau is built,
reached Dantes’ ear distinctly as they went forward.

“Bad weather!” observed one of the bearers; “not a pleasant
night for a dip in the sea.”

“Why, yes, the abbe runs a chance of being wet,” said the
other; and then there was a burst of brutal laughter. Dantes
did not comprehend the jest, but his hair stood erect on his
head.

“Well, here we are at last,” said one of them. “A little
farther — a little farther,” said the other. “You know very
well that the last was stopped on his way, dashed on the
rocks, and the governor told us next day that we were
careless fellows.”

They ascended five or six more steps, and then Dantes felt
that they took him, one by the head and the other by the
heels, and swung him to and fro. “One!” said the
grave-diggers, “two! three!” And at the same instant Dantes
felt himself flung into the air like a wounded bird,
falling, falling, with a rapidity that made his blood
curdle. Although drawn downwards by the heavy weight which
hastened his rapid descent, it seemed to him as if the fall
lasted for a century.

At last, with a horrible splash, he darted like an arrow
into the ice-cold water, and as he did so he uttered a
shrill cry, stifled in a moment by his immersion beneath the
waves.

Dantes had been flung into the sea, and was dragged into its
depths by a thirty-six pound shot tied to his feet. The sea
is the cemetery of the Chateau d’If.

 

Dantes, although stunned and almost suffocated, had
sufficient presence of mind to hold his breath, and as his
right hand (prepared as he was for every chance) held his
knife open, he rapidly ripped up the sack, extricated his
arm, and then his body; but in spite of all his efforts to
free himself from the shot, he felt it dragging him down
still lower. He then bent his body, and by a desperate
effort severed the cord that bound his legs, at the moment
when it seemed as if he were actually strangled. With a
mighty leap he rose to the surface of the sea, while the
shot dragged down to the depths the sack that had so nearly
become his shroud.

Dantes waited only to get breath, and then dived, in order
to avoid being seen. When he arose a second time, he was
fifty paces from where he had first sunk. He saw overhead a
black and tempestuous sky, across which the wind was driving
clouds that occasionally suffered a twinkling star to
appear; before him was the vast expanse of waters, sombre
and terrible, whose waves foamed and roared as if before the
approach of a storm. Behind him, blacker than the sea,
blacker than the sky, rose phantom-like the vast stone
structure, whose projecting crags seemed like arms extended
to seize their prey, and on the highest rock was a torch
lighting two figures. He fancied that these two forms were
looking at the sea; doubtless these strange grave-diggers
had heard his cry. Dantes dived again, and remained a long
time beneath the water. This was an easy feat to him, for he
usually attracted a crowd of spectators in the bay before
the lighthouse at Marseilles when he swam there, and was
unanimously declared to be the best swimmer in the port.
When he came up again the light had disappeared.

He must now get his bearings. Ratonneau and Pomegue are the
nearest islands of all those that surround the Chateau d’If,
but Ratonneau and Pomegue are inhabited, as is also the
islet of Daume. Tiboulen and Lemaire were therefore the
safest for Dantes’ venture. The islands of Tiboulen and
Lemaire are a league from the Chateau d’If; Dantes,
nevertheless, determined to make for them. But how could he
find his way in the darkness of the night? At this moment he
saw the light of Planier, gleaming in front of him like a
star. By leaving this light on the right, he kept the Island
of Tiboulen a little on the left; by turning to the left,
therefore, he would find it. But, as we have said, it was at
least a league from the Chateau d’If to this island. Often
in prison Faria had said to him, when he saw him idle and
inactive, “Dantes, you must not give way to this
listlessness; you will be drowned if you seek to escape, and
your strength has not been properly exercised and prepared
for exertion.” These words rang in Dantes’ ears, even
beneath the waves; he hastened to cleave his way through
them to see if he had not lost his strength. He found with
pleasure that his captivity had taken away nothing of his
power, and that he was still master of that element on whose
bosom he had so often sported as a boy.

Fear, that relentless pursuer, clogged Dantes’ efforts. He
listened for any sound that might be audible, and every time
that he rose to the top of a wave he scanned the horizon,
and strove to penetrate the darkness. He fancied that every
wave behind him was a pursuing boat, and he redoubled his
exertions, increasing rapidly his distance from the chateau,
but exhausting his strength. He swam on still, and already
the terrible chateau had disappeared in the darkness. He
could not see it, but he felt its presence. An hour passed,
during which Dantes, excited by the feeling of freedom,
continued to cleave the waves. “Let us see,” said he, “I
have swum above an hour, but as the wind is against me, that
has retarded my speed; however, if I am not mistaken, I must
be close to Tiboulen. But what if I were mistaken?” A
shudder passed over him. He sought to tread water, in order
to rest himself; but the sea was too violent, and he felt
that he could not make use of this means of recuperation.

“Well,” said he, “I will swim on until I am worn out, or the
cramp seizes me, and then I shall sink;” and he struck out
with the energy of despair.

Suddenly the sky seemed to him to become still darker and
more dense, and heavy clouds seemed to sweep down towards
him; at the same time he felt a sharp pain in his knee. He
fancied for a moment that he had been shot, and listened for
the report; but he heard nothing. Then he put out his hand,
and encountered an obstacle and with another stroke knew
that he had gained the shore.

Before him rose a grotesque mass of rocks, that resembled
nothing so much as a vast fire petrified at the moment of
its most fervent combustion. It was the Island of Tiboulen.
Dantes rose, advanced a few steps, and, with a fervent
prayer of gratitude, stretched himself on the granite, which
seemed to him softer than down. Then, in spite of the wind
and rain, he fell into the deep, sweet sleep of utter
exhaustion. At the expiration of an hour Edmond was awakened
by the roar of thunder. The tempest was let loose and
beating the atmosphere with its mighty wings; from time to
time a flash of lightning stretched across the heavens like
a fiery serpent, lighting up the clouds that rolled on in
vast chaotic waves.

Dantes had not been deceived — he had reached the first of
the two islands, which was, in fact, Tiboulen. He knew that
it was barren and without shelter; but when the sea became
more calm, he resolved to plunge into its waves again, and
swim to Lemaire, equally arid, but larger, and consequently
better adapted for concealment.

An overhanging rock offered him a temporary shelter, and
scarcely had he availed himself of it when the tempest burst
forth in all its fury. Edmond felt the trembling of the rock
beneath which he lay; the waves, dashing themselves against
it, wetted him with their spray. He was safely sheltered,
and yet he felt dizzy in the midst of the warring of the
elements and the dazzling brightness of the lightning. It
seemed to him that the island trembled to its base, and that
it would, like a vessel at anchor, break moorings, and bear
him off into the centre of the storm. He then recollected
that he had not eaten or drunk for four-and-twenty hours. He
extended his hands, and drank greedily of the rainwater that
had lodged in a hollow of the rock.

As he rose, a flash of lightning, that seemed to rive the
remotest heights of heaven, illumined the darkness. By its
light, between the Island of Lemaire and Cape Croiselle, a
quarter of a league distant, Dantes saw a fishing-boat
driven rapidly like a spectre before the power of winds and
waves. A second after, he saw it again, approaching with
frightful rapidity. Dantes cried at the top of his voice to
warn them of their danger, but they saw it themselves.
Another flash showed him four men clinging to the shattered
mast and the rigging, while a fifth clung to the broken
rudder.

The men he beheld saw him undoubtedly, for their cries were
carried to his ears by the wind. Above the splintered mast a
sail rent to tatters was waving; suddenly the ropes that
still held it gave way, and it disappeared in the darkness
of the night like a vast sea-bird. At the same moment a
violent crash was heard, and cries of distress. Dantes from
his rocky perch saw the shattered vessel, and among the
fragments the floating forms of the hapless sailors. Then
all was dark again.

Dantes ran down the rocks at the risk of being himself
dashed to pieces; he listened, he groped about, but he heard
and saw nothing — the cries had ceased, and the tempest
continued to rage. By degrees the wind abated, vast gray
clouds rolled towards the west, and the blue firmament
appeared studded with bright stars. Soon a red streak became
visible in the horizon, the waves whitened, a light played
over them, and gilded their foaming crests with gold. It was
day.

Dantes stood mute and motionless before this majestic
spectacle, as if he now beheld it for the first time; and
indeed since his captivity in the Chateau d’If he had
forgotten that such scenes were ever to be witnessed. He
turned towards the fortress, and looked at both sea and
land. The gloomy building rose from the bosom of the ocean
with imposing majesty and seemed to dominate the scene. It
was about five o’clock. The sea continued to get calmer.

“In two or three hours,” thought Dantes, “the turnkey will
enter my chamber, find the body of my poor friend, recognize
it, seek for me in vain, and give the alarm. Then the tunnel
will be discovered; the men who cast me into the sea and who
must have heard the cry I uttered, will be questioned. Then
boats filled with armed soldiers will pursue the wretched
fugitive. The cannon will warn every one to refuse shelter
to a man wandering about naked and famished. The police of
Marseilles will be on the alert by land, whilst the governor
pursues me by sea. I am cold, I am hungry. I have lost even
the knife that saved me. O my God, I have suffered enough
surely! Have pity on me, and do for me what I am unable to
do for myself.”

As Dantes (his eyes turned in the direction of the Chateau
d’If) uttered this prayer, he saw off the farther point of
the Island of Pomegue a small vessel with lateen sail
skimming the sea like a gull in search of prey; and with his
sailor’s eye he knew it to be a Genoese tartan. She was
coming out of Marseilles harbor, and was standing out to sea
rapidly, her sharp prow cleaving through the waves. “Oh,”
cried Edmond, “to think that in half an hour I could join
her, did I not fear being questioned, detected, and conveyed
back to Marseilles! What can I do? What story can I invent?
under pretext of trading along the coast, these men, who are
in reality smugglers, will prefer selling me to doing a good
action. I must wait. But I cannot —I am starving. In a few
hours my strength will be utterly exhausted; besides,
perhaps I have not been missed at the fortress. I can pass
as one of the sailors wrecked last night. My story will be
accepted, for there is no one left to contradict me.”

As he spoke, Dantes looked toward the spot where the
fishing-vessel had been wrecked, and started. The red cap of
one of the sailors hung to a point of the rock and some
timbers that had formed part of the vessel’s keel, floated
at the foot of the crag. In an instant Dantes’ plan was
formed. He swam to the cap, placed it on his head, seized
one of the timbers, and struck out so as to cut across the
course the vessel was taking.

“I am saved!” murmured he. And this conviction restored his
strength.

He soon saw that the vessel, with the wind dead ahead, was
tacking between the Chateau d’If and the tower of Planier.
For an instant he feared lest, instead of keeping in shore,
she should stand out to sea; but he soon saw that she would
pass, like most vessels bound for Italy, between the islands
of Jaros and Calaseraigne. However, the vessel and the
swimmer insensibly neared one another, and in one of its
tacks the tartan bore down within a quarter of a mile of
him. He rose on the waves, making signs of distress; but no
one on board saw him, and the vessel stood on another tack.
Dantes would have shouted, but he knew that the wind would
drown his voice.

It was then he rejoiced at his precaution in taking the
timber, for without it he would have been unable, perhaps,
to reach the vessel — certainly to return to shore, should
he be unsuccessful in attracting attention.

Dantes, though almost sure as to what course the vessel
would take, had yet watched it anxiously until it tacked and
stood towards him. Then he advanced; but before they could
meet, the vessel again changed her course. By a violent
effort he rose half out of the water, waving his cap, and
uttering a loud shout peculiar to sailers. This time he was
both seen and heard, and the tartan instantly steered
towards him. At the same time, he saw they were about to
lower the boat.

An instant after, the boat, rowed by two men, advanced
rapidly towards him. Dantes let go of the timber, which he
now thought to be useless, and swam vigorously to meet them.
But he had reckoned too much upon his strength, and then he
realized how serviceable the timber had been to him. His
arms became stiff, his legs lost their flexibility, and he
was almost breathless.

He shouted again. The two sailors redoubled their efforts,
and one of them cried in Italian, “Courage!”

The word reached his ear as a wave which he no longer had
the strength to surmount passed over his head. He rose again
to the surface, struggled with the last desperate effort of
a drowning man, uttered a third cry, and felt himself
sinking, as if the fatal cannon shot were again tied to his
feet. The water passed over his head, and the sky turned
gray. A convulsive movement again brought him to the
surface. He felt himself seized by the hair, then he saw and
heard nothing. He had fainted.

When he opened his eyes Dantes found himself on the deck of
the tartan. His first care was to see what course they were
taking. They were rapidly leaving the Chateau d’If behind.
Dantes was so exhausted that the exclamation of joy he
uttered was mistaken for a sigh.

As we have said, he was lying on the deck. A sailor was
rubbing his limbs with a woollen cloth; another, whom he
recognized as the one who had cried out “Courage!” held a
gourd full of rum to his mouth; while the third, an old
sailer, at once the pilot and captain, looked on with that
egotistical pity men feel for a misfortune that they have
escaped yesterday, and which may overtake them to-morrow.

A few drops of the rum restored suspended animation, while
the friction of his limbs restored their elasticity.

“Who are you?” said the pilot in bad French.

“I am,” replied Dantes, in bad Italian, “a Maltese sailor.
We were coming from Syracuse laden with grain. The storm of
last night overtook us at Cape Morgion, and we were wrecked
on these rocks.”

“Where do you come from?”

“From these rocks that I had the good luck to cling to while
our captain and the rest of the crew were all lost. I saw
your vessel, and fearful of being left to perish on the
desolate island, I swam off on a piece of wreckage to try
and intercept your course. You have saved my life, and I
thank you,” continued Dantes. “I was lost when one of your
sailors caught hold of my hair.”

“It was I,” said a sailor of a frank and manly appearance;
“and it was time, for you were sinking.”

“Yes,” returned Dantes, holding out his hand, “I thank you
again.”

“I almost hesitated, though,” replied the sailor; “you
looked more like a brigand than an honest man, with your
beard six inches, and your hair a foot long.” Dantes
recollected that his hair and beard had not been cut all the
time he was at the Chateau d’If.

“Yes,” said he, “I made a vow, to our Lady of the Grotto not
to cut my hair or beard for ten years if I were saved in a
moment of danger; but to-day the vow expires.”

“Now what are we to do with you?” said the captain.

“Alas, anything you please. My captain is dead; I have
barely escaped; but I am a good sailor. Leave me at the
first port you make; I shall be sure to find employment.”

“Do you know the Mediterranean?”

“I have sailed over it since my childhood.”

“You know the best harbors?”

“There are few ports that I could not enter or leave with a
bandage over my eyes.”

“I say, captain,” said the sailor who had cried “Courage!”
to Dantes, “if what he says is true, what hinders his
staying with us?”

“If he says true,” said the captain doubtingly. “But in his
present condition he will promise anything, and take his
chance of keeping it afterwards.”

“I will do more than I promise,” said Dantes.

“We shall see,” returned the other, smiling.

“Where are you going?” asked Dantes.

“To Leghorn.”

“Then why, instead of tacking so frequently, do you not sail
nearer the wind?”

“Because we should run straight on to the Island of Rion.”

“You shall pass it by twenty fathoms.”

“Take the helm, and let us see what you know.” The young man
took the helm, felt to see if the vessel answered the rudder
promptly and seeing that, without being a first-rate sailer,
she yet was tolerably obedient, —

“To the sheets,” said he. The four seamen, who composed the
crew, obeyed, while the pilot looked on. “Haul taut.” —
They obeyed.

“Belay.” This order was also executed; and the vessel
passed, as Dantes had predicted, twenty fathoms to windward.

“Bravo!” said the captain.

“Bravo!” repeated the sailors. And they all looked with
astonishment at this man whose eye now disclosed an
intelligence and his body a vigor they had not thought him
capable of showing.

“You see,” said Dantes, quitting the helm, “I shall be of
some use to you, at least during the voyage. If you do not
want me at Leghorn, you can leave me there, and I will pay
you out of the first wages I get, for my food and the
clothes you lend me.”

“Ah,” said the captain, “we can agree very well, if you are
reasonable.”

“Give me what you give the others, and it will be all
right,” returned Dantes.

“That’s not fair,” said the seaman who had saved Dantes;
“for you know more than we do.”

“What is that to you, Jacopo?” returned the Captain. “Every
one is free to ask what he pleases.”

“That’s true,” replied Jacopo; “I only make a remark.”

“Well, you would do much better to find him a jacket and a
pair of trousers, if you have them.”

“No,” said Jacopo; “but I have a shirt and a pair of
trousers.”

“That is all I want,” interrupted Dantes. Jacopo dived into
the hold and soon returned with what Edmond wanted.

“Now, then, do you wish for anything else?” said the patron.

“A piece of bread and another glass of the capital rum I
tasted, for I have not eaten or drunk for a long time.” He
had not tasted food for forty hours. A piece of bread was
brought, and Jacopo offered him the gourd.

“Larboard your helm,” cried the captain to the steersman.
Dantes glanced that way as he lifted the gourd to his mouth;
then paused with hand in mid-air.

“Hollo! what’s the matter at the Chateau d’If?” said the
captain.

A small white cloud, which had attracted Dantes’ attention,
crowned the summit of the bastion of the Chateau d’If. At
the same moment the faint report of a gun was heard. The
sailors looked at one another.

“What is this?” asked the captain.

“A prisoner has escaped from the Chateau d’If, and they are
firing the alarm gun,” replied Dantes. The captain glanced
at him, but he had lifted the rum to his lips and was
drinking it with so much composure, that suspicions, if the
captain had any, died away.

“At any rate,” murmured he, “if it be, so much the better,
for I have made a rare acquisition.” Under pretence of being
fatigued, Dantes asked to take the helm; the steersman, glad
to be relieved, looked at the captain, and the latter by a
sign indicated that he might abandon it to his new comrade.
Dantes could thus keep his eyes on Marseilles.

“What is the day of the month?” asked he of Jacopo, who sat
down beside him.

“The 28th of February.”

“In what year?”

“In what year — you ask me in what year?”

“Yes,” replied the young man, “I ask you in what year!”

“You have forgotten then?”

“I got such a fright last night,” replied Dantes, smiling,
“that I have almost lost my memory. I ask you what year is
it?”

“The year 1829,” returned Jacopo. It was fourteen years day
for day since Dantes’ arrest. He was nineteen when he
entered the Chateau d’If; he was thirty-three when he
escaped. A sorrowful smile passed over his face; he asked
himself what had become of Mercedes, who must believe him
dead. Then his eyes lighted up with hatred as he thought of
the three men who had caused him so long and wretched a
captivity. He renewed against Danglars, Fernand, and
Villefort the oath of implacable vengeance he had made in
his dungeon. This oath was no longer a vain menace; for the
fastest sailer in the Mediterranean would have been unable
to overtake the little tartan, that with every stitch of
canvas set was flying before the wind to Leghorn.

 

Dantes had not been a day on board before he had a very
clear idea of the men with whom his lot had been cast.
Without having been in the school of the Abbe Faria, the
worthy master of The Young Amelia (the name of the Genoese
tartan) knew a smattering of all the tongues spoken on the
shores of that large lake called the Mediterranean, from the
Arabic to the Provencal, and this, while it spared him
interpreters, persons always troublesome and frequently
indiscreet, gave him great facilities of communication,
either with the vessels he met at sea, with the small boats
sailing along the coast, or with the people without name,
country, or occupation, who are always seen on the quays of
seaports, and who live by hidden and mysterious means which
we must suppose to be a direct gift of providence, as they
have no visible means of support. It is fair to assume that
Dantes was on board a smuggler.

At first the captain had received Dantes on board with a
certain degree of distrust. He was very well known to the
customs officers of the coast; and as there was between
these worthies and himself a perpetual battle of wits, he
had at first thought that Dantes might be an emissary of
these industrious guardians of rights and duties, who
perhaps employed this ingenious means of learning some of
the secrets of his trade. But the skilful manner in which
Dantes had handled the lugger had entirely reassured him;
and then, when he saw the light plume of smoke floating
above the bastion of the Chateau d’If, and heard the distant
report, he was instantly struck with the idea that he had on
board his vessel one whose coming and going, like that of
kings, was accompanied with salutes of artillery. This made
him less uneasy, it must be owned, than if the new-comer had
proved to be a customs officer; but this supposition also
disappeared like the first, when he beheld the perfect
tranquillity of his recruit.

Edmond thus had the advantage of knowing what the owner was,
without the owner knowing who he was; and however the old
sailor and his crew tried to “pump” him, they extracted
nothing more from him; he gave accurate descriptions of
Naples and Malta, which he knew as well as Marseilles, and
held stoutly to his first story. Thus the Genoese, subtle as
he was, was duped by Edmond, in whose favor his mild
demeanor, his nautical skill, and his admirable
dissimulation, pleaded. Moreover, it is possible that the
Genoese was one of those shrewd persons who know nothing but
what they should know, and believe nothing but what they
should believe.

In this state of mutual understanding, they reached Leghorn.
Here Edmond was to undergo another trial; he was to find out
whether he could recognize himself, as he had not seen his
own face for fourteen years. He had preserved a tolerably
good remembrance of what the youth had been, and was now to
find out what the man had become. His comrades believed that
his vow was fulfilled. As he had twenty times touched at
Leghorn, he remembered a barber in St. Ferdinand Street; he
went there to have his beard and hair cut. The barber gazed
in amazement at this man with the long, thick and black hair
and beard, which gave his head the appearance of one of
Titian’s portraits. At this period it was not the fashion to
wear so large a beard and hair so long; now a barber would
only be surprised if a man gifted with such advantages
should consent voluntarily to deprive himself of them. The
Leghorn barber said nothing and went to work.

When the operation was concluded, and Edmond felt that his
chin was completely smooth, and his hair reduced to its
usual length, he asked for a hand-glass. He was now, as we
have said, three-and-thirty years of age, and his fourteen
years’ imprisonment had produced a great transformation in
his appearance. Dantes had entered the Chateau d’If with the
round, open, smiling face of a young and happy man, with
whom the early paths of life have been smooth, and who
anticipates a future corresponding with his past. This was
now all changed. The oval face was lengthened, his smiling
mouth had assumed the firm and marked lines which betoken
resolution; his eyebrows were arched beneath a brow furrowed
with thought; his eyes were full of melancholy, and from
their depths occasionally sparkled gloomy fires of
misanthropy and hatred; his complexion, so long kept from
the sun, had now that pale color which produces, when the
features are encircled with black hair, the aristocratic
beauty of the man of the north; the profound learning he had
acquired had besides diffused over his features a refined
intellectual expression; and he had also acquired, being
naturally of a goodly stature, that vigor which a frame
possesses which has so long concentrated all its force
within itself.

To the elegance of a nervous and slight form had succeeded
the solidity of a rounded and muscular figure. As to his
voice, prayers, sobs, and imprecations had changed it so
that at times it was of a singularly penetrating sweetness,
and at others rough and almost hoarse. Moreover, from being
so long in twilight or darkness, his eyes had acquired the
faculty of distinguishing objects in the night, common to
the hyena and the wolf. Edmond smiled when he beheld
himself: it was impossible that his best friend — if,
indeed, he had any friend left — could recognize him; he
could not recognize himself.

The master of The Young Amelia, who was very desirous of
retaining amongst his crew a man of Edmond’s value, had
offered to advance him funds out of his future profits,
which Edmond had accepted. His next care on leaving the
barber’s who had achieved his first metamorphosis was to
enter a shop and buy a complete sailor’s suit — a garb, as
we all know, very simple, and consisting of white trousers,
a striped shirt, and a cap. It was in this costume, and
bringing back to Jacopo the shirt and trousers he had lent
him, that Edmond reappeared before the captain of the
lugger, who had made him tell his story over and over again
before he could believe him, or recognize in the neat and
trim sailor the man with thick and matted beard, hair
tangled with seaweed, and body soaking in seabrine, whom he
had picked up naked and nearly drowned. Attracted by his
prepossessing appearance, he renewed his offers of an
engagement to Dantes; but Dantes, who had his own projects,
would not agree for a longer time than three months.

The Young Amelia had a very active crew, very obedient to
their captain, who lost as little time as possible. He had
scarcely been a week at Leghorn before the hold of his
vessel was filled with printed muslins, contraband cottons,
English powder, and tobacco on which the excise had
forgotten to put its mark. The master was to get all this
out of Leghorn free of duties, and land it on the shores of
Corsica, where certain speculators undertook to forward the
cargo to France. They sailed; Edmond was again cleaving the
azure sea which had been the first horizon of his youth, and
which he had so often dreamed of in prison. He left Gorgone
on his right and La Pianosa on his left, and went towards
the country of Paoli and Napoleon. The next morning going on
deck, as he always did at an early hour, the patron found
Dantes leaning against the bulwarks gazing with intense
earnestness at a pile of granite rocks, which the rising sun
tinged with rosy light. It was the Island of Monte Cristo.
The Young Amelia left it three-quarters of a league to the
larboard, and kept on for Corsica.

Dantes thought, as they passed so closely to the island
whose name was so interesting to him, that he had only to
leap into the sea and in half an hour be at the promised
land. But then what could he do without instruments to
discover his treasure, without arms to defend himself?
Besides, what would the sailors say? What would the patron
think? He must wait.

Fortunately, Dantes had learned how to wait; he had waited
fourteen years for his liberty, and now he was free he could
wait at least six months or a year for wealth. Would he not
have accepted liberty without riches if it had been offered
to him? Besides, were not those riches chimerical? —
offspring of the brain of the poor Abbe Faria, had they not
died with him? It is true, the letter of the Cardinal Spada
was singularly circumstantial, and Dantes repeated it to
himself, from one end to the other, for he had not forgotten
a word.

Evening came, and Edmond saw the island tinged with the
shades of twilight, and then disappear in the darkness from
all eyes but his own, for he, with vision accustomed to the
gloom of a prison, continued to behold it last of all, for
he remained alone upon deck. The next morn broke off the
coast of Aleria; all day they coasted, and in the evening
saw fires lighted on land; the position of these was no
doubt a signal for landing, for a ship’s lantern was hung up
at the mast-head instead of the streamer, and they came to
within a gunshot of the shore. Dantes noticed that the
captain of The Young Amelia had, as he neared the land,
mounted two small culverins, which, without making much
noise, can throw a four ounce ball a thousand paces or so.

But on this occasion the precaution was superfluous, and
everything proceeded with the utmost smoothness and
politeness. Four shallops came off with very little noise
alongside the lugger, which, no doubt, in acknowledgement of
the compliment, lowered her own shallop into the sea, and
the five boats worked so well that by two o’clock in the
morning all the cargo was out of The Young Amelia and on
terra firma. The same night, such a man of regularity was
the patron of The Young Amelia, the profits were divided,
and each man had a hundred Tuscan livres, or about eighty
francs. But the voyage was not ended. They turned the
bowsprit towards Sardinia, where they intended to take in a
cargo, which was to replace what had been discharged. The
second operation was as successful as the first, The Young
Amelia was in luck. This new cargo was destined for the
coast of the Duchy of Lucca, and consisted almost entirely
of Havana cigars, sherry, and Malaga wines.

There they had a bit of a skirmish in getting rid of the
duties; the excise was, in truth, the everlasting enemy of
the patron of The Young Amelia. A customs officer was laid
low, and two sailors wounded; Dantes was one of the latter,
a ball having touched him in the left shoulder. Dantes was
almost glad of this affray, and almost pleased at being
wounded, for they were rude lessons which taught him with
what eye he could view danger, and with what endurance he
could bear suffering. He had contemplated danger with a
smile, and when wounded had exclaimed with the great
philosopher, “Pain, thou art not an evil.” He had, moreover,
looked upon the customs officer wounded to death, and,
whether from heat of blood produced by the encounter, or the
chill of human sentiment, this sight had made but slight
impression upon him. Dantes was on the way he desired to
follow, and was moving towards the end he wished to achieve;
his heart was in a fair way of petrifying in his bosom.
Jacopo, seeing him fall, had believed him killed, and
rushing towards him raised him up, and then attended to him
with all the kindness of a devoted comrade.

This world was not then so good as Doctor Pangloss believed
it, neither was it so wicked as Dantes thought it, since
this man, who had nothing to expect from his comrade but the
inheritance of his share of the prize-money, manifested so
much sorrow when he saw him fall. Fortunately, as we have
said, Edmond was only wounded, and with certain herbs
gathered at certain seasons, and sold to the smugglers by
the old Sardinian women, the wound soon closed. Edmond then
resolved to try Jacopo, and offered him in return for his
attention a share of his prize-money, but Jacopo refused it
indignantly.

As a result of the sympathetic devotion which Jacopo had
from the first bestowed on Edmond, the latter was moved to a
certain degree of affection. But this sufficed for Jacopo,
who instinctively felt that Edmond had a right to
superiority of position — a superiority which Edmond had
concealed from all others. And from this time the kindness
which Edmond showed him was enough for the brave seaman.

Then in the long days on board ship, when the vessel,
gliding on with security over the azure sea, required no
care but the hand of the helmsman, thanks to the favorable
winds that swelled her sails, Edmond, with a chart in his
hand, became the instructor of Jacopo, as the poor Abbe
Faria had been his tutor. He pointed out to him the bearings
of the coast, explained to him the variations of the
compass, and taught him to read in that vast book opened
over our heads which they call heaven, and where God writes
in azure with letters of diamonds. And when Jacopo inquired
of him, “What is the use of teaching all these things to a
poor sailor like me?” Edmond replied, “Who knows? You may
one day be the captain of a vessel. Your fellow-countryman,
Bonaparte, became emperor.” We had forgotten to say that
Jacopo was a Corsican.

Two months and a half elapsed in these trips, and Edmond had
become as skilful a coaster as he had been a hardy seaman;
he had formed an acquaintance with all the smugglers on the
coast, and learned all the Masonic signs by which these half
pirates recognize each other. He had passed and re-passed
his Island of Monte Cristo twenty times, but not once had he
found an opportunity of landing there. He then formed a
resolution. As soon as his engagement with the patron of The
Young Amelia ended, he would hire a small vessel on his own
account — for in his several voyages he had amassed a
hundred piastres — and under some pretext land at the
Island of Monte Cristo. Then he would be free to make his
researches, not perhaps entirely at liberty, for he would be
doubtless watched by those who accompanied him. But in this
world we must risk something. Prison had made Edmond
prudent, and he was desirous of running no risk whatever.
But in vain did he rack his imagination; fertile as it was,
he could not devise any plan for reaching the island without
companionship.

Dantes was tossed about on these doubts and wishes, when the
patron, who had great confidence in him, and was very
desirous of retaining him in his service, took him by the
arm one evening and led him to a tavern on the Via del’
Oglio, where the leading smugglers of Leghorn used to
congregate and discuss affairs connected with their trade.
Already Dantes had visited this maritime Bourse two or three
times, and seeing all these hardy free-traders, who supplied
the whole coast for nearly two hundred leagues in extent, he
had asked himself what power might not that man attain who
should give the impulse of his will to all these contrary
and diverging minds. This time it was a great matter that
was under discussion, connected with a vessel laden with
Turkey carpets, stuffs of the Levant, and cashmeres. It was
necessary to find some neutral ground on which an exchange
could be made, and then to try and land these goods on the
coast of France. If the venture was successful the profit
would be enormous, there would be a gain of fifty or sixty
piastres each for the crew.

The patron of The Young Amelia proposed as a place of
landing the Island of Monte Cristo, which being completely
deserted, and having neither soldiers nor revenue officers,
seemed to have been placed in the midst of the ocean since
the time of the heathen Olympus by Mercury, the god of
merchants and robbers, classes of mankind which we in modern
times have separated if not made distinct, but which
antiquity appears to have included in the same category. At
the mention of Monte Cristo Dantes started with joy; he rose
to conceal his emotion, and took a turn around the smoky
tavern, where all the languages of the known world were
jumbled in a lingua franca. When he again joined the two
persons who had been discussing the matter, it had been
decided that they should touch at Monte Cristo and set out
on the following night. Edmond, being consulted, was of
opinion that the island afforded every possible security,
and that great enterprises to be well done should be done
quickly. Nothing then was altered in the plan, and orders
were given to get under weigh next night, and, wind and
weather permitting, to make the neutral island by the
following day.

 

Thus, at length, by one of the unexpected strokes of fortune
which sometimes befall those who have for a long time been
the victims of an evil destiny, Dantes was about to secure
the opportunity he wished for, by simple and natural means,
and land on the island without incurring any suspicion. One
night more and he would be on his way.

The night was one of feverish distraction, and in its
progress visions good and evil passed through Dantes’ mind.
If he closed his eyes, he saw Cardinal Spada’s letter
written on the wall in characters of flame — if he slept
for a moment the wildest dreams haunted his brain. He
ascended into grottos paved with emeralds, with panels of
rubies, and the roof glowing with diamond stalactites.
Pearls fell drop by drop, as subterranean waters filter in
their caves. Edmond, amazed, wonderstruck, filled his
pockets with the radiant gems and then returned to daylight,
when be discovered that his prizes had all changed into
common pebbles. He then endeavored to re-enter the
marvellous grottos, but they had suddenly receded, and now
the path became a labyrinth, and then the entrance vanished,
and in vain did he tax his memory for the magic and
mysterious word which opened the splendid caverns of Ali
Baba to the Arabian fisherman. All was useless, the treasure
disappeared, and had again reverted to the genii from whom
for a moment he had hoped to carry it off. The day came at
length, and was almost as feverish as the night had been,
but it brought reason to the aid of imagination, and Dantes
was then enabled to arrange a plan which had hitherto been
vague and unsettled in his brain. Night came, and with it
the preparation for departure, and these preparations served
to conceal Dantes’ agitation. He had by degrees assumed such
authority over his companions that he was almost like a
commander on board; and as his orders were always clear,
distinct, and easy of execution, his comrades obeyed him
with celerity and pleasure.

The old patron did not interfere, for he too had recognized
the superiority of Dantes over the crew and himself. He saw
in the young man his natural successor, and regretted that
he had not a daughter, that he might have bound Edmond to
him by a more secure alliance. At seven o’clock in the
evening all was ready, and at ten minutes past seven they
doubled the lighthouse just as the beacon was kindled. The
sea was calm, and, with a fresh breeze from the south-east,
they sailed beneath a bright blue sky, in which God also
lighted up in turn his beacon lights, each of which is a
world. Dantes told them that all hands might turn in, and he
would take the helm. When the Maltese (for so they called
Dantes) had said this, it was sufficient, and all went to
their bunks contentedly. This frequently happened. Dantes,
cast from solitude into the world, frequently experienced an
imperious desire for solitude; and what solitude is more
complete, or more poetical, than that of a ship floating in
isolation on the sea during the obscurity of the night, in
the silence of immensity, and under the eye of heaven?

Now this solitude was peopled with his thoughts, the night
lighted up by his illusions, and the silence animated by his
anticipations. When the patron awoke, the vessel was
hurrying on with every sail set, and every sail full with
the breeze. They were making nearly ten knots an hour. The
Island of Monte Cristo loomed large in the horizon. Edmond
resigned the lugger to the master’s care, and went and lay
down in his hammock; but, in spite of a sleepless night, he
could not close his eyes for a moment. Two hours afterwards
he came on deck, as the boat was about to double the Island
of Elba. They were just abreast of Mareciana, and beyond the
flat but verdant Island of La Pianosa. The peak of Monte
Cristo reddened by the burning sun, was seen against the
azure sky. Dantes ordered the helmsman to put down his helm,
in order to leave La Pianosa to starboard, as he knew that
he should shorten his course by two or three knots. About
five o’clock in the evening the island was distinct, and
everything on it was plainly perceptible, owing to that
clearness of the atmosphere peculiar to the light which the
rays of the sun cast at its setting.

Edmond gazed very earnestly at the mass of rocks which gave
out all the variety of twilight colors, from the brightest
pink to the deepest blue; and from time to time his cheeks
flushed, his brow darkened, and a mist passed over his eyes.
Never did gamester, whose whole fortune is staked on one
cast of the die, experience the anguish which Edmond felt in
his paroxysms of hope. Night came, and at ten o’clock they
anchored. The Young Amelia was first at the rendezvous. In
spite of his usual command over himself, Dantes could not
restrain his impetuosity. He was the first to jump on shore;
and had he dared, he would, like Lucius Brutus, have “kissed
his mother earth.” It was dark, but at eleven o’clock the
moon rose in the midst of the ocean, whose every wave she
silvered, and then, “ascending high,” played in floods of
pale light on the rocky hills of this second Pelion.

The island was familiar to the crew of The Young Amelia, —
it was one of her regular haunts. As to Dantes, he had
passed it on his voyage to and from the Levant, but never
touched at it. He questioned Jacopo. “Where shall we pass
the night?” he inquired.

“Why, on board the tartan,” replied the sailor.

“Should we not do better in the grottos?”

“What grottos?”

“Why, the grottos — caves of the island.”

“I do not know of any grottos,” replied Jacopo. The cold
sweat sprang forth on Dantes’ brow.

“What, are there no grottos at Monte Cristo?” he asked.

“None.”

For a moment Dantes was speechless; then he remembered that
these caves might have been filled up by some accident, or
even stopped up, for the sake of greater security, by
Cardinal Spada. The point was, then, to discover the hidden
entrance. It was useless to search at night, and Dantes
therefore delayed all investigation until the morning.
Besides, a signal made half a league out at sea, and to
which The Young Amelia replied by a similar signal,
indicated that the moment for business had come. The boat
that now arrived, assured by the answering signal that all
was well, soon came in sight, white and silent as a phantom,
and cast anchor within a cable’s length of shore.

Then the landing began. Dantes reflected, as he worked, on
the shout of joy which, with a single word, he could evoke
from all these men, if he gave utterance to the one
unchanging thought that pervaded his heart; but, far from
disclosing this precious secret, he almost feared that he
had already said too much, and by his restlessness and
continual questions, his minute observations and evident
pre-occupation, aroused suspicions. Fortunately, as regarded
this circumstance at least, his painful past gave to his
countenance an indelible sadness, and the glimmerings of
gayety seen beneath this cloud were indeed but transitory.

No one had the slightest suspicion; and when next day,
taking a fowling-piece, powder, and shot, Dantes declared
his intention to go and kill some of the wild goats that
were seen springing from rock to rock, his wish was
construed into a love of sport, or a desire for solitude.
However, Jacopo insisted on following him, and Dantes did
not oppose this, fearing if he did so that he might incur
distrust. Scarcely, however, had they gone a quarter of a
league when, having killed a kid, he begged Jacopo to take
it to his comrades, and request them to cook it, and when
ready to let him know by firing a gun. This and some dried
fruits and a flask of Monte Pulciano, was the bill of fare.
Dantes went on, looking from time to time behind and around
about him. Having reached the summit of a rock, he saw, a
thousand feet beneath him, his companions, whom Jacopo had
rejoined, and who were all busy preparing the repast which
Edmond’s skill as a marksman had augmented with a capital
dish.

Edmond looked at them for a moment with the sad and gentle
smile of a man superior to his fellows. “In two hours’
time,” said he, “these persons will depart richer by fifty
piastres each, to go and risk their lives again by
endeavoring to gain fifty more; then they will return with a
fortune of six hundred francs, and waste this treasure in
some city with the pride of sultans and the insolence of
nabobs. At this moment hope makes me despise their riches,
which seem to me contemptible. Yet perchance to-morrow
deception will so act on me, that I shall, on compulsion,
consider such a contemptible possession as the utmost
happiness. Oh, no!” exclaimed Edmond, “that will not be. The
wise, unerring Faria could not be mistaken in this one
thing. Besides, it were better to die than to continue to
lead this low and wretched life.” Thus Dantes, who but three
months before had no desire but liberty had now not liberty
enough, and panted for wealth. The cause was not in Dantes,
but in providence, who, while limiting the power of man, has
filled him with boundless desires.

Meanwhile, by a cleft between two walls of rock, following a
path worn by a torrent, and which, in all human probability,
human foot had never before trod, Dantes approached the spot
where he supposed the grottos must have existed. Keeping
along the shore, and examining the smallest object with
serious attention, he thought he could trace, on certain
rocks, marks made by the hand of man.

Time, which encrusts all physical substances with its mossy
mantle, as it invests all things of the mind with
forgetfulness, seemed to have respected these signs, which
apparently had been made with some degree of regularity, and
probably with a definite purpose. Occasionally the marks
were hidden under tufts of myrtle, which spread into large
bushes laden with blossoms, or beneath parasitical lichen.
So Edmond had to separate the branches or brush away the
moss to know where the guide-marks were. The sight of marks
renewed Edmond fondest hopes. Might it not have been the
cardinal himself who had first traced them, in order that
they might serve as a guide for his nephew in the event of a
catastrophe, which he could not foresee would have been so
complete. This solitary place was precisely suited to the
requirements of a man desirous of burying treasure. Only,
might not these betraying marks have attracted other eyes
than those for whom they were made? and had the dark and
wondrous island indeed faithfully guarded its precious
secret?

It seemed, however, to Edmond, who was hidden from his
comrades by the inequalities of the ground, that at sixty
paces from the harbor the marks ceased; nor did they
terminate at any grotto. A large round rock, placed solidly
on its base, was the only spot to which they seemed to lead.
Edmond concluded that perhaps instead of having reached the
end of the route he had only explored its beginning, and he
therefore turned round and retraced his steps.

Meanwhile his comrades had prepared the repast, had got some
water from a spring, spread out the fruit and bread, and
cooked the kid. Just at the moment when they were taking the
dainty animal from the spit, they saw Edmond springing with
the boldness of a chamois from rock to rock, and they fired
the signal agreed upon. The sportsman instantly changed his
direction, and ran quickly towards them. But even while they
watched his daring progress, Edmond’s foot slipped, and they
saw him stagger on the edge of a rock and disappear. They
all rushed towards him, for all loved Edmond in spite of his
superiority; yet Jacopo reached him first.

He found Edmond lying prone, bleeding, and almost senseless.
He had rolled down a declivity of twelve or fifteen feet.
They poured a little rum down his throat, and this remedy
which had before been so beneficial to him, produced the
same effect as formerly. Edmond opened his eyes, complained
of great pain in his knee, a feeling of heaviness in his
head, and severe pains in his loins. They wished to carry
him to the shore; but when they touched him, although under
Jacopo’s directions, he declared, with heavy groans, that he
could not bear to be moved.

It may be supposed that Dantes did not now think of his
dinner, but he insisted that his comrades, who had not his
reasons for fasting, should have their meal. As for himself,
he declared that he had only need of a little rest, and that
when they returned he should be easier. The sailors did not
require much urging. They were hungry, and the smell of the
roasted kid was very savory, and your tars are not very
ceremonious. An hour afterwards they returned. All that
Edmond had been able to do was to drag himself about a dozen
paces forward to lean against a moss-grown rock.

But, instead of growing easier, Dantes’ pains appeared to
increase in violence. The old patron, who was obliged to
sail in the morning in order to land his cargo on the
frontiers of Piedmont and France, between Nice and Frejus,
urged Dantes to try and rise. Edmond made great exertions in
order to comply; but at each effort he fell back, moaning
and turning pale.

“He has broken his ribs,” said the commander, in a low
voice. “No matter; he is an excellent fellow, and we must
not leave him. We will try and carry him on board the
tartan.” Dantes declared, however, that he would rather die
where he was than undergo the agony which the slightest
movement cost him. “Well,” said the patron, “let what may
happen, it shall never be said that we deserted a good
comrade like you. We will not go till evening.” This very
much astonished the sailors, although, not one opposed it.
The patron was so strict that this was the first time they
had ever seen him give up an enterprise, or even delay in
its execution. Dantes would not allow that any such
infraction of regular and proper rules should be made in his
favor. “No, no,” he said to the patron, “I was awkward, and
it is just that I pay the penalty of my clumsiness. Leave me
a small supply of biscuit, a gun, powder, and balls, to kill
the kids or defend myself at need, and a pickaxe, that I may
build a shelter if you delay in coming back for me.”

“But you’ll die of hunger,” said the patron.

“I would rather do so,” was Edmond reply, “than suffer the
inexpressible agonies which the slightest movement causes
me.” The patron turned towards his vessel, which was rolling
on the swell in the little harbor, and, with sails partly
set, would be ready for sea when her toilet should be
completed.

“What are we to do, Maltese?” asked the captain. “We cannot
leave you here so, and yet we cannot stay.”

“Go, go!” exclaimed Dantes.

“We shall be absent at least a week,” said the patron, “and
then we must run out of our course to come here and take you
up again.”

“Why,” said Dantes, “if in two or three days you hail any
fishing-boat, desire them to come here to me. I will pay
twenty-five piastres for my passage back to Leghorn. If you
do not come across one, return for me.” The patron shook his
head.

“Listen, Captain Baldi; there’s one way of settling this,”
said Jacopo. “Do you go, and I will stay and take care of
the wounded man.”

“And give up your share of the venture,” said Edmond, “to
remain with me?”

“Yes,” said Jacopo, “and without any hesitation.”

“You are a good fellow and a kind-hearted messmate,” replied
Edmond, “and heaven will recompense you for your generous
intentions; but I do not wish any one to stay with me. A day
or two of rest will set me up, and I hope I shall find among
the rocks certain herbs most excellent for bruises.”

A peculiar smile passed over Dantes’ lips; he squeezed
Jacopo’s hand warmly, but nothing could shake his
determination to remain — and remain alone. The smugglers
left with Edmond what he had requested and set sail, but not
without turning about several times, and each time making
signs of a cordial farewell, to which Edmond replied with
his hand only, as if he could not move the rest of his body.
Then, when they had disappeared, he said with a smile, —
“‘Tis strange that it should be among such men that we find
proofs of friendship and devotion.” Then he dragged himself
cautiously to the top of a rock, from which he had a full
view of the sea, and thence he saw the tartan complete her
preparations for sailing, weigh anchor, and, balancing
herself as gracefully as a water-fowl ere it takes to the
wing, set sail. At the end of an hour she was completely out
of sight; at least, it was impossible for the wounded man to
see her any longer from the spot where he was. Then Dantes
rose more agile and light than the kid among the myrtles and
shrubs of these wild rocks, took his gun in one hand, his
pickaxe in the other, and hastened towards the rock on which
the marks he had noted terminated. “And now,” he exclaimed,
remembering the tale of the Arabian fisherman, which Faria
had related to him, “now, open sesame!”

The sun had nearly reached the meridian, and his scorching
rays fell full on the rocks, which seemed themselves
sensible of the heat. Thousands of grasshoppers, hidden in
the bushes, chirped with a monotonous and dull note; the
leaves of the myrtle and olive trees waved and rustled in
the wind. At every step that Edmond took he disturbed the
lizards glittering with the hues of the emerald; afar off he
saw the wild goats bounding from crag to crag. In a word,
the island was inhabited, yet Edmond felt himself alone,
guided by the hand of God. He felt an indescribable
sensation somewhat akin to dread — that dread of the
daylight which even in the desert makes us fear we are
watched and observed. This feeling was so strong that at the
moment when Edmond was about to begin his labor, he stopped,
laid down his pickaxe, seized his gun, mounted to the summit
of the highest rock, and from thence gazed round in every
direction.

But it was not upon Corsica, the very houses of which he
could distinguish; or on Sardinia; or on the Island of Elba,
with its historical associations; or upon the almost
imperceptible line that to the experienced eye of a sailor
alone revealed the coast of Genoa the proud, and Leghorn the
commercial, that he gazed. It was at the brigantine that had
left in the morning, and the tartan that had just set sail,
that Edmond fixed his eyes. The first was just disappearing
in the straits of Bonifacio; the other, following an
opposite direction, was about to round the Island of
Corsica. This sight reassured him. He then looked at the
objects near him. He saw that he was on the highest point of
the island, — a statue on this vast pedestal of granite,
nothing human appearing in sight, while the blue ocean beat
against the base of the island, and covered it with a fringe
of foam. Then he descended with cautious and slow step, for
he dreaded lest an accident similar to that he had so
adroitly feigned should happen in reality.

Dantes, as we have said, had traced the marks along the
rocks, and he had noticed that they led to a small creek.
which was hidden like the bath of some ancient nymph. This
creek was sufficiently wide at its mouth, and deep in the
centre, to admit of the entrance of a small vessel of the
lugger class, which would be perfectly concealed from
observation.

Then following the clew that, in the hands of the Abbe
Faria, had been so skilfully used to guide him through the
Daedalian labyrinth of probabilities, he thought that the
Cardinal Spada, anxious not to be watched, had entered the
creek, concealed his little barque, followed the line marked
by the notches in the rock, and at the end of it had buried
his treasure. It was this idea that had brought Dantes back
to the circular rock. One thing only perplexed Edmond, and
destroyed his theory. How could this rock, which weighed
several tons, have been lifted to this spot, without the aid
of many men? Suddenly an idea flashed across his mind.
Instead of raising it, thought he, they have lowered it. And
he sprang from the rock in order to inspect the base on
which it had formerly stood. He soon perceived that a slope
had been formed, and the rock had slid along this until it
stopped at the spot it now occupied. A large stone had
served as a wedge; flints and pebbles had been inserted
around it, so as to conceal the orifice; this species of
masonry had been covered with earth, and grass and weeds had
grown there, moss had clung to the stones, myrtle-bushes had
taken root, and the old rock seemed fixed to the earth.

Dantes dug away the earth carefully, and detected, or
fancied he detected, the ingenious artifice. He attacked
this wall, cemented by the hand of time, with his pickaxe.
After ten minutes’ labor the wall gave way, and a hole large
enough to insert the arm was opened. Dantes went and cut the
strongest olive-tree he could find, stripped off its
branches, inserted it in the hole, and used it as a lever.
But the rock was too heavy, and too firmly wedged, to be
moved by any one man, were he Hercules himself. Dantes saw
that he must attack the wedge. But how? He cast his eyes
around, and saw the horn full of powder which his friend
Jacopo had left him. He smiled; the infernal invention would
serve him for this purpose. With the aid of his pickaxe,
Dantes, after the manner of a labor-saving pioneer, dug a
mine between the upper rock and the one that supported it,
filled it with powder, then made a match by rolling his
handkerchief in saltpetre. He lighted it and retired. The
explosion soon followed; the upper rock was lifted from its
base by the terrific force of the powder; the lower one flew
into pieces; thousands of insects escaped from the aperture
Dantes had previously formed, and a huge snake, like the
guardian demon of the treasure, rolled himself along in
darkening coils, and disappeared.

Dantes approached the upper rock, which now, without any
support, leaned towards the sea. The intrepid
treasure-seeker walked round it, and, selecting the spot
from whence it appeared most susceptible to attack, placed
his lever in one of the crevices, and strained every nerve
to move the mass. The rock, already shaken by the explosion,
tottered on its base. Dantes redoubled his efforts; he
seemed like one of the ancient Titans, who uprooted the
mountains to hurl against the father of the gods. The rock
yielded, rolled over, bounded from point to point, and
finally disappeared in the ocean.

On the spot it had occupied was a circular space, exposing
an iron ring let into a square flag-stone. Dantes uttered a
cry of joy and surprise; never had a first attempt been
crowned with more perfect success. He would fain have
continued, but his knees trembled, and his heart beat so
violently, and his sight became so dim, that he was forced
to pause. This feeling lasted but for a moment. Edmond
inserted his lever in the ring and exerted all his strength;
the flag-stone yielded, and disclosed steps that descended
until they were lost in the obscurity of a subterraneous
grotto. Any one else would have rushed on with a cry of joy.
Dantes turned pale, hesitated, and reflected. “Come,” said
he to himself, “be a man. I am accustomed to adversity. I
must not be cast down by the discovery that I have been
deceived. What, then, would be the use of all I have
suffered? The heart breaks when, after having been elated by
flattering hopes, it sees all its illusions destroyed. Faria
has dreamed this; the Cardinal Spada buried no treasure
here; perhaps he never came here, or if he did, Caesar
Borgia, the intrepid adventurer, the stealthy and
indefatigable plunderer, has followed him, discovered his
traces, pursued them as I have done, raised the stone, and
descending before me, has left me nothing.” He remained
motionless and pensive, his eyes fixed on the gloomy
aperture that was open at his feet.

“Now that I expect nothing, now that I no longer entertain
the slightest hopes, the end of this adventure becomes
simply a matter of curiosity.” And he remained again
motionless and thoughtful.

“Yes, yes; this is an adventure worthy a place in the varied
career of that royal bandit. This fabulous event formed but
a link in a long chain of marvels. Yes, Borgia has been
here, a torch in one hand, a sword in the other, and within
twenty paces, at the foot of this rock, perhaps two guards
kept watch on land and sea, while their master descended, as
I am about to descend, dispelling the darkness before his
awe-inspiring progress.”

“But what was the fate of the guards who thus possessed his
secret?” asked Dantes of himself.

“The fate,” replied he, smiling, “of those who buried
Alaric.”

“Yet, had he come,” thought Dantes, “he would have found the
treasure, and Borgia, he who compared Italy to an artichoke,
which he could devour leaf by leaf, knew too well the value
of time to waste it in replacing this rock. I will go down.”

Then he descended, a smile on his lips, and murmuring that
last word of human philosophy, “Perhaps!” But instead of the
darkness, and the thick and mephitic atmosphere he had
expected to find, Dantes saw a dim and bluish light, which,
as well as the air, entered, not merely by the aperture he
had just formed, but by the interstices and crevices of the
rock which were visible from without, and through which he
could distinguish the blue sky and the waving branches of
the evergreen oaks, and the tendrils of the creepers that
grew from the rocks. After having stood a few minutes in the
cavern, the atmosphere of which was rather warm than damp,
Dantes’ eye, habituated as it was to darkness, could pierce
even to the remotest angles of the cavern, which was of
granite that sparkled like diamonds. “Alas,” said Edmond,
smiling, “these are the treasures the cardinal has left; and
the good abbe, seeing in a dream these glittering walls, has
indulged in fallacious hopes.”

But he called to mind the words of the will, which he knew
by heart. “In the farthest angle of the second opening,”
said the cardinal’s will. He had only found the first
grotto; he had now to seek the second. Dantes continued his
search. He reflected that this second grotto must penetrate
deeper into the island; he examined the stones, and sounded
one part of the wall where he fancied the opening existed,
masked for precaution’s sake. The pickaxe struck for a
moment with a dull sound that drew out of Dantes’ forehead
large drops of perspiration. At last it seemed to him that
one part of the wall gave forth a more hollow and deeper
echo; he eagerly advanced, and with the quickness of
perception that no one but a prisoner possesses, saw that
there, in all probability, the opening must be.

However, he, like Caesar Borgia, knew the value of time;
and, in order to avoid fruitless toil, he sounded all the
other walls with his pickaxe, struck the earth with the butt
of his gun, and finding nothing that appeared suspicious,
returned to that part of the wall whence issued the
consoling sound he had before heard. He again struck it, and
with greater force. Then a singular thing occurred. As he
struck the wall, pieces of stucco similar to that used in
the ground work of arabesques broke off, and fell to the
ground in flakes, exposing a large white stone. The aperture
of the rock had been closed with stones, then this stucco
had been applied, and painted to imitate granite. Dantes
struck with the sharp end of his pickaxe, which entered
someway between the interstices. It was there he must dig.
But by some strange play of emotion, in proportion as the
proofs that Faria, had not been deceived became stronger, so
did his heart give way, and a feeling of discouragement
stole over him. This last proof, instead of giving him fresh
strength, deprived him of it; the pickaxe descended, or
rather fell; he placed it on the ground, passed his hand
over his brow, and remounted the stairs, alleging to
himself, as an excuse, a desire to be assured that no one
was watching him, but in reality because he felt that he was
about to faint. The island was deserted, and the sun seemed
to cover it with its fiery glance; afar off, a few small
fishing boats studded the bosom of the blue ocean.

Dantes had tasted nothing, but he thought not of hunger at
such a moment; he hastily swallowed a few drops of rum, and
again entered the cavern. The pickaxe that had seemed so
heavy, was now like a feather in his grasp; he seized it,
and attacked the wall. After several blows he perceived that
the stones were not cemented, but had been merely placed one
upon the other, and covered with stucco; he inserted the
point of his pickaxe, and using the handle as a lever, with
joy soon saw the stone turn as if on hinges, and fall at his
feet. He had nothing more to do now, but with the iron tooth
of the pickaxe to draw the stones towards him one by one.
The aperture was already sufficiently large for him to
enter, but by waiting, he could still cling to hope, and
retard the certainty of deception. At last, after renewed
hesitation, Dantes entered the second grotto. The second
grotto was lower and more gloomy than the first; the air
that could only enter by the newly formed opening had the
mephitic smell Dantes was surprised not to find in the outer
cavern. He waited in order to allow pure air to displace the
foul atmosphere, and then went on. At the left of the
opening was a dark and deep angle. But to Dantes’ eye there
was no darkness. He glanced around this second grotto; it
was, like the first, empty.

The treasure, if it existed, was buried in this corner. The
time had at length arrived; two feet of earth removed, and
Dantes’ fate would be decided. He advanced towards the
angle, and summoning all his resolution, attacked the ground
with the pickaxe. At the fifth or sixth blow the pickaxe
struck against an iron substance. Never did funeral knell,
never did alarm-bell, produce a greater effect on the
hearer. Had Dantes found nothing he could not have become
more ghastly pale. He again struck his pickaxe into the
earth, and encountered the same resistance, but not the same
sound. “It is a casket of wood bound with iron,” thought he.
At this moment a shadow passed rapidly before the opening;
Dantes seized his gun, sprang through the opening, and
mounted the stair. A wild goat had passed before the mouth
of the cave, and was feeding at a little distance. This
would have been a favorable occasion to secure his dinner;
but Dantes feared lest the report of his gun should attract
attention.

He thought a moment, cut a branch of a resinous tree,
lighted it at the fire at which the smugglers had prepared
their breakfast, and descended with this torch. He wished to
see everything. He approached the hole he had dug, and now,
with the aid of the torch, saw that his pickaxe had in
reality struck against iron and wood. He planted his torch
in the ground and resumed his labor. In an instant a space
three feet long by two feet broad was cleared, and Dantes
could see an oaken coffer, bound with cut steel; in the
middle of the lid he saw engraved on a silver plate, which
was still untarnished, the arms of the Spada family — viz.,
a sword, pale, on an oval shield, like all the Italian
armorial bearings, and surmounted by a cardinal’s hat;
Dantes easily recognized them, Faria had so often drawn them
for him. There was no longer any doubt: the treasure was
there — no one would have been at such pains to conceal an
empty casket. In an instant he had cleared every obstacle
away, and he saw successively the lock, placed between two
padlocks, and the two handles at each end, all carved as
things were carved at that epoch, when art rendered the
commonest metals precious. Dantes seized the handles, and
strove to lift the coffer; it was impossible. He sought to
open it; lock and padlock were fastened; these faithful
guardians seemed unwilling to surrender their trust. Dantes
inserted the sharp end of the pickaxe between the coffer and
the lid, and pressing with all his force on the handle,
burst open the fastenings. The hinges yielded in their turn
and fell, still holding in their grasp fragments of the
wood, and the chest was open.

Edmond was seized with vertigo; he cocked his gun and laid
it beside him. He then closed his eyes as children do in
order that they may see in the resplendent night of their
own imagination more stars than are visible in the
firmament; then he re-opened them, and stood motionless with
amazement. Three compartments divided the coffer. In the
first, blazed piles of golden coin; in the second, were
ranged bars of unpolished gold, which possessed nothing
attractive save their value; in the third, Edmond grasped
handfuls of diamonds, pearls, and rubies, which, as they
fell on one another, sounded like hail against glass. After
having touched, felt, examined these treasures, Edmond
rushed through the caverns like a man seized with frenzy; he
leaped on a rock, from whence he could behold the sea. He
was alone — alone with these countless, these unheard-of
treasures! was he awake, or was it but a dream?

He would fain have gazed upon his gold, and yet he had not
strength enough; for an instant he leaned his head in his
hands as if to prevent his senses from leaving him, and then
rushed madly about the rocks of Monte Cristo, terrifying the
wild goats and scaring the sea-fowls with his wild cries and
gestures; then he returned, and, still unable to believe the
evidence of his senses, rushed into the grotto, and found
himself before this mine of gold and jewels. This time he
fell on his knees, and, clasping his hands convulsively,
uttered a prayer intelligible to God alone. He soon became
calmer and more happy, for only now did he begin to realize
his felicity. He then set himself to work to count his
fortune. There were a thousand ingots of gold, each weighing
from two to three pounds; then he piled up twenty-five
thousand crowns, each worth about eighty francs of our
money, and bearing the effigies of Alexander VI. and his
predecessors; and he saw that the complement was not half
empty. And he measured ten double handfuls of pearls,
diamonds, and other gems, many of which, mounted by the most
famous workmen, were valuable beyond their intrinsic worth.
Dantes saw the light gradually disappear, and fearing to be
surprised in the cavern, left it, his gun in his hand. A
piece of biscuit and a small quantity of rum formed his
supper, and he snatched a few hours’ sleep, lying over the
mouth of the cave.

It was a night of joy and terror, such as this man of
stupendous emotions had already experienced twice or thrice
in his lifetime.

Day, for which Dantes had so eagerly and impatiently waited
with open eyes, again dawned. With the first light Dantes
resumed his search. Again he climbed the rocky height he had
ascended the previous evening, and strained his view to
catch every peculiarity of the landscape; but it wore the
same wild, barren aspect when seen by the rays of the
morning sun which it had done when surveyed by the fading
glimmer of eve. Descending into the grotto, he lifted the
stone, filled his pockets with gems, put the box together as
well and securely as he could, sprinkled fresh sand over the
spot from which it had been taken, and then carefully trod
down the earth to give it everywhere a uniform appearance;
then, quitting the grotto, he replaced the stone, heaping on
it broken masses of rocks and rough fragments of crumbling
granite, filling the interstices with earth, into which he
deftly inserted rapidly growing plants, such as the wild
myrtle and flowering thorn, then carefully watering these
new plantations, he scrupulously effaced every trace of
footsteps, leaving the approach to the cavern as
savage-looking and untrodden as he had found it. This done,
he impatiently awaited the return of his companions. To wait
at Monte Cristo for the purpose of watching like a dragon
over the almost incalculable riches that had thus fallen into
his possession satisfied not the cravings of his heart,
which yearned to return to dwell among mankind, and to
assume the rank, power, and influence which are always
accorded to wealth — that first and greatest of all the
forces within the grasp of man.

On the sixth day, the smugglers returned. From a distance
Dantes recognized the rig and handling of The Young Amelia,
and dragging himself with affected difficulty towards the
landing-place, he met his companions with an assurance that,
although considerably better than when they quitted him, he
still suffered acutely from his late accident. He then
inquired how they had fared in their trip. To this question
the smugglers replied that, although successful in landing
their cargo in safety, they had scarcely done so when they
received intelligence that a guard-ship had just quitted the
port of Toulon and was crowding all sail towards them. This
obliged them to make all the speed they could to evade the
enemy, when they could but lament the absence of Dantes,
whose superior skill in the management of a vessel would
have availed them so materially. In fact, the pursuing
vessel had almost overtaken them when, fortunately, night
came on, and enabled them to double the Cape of Corsica, and
so elude all further pursuit. Upon the whole, however, the
trip had been sufficiently successful to satisfy all
concerned; while the crew, and particularly Jacopo,
expressed great regrets that Dantes had not been an equal
sharer with themselves in the profits, which amounted to no
less a sum than fifty piastres each.

Edmond preserved the most admirable self-command, not
suffering the faintest indication of a smile to escape him
at the enumeration of all the benefits he would have reaped
had he been able to quit the island; but as The Young Amelia
had merely come to Monte Cristo to fetch him away, he
embarked that same evening, and proceeded with the captain
to Leghorn. Arrived at Leghorn, he repaired to the house of
a Jew, a dealer in precious stones, to whom he disposed of
four of his smallest diamonds for five thousand francs each.
Dantes half feared that such valuable jewels in the hands of
a poor sailor like himself might excite suspicion; but the
cunning purchaser asked no troublesome questions concerning
a bargain by which he gained a round profit of at least
eighty per cent.

The following day Dantes presented Jacopo with an entirely
new vessel, accompanying the gift by a donation of one
hundred piastres, that he might provide himself with a
suitable crew and other requisites for his outfit, upon
condition that he would go at once to Marseilles for the
purpose of inquiring after an old man named Louis Dantes,
residing in the Allees de Meillan, and also a young woman
called Mercedes, an inhabitant of the Catalan village.
Jacopo could scarcely believe his senses at receiving this
magnificent present, which Dantes hastened to account for by
saying that he had merely been a sailor from whim and a
desire to spite his family, who did not allow him as much
money as he liked to spend; but that on his arrival at
Leghorn he had come into possession of a large fortune, left
him by an uncle, whose sole heir he was. The superior
education of Dantes gave an air of such extreme probability
to this statement that it never once occurred to Jacopo to
doubt its accuracy. The term for which Edmond had engaged to
serve on board The Young Amelia having expired, Dantes took
leave of the captain, who at first tried all his powers of
persuasion to induce him to remain as one of the crew, but
having been told the history of the legacy, he ceased to
importune him further. The following morning Jacopo set sail
for Marseilles, with directions from Dantes to join him at
the Island of Monte Cristo.

Having seen Jacopo fairly out of the harbor, Dantes
proceeded to make his final adieus on board The Young
Amelia, distributing so liberal a gratuity among her crew as
to secure for him the good wishes of all, and expressions of
cordial interest in all that concerned him. To the captain
he promised to write when he had made up his mind as to his
future plans. Then Dantes departed for Genoa. At the moment
of his arrival a small yacht was under trial in the bay;
this yacht had been built by order of an Englishman, who,
having heard that the Genoese excelled all other builders
along the shores of the Mediterranean in the construction of
fast-sailing vessels, was desirous of possessing a specimen
of their skill; the price agreed upon between the Englishman
and the Genoese builder was forty thousand francs. Dantes,
struck with the beauty and capability of the little vessel,
applied to its owner to transfer it to him, offering sixty
thousand francs, upon condition that he should be allowed to
take immediate possession. The proposal was too advantageous
to be refused, the more so as the person for whom the yacht
was intended had gone upon a tour through Switzerland, and
was not expected back in less than three weeks or a month,
by which time the builder reckoned upon being able to
complete another. A bargain was therefore struck. Dantes led
the owner of the yacht to the dwelling of a Jew; retired
with the latter for a few minutes to a small back parlor,
and upon their return the Jew counted out to the shipbuilder
the sum of sixty thousand francs in bright gold pieces.

The delighted builder then offered his services in providing
a suitable crew for the little vessel, but this Dantes
declined with many thanks, saying he was accustomed to
cruise about quite alone, and his principal pleasure
consisted in managing his yacht himself; the only thing the
builder could oblige him in would be to contrive a sort of
secret closet in the cabin at his bed’s head, the closet to
contain three divisions, so constructed as to be concealed
from all but himself. The builder cheerfully undertook the
commission, and promised to have these secret places
completed by the next day, Dantes furnishing the dimensions
and plan in accordance with which they were to be
constructed.

The following day Dantes sailed with his yacht from Genoa,
under the inspection of an immense crowd drawn together by
curiosity to see the rich Spanish nobleman who preferred
managing his own yacht. But their wonder was soon changed to
admiration at seeing the perfect skill with which Dantes
handled the helm. The boat, indeed, seemed to be animated
with almost human intelligence, so promptly did it obey the
slightest touch; and Dantes required but a short trial of
his beautiful craft to acknowledge that the Genoese had not
without reason attained their high reputation in the art of
shipbuilding. The spectators followed the little vessel with
their eyes as long as it remained visible; they then turned
their conjectures upon her probable destination. Some
insisted she was making for Corsica, others the Island of
Elba; bets were offered to any amount that she was bound for
Spain; while Africa was positively reported by many persons
as her intended course; but no one thought of Monte Cristo.
Yet thither it was that Dantes guided his vessel, and at
Monte Cristo he arrived at the close of the second day; his
boat had proved herself a first-class sailer, and had come
the distance from Genoa in thirty-five hours. Dantes had
carefully noted the general appearance of the shore, and,
instead of landing at the usual place, he dropped anchor in
the little creek. The island was utterly deserted, and bore
no evidence of having been visited since he went away; his
treasure was just as he had left it. Early on the following
morning he commenced the removal of his riches, and ere
nightfall the whole of his immense wealth was safely
deposited in the compartments of the secret locker.

A week passed by. Dantes employed it in manoeuvring his
yacht round the island, studying it as a skilful horseman
would the animal he destined for some important service,
till at the end of that time he was perfectly conversant
with its good and bad qualities. The former Dantes proposed
to augment, the latter to remedy.

Upon the eighth day he discerned a small vessel under full
sail approaching Monte Cristo. As it drew near, he
recognized it as the boat he had given to Jacopo. He
immediately signalled it. His signal was returned, and in
two hours afterwards the new-comer lay at anchor beside the
yacht. A mournful answer awaited each of Edmond’s eager
inquiries as to the information Jacopo had obtained. Old
Dantes was dead, and Mercedes had disappeared. Dantes
listened to these melancholy tidings with outward calmness;
but, leaping lightly ashore, he signified his desire to be
quite alone. In a couple of hours he returned. Two of the
men from Jacopo’s boat came on board the yacht to assist in
navigating it, and he gave orders that she should be steered
direct to Marseilles. For his father’s death he was in some
manner prepared; but he knew not how to account for the
mysterious disappearance of Mercedes.

Without divulging his secret, Dantes could not give
sufficiently clear instructions to an agent. There were,
besides, other particulars he was desirous of ascertaining,
and those were of a nature he alone could investigate in a
manner satisfactory to himself. His looking-glass had
assured him, during his stay at Leghorn, that he ran no risk
of recognition; moreover, he had now the means of adopting
any disguise he thought proper. One fine morning, then, his
yacht, followed by the little fishing-boat, boldly entered
the port of Marseilles, and anchored exactly opposite the
spot from whence, on the never-to-be-forgotten night of his
departure for the Chateau d’If, he had been put on board the
boat destined to convey him thither. Still Dantes could not
view without a shudder the approach of a gendarme who
accompanied the officers deputed to demand his bill of
health ere the yacht was permitted to hold communication
with the shore; but with that perfect self-possession he had
acquired during his acquaintance with Faria, Dantes coolly
presented an English passport he had obtained from Leghorn,
and as this gave him a standing which a French passport
would not have afforded, he was informed that there existed
no obstacle to his immediate debarkation.

The first person to attract the attention of Dantes, as he
landed on the Canebiere, was one of the crew belonging to
the Pharaon. Edmond welcomed the meeting with this fellow —
who had been one of his own sailors — as a sure means of
testing the extent of the change which time had worked in
his own appearance. Going straight towards him, he
propounded a variety of questions on different subjects,
carefully watching the man’s countenance as he did so; but
not a word or look implied that he had the slightest idea of
ever having seen before the person with whom he was then
conversing. Giving the sailor a piece of money in return for
his civility, Dantes proceeded onwards; but ere he had gone
many steps he heard the man loudly calling him to stop.
Dantes instantly turned to meet him. “I beg your pardon,
sir,” said the honest fellow, in almost breathless haste,
“but I believe you made a mistake; you intended to give me a
two-franc piece, and see, you gave me a double Napoleon.”

“Thank you, my good friend. I see that I have made a
trifling mistake, as you say; but by way of rewarding your
honesty I give you another double Napoleon, that you may
drink to my health, and be able to ask your messmates to
join you.”

So extreme was the surprise of the sailor, that he was
unable even to thank Edmond, whose receding figure he
continued to gaze after in speechless astonishment. “Some
nabob from India,” was his comment.

Dantes, meanwhile, went on his way. Each step he trod
oppressed his heart with fresh emotion; his first and most
indelible recollections were there; not a tree, not a
street, that he passed but seemed filled with dear and
cherished memories. And thus he proceeded onwards till he
arrived at the end of the Rue de Noailles, from whence a
full view of the Allees de Meillan was obtained. At this
spot, so pregnant with fond and filial remembrances, his
heart beat almost to bursting, his knees tottered under him,
a mist floated over his sight, and had he not clung for
support to one of the trees, he would inevitably have fallen
to the ground and been crushed beneath the many vehicles
continually passing there. Recovering himself, however, he
wiped the perspiration from his brows, and stopped not again
till he found himself at the door of the house in which his
father had lived.

The nasturtiums and other plants, which his father had
delighted to train before his window, had all disappeared
from the upper part of the house. Leaning against the tree,
he gazed thoughtfully for a time at the upper stories of the
shabby little house. Then he advanced to the door, and asked
whether there were any rooms to be let. Though answered in
the negative, he begged so earnestly to be permitted to
visit those on the fifth floor, that, in despite of the
oft-repeated assurance of the concierge that they were
occupied, Dantes succeeded in inducing the man to go up to
the tenants, and ask permission for a gentleman to be
allowed to look at them.

The tenants of the humble lodging were a young couple who
had been scarcely married a week; and seeing them, Dantes
sighed heavily. Nothing in the two small chambers forming
the apartments remained as it had been in the time of the
elder Dantes; the very paper was different, while the
articles of antiquated furniture with which the rooms had
been filled in Edmond’s time had all disappeared; the four
walls alone remained as he had left them. The bed belonging
to the present occupants was placed as the former owner of
the chamber had been accustomed to have his; and, in spite
of his efforts to prevent it, the eyes of Edmond were
suffused in tears as he reflected that on that spot the old
man had breathed his last, vainly calling for his son. The
young couple gazed with astonishment at the sight of their
visitor’s emotion, and wondered to see the large tears
silently chasing each other down his otherwise stern and
immovable features; but they felt the sacredness of his
grief, and kindly refrained from questioning him as to its
cause, while, with instinctive delicacy, they left him to
indulge his sorrow alone. When he withdrew from the scene of
his painful recollections, they both accompanied him
downstairs, reiterating their hope that he would come again
whenever he pleased, and assuring him that their poor
dwelling would ever be open to him. As Edmond passed the
door on the fourth floor, he paused to inquire whether
Caderousse the tailor still dwelt there; but he received,
for reply, that the person in question had got into
difficulties, and at the present time kept a small inn on
the route from Bellegarde to Beaucaire.

Having obtained the address of the person to whom the house
in the Allees de Meillan belonged, Dantes next proceeded
thither, and, under the name of Lord Wilmore (the name and
title inscribed on his passport), purchased the small
dwelling for the sum of twenty-five thousand francs, at
least ten thousand more than it was worth; but had its owner
asked half a million, it would unhesitatingly have been
given. The very same day the occupants of the apartments on
the fifth floor of the house, now become the property of
Dantes, were duly informed by the notary who had arranged
the necessary transfer of deeds, etc., that the new landlord
gave them their choice of any of the rooms in the house,
without the least augmentation of rent, upon condition of
their giving instant possession of the two small chambers
they at present inhabited.

This strange event aroused great wonder and curiosity in the
neighborhood of the Allees de Meillan, and a multitude of
theories were afloat, none of which was anywhere near the
truth. But what raised public astonishment to a climax, and
set all conjecture at defiance, was the knowledge that the
same stranger who had in the morning visited the Allees de
Meillan had been seen in the evening walking in the little
village of the Catalans, and afterwards observed to enter a
poor fisherman’s hut, and to pass more than an hour in
inquiring after persons who had either been dead or gone
away for more than fifteen or sixteen years. But on the
following day the family from whom all these particulars had
been asked received a handsome present, consisting of an
entirely new fishing-boat, with two seines and a tender. The
delighted recipients of these munificent gifts would gladly
have poured out their thanks to their generous benefactor,
but they had seen him, upon quitting the hut, merely give
some orders to a sailor, and then springing lightly on
horseback, leave Marseilles by the Porte d’Aix.

 

Such of my readers as have made a pedestrian excursion to
the south of France may perchance have noticed, about midway
between the town of Beaucaire and the village of Bellegarde,
— a little nearer to the former than to the latter, — a
small roadside inn, from the front of which hung, creaking
and flapping in the wind, a sheet of tin covered with a
grotesque representation of the Pont du Gard. This modern
place of entertainment stood on the left-hand side of the
post road, and backed upon the Rhone. It also boasted of
what in Languedoc is styled a garden, consisting of a small
plot of ground, on the side opposite to the main entrance
reserved for the reception of guests. A few dingy olives and
stunted fig-trees struggled hard for existence, but their
withered dusty foliage abundantly proved how unequal was the
conflict. Between these sickly shrubs grew a scanty supply
of garlic, tomatoes, and eschalots; while, lone and
solitary, like a forgotten sentinel, a tall pine raised its
melancholy head in one of the corners of this unattractive
spot, and displayed its flexible stem and fan-shaped summit
dried and cracked by the fierce heat of the sub-tropical
sun.

In the surrounding plain, which more resembled a dusty lake
than solid ground, were scattered a few miserable stalks of
wheat, the effect, no doubt, of a curious desire on the part
of the agriculturists of the country to see whether such a
thing as the raising of grain in those parched regions was
practicable. Each stalk served as a perch for a grasshopper,
which regaled the passers by through this Egyptian scene
with its strident, monotonous note.

For about seven or eight years the little tavern had been
kept by a man and his wife, with two servants, — a
chambermaid named Trinette, and a hostler called Pecaud.
This small staff was quite equal to all the requirements,
for a canal between Beaucaire and Aiguemortes had
revolutionized transportation by substituting boats for the
cart and the stagecoach. And, as though to add to the daily
misery which this prosperous canal inflicted on the
unfortunate inn-keeper, whose utter ruin it was fast
accomplishing, it was situated between the Rhone from which
it had its source and the post-road it had depleted, not a
hundred steps from the inn, of which we have given a brief
but faithful description.

The inn-keeper himself was a man of from forty to fifty-five
years of age, tall, strong, and bony, a perfect specimen of
the natives of those southern latitudes; he had dark,
sparkling, and deep-set eyes, hooked nose, and teeth white
as those of a carnivorous animal; his hair, like his beard,
which he wore under his chin, was thick and curly, and in
spite of his age but slightly interspersed with a few
silvery threads. His naturally dark complexion had assumed a
still further shade of brown from the habit the unfortunate
man had acquired of stationing himself from morning till eve
at the threshold of his door, on the lookout for guests who
seldom came, yet there he stood, day after day, exposed to
the meridional rays of a burning sun, with no other
protection for his head than a red handkerchief twisted
around it, after the manner of the Spanish muleteers. This
man was our old acquaintance, Gaspard Caderousse. His wife,
on the contrary, whose maiden name had been Madeleine
Radelle, was pale, meagre, and sickly-looking. Born in the
neighborhood of Arles, she had shared in the beauty for
which its women are proverbial; but that beauty had
gradually withered beneath the devastating influence of the
slow fever so prevalent among dwellers by the ponds of
Aiguemortes and the marshes of Camargue. She remained nearly
always in her second-floor chamber, shivering in her chair,
or stretched languid and feeble on her bed, while her
husband kept his daily watch at the door — a duty he
performed with so much the greater willingness, as it saved
him the necessity of listening to the endless plaints and
murmurs of his helpmate, who never saw him without breaking
out into bitter invectives against fate; to all of which her
husband would calmly return an unvarying reply, in these
philosophic words: —

“Hush, La Carconte. It is God’s pleasure that things should
be so.”

The sobriquet of La Carconte had been bestowed on Madeleine
Radelle from the fact that she had been born in a village,
so called, situated between Salon and Lambesc; and as a
custom existed among the inhabitants of that part of France
where Caderousse lived of styling every person by some
particular and distinctive appellation, her husband had
bestowed on her the name of La Carconte in place of her
sweet and euphonious name of Madeleine, which, in all
probability, his rude gutteral language would not have
enabled him to pronounce. Still, let it not be supposed that
amid this affected resignation to the will of Providence,
the unfortunate inn-keeper did not writhe under the double
misery of seeing the hateful canal carry off his customers
and his profits, and the daily infliction of his peevish
partner’s murmurs and lamentations.

Like other dwellers in the south, he was a man of sober
habits and moderate desires, but fond of external show,
vain, and addicted to display. During the days of his
prosperity, not a festivity took place without himself and
wife being among the spectators. He dressed in the
picturesque costume worn upon grand occasions by the
inhabitants of the south of France, bearing equal
resemblance to the style adopted both by the Catalans and
Andalusians; while La Carconte displayed the charming
fashion prevalent among the women of Arles, a mode of attire
borrowed equally from Greece and Arabia. But, by degrees,
watch-chains, necklaces, parti-colored scarfs, embroidered
bodices, velvet vests, elegantly worked stockings, striped
gaiters, and silver buckles for the shoes, all disappeared;
and Gaspard Caderousse, unable to appear abroad in his
pristine splendor, had given up any further participation in
the pomps and vanities, both for himself and wife, although
a bitter feeling of envious discontent filled his mind as
the sound of mirth and merry music from the joyous revellers
reached even the miserable hostelry to which he still clung,
more for the shelter than the profit it afforded.

Caderousse, then, was, as usual, at his place of observation
before the door, his eyes glancing listlessly from a piece
of closely shaven grass — on which some fowls were
industriously, though fruitlessly, endeavoring to turn up
some grain or insect suited to their palate — to the
deserted road, which led away to the north and south, when
he was aroused by the shrill voice of his wife, and
grumbling to himself as he went, he mounted to her chamber,
first taking care, however, to set the entrance door wide
open, as an invitation to any chance traveller who might be
passing.

At the moment Caderousse quitted his sentry-like watch
before the door, the road on which he so eagerly strained
his sight was void and lonely as a desert at mid-day. There
it lay stretching out into one interminable line of dust and
sand, with its sides bordered by tall, meagre trees,
altogether presenting so uninviting an appearance, that no
one in his senses could have imagined that any traveller, at
liberty to regulate his hours for journeying, would choose
to expose himself in such a formidable Sahara. Nevertheless,
had Caderousse but retained his post a few minutes longer,
he might have caught a dim outline of something approaching
from the direction of Bellegarde; as the moving object drew
nearer, he would easily have perceived that it consisted of
a man and horse, between whom the kindest and most amiable
understanding appeared to exist. The horse was of Hungarian
breed, and ambled along at an easy pace. His rider was a
priest, dressed in black, and wearing a three-cornered hat;
and, spite of the ardent rays of a noonday sun, the pair
came on with a fair degree of rapidity.

Having arrived before the Pont du Gard, the horse stopped,
but whether for his own pleasure or that of his rider would
have been difficult to say. However that might have been,
the priest, dismounting, led his steed by the bridle in
search of some place to which he could secure him. Availing
himself of a handle that projected from a half-fallen door,
he tied the animal safely and having drawn a red cotton
handkerchief, from his pocket, wiped away the perspiration
that streamed from his brow, then, advancing to the door,
struck thrice with the end of his iron-shod stick. At this
unusual sound, a huge black dog came rushing to meet the
daring assailant of his ordinarily tranquil abode, snarling
and displaying his sharp white teeth with a determined
hostility that abundantly proved how little he was
accustomed to society. At that moment a heavy footstep was
heard descending the wooden staircase that led from the
upper floor, and, with many bows and courteous smiles, mine
host of the Pont du Gard besought his guest to enter.

“You are welcome, sir, most welcome!” repeated the
astonished Caderousse. “Now, then, Margotin,” cried he,
speaking to the dog, “will you be quiet? Pray don’t heed
him, sir! — he only barks, he never bites. I make no doubt
a glass of good wine would be acceptable this dreadfully hot
day.” Then perceiving for the first time the garb of the
traveller he had to entertain, Caderousse hastily exclaimed:
“A thousand pardons! I really did not observe whom I had the
honor to receive under my poor roof. What would the abbe
please to have? What refreshment can I offer? All I have is
at his service.”

The priest gazed on the person addressing him with a long
and searching gaze — there even seemed a disposition on his
part to court a similar scrutiny on the part of the
inn-keeper; then, observing in the countenance of the latter
no other expression than extreme surprise at his own want of
attention to an inquiry so courteously worded, he deemed it
as well to terminate this dumb show, and therefore said,
speaking with a strong Italian accent, “You are, I presume,
M. Caderousse?”

“Yes, sir,” answered the host, even more surprised at the
question than he had been by the silence which had preceded
it; “I am Gaspard Caderousse, at your service.”

“Gaspard Caderousse,” rejoined the priest. “Yes, —
Christian and surname are the same. You formerly lived, I
believe in the Allees de Meillan, on the fourth floor?”

“I did.”

“And you followed the business of a tailor?”

“True, I was a tailor, till the trade fell off. It is so hot
at Marseilles, that really I believe that the respectable
inhabitants will in time go without any clothing whatever.
But talking of heat, is there nothing I can offer you by way
of refreshment?”

“Yes; let me have a bottle of your best wine, and then, with
your permission, we will resume our conversation from where
we left off.”

“As you please, sir,” said Caderousse, who, anxious not to
lose the present opportunity of finding a customer for one
of the few bottles of Cahors still remaining in his
possession, hastily raised a trap-door in the floor of the
apartment they were in, which served both as parlor and
kitchen. Upon issuing forth from his subterranean retreat at
the expiration of five minutes, he found the abbe seated
upon a wooden stool, leaning his elbow on a table, while
Margotin, whose animosity seemed appeased by the unusual
command of the traveller for refreshments, had crept up to
him, and had established himself very comfortably between
his knees, his long, skinny neck resting on his lap, while
his dim eye was fixed earnestly on the traveller’s face.

“Are you quite alone?” inquired the guest, as Caderousse
placed before him the bottle of wine and a glass.

“Quite, quite alone,” replied the man — “or, at least,
practically so, for my poor wife, who is the only person in
the house besides myself, is laid up with illness, and
unable to render me the least assistance, poor thing!”

“You are married, then?” said the priest, with a show of
interest, glancing round as he spoke at the scanty
furnishings of the apartment.

“Ah, sir,” said Caderousse with a sigh, “it is easy to
perceive I am not a rich man; but in this world a man does
not thrive the better for being honest.” The abbe fixed on
him a searching, penetrating glance.

“Yes, honest — I can certainly say that much for myself,”
continued the inn-keeper, fairly sustaining the scrutiny of
the abbe’s gaze; “I can boast with truth of being an honest
man; and,” continued he significantly, with a hand on his
breast and shaking his head, “that is more than every one
can say nowadays.”

“So much the better for you, if what you assert be true,”
said the abbe; “for I am firmly persuaded that, sooner or
later, the good will be rewarded, and the wicked punished.”

“Such words as those belong to your profession,” answered
Caderousse, “and you do well to repeat them; but,” added he,
with a bitter expression of countenance, “one is free to
believe them or not, as one pleases.”

“You are wrong to speak thus,” said the abbe; “and perhaps I
may, in my own person, be able to prove to you how
completely you are in error.”

“What mean you?” inquired Caderousse with a look of
surprise.

“In the first place, I must be satisfied that you are the
person I am in search of.”

“What proofs do you require?”

“Did you, in the year 1814 or 1815, know anything of a young
sailor named Dantes?”

“Dantes? Did I know poor dear Edmond? Why, Edmond Dantes and
myself were intimate friends!” exclaimed Caderousse, whose
countenance flushed darkly as he caught the penetrating gaze
of the abbe fixed on him, while the clear, calm eye of the
questioner seemed to dilate with feverish scrutiny.

“You remind me,” said the priest, “that the young man
concerning whom I asked you was said to bear the name of
Edmond.”

“Said to bear the name!” repeated Caderousse, becoming
excited and eager. “Why, he was so called as truly as I
myself bore the appellation of Gaspard Caderousse; but tell
me, I pray, what has become of poor Edmond? Did you know
him? Is he alive and at liberty? Is he prosperous and
happy?”

“He died a more wretched, hopeless, heart-broken prisoner
than the felons who pay the penalty of their crimes at the
galleys of Toulon.”

A deadly pallor followed the flush on the countenance of
Caderousse, who turned away, and the priest saw him wiping
the tears from his eyes with the corner of the red
handkerchief twisted round his head.

“Poor fellow, poor fellow!” murmured Caderousse. “Well,
there, sir, is another proof that good people are never
rewarded on this earth, and that none but the wicked
prosper. Ah,” continued Caderousse, speaking in the highly
colored language of the south, “the world grows worse and
worse. Why does not God, if he really hates the wicked, as
he is said to do, send down brimstone and fire, and consume
them altogether?”

“You speak as though you had loved this young Dantes,”
observed the abbe, without taking any notice of his
companion’s vehemence.

“And so I did,” replied Caderousse; “though once, I confess,
I envied him his good fortune. But I swear to you, sir, I
swear to you, by everything a man holds dear, I have, since
then, deeply and sincerely lamented his unhappy fate.” There
was a brief silence, during which the fixed, searching eye
of the abbe was employed in scrutinizing the agitated
features of the inn-keeper.

“You knew the poor lad, then?” continued Caderousse.

“I was called to see him on his dying bed, that I might
administer to him the consolations of religion.”

“And of what did he die?” asked Caderousse in a choking
voice.

“Of what, think you, do young and strong men die in prison,
when they have scarcely numbered their thirtieth year,
unless it be of imprisonment?” Caderousse wiped away the
large beads of perspiration that gathered on his brow.

“But the strangest part of the story is,” resumed the abbe,
“that Dantes, even in his dying moments, swore by his
crucified Redeemer, that he was utterly ignorant of the
cause of his detention.”

“And so he was,” murmured Caderousse. “How should he have
been otherwise? Ah, sir, the poor fellow told you the
truth.”

“And for that reason, he besought me to try and clear up a
mystery he had never been able to penetrate, and to clear
his memory should any foul spot or stain have fallen on it.”

And here the look of the abbe, becoming more and more fixed,
seemed to rest with ill-concealed satisfaction on the gloomy
depression which was rapidly spreading over the countenance
of Caderousse.

“A rich Englishman,” continued the abbe, “who had been his
companion in misfortune, but had been released from prison
during the second restoration, was possessed of a diamond of
immense value; this jewel he bestowed on Dantes upon himself
quitting the prison, as a mark of his gratitude for the
kindness and brotherly care with which Dantes had nursed him
in a severe illness he underwent during his confinement.
Instead of employing this diamond in attempting to bribe his
jailers, who might only have taken it and then betrayed him
to the governor, Dantes carefully preserved it, that in the
event of his getting out of prison he might have wherewithal
to live, for the sale of such a diamond would have quite
sufficed to make his fortune.”

“Then, I suppose,” asked Caderousse, with eager, glowing
looks, “that it was a stone of immense value?”

“Why, everything is relative,” answered the abbe. “To one in
Edmond’s position the diamond certainly was of great value.
It was estimated at fifty thousand francs.”

“Bless me!” exclaimed Caderousse, “fifty thousand francs!
Surely the diamond was as large as a nut to be worth all
that.”

“No,” replied the abbe, “it was not of such a size as that;
but you shall judge for yourself. I have it with me.”

The sharp gaze of Caderousse was instantly directed towards
the priest’s garments, as though hoping to discover the
location of the treasure. Calmly drawing forth from his
pocket a small box covered with black shagreen, the abbe
opened it, and displayed to the dazzled eyes of Caderousse
the sparkling jewel it contained, set in a ring of admirable
workmanship. “And that diamond,” cried Caderousse, almost
breathless with eager admiration, “you say, is worth fifty
thousand francs?”

“It is, without the setting, which is also valuable,”
replied the abbe, as he closed the box, and returned it to
his pocket, while its brilliant hues seemed still to dance
before the eyes of the fascinated inn-keeper.

“But how comes the diamond in your possession, sir? Did
Edmond make you his heir?”

“No, merely his testamentary executor. `I once possessed
four dear and faithful friends, besides the maiden to whom I
was betrothed’ he said; `and I feel convinced they have all
unfeignedly grieved over my loss. The name of one of the
four friends is Caderousse.'” The inn-keeper shivered.

“`Another of the number,'” continued the abbe, without
seeming to notice the emotion of Caderousse, “`is called
Danglars; and the third, in spite of being my rival,
entertained a very sincere affection for me.'” A fiendish
smile played over the features of Caderousse, who was about
to break in upon the abbe’s speech, when the latter, waving
his hand, said, “Allow me to finish first, and then if you
have any observations to make, you can do so afterwards.
`The third of my friends, although my rival, was much
attached to me, — his name was Fernand; that of my
betrothed was’ — Stay, stay,” continued the abbe, “I have
forgotten what he called her.”

“Mercedes,” said Caderousse eagerly.

“True,” said the abbe, with a stifled sigh, “Mercedes it
was.”

“Go on,” urged Caderousse.

“Bring me a carafe of water,” said the abbe.

Caderousse quickly performed the stranger’s bidding; and
after pouring some into a glass, and slowly swallowing its
contents, the abbe, resuming his usual placidity of manner,
said, as he placed his empty glass on the table, — “Where
did we leave off?”

“The name of Edmond’s betrothed was Mercedes.”

“To be sure. `You will go to Marseilles,’ said Dantes, —
for you understand, I repeat his words just as he uttered
them. Do you understand?”

“Perfectly.”

“`You will sell this diamond; you will divide the money into
five equal parts, and give an equal portion to these good
friends, the only persons who have loved me upon earth.'”

“But why into five parts?” asked Caderousse; “you only
mentioned four persons.”

“Because the fifth is dead, as I hear. The fifth sharer in
Edmond’s bequest, was his own father.”

“Too true, too true!” ejaculated Caderousse, almost
suffocated by the contending passions which assailed him,
“the poor old man did die.”

“I learned so much at Marseilles,” replied the abbe, making
a strong effort to appear indifferent; “but from the length
of time that has elapsed since the death of the elder
Dantes, I was unable to obtain any particulars of his end.
Can you enlighten me on that point?”

“I do not know who could if I could not,” said Caderousse.
“Why, I lived almost on the same floor with the poor old
man. Ah, yes, about a year after the disappearance of his
son the poor old man died.”

“Of what did he die?”

“Why, the doctors called his complaint gastro-enteritis, I
believe; his acquaintances say he died of grief; but I, who
saw him in his dying moments, I say he died of” —
Caderousse paused.

“Of what?” asked the priest, anxiously and eagerly.

“Why, of downright starvation.”

“Starvation!” exclaimed the abbe, springing from his seat.
“Why, the vilest animals are not suffered to die by such a
death as that. The very dogs that wander houseless and
homeless in the streets find some pitying hand to cast them
a mouthful of bread; and that a man, a Christian, should be
allowed to perish of hunger in the midst of other men who
call themselves Christians, is too horrible for belief. Oh,
it is impossible — utterly impossible!”

“What I have said, I have said,” answered Caderousse.

“And you are a fool for having said anything about it,” said
a voice from the top of the stairs. “Why should you meddle
with what does not concern you?”

The two men turned quickly, and saw the sickly countenance
of La Carconte peering between the baluster rails; attracted
by the sound of voices, she had feebly dragged herself down
the stairs, and, seated on the lower step, head on knees,
she had listened to the foregoing conversation. “Mind your
own business, wife,” replied Caderousse sharply. “This
gentleman asks me for information, which common politeness
will not permit me to refuse.”

“Politeness, you simpleton!” retorted La Carconte. “What
have you to do with politeness, I should like to know?
Better study a little common prudence. How do you know the
motives that person may have for trying to extract all he
can from you?”

“I pledge you my word, madam,” said the abbe, “that my
intentions are good; and that you husband can incur no risk,
provided he answers me candidly.”

“Ah, that’s all very fine,” retorted the woman. “Nothing is
easier than to begin with fair promises and assurances of
nothing to fear; but when poor, silly folks, like my husband
there, have been persuaded to tell all they know, the
promises and assurances of safety are quickly forgotten; and
at some moment when nobody is expecting it, behold trouble
and misery, and all sorts of persecutions, are heaped on the
unfortunate wretches, who cannot even see whence all their
afflictions come.”

“Nay, nay, my good woman, make yourself perfectly easy, I
beg of you. Whatever evils may befall you, they will not be
occasioned by my instrumentality, that I solemnly promise
you.”

La Carconte muttered a few inarticulate words, then let her
head again drop upon her knees, and went into a fit of ague,
leaving the two speakers to resume the conversation, but
remaining so as to be able to hear every word they uttered.
Again the abbe had been obliged to swallow a draught of
water to calm the emotions that threatened to overpower him.
When he had sufficiently recovered himself, he said, “It
appears, then, that the miserable old man you were telling
me of was forsaken by every one. Surely, had not such been
the case, he would not have perished by so dreadful a
death.”

“Why, he was not altogether forsaken,” continued Caderousse,
“for Mercedes the Catalan and Monsieur Morrel were very kind
to him; but somehow the poor old man had contracted a
profound hatred for Fernand — the very person,” added
Caderousse with a bitter smile, “that you named just now as
being one of Dantes’ faithful and attached friends.”

“And was he not so?” asked the abbe.

“Gaspard, Gaspard!” murmured the woman, from her seat on the
stairs, “mind what you are saying!” Caderousse made no reply
to these words, though evidently irritated and annoyed by
the interruption, but, addressing the abbe, said, “Can a man
be faithful to another whose wife he covets and desires for
himself? But Dantes was so honorable and true in his own
nature, that he believed everybody’s professions of
friendship. Poor Edmond, he was cruelly deceived; but it was
fortunate that he never knew, or he might have found it more
difficult, when on his deathbed, to pardon his enemies. And,
whatever people may say,” continued Caderousse, in his
native language, which was not altogether devoid of rude
poetry, “I cannot help being more frightened at the idea of
the malediction of the dead than the hatred of the living.”

“Imbecile!” exclaimed La Carconte.

“Do you, then, know in what manner Fernand injured Dantes?”
inquired the abbe of Caderousse.

“Do I? No one better.”

“Speak out then, say what it was!”

“Gaspard!” cried La Carconte, “do as you will; you are
master — but if you take my advice you’ll hold your
tongue.”

“Well, wife,” replied Caderousse, “I don’t know but what
you’re right!”

“So you will say nothing?” asked the abbe.

“Why, what good would it do?” asked Caderousse. “If the poor
lad were living, and came to me and begged that I would
candidly tell which were his true and which his false
friends, why, perhaps, I should not hesitate. But you tell
me he is no more, and therefore can have nothing to do with
hatred or revenge, so let all such feeling be buried with
him.”

“You prefer, then,” said the abbe, “that I should bestow on
men you say are false and treacherous, the reward intended
for faithful friendship?”

“That is true enough,” returned Caderousse. “You say truly,
the gift of poor Edmond was not meant for such traitors as
Fernand and Danglars; besides, what would it be to them? no
more than a drop of water in the ocean.”

“Remember,” chimed in La Carconte, “those two could crush
you at a single blow!”

“How so?” inquired the abbe. “Are these persons, then, so
rich and powerful?”

“Do you not know their history?”

“I do not. Pray relate it to me!” Caderousse seemed to
reflect for a few moments, then said, “No, truly, it would
take up too much time.”

“Well, my good friend,” returned the abbe, in a tone that
indicated utter indifference on his part, “you are at
liberty, either to speak or be silent, just as you please;
for my own part, I respect your scruples and admire your
sentiments; so let the matter end. I shall do my duty as
conscientiously as I can, and fulfil my promise to the dying
man. My first business will be to dispose of this diamond.”
So saying, the abbe again draw the small box from his
pocket, opened it, and contrived to hold it in such a light,
that a bright flash of brilliant hues passed before the
dazzled gaze of Caderousse.

“Wife, wife!” cried he in a hoarse voice, “come here!”

“Diamond!” exclaimed La Carconte, rising and descending to
the chamber with a tolerably firm step; “what diamond are
you talking about?”

“Why, did you not hear all we said?” inquired Caderousse.
“It is a beautiful diamond left by poor Edmond Dantes, to be
sold, and the money divided between his father, Mercedes,
his betrothed bride, Fernand, Danglars, and myself. The
jewel is worth at least fifty thousand francs.”

“Oh, what a magnificent jewel!” cried the astonished woman.

“The fifth part of the profits from this stone belongs to us
then, does it not?” asked Caderousse.

“It does,” replied the abbe; “with the addition of an equal
division of that part intended for the elder Dantes, which I
believe myself at liberty to divide equally with the four
survivors.”

“And why among us four?” inquired Caderousse.

“As being the friends Edmond esteemed most faithful and
devoted to him.”

“I don’t call those friends who betray and ruin you,”
murmured the wife in her turn, in a low, muttering voice.

“Of course not!” rejoined Caderousse quickly; “no more do I,
and that was what I was observing to this gentleman just
now. I said I looked upon it as a sacrilegious profanation
to reward treachery, perhaps crime.”

“Remember,” answered the abbe calmly, as he replaced the
jewel and its case in the pocket of his cassock, “it is your
fault, not mine, that I do so. You will have the goodness to
furnish me with the address of both Fernand and Danglars, in
order that I may execute Edmond’s last wishes.” The
agitation of Caderousse became extreme, and large drops of
perspiration rolled from his heated brow. As he saw the abbe
rise from his seat and go towards the door, as though to
ascertain if his horse were sufficiently refreshed to
continue his journey, Caderousse and his wife exchanged
looks of deep meaning.

“There, you see, wife,” said the former, “this splendid
diamond might all be ours, if we chose!”

“Do you believe it?”

“Why, surely a man of his holy profession would not deceive
us!”

“Well,” replied La Carconte, “do as you like. For my part, I
wash my hands of the affair.” So saying, she once more
climbed the staircase leading to her chamber, her body
convulsed with chills, and her teeth rattling in her head,
in spite of the intense heat of the weather. Arrived at the
top stair, she turned round, and called out, in a warning
tone, to her husband, “Gaspard, consider well what you are
about to do!”

“I have both reflected and decided,” answered he. La
Carconte then entered her chamber, the flooring of which
creaked beneath her heavy, uncertain tread, as she proceeded
towards her arm-chair, into which she fell as though
exhausted.

“Well,” asked the abbe, as he returned to the apartment
below, “what have you made up your mind to do?”

“To tell you all I know,” was the reply.

“I certainly think you act wisely in so doing,” said the
priest. “Not because I have the least desire to learn
anything you may please to conceal from me, but simply that
if, through your assistance, I could distribute the legacy
according to the wishes of the testator, why, so much the
better, that is all.”

“I hope it may be so,” replied Caderousse, his face flushed
with cupidity.

“I am all attention,” said the abbe.

“Stop a minute,” answered Caderousse; “we might be
interrupted in the most interesting part of my story, which
would be a pity; and it is as well that your visit hither
should be made known only to ourselves.” With these words he
went stealthily to the door, which he closed, and, by way of
still greater precaution, bolted and barred it, as he was
accustomed to do at night. During this time the abbe had
chosen his place for listening at his ease. He removed his
seat into a corner of the room, where he himself would be in
deep shadow, while the light would be fully thrown on the
narrator; then, with head bent down and hands clasped, or
rather clinched together, he prepared to give his whole
attention to Caderousse, who seated himself on the little
stool, exactly opposite to him.

“Remember, this is no affair of mine,” said the trembling
voice of La Carconte, as though through the flooring of her
chamber she viewed the scene that was enacting below.

“Enough, enough!” replied Caderousse; “say no more about it;
I will take all the consequences upon myself.” And he began
his story.

“First, sir,” said Caderousse, “you must make me a promise.”

“What is that?” inquired the abbe.

“Why, if you ever make use of the details I am about to give
you, that you will never let any one know that it was I who
supplied them; for the persons of whom I am about to talk
are rich and powerful, and if they only laid the tips of
their fingers on me, I should break to pieces like glass.”

“Make yourself easy, my friend,” replied the abbe. “I am a
priest, and confessions die in my breast. Recollect, our
only desire is to carry out, in a fitting manner, the last
wishes of our friend. Speak, then, without reserve, as
without hatred; tell the truth, the whole truth; I do not
know, never may know, the persons of whom you are about to
speak; besides, I am an Italian, and not a Frenchman, and
belong to God, and not to man, and I shall shortly retire to
my convent, which I have only quitted to fulfil the last
wishes of a dying man.” This positive assurance seemed to
give Caderousse a little courage.

“Well, then, under these circumstances,” said Caderousse, “I
will, I even believe I ought to undeceive you as to the
friendship which poor Edmond thought so sincere and
unquestionable.”

“Begin with his father, if you please.” said the abbe;
“Edmond talked to me a great deal about the old man for whom
he had the deepest love.”

“The history is a sad one, sir,” said Caderousse, shaking
his head; “perhaps you know all the earlier part of it?”

“Yes.” answered the abbe; “Edmond related to me everything
until the moment when he was arrested in a small cabaret
close to Marseilles.”

“At La Reserve! Oh, yes; I can see it all before me this
moment.”

“Was it not his betrothal feast?”

“It was and the feast that began so gayly had a very
sorrowful ending; a police commissary, followed by four
soldiers, entered, and Dantes was arrested.”

“Yes, and up to this point I know all,” said the priest.
“Dantes himself only knew that which personally concerned
him, for he never beheld again the five persons I have named
to you, or heard mention of any one of them.”

“Well, when Dantes was arrested, Monsieur Morrel hastened to
obtain the particulars, and they were very sad. The old man
returned alone to his home, folded up his wedding suit with
tears in his eyes, and paced up and down his chamber the
whole day, and would not go to bed at all, for I was
underneath him and heard him walking the whole night; and
for myself, I assure you I could not sleep either, for the
grief of the poor father gave me great uneasiness, and every
step he took went to my heart as really as if his foot had
pressed against my breast. The next day Mercedes came to
implore the protection of M. de Villefort; she did not
obtain it, however, and went to visit the old man; when she
saw him so miserable and heart-broken, having passed a
sleepless night, and not touched food since the previous
day, she wished him to go with her that she might take care
of him; but the old man would not consent. `No,’ was the old
man’s reply, `I will not leave this house, for my poor dear
boy loves me better than anything in the world; and if he
gets out of prison he will come and see me the first thing,
and what would he think if I did not wait here for him?’ I
heard all this from the window, for I was anxious that
Mercedes should persuade the old man to accompany her, for
his footsteps over my head night and day did not leave me a
moment’s repose.”

“But did you not go up-stairs and try to console the poor
old man?” asked the abbe.

“Ah, sir,” replied Caderousse, “we cannot console those who
will not be consoled, and he was one of these; besides, I
know not why, but he seemed to dislike seeing me. One night,
however, I heard his sobs, and I could not resist my desire
to go up to him, but when I reached his door he was no
longer weeping but praying. I cannot now repeat to you, sir,
all the eloquent words and imploring language he made use
of; it was more than piety, it was more than grief, and I,
who am no canter, and hate the Jesuits, said then to myself,
`It is really well, and I am very glad that I have not any
children; for if I were a father and felt such excessive
grief as the old man does, and did not find in my memory or
heart all he is now saying, I should throw myself into the
sea at once, for I could not bear it.'”

“Poor father!” murmured the priest.

“From day to day he lived on alone, and more and more
solitary. M. Morrel and Mercedes came to see him, but his
door was closed; and, although I was certain he was at home,
he would not make any answer. One day, when, contrary to his
custom, he had admitted Mercedes, and the poor girl, in
spite of her own grief and despair, endeavored to console
him, he said to her, — `Be assured, my dear daughter, he is
dead; and instead of expecting him, it is he who is awaiting
us; I am quite happy, for I am the oldest, and of course
shall see him first.’ However well disposed a person may be,
why you see we leave off after a time seeing persons who are
in sorrow, they make one melancholy; and so at last old
Dantes was left all to himself, and I only saw from time to
time strangers go up to him and come down again with some
bundle they tried to hide; but I guessed what these bundles
were, and that he sold by degrees what he had to pay for his
subsistence. At length the poor old fellow reached the end
of all he had; he owed three quarters’ rent, and they
threatened to turn him out; he begged for another week,
which was granted to him. I know this, because the landlord
came into my apartment when he left his. For the first three
days I heard him walking about as usual, but, on the fourth
I heard nothing. I then resolved to go up to him at all
risks. The door was closed, but I looked through the
keyhole, and saw him so pale and haggard, that believing him
very ill, I went and told M. Morrel and then ran on to
Mercedes. They both came immediately, M. Morrel bringing a
doctor, and the doctor said it was inflammation of the
bowels, and ordered him a limited diet. I was there, too,
and I never shall forget the old man’s smile at this
prescription. From that time he received all who came; he
had an excuse for not eating any more; the doctor had put
him on a diet.” The abbe uttered a kind of groan. “The story
interests you, does it not, sir?” inquired Caderousse.

“Yes,” replied the abbe, “it is very affecting.”

“Mercedes came again, and she found him so altered that she
was even more anxious than before to have him taken to her
own home. This was M. Morrel’s wish also, who would fain
have conveyed the old man against his consent; but the old
man resisted, and cried so that they were actually
frightened. Mercedes remained, therefore, by his bedside,
and M. Morrel went away, making a sign to the Catalan that
he had left his purse on the chimney-piece. But availing
himself of the doctor’s order, the old man would not take
any sustenance; at length (after nine days of despair and
fasting), the old man died, cursing those who had caused his
misery, and saying to Mercedes, `If you ever see my Edmond
again, tell him I die blessing him.'” The abbe rose from his
chair, made two turns round the chamber, and pressed his
trembling hand against his parched throat. “And you believe
he died” —

“Of hunger, sir, of hunger,” said Caderousse. “I am as
certain of it as that we two are Christians.”

The abbe, with a shaking hand, seized a glass of water that
was standing by him half-full, swallowed it at one gulp, and
then resumed his seat, with red eyes and pale cheeks. “This
was, indeed, a horrid event.” said he in a hoarse voice.

“The more so, sir, as it was men’s and not God’s doing.”

“Tell me of those men,” said the abbe, “and remember too,”
he added in an almost menacing tone, “you have promised to
tell me everything. Tell me, therefore, who are these men
who killed the son with despair, and the father with
famine?”

“Two men jealous of him, sir; one from love, and the other
from ambition, — Fernand and Danglars.”

“How was this jealousy manifested? Speak on.”

“They denounced Edmond as a Bonapartist agent.”

“Which of the two denounced him? Which was the real
delinquent?”

“Both, sir; one with a letter, and the other put it in the
post.”

“And where was this letter written?”

“At La Reserve, the day before the betrothal feast.”

“‘Twas so, then — ’twas so, then,” murmured the abbe. “Oh,
Faria, Faria, how well did you judge men and things!”

“What did you please to say, sir?” asked Caderousse.

“Nothing, nothing,” replied the priest; “go on.”

“It was Danglars who wrote the denunciation with his left
hand, that his writing might not be recognized, and Fernand
who put it in the post.”

“But,” exclaimed the abbe suddenly, “you were there
yourself.”

“I!” said Caderousse, astonished; “who told you I was
there?”

The abbe saw he had overshot the mark, and he added quickly,
— “No one; but in order to have known everything so well,
you must have been an eye-witness.”

“True, true!” said Caderousse in a choking voice, “I was
there.”

“And did you not remonstrate against such infamy?” asked the
abbe; “if not, you were an accomplice.”

“Sir,” replied Caderousse, “they had made me drink to such
an excess that I nearly lost all perception. I had only an
indistinct understanding of what was passing around me. I
said all that a man in such a state could say; but they both
assured me that it was a jest they were carrying on, and
perfectly harmless.”

“Next day — next day, sir, you must have seen plain enough
what they had been doing, yet you said nothing, though you
were present when Dantes was arrested.”

“Yes, sir, I was there, and very anxious to speak; but
Danglars restrained me. `If he should really be guilty,’
said he, `and did really put in to the Island of Elba; if he
is really charged with a letter for the Bonapartist
committee at Paris, and if they find this letter upon him,
those who have supported him will pass for his accomplices.’
I confess I had my fears, in the state in which politics
then were, and I held my tongue. It was cowardly, I confess,
but it was not criminal.”

“I understand — you allowed matters to take their course,
that was all.”

“Yes, sir,” answered Caderousse; “and remorse preys on me
night and day. I often ask pardon of God, I swear to you,
because this action, the only one with which I have
seriously to reproach myself in all my life, is no doubt the
cause of my abject condition. I am expiating a moment of
selfishness, and so I always say to La Carconte, when she
complains, `Hold your tongue, woman; it is the will of
God.'” And Caderousse bowed his head with every sign of real
repentance.

“Well, sir,” said the abbe, “you have spoken unreservedly;
and thus to accuse yourself is to deserve pardon.”

“Unfortunately, Edmond is dead, and has not pardoned me.”

“He did not know,” said the abbe.

“But he knows it all now,” interrupted Caderousse; “they say
the dead know everything.” There was a brief silence; the
abbe rose and paced up and down pensively, and then resumed
his seat. “You have two or three times mentioned a M.
Morrel,” he said; “who was he?”

“The owner of the Pharaon and patron of Dantes.”

“And what part did he play in this sad drama?” inquired the
abbe.

“The part of an honest man, full of courage and real regard.
Twenty times he interceded for Edmond. When the emperor
returned, he wrote, implored, threatened, and so
energetically, that on the second restoration he was
persecuted as a Bonapartist. Ten times, as I told you, he
came to see Dantes’ father, and offered to receive him in
his own house; and the night or two before his death, as I
have already said, he left his purse on the mantelpiece,
with which they paid the old man’s debts, and buried him
decently; and so Edmond’s father died, as he had lived,
without doing harm to any one. I have the purse still by me
— a large one, made of red silk.”

“And,” asked the abbe, “is M. Morrel still alive?”

“Yes,” replied Caderousse.

“In that case,” replied the abbe, “he should be rich,
happy.”

Caderousse smiled bitterly. “Yes, happy as myself,” said he.

“What! M. Morrel unhappy?” exclaimed the abbe.

“He is reduced almost to the last extremity — nay, he is
almost at the point of dishonor.”

“How?”

“Yes,” continued Caderousse, “so it is; after five and
twenty years of labor, after having acquired a most
honorable name in the trade of Marseilles, M. Morrel is
utterly ruined; he has lost five ships in two years, has
suffered by the bankruptcy of three large houses, and his
only hope now is in that very Pharaon which poor Dantes
commanded, and which is expected from the Indies with a
cargo of cochineal and indigo. If this ship founders, like
the others, he is a ruined man.”

“And has the unfortunate man wife or children?” inquired the
abbe.

“Yes, he has a wife, who through everything has behaved like
an angel; he has a daughter, who was about to marry the man
she loved, but whose family now will not allow him to wed
the daughter of a ruined man; he has, besides, a son, a
lieutenant in the army; and, as you may suppose, all this,
instead of lessening, only augments his sorrows. If he were
alone in the world he would blow out his brains, and there
would be an end.”

“Horrible!” ejaculated the priest.

“And it is thus heaven recompenses virtue, sir,” added
Caderousse. “You see, I, who never did a bad action but that
I have told you of — am in destitution, with my poor wife
dying of fever before my very eyes, and I unable to do
anything in the world for her; I shall die of hunger, as old
Dantes did, while Fernand and Danglars are rolling in
wealth.”

“How is that?”

“Because their deeds have brought them good fortune, while
honest men have been reduced to misery.”

“What has become of Danglars, the instigator, and therefore
the most guilty?”

“What has become of him? Why, he left Marseilles, and was
taken, on the recommendation of M. Morrel, who did not know
his crime, as cashier into a Spanish bank. During the war
with Spain he was employed in the commissariat of the French
army, and made a fortune; then with that money he speculated
in the funds, and trebled or quadrupled his capital; and,
having first married his banker’s daughter, who left him a
widower, he has married a second time, a widow, a Madame de
Nargonne, daughter of M. de Servieux, the king’s
chamberlain, who is in high favor at court. He is a
millionaire, and they have made him a baron, and now he is
the Baron Danglars, with a fine residence in the Rue de
Mont-Blanc, with ten horses in his stables, six footmen in
his ante-chamber, and I know not how many millions in his
strongbox.”

“Ah!” said the abbe, in a peculiar tone, “he is happy.”

“Happy? Who can answer for that? Happiness or unhappiness is
the secret known but to one’s self and the walls — walls
have ears but no tongue; but if a large fortune produces
happiness, Danglars is happy.”

“And Fernand?”

“Fernand? Why, much the same story.”

“But how could a poor Catalan fisher-boy, without education
or resources, make a fortune? I confess this staggers me.”

“And it has staggered everybody. There must have been in his
life some strange secret that no one knows.”

“But, then, by what visible steps has he attained this high
fortune or high position?”

“Both, sir — he has both fortune and position — both.”

“This must be impossible!”

“It would seem so; but listen, and you will understand. Some
days before the return of the emperor, Fernand was drafted.
The Bourbons left him quietly enough at the Catalans, but
Napoleon returned, a special levy was made, and Fernand was
compelled to join. I went too; but as I was older than
Fernand, and had just married my poor wife, I was only sent
to the coast. Fernand was enrolled in the active troop, went
to the frontier with his regiment, and was at the battle of
Ligny. The night after that battle he was sentry at the door
of a general who carried on a secret correspondence with the
enemy. That same night the general was to go over to the
English. He proposed to Fernand to accompany him; Fernand
agreed to do so, deserted his post, and followed the
general. Fernand would have been court-martialed if Napoleon
had remained on the throne, but his action was rewarded by
the Bourbons. He returned to France with the epaulet of
sub-lieutenant, and as the protection of the general, who is
in the highest favor, was accorded to him, he was a captain
in 1823, during the Spanish war — that is to say, at the
time when Danglars made his early speculations. Fernand was
a Spaniard, and being sent to Spain to ascertain the feeling
of his fellow-countrymen, found Danglars there, got on very
intimate terms with him, won over the support of the
royalists at the capital and in the provinces, received
promises and made pledges on his own part, guided his
regiment by paths known to himself alone through the
mountain gorges which were held by the royalists, and, in
fact, rendered such services in this brief campaign that,
after the taking of Trocadero, he was made colonel, and
received the title of count and the cross of an officer of
the Legion of Honor.”

“Destiny! destiny!” murmured the abbe.

“Yes, but listen: this was not all. The war with Spain being
ended, Fernand’s career was checked by the long peace which
seemed likely to endure throughout Europe. Greece only had
risen against Turkey, and had begun her war of independence;
all eyes were turned towards Athens — it was the fashion to
pity and support the Greeks. The French government, without
protecting them openly, as you know, gave countenance to
volunteer assistance. Fernand sought and obtained leave to
go and serve in Greece, still having his name kept on the
army roll. Some time after, it was stated that the Comte de
Morcerf (this was the name he bore) had entered the service
of Ali Pasha with the rank of instructor-general. Ali Pasha
was killed, as you know, but before he died he recompensed
the services of Fernand by leaving him a considerable sum,
with which he returned to France, when he was gazetted
lieutenant-general.”

“So that now?” — inquired the abbe.

“So that now,” continued Caderousse, “he owns a magnificent
house — No. 27, Rue du Helder, Paris.” The abbe opened his
mouth, hesitated for a moment, then, making an effort at
self-control, he said, “And Mercedes — they tell me that
she has disappeared?”

“Disappeared,” said Caderousse, “yes, as the sun disappears,
to rise the next day with still more splendor.”

“Has she made a fortune also?” inquired the abbe, with an
ironical smile.

“Mercedes is at this moment one of the greatest ladies in
Paris,” replied Caderousse.

“Go on,” said the abbe; “it seems as if I were listening to
the story of a dream. But I have seen things so
extraordinary, that what you tell me seems less astonishing
than it otherwise might.”

“Mercedes was at first in the deepest despair at the blow
which deprived her of Edmond. I have told you of her
attempts to propitiate M. de Villefort, her devotion to the
elder Dantes. In the midst of her despair, a new affliction
overtook her. This was the departure of Fernand — of
Fernand, whose crime she did not know, and whom she regarded
as her brother. Fernand went, and Mercedes remained alone.
Three months passed and still she wept — no news of Edmond,
no news of Fernand, no companionship save that of an old man
who was dying with despair. One evening, after a day of
accustomed vigil at the angle of two roads leading to
Marseilles from the Catalans, she returned to her home more
depressed than ever. Suddenly she heard a step she knew,
turned anxiously around, the door opened, and Fernand,
dressed in the uniform of a sub-lieutenant, stood before
her. It was not the one she wished for most, but it seemed
as if a part of her past life had returned to her. Mercedes
seized Fernand’s hands with a transport which he took for
love, but which was only joy at being no longer alone in the
world, and seeing at last a friend, after long hours of
solitary sorrow. And then, it must be confessed, Fernand had
never been hated — he was only not precisely loved. Another
possessed all Mercedes’ heart; that other was absent, had
disappeared, perhaps was dead. At this last thought Mercedes
burst into a flood of tears, and wrung her hands in agony;
but the thought, which she had always repelled before when
it was suggested to her by another, came now in full force
upon her mind; and then, too, old Dantes incessantly said to
her, `Our Edmond is dead; if he were not, he would return to
us.’ The old man died, as I have told you; had he lived,
Mercedes, perchance, had not become the wife of another, for
he would have been there to reproach her infidelity. Fernand
saw this, and when he learned of the old man’s death he
returned. He was now a lieutenant. At his first coming he
had not said a word of love to Mercedes; at the second he
reminded her that he loved her. Mercedes begged for six
months more in which to await and mourn for Edmond.”

“So that,” said the abbe, with a bitter smile, “that makes
eighteen months in all. What more could the most devoted
lover desire?” Then he murmured the words of the English
poet, “`Frailty, thy name is woman.'”

“Six months afterwards,” continued Caderousse, “the marriage
took place in the church of Accoules.”

“The very church in which she was to have married Edmond,”
murmured the priest; “there was only a change of
bride-grooms.”

“Well, Mercedes was married,” proceeded Caderousse; “but
although in the eyes of the world she appeared calm, she
nearly fainted as she passed La Reserve, where, eighteen
months before, the betrothal had been celebrated with him
whom she might have known she still loved had she looked to
the bottom of her heart. Fernand, more happy, but not more
at his ease — for I saw at this time he was in constant
dread of Edmond’s return — Fernand was very anxious to get
his wife away, and to depart himself. There were too many
unpleasant possibilities associated with the Catalans, and
eight days after the wedding they left Marseilles.”

“Did you ever see Mercedes again?” inquired the priest.

“Yes, during the Spanish war, at Perpignan, where Fernand
had left her; she was attending to the education of her
son.” The abbe started. “Her son?” said he.

“Yes,” replied Caderousse, “little Albert.”

“But, then, to be able to instruct her child,” continued the
abbe, “she must have received an education herself. I
understood from Edmond that she was the daughter of a simple
fisherman, beautiful but uneducated.”

“Oh,” replied Caderousse, “did he know so little of his
lovely betrothed? Mercedes might have been a queen, sir, if
the crown were to be placed on the heads of the loveliest
and most intelligent. Fernand’s fortune was already waxing
great, and she developed with his growing fortune. She
learned drawing, music — everything. Besides, I believe,
between ourselves, she did this in order to distract her
mind, that she might forget; and she only filled her head in
order to alleviate the weight on her heart. But now her
position in life is assured,” continued Caderousse; “no
doubt fortune and honors have comforted her; she is rich, a
countess, and yet” — Caderousse paused.

“And yet what?” asked the abbe.

“Yet, I am sure, she is not happy,” said Caderousse.

“What makes you believe this?”

“Why, when I found myself utterly destitute, I thought my
old friends would, perhaps, assist me. So I went to
Danglars, who would not even receive me. I called on
Fernand, who sent me a hundred francs by his
valet-de-chambre.”

“Then you did not see either of them?”

“No, but Madame de Morcerf saw me.”

“How was that?”

“As I went away a purse fell at my feet — it contained five
and twenty louis; I raised my head quickly, and saw
Mercedes, who at once shut the blind.”

“And M. de Villefort?” asked the abbe.

“Oh, he never was a friend of mine, I did not know him, and
I had nothing to ask of him.”

“Do you not know what became of him, and the share he had in
Edmond’s misfortunes?”

“No; I only know that some time after Edmond’s arrest, he
married Mademoiselle de Saint-Meran, and soon after left
Marseilles; no doubt he has been as lucky as the rest; no
doubt he is as rich as Danglars, as high in station as
Fernand. I only, as you see, have remained poor, wretched,
and forgotten.”

“You are mistaken, my friend,” replied the abbe; “God may
seem sometimes to forget for a time, while his justice
reposes, but there always comes a moment when he remembers
— and behold — a proof!” As he spoke, the abbe took the
diamond from his pocket, and giving it to Caderousse, said,
— “Here, my friend, take this diamond, it is yours.”

“What, for me only?” cried Caderousse, “ah, sir, do not jest
with me!”

“This diamond was to have been shared among his friends.
Edmond had one friend only, and thus it cannot be divided.
Take the diamond, then, and sell it; it is worth fifty
thousand francs, and I repeat my wish that this sum may
suffice to release you from your wretchedness.”

“Oh, sir,” said Caderousse, putting out one hand timidly,
and with the other wiping away the perspiration which
bedewed his brow, — “Oh, sir, do not make a jest of the
happiness or despair of a man.”

“I know what happiness and what despair are, and I never
make a jest of such feelings. Take it, then, but in exchange
— “

Caderousse, who touched the diamond, withdrew his hand. The
abbe smiled. “In exchange,” he continued, “give me the red
silk purse that M. Morrel left on old Dantes’ chimney-piece,
and which you tell me is still in your hands.” Caderousse,
more and more astonished, went toward a large oaken
cupboard, opened it, and gave the abbe a long purse of faded
red silk, round which were two copper runners that had once
been gilt. The abbe took it, and in return gave Caderousse
the diamond.

“Oh, you are a man of God, sir,” cried Caderousse; “for no
one knew that Edmond had given you this diamond, and you
might have kept it.”

“Which,” said the abbe to himself, “you would have done.”
The abbe rose, took his hat and gloves. “Well,” he said,
“all you have told me is perfectly true, then, and I may
believe it in every particular.”

“See, sir,” replied Caderousse, “in this corner is a
crucifix in holy wood — here on this shelf is my wife’s
testament; open this book, and I will swear upon it with my
hand on the crucifix. I will swear to you by my soul’s
salvation, my faith as a Christian, I have told everything
to you as it occurred, and as the recording angel will tell
it to the ear of God at the day of the last judgment!”

“‘Tis well,” said the abbe, convinced by his manner and tone
that Caderousse spoke the truth. “‘Tis well, and may this
money profit you! Adieu; I go far from men who thus so
bitterly injure each other.” The abbe with difficulty got
away from the enthusiastic thanks of Caderousse, opened the
door himself, got out and mounted his horse, once more
saluted the innkeeper, who kept uttering his loud farewells,
and then returned by the road he had travelled in coming.
When Caderousse turned around, he saw behind him La
Carconte, paler and trembling more than ever. “Is, then, all
that I have heard really true?” she inquired.

“What? That he has given the diamond to us only?” inquired
Caderousse, half bewildered with joy; “yes, nothing more
true! See, here it is.” The woman gazed at it a moment, and
then said, in a gloomy voice, “Suppose it’s false?”
Caderousse started and turned pale. “False!” he muttered.
“False! Why should that man give me a false diamond?”

“To get your secret without paying for it, you blockhead!”

Caderousse remained for a moment aghast under the weight of
such an idea. “Oh!” he said, taking up his hat, which he
placed on the red handkerchief tied round his head, “we will
soon find out.”

“In what way?”

“Why, the fair is on at Beaucaire, there are always
jewellers from Paris there, and I will show it to them. Look
after the house, wife, and I shall be back in two hours,”
and Caderousse left the house in haste, and ran rapidly in
the direction opposite to that which the priest had taken.
“Fifty thousand francs!” muttered La Carconte when left
alone; “it is a large sum of money, but it is not a
fortune.”

 

 
VOLUME TWO

The day after that in which the scene we have just described
had taken place on the road between Bellegarde and
Beaucaire, a man of about thirty or two and thirty, dressed
in a bright blue frock coat, nankeen trousers, and a white
waistcoat, having the appearance and accent of an
Englishman, presented himself before the mayor of
Marseilles. “Sir,” said he, “I am chief clerk of the house
of Thomson & French, of Rome. We are, and have been these
ten years, connected with the house of Morrel & Son, of
Marseilles. We have a hundred thousand francs or thereabouts
loaned on their securities, and we are a little uneasy at
reports that have reached us that the firm is on the brink
of ruin. I have come, therefore, express from Rome, to ask
you for information.”

“Sir,” replied the mayor. “I know very well that during the
last four or five years misfortune has seemed to pursue M.
Morrel. He has lost four or five vessels, and suffered by
three or four bankruptcies; but it is not for me, although I
am a creditor myself to the amount of ten thousand francs,
to give any information as to the state of his finances. Ask
of me, as mayor, what is my opinion of M. Morrel, and I
shall say that he is a man honorable to the last degree, and
who has up to this time fulfilled every engagement with
scrupulous punctuality. This is all I can say, sir; if you
wish to learn more, address yourself to M. de Boville, the
inspector of prisons, No. 15, Rue de Nouailles; he has, I
believe, two hundred thousand francs in Morrel’s hands, and
if there be any grounds for apprehension, as this is a
greater amount than mine, you will most probably find him
better informed than myself.”

The Englishman seemed to appreciate this extreme delicacy,
made his bow and went away, proceeding with a characteristic
British stride towards the street mentioned. M. de Boville
was in his private room, and the Englishman, on perceiving
him, made a gesture of surprise, which seemed to indicate
that it was not the first time he had been in his presence.
As to M. de Boville, he was in such a state of despair, that
it was evident all the faculties of his mind, absorbed in
the thought which occupied him at the moment, did not allow
either his memory or his imagination to stray to the past.
The Englishman, with the coolness of his nation, addressed
him in terms nearly similar to those with which he had
accosted the mayor of Marseilles. “Oh, sir,” exclaimed M. de
Boville, “your fears are unfortunately but too well founded,
and you see before you a man in despair. I had two hundred
thousand francs placed in the hands of Morrel & Son; these
two hundred thousand francs were the dowry of my daughter,
who was to be married in a fortnight, and these two hundred
thousand francs were payable, half on the 15th of this
month, and the other half on the 15th of next month. I had
informed M. Morrel of my desire to have these payments
punctually, and he has been here within the last half-hour
to tell me that if his ship, the Pharaon, did not come into
port on the 15th, he would be wholly unable to make this
payment.”

“But,” said the Englishman, “this looks very much like a
suspension of payment.”

“It looks more like bankruptcy!” exclaimed M. de Boville
despairingly.

The Englishman appeared to reflect a moment, and then said,
— “From which it would appear, sir, that this credit
inspires you with considerable apprehension?”

“To tell you the truth, I consider it lost.”

“Well, then, I will buy it of you!”

“You?”

“Yes, I!”

“But at a tremendous discount, of course?”

“No, for two hundred thousand francs. Our house,” added the
Englishman with a laugh, “does not do things in that way.”

“And you will pay” —

“Ready money.” And the Englishman drew from his pocket a
bundle of bank-notes, which might have been twice the sum M.
de Boville feared to lose. A ray of joy passed across M. de
Boville’s countenance, yet he made an effort at
self-control, and said, — “Sir, I ought to tell you that,
in all probability, you will not realize six per cent of
this sum.”

“That’s no affair of mine,” replied the Englishman, “that is
the affair of the house of Thomson & French, in whose name I
act. They have, perhaps, some motive to serve in hastening
the ruin of a rival firm. But all I know, sir, is, that I am
ready to hand you over this sum in exchange for your
assignment of the debt. I only ask a brokerage.”

“Of course, that is perfectly just,” cried M. de Boville.
“The commission is usually one and a half; will you have two
— three — five per cent, or even more? Whatever you say.”

“Sir,” replied the Englishman, laughing, “I am like my
house, and do not do such things — no, the commission I ask
is quite different.”

“Name it, sir, I beg.”

“You are the inspector of prisons?”

“I have been so these fourteen years.”

“You keep the registers of entries and departures?”

“I do.”

“To these registers there are added notes relative to the
prisoners?”

“There are special reports on every prisoner.”

“Well, sir, I was educated at home by a poor devil of an
abbe, who disappeared suddenly. I have since learned that he
was confined in the Chateau d’If, and I should like to learn
some particulars of his death.”

“What was his name?”

“The Abbe Faria.”

“Oh, I recollect him perfectly,” cried M. de Boville; “he
was crazy.”

“So they said.”

“Oh, he was, decidedly.”

“Very possibly; but what sort of madness was it?”

“He pretended to know of an immense treasure, and offered
vast sums to the government if they would liberate him.”

“Poor devil! — and he is dead?”

“Yes, sir, five or six months ago — last February.”

“You have a good memory, sir, to recollect dates so well.”

“I recollect this, because the poor devil’s death was
accompanied by a singular incident.”

“May I ask what that was?” said the Englishman with an
expression of curiosity, which a close observer would have
been astonished at discovering in his phlegmatic
countenance.

“Oh dear, yes, sir; the abbe’s dungeon was forty or fifty
feet distant from that of one of Bonaparte’s emissaries, —
one of those who had contributed the most to the return of
the usurper in 1815, — a very resolute and very dangerous
man.”

“Indeed!” said the Englishman.

“Yes,” replied M. de Boville; “I myself had occasion to see
this man in 1816 or 1817, and we could only go into his
dungeon with a file of soldiers. That man made a deep
impression on me; I shall never forget his countenance!” The
Englishman smiled imperceptibly.

“And you say, sir,” he interposed, “that the two dungeons”

“Were separated by a distance of fifty feet; but it appears
that this Edmond Dantes” —

“This dangerous man’s name was” —

“Edmond Dantes. It appears, sir, that this Edmond Dantes had
procured tools, or made them, for they found a tunnel
through which the prisoners held communication with one
another.”

“This tunnel was dug, no doubt, with an intention of
escape?”

“No doubt; but unfortunately for the prisoners, the Abbe
Faria had an attack of catalepsy, and died.”

“That must have cut short the projects of escape.”

“For the dead man, yes,” replied M. de Boville, “but not for
the survivor; on the contrary, this Dantes saw a means of
accelerating his escape. He, no doubt, thought that
prisoners who died in the Chateau d’If were interred in an
ordinary burial-ground, and he conveyed the dead man into
his own cell, took his place in the sack in which they had
sewed up the corpse, and awaited the moment of interment.”

“It was a bold step, and one that showed some courage,”
remarked the Englishman.

“As I have already told you, sir, he was a very dangerous
man; and, fortunately, by his own act disembarrassed the
government of the fears it had on his account.”

“How was that?”

“How? Do you not comprehend?”

“No.”

“The Chateau d’If has no cemetery, and they simply throw the
dead into the sea, after fastening a thirty-six pound
cannon-ball to their feet.”

“Well,” observed the Englishman as if he were slow of
comprehension.

“Well, they fastened a thirty-six pound ball to his feet,
and threw him into the sea.”

“Really!” exclaimed the Englishman.

“Yes, sir,” continued the inspector of prisons. “You may
imagine the amazement of the fugitive when he found himself
flung headlong over the rocks! I should like to have seen
his face at that moment.”

“That would have been difficult.”

“No matter,” replied De Boville, in supreme good-humor at
the certainty of recovering his two hundred thousand francs,
— “no matter, I can fancy it.” And he shouted with
laughter.

“So can I,” said the Englishman, and he laughed too; but he
laughed as the English do, “at the end of his teeth.”

“And so,” continued the Englishman who first gained his
composure, “he was drowned?”

“Unquestionably.”

“So that the governor got rid of the dangerous and the crazy
prisoner at the same time?”

“Precisely.”

“But some official document was drawn up as to this affair,
I suppose?” inquired the Englishman.

“Yes, yes, the mortuary deposition. You understand, Dantes’
relations, if he had any, might have some interest in
knowing if he were dead or alive.”

“So that now, if there were anything to inherit from him,
they may do so with easy conscience. He is dead, and no
mistake about it.”

“Oh, yes; and they may have the fact attested whenever they
please.”

“So be it,” said the Englishman. “But to return to these
registers.”

“True, this story has diverted our attention from them.
Excuse me.”

“Excuse you for what? For the story? By no means; it really
seems to me very curious.”

“Yes, indeed. So, sir, you wish to see all relating to the
poor abbe, who really was gentleness itself.”

“Yes, you will much oblige me.”

“Go into my study here, and I will show it to you.” And they
both entered M. de Boville’s study. Everything was here
arranged in perfect order; each register had its number,
each file of papers its place. The inspector begged the
Englishman to seat himself in an arm-chair, and placed
before him the register and documents relative to the
Chateau d’If, giving him all the time he desired for the
examination, while De Boville seated himself in a corner,
and began to read his newspaper. The Englishman easily found
the entries relative to the Abbe Faria; but it seemed that
the history which the inspector had related interested him
greatly, for after having perused the first documents he
turned over the leaves until he reached the deposition
respecting Edmond Dantes. There he found everything arranged
in due order, — the accusation, examination, Morrel’s
petition, M. de Villefort’s marginal notes. He folded up the
accusation quietly, and put it as quietly in his pocket;
read the examination, and saw that the name of Noirtier was
not mentioned in it; perused, too, the application dated
10th April, 1815, in which Morrel, by the deputy procureur’s
advice, exaggerated with the best intentions (for Napoleon
was then on the throne) the services Dantes had rendered to
the imperial cause — services which Villefort’s
certificates rendered indispensable. Then he saw through the
whole thing. This petition to Napoleon, kept back by
Villefort, had become, under the second restoration, a
terrible weapon against him in the hands of the king’s
attorney. He was no longer astonished when he searched on to
find in the register this note, placed in a bracket against
his name: —

Edmond Dantes.

An inveterate Bonapartist; took an active part in the return
from the Island of Elba.

To be kept in strict solitary confinement, and to be closely
watched and guarded.

Beneath these lines was written in another hand: “See note
above — nothing can be done.” He compared the writing in
the bracket with the writing of the certificate placed
beneath Morrel’s petition, and discovered that the note in
the bracket was the same writing as the certificate — that
is to say, was in Villefort’s handwriting. As to the note
which accompanied this, the Englishman understood that it
might have been added by some inspector who had taken a
momentary interest in Dantes’ situation, but who had, from
the remarks we have quoted, found it impossible to give any
effect to the interest he had felt.

As we have said, the inspector, from discretion, and that he
might not disturb the Abbe Faria’s pupil in his researches,
had seated himself in a corner, and was reading Le Drapeau
Blanc. He did not see the Englishman fold up and place in
his pocket the accusation written by Danglars under the
arbor of La Reserve, and which had the postmark,
“Marseilles, 27th Feb., delivery 6 o’clock, P.M.” But it
must be said that if he had seen it, he attached so little
importance to this scrap of paper, and so much importance to
his two hundred thousand francs, that he would not have
opposed whatever the Englishman might do, however irregular
it might be.

“Thanks,” said the latter, closing the register with a slam,
“I have all I want; now it is for me to perform my promise.
Give me a simple assignment of your debt; acknowledge
therein the receipt of the cash, and I will hand you over
the money.” He rose, gave his seat to M. de Boville, who
took it without ceremony, and quickly drew up the required
assignment, while the Englishman counted out the bank-notes
on the other side of the desk.

Any one who had quitted Marseilles a few years previously,
well acquainted with the interior of Morrel’s warehouse, and
had returned at this date, would have found a great change.
Instead of that air of life, of comfort, and of happiness
that permeates a flourishing and prosperous business
establishment — instead of merry faces at the windows, busy
clerks hurrying to and fro in the long corridors — instead
of the court filled with bales of goods, re-echoing with the
cries and the jokes of porters, one would have immediately
perceived all aspect of sadness and gloom. Out of all the
numerous clerks that used to fill the deserted corridor and
the empty office, but two remained. One was a young man of
three or four and twenty, who was in love with M. Morrel’s
daughter, and had remained with him in spite of the efforts
of his friends to induce him to withdraw; the other was an
old one-eyed cashier, called “Cocles,” or “Cock-eye,” a
nickname given him by the young men who used to throng this
vast now almost deserted bee-hive, and which had so
completely replaced his real name that he would not, in all
probability, have replied to any one who addressed him by
it.

Cocles remained in M. Morrel’s service, and a most singular
change had taken place in his position; he had at the same
time risen to the rank of cashier, and sunk to the rank of a
servant. He was, however, the same Cocles, good, patient,
devoted, but inflexible on the subject of arithmetic, the
only point on which he would have stood firm against the
world, even against M. Morrel; and strong in the
multiplication-table, which he had at his fingers’ ends, no
matter what scheme or what trap was laid to catch him. In
the midst of the disasters that befell the house, Cocles was
the only one unmoved. But this did not arise from a want of
affection; on the contrary, from a firm conviction. Like the
rats that one by one forsake the doomed ship even before the
vessel weighs anchor, so all the numerous clerks had by
degrees deserted the office and the warehouse. Cocles had
seen them go without thinking of inquiring the cause of
their departure. Everything was as we have said, a question
of arithmetic to Cocles, and during twenty years he had
always seen all payments made with such exactitude, that it
seemed as impossible to him that the house should stop
payment, as it would to a miller that the river that had so
long turned his mill should cease to flow.

Nothing had as yet occurred to shake Cocles’ belief; the
last month’s payment had been made with the most scrupulous
exactitude; Cocles had detected an overbalance of fourteen
sous in his cash, and the same evening he had brought them
to M. Morrel, who, with a melancholy smile, threw them into
an almost empty drawer, saying: —

“Thanks, Cocles; you are the pearl of cashiers.”

Cocles went away perfectly happy, for this eulogium of M.
Morrel, himself the pearl of the honest men of Marseilles,
flattered him more than a present of fifty crowns. But since
the end of the month M. Morrel had passed many an anxious
hour. In order to meet the payments then due; he had
collected all his resources, and, fearing lest the report of
his distress should get bruited abroad at Marseilles when he
was known to be reduced to such an extremity, he went to the
Beaucaire fair to sell his wife’s and daughter’s jewels and
a portion of his plate. By this means the end of the month
was passed, but his resources were now exhausted. Credit,
owing to the reports afloat, was no longer to be had; and to
meet the one hundred thousand francs due on the 10th of the
present month, and the one hundred thousand francs due on
the 15th of the next month to M. de Boville, M. Morrel had,
in reality, no hope but the return of the Pharaon, of whose
departure he had learnt from a vessel which had weighed
anchor at the same time, and which had already arrived in
harbor. But this vessel which, like the Pharaon, came from
Calcutta, had been in for a fortnight, while no intelligence
had been received of the Pharaon.

Such was the state of affairs when, the day after his
interview with M. de Boville, the confidential clerk of the
house of Thomson & French of Rome, presented himself at M.
Morrel’s. Emmanuel received him; this young man was alarmed
by the appearance of every new face, for every new face
might be that of a new creditor, come in anxiety to question
the head of the house. The young man, wishing to spare his
employer the pain of this interview, questioned the
new-comer; but the stranger declared that he had nothing to
say to M. Emmanuel, and that his business was with M. Morrel
in person. Emmanuel sighed, and summoned Cocles. Cocles
appeared, and the young man bade him conduct the stranger to
M. Morrel’s apartment. Cocles went first, and the stranger
followed him. On the staircase they met a beautiful girl of
sixteen or seventeen, who looked with anxiety at the
stranger.

“M. Morrel is in his room, is he not, Mademoiselle Julie?”
said the cashier.

“Yes; I think so, at least,” said the young girl
hesitatingly. “Go and see, Cocles, and if my father is
there, announce this gentleman.”

“It will be useless to announce me, mademoiselle,” returned
the Englishman. “M. Morrel does not know my name; this
worthy gentleman has only to announce the confidential clerk
of the house of Thomson & French of Rome, with whom your
father does business.”

The young girl turned pale and continued to descend, while
the stranger and Cocles continued to mount the staircase.
She entered the office where Emmanuel was, while Cocles, by
the aid of a key he possessed, opened a door in the corner
of a landing-place on the second staircase, conducted the
stranger into an ante-chamber, opened a second door, which
he closed behind him, and after having left the clerk of the
house of Thomson & French alone, returned and signed to him
that he could enter. The Englishman entered, and found
Morrel seated at a table, turning over the formidable
columns of his ledger, which contained the list of his
liabilities. At the sight of the stranger, M. Morrel closed
the ledger, arose, and offered a seat to the stranger; and
when he had seen him seated, resumed his own chair. Fourteen
years had changed the worthy merchant, who, in his
thirty-sixth year at the opening of this history, was now in
his fiftieth; his hair had turned white, time and sorrow had
ploughed deep furrows on his brow, and his look, once so
firm and penetrating, was now irresolute and wandering, as
if he feared being forced to fix his attention on some
particular thought or person. The Englishman looked at him
with an air of curiosity, evidently mingled with interest.
“Monsieur,” said Morrel, whose uneasiness was increased by
this examination, “you wish to speak to me?”

“Yes, monsieur; you are aware from whom I come?”

“The house of Thomson & French; at least, so my cashier
tells me.”

“He has told you rightly. The house of Thomson & French had
300,000 or 400,000 francs to pay this month in France; and,
knowing your strict punctuality, have collected all the
bills bearing your signature, and charged me as they became
due to present them, and to employ the money otherwise.”
Morrel sighed deeply, and passed his hand over his forehead,
which was covered with perspiration.

“So then, sir,” said Morrel, “you hold bills of mine?”

“Yes, and for a considerable sum.”

“What is the amount?” asked Morrel with a voice he strove to
render firm.

“Here is,” said the Englishman, taking a quantity of papers
from his pocket, “an assignment of 200,000 francs to our
house by M. de Boville, the inspector of prisons, to whom
they are due. You acknowledge, of course, that you owe this
sum to him?”

“Yes; he placed the money in my hands at four and a half per
cent nearly five years ago.”

“When are you to pay?”

“Half the 15th of this month, half the 15th of next.”

“Just so; and now here are 32,500 francs payable shortly;
they are all signed by you, and assigned to our house by the
holders.”

“I recognize them,” said Morrel, whose face was suffused, as
he thought that, for the first time in his life, he would be
unable to honor his own signature. “Is this all?”

“No, I have for the end of the month these bills which have
been assigned to us by the house of Pascal, and the house of
Wild & Turner of Marseilles, amounting to nearly 55,000
francs; in all, 287,500 francs.” It is impossible to
describe what Morrel suffered during this enumeration. “Two
hundred and eighty-seven thousand five hundred francs,”
repeated he.

“Yes, sir,” replied the Englishman. “I will not,” continued
he, after a moment’s silence, “conceal from you, that while
your probity and exactitude up to this moment are
universally acknowledged, yet the report is current in
Marseilles that you are not able to meet your liabilities.”
At this almost brutal speech Morrel turned deathly pale.
“Sir,” said he, “up to this time — and it is now more than
four-and-twenty years since I received the direction of this
house from my father, who had himself conducted it for five
and thirty years — never has anything bearing the signature
of Morrel & Son been dishonored.”

“I know that,” replied the Englishman. “But as a man of
honor should answer another, tell me fairly, shall you pay
these with the same punctuality?” Morrel shuddered, and
looked at the man, who spoke with more assurance than he had
hitherto shown. “To questions frankly put,” said he, “a
straightforward answer should be given. Yes, I shall pay,
if, as I hope, my vessel arrives safely; for its arrival
will again procure me the credit which the numerous
accidents, of which I have been the victim, have deprived
me; but if the Pharaon should be lost, and this last
resource be gone” — the poor man’s eyes filled with tears.

“Well,” said the other, “if this last resource fail you?”

“Well,” returned Morrel, “it is a cruel thing to be forced
to say, but, already used to misfortune, I must habituate
myself to shame. I fear I shall be forced to suspend
payment.”

“Have you no friends who could assist you?” Morrel smiled
mournfully. “In business, sir,” said he, “one has no
friends, only correspondents.”

“It is true,” murmured the Englishman; “then you have but
one hope.”

“But one.”

“The last?”

“The last.”

“So that if this fail” —

“I am ruined, — completely ruined!”

“As I was on my way here, a vessel was coming into port.”

“I know it, sir; a young man, who still adheres to my fallen
fortunes, passes a part of his time in a belvidere at the
top of the house, in hopes of being the first to announce
good news to me; he has informed me of the arrival of this
ship.”

“And it is not yours?”

“No, she is a Bordeaux vessel, La Gironde; she comes from
India also; but she is not mine.”

“Perhaps she has spoken the Pharaon, and brings you some
tidings of her?”

“Shall I tell you plainly one thing, sir? I dread almost as
much to receive any tidings of my vessel as to remain in
doubt. Uncertainty is still hope.” Then in a low voice
Morrel added, — “This delay is not natural. The Pharaon
left Calcutta the 5th February; she ought to have been here
a month ago.”

“What is that?” said the Englishman. “What is the meaning of
that noise?”

“Oh, oh!” cried Morrel, turning pale, “what is it?” A loud
noise was heard on the stairs of people moving hastily, and
half-stifled sobs. Morrel rose and advanced to the door; but
his strength failed him and he sank into a chair. The two
men remained opposite one another, Morrel trembling in every
limb, the stranger gazing at him with an air of profound
pity. The noise had ceased; but it seemed that Morrel
expected something — something had occasioned the noise,
and something must follow. The stranger fancied he heard
footsteps on the stairs; and that the footsteps, which were
those of several persons, stopped at the door. A key was
inserted in the lock of the first door, and the creaking of
hinges was audible.

“There are only two persons who have the key to that door,”
murmured Morrel, “Cocles and Julie.” At this instant the
second door opened, and the young girl, her eyes bathed with
tears, appeared. Morrel rose tremblingly, supporting himself
by the arm of the chair. He would have spoken, but his voice
failed him. “Oh, father!” said she, clasping her hands,
“forgive your child for being the bearer of evil tidings.”

Morrel again changed color. Julie threw herself into his
arms.

“Oh, father, father!” murmured she, “courage!”

“The Pharaon has gone down, then?” said Morrel in a hoarse
voice. The young girl did not speak; but she made an
affirmative sign with her head as she lay on her father’s
breast.

“And the crew?” asked Morrel.

“Saved,” said the girl; “saved by the crew of the vessel
that has just entered the harbor.” Morrel raised his two
hands to heaven with an expression of resignation and
sublime gratitude. “Thanks, my God,” said he, “at least thou
strikest but me alone.” A tear moistened the eye of the
phlegmatic Englishman.

“Come in, come in,” said Morrel, “for I presume you are all
at the door.”

Scarcely had he uttered those words than Madame Morrel
entered weeping bitterly. Emmanuel followed her, and in the
antechamber were visible the rough faces of seven or eight
half-naked sailors. At the sight of these men the Englishman
started and advanced a step; then restrained himself, and
retired into the farthest and most obscure corner of the
apartment. Madame Morrel sat down by her husband and took
one of his hands in hers, Julie still lay with her head on
his shoulder, Emmanuel stood in the centre of the chamber
and seemed to form the link between Morrel’s family and the
sailors at the door.

“How did this happen?” said Morrel.

“Draw nearer, Penelon,” said the young man, “and tell us all
about it.”

An old seaman, bronzed by the tropical sun, advanced,
twirling the remains of a tarpaulin between his hands.
“Good-day, M. Morrel,” said he, as if he had just quitted
Marseilles the previous evening, and had just returned from
Aix or Toulon.

“Good-day, Penelon,” returned Morrel, who could not refrain
from smiling through his tears, “where is the captain?”

“The captain, M. Morrel, — he has stayed behind sick at
Palma; but please God, it won’t be much, and you will see
him in a few days all alive and hearty.”

“Well, now tell your story, Penelon.”

Penelon rolled his quid in his cheek, placed his hand before
his mouth, turned his head, and sent a long jet of
tobacco-juice into the antechamber, advanced his foot,
balanced himself, and began, — “You see, M. Morrel,” said
he, “we were somewhere between Cape Blanc and Cape Boyador,
sailing with a fair breeze, south-south-west after a week’s
calm, when Captain Gaumard comes up to me — I was at the
helm I should tell you — and says, `Penelon, what do you
think of those clouds coming up over there?’ I was just then
looking at them myself. `What do I think, captain? Why I
think that they are rising faster than they have any
business to do, and that they would not be so black if they
didn’t mean mischief.’ — `That’s my opinion too,’ said the
captain, `and I’ll take precautions accordingly. We are
carrying too much canvas. Avast, there, all hands! Take in
the studding-sl’s and stow the flying jib.’ It was time; the
squall was on us, and the vessel began to heel. `Ah,’ said
the captain, `we have still too much canvas set; all hands
lower the mains’l!’ Five minutes after, it was down; and we
sailed under mizzen-tops’ls and to’gall’nt sails. `Well,
Penelon,’ said the captain, `what makes you shake your
head?’ `Why,’ I says, `I still think you’ve got too much
on.’ `I think you’re right,’ answered he, `we shall have a
gale.’ `A gale? More than that, we shall have a tempest, or
I don’t know what’s what.’ You could see the wind coming
like the dust at Montredon; luckily the captain understood
his business. `Take in two reefs in the tops’ls,’ cried the
captain; `let go the bowlin’s, haul the brace, lower the
to’gall’nt sails, haul out the reef-tackles on the yards.'”

“That was not enough for those latitudes,” said the
Englishman; “I should have taken four reefs in the topsails
and furled the spanker.”

His firm, sonorous, and unexpected voice made every one
start. Penelon put his hand over his eyes, and then stared
at the man who thus criticized the manoeuvres of his
captain. “We did better than that, sir,” said the old sailor
respectfully; “we put the helm up to run before the tempest;
ten minutes after we struck our tops’ls and scudded under
bare poles.”

“The vessel was very old to risk that,” said the Englishman.

“Eh, it was that that did the business; after pitching
heavily for twelve hours we sprung a leak. `Penelon,’ said
the captain, `I think we are sinking, give me the helm, and
go down into the hold.’ I gave him the helm, and descended;
there was already three feet of water. `All hands to the
pumps!’ I shouted; but it was too late, and it seemed the
more we pumped the more came in. `Ah,’ said I, after four
hours’ work, `since we are sinking, let us sink; we can die
but once.’ `That’s the example you set, Penelon,’ cries the
captain; `very well, wait a minute.’ He went into his cabin
and came back with a brace of pistols. `I will blow the
brains out of the first man who leaves the pump,’ said he.”

“Well done!” said the Englishman.

“There’s nothing gives you so much courage as good reasons,”
continued the sailor; “and during that time the wind had
abated, and the sea gone down, but the water kept rising;
not much, only two inches an hour, but still it rose. Two
inches an hour does not seem much, but in twelve hours that
makes two feet, and three we had before, that makes five.
`Come,’ said the captain, `we have done all in our power,
and M. Morrel will have nothing to reproach us with, we have
tried to save the ship, let us now save ourselves. To the
boats, my lads, as quick as you can.’ Now,” continued
Penelon, “you see, M. Morrel, a sailor is attached to his
ship, but still more to his life, so we did not wait to be
told twice; the more so, that the ship was sinking under us,
and seemed to say, `Get along — save yourselves.’ We soon
launched the boat, and all eight of us got into it. The
captain descended last, or rather, he did not descend, he
would not quit the vessel; so I took him round the waist,
and threw him into the boat, and then I jumped after him. It
was time, for just as I jumped the deck burst with a noise
like the broadside of a man-of-war. Ten minutes after she
pitched forward, then the other way, spun round and round,
and then good-by to the Pharaon. As for us, we were three
days without anything to eat or drink, so that we began to
think of drawing lots who should feed the rest, when we saw
La Gironde; we made signals of distress, she perceived us,
made for us, and took us all on board. There now, M. Morrel,
that’s the whole truth, on the honor of a sailor; is not it
true, you fellows there?” A general murmur of approbation
showed that the narrator had faithfully detailed their
misfortunes and sufferings.

“Well, well,” said M. Morrel, “I know there was no one in
fault but destiny. It was the will of God that this should
happen, blessed be his name. What wages are due to you?”

“Oh, don’t let us talk of that, M. Morrel.”

“Yes, but we will talk of it.”

“Well, then, three months,” said Penelon.

“Cocles, pay two hundred francs to each of these good
fellows,” said Morrel. “At another time,” added be, “I
should have said, Give them, besides, two hundred francs
over as a present; but times are changed, and the little
money that remains to me is not my own.”

Penelon turned to his companions, and exchanged a few words
with them.

“As for that, M. Morrel,” said he, again turning his quid,
“as for that” —

“As for what?”

“The money.”

“Well” —

“Well, we all say that fifty francs will be enough for us at
present, and that we will wait for the rest.”

“Thanks, my friends, thanks!” cried Morrel gratefully; “take
it — take it; and if you can find another employer, enter
his service; you are free to do so.” These last words
produced a prodigious effect on the seaman. Penelon nearly
swallowed his quid; fortunately he recovered. “What, M.
Morrel!” said he in a low voice, “you send us away; you are
then angry with us!”

“No, no,” said M. Morrel, “I am not angry, quite the
contrary, and I do not send you away; but I have no more
ships, and therefore I do not want any sailors.”

“No more ships!” returned Penelon; “well, then, you’ll build
some; we’ll wait for you.”

“I have no money to build ships with, Penelon,” said the
poor owner mournfully, “so I cannot accept your kind offer.”

“No more money? Then you must not pay us; we can scud, like
the Pharaon, under bare poles.”

“Enough, enough!” cried Morrel, almost overpowered; “leave
me, I pray you; we shall meet again in a happier time.
Emmanuel, go with them, and see that my orders are
executed.”

“At least, we shall see each other again, M. Morrel?” asked
Penelon.

“Yes; I hope so, at least. Now go.” He made a sign to
Cocles, who went first; the seamen followed him and Emmanuel
brought up the rear. “Now,” said the owner to his wife and
daughter, “leave me; I wish to speak with this gentleman.”
And he glanced towards the clerk of Thomson & French, who
had remained motionless in the corner during this scene, in
which he had taken no part, except the few words we have
mentioned. The two women looked at this person whose
presence they had entirely forgotten, and retired; but, as
she left the apartment, Julie gave the stranger a
supplicating glance, to which he replied by a smile that an
indifferent spectator would have been surprised to see on
his stern features. The two men were left alone. “Well,
sir,” said Morrel, sinking into a chair, “you have heard
all, and I have nothing further to tell you.”

“I see,” returned the Englishman, “that a fresh and
unmerited misfortune his overwhelmed you, and this only
increases my desire to serve you.”

“Oh, sir!” cried Morrel.

“Let me see,” continued the stranger, “I am one of your
largest creditors.”

“Your bills, at least, are the first that will fall due.”

“Do you wish for time to pay?”

“A delay would save my honor, and consequently my life.”

“How long a delay do you wish for?” — Morrel reflected.
“Two months,” said he.

“I will give you three,” replied the stranger.

“But,” asked Morrel, “will the house of Thomson & French
consent?”

“Oh, I take everything on myself. To-day is the 5th of
June.”

“Yes.”

“Well, renew these bills up to the 5th of September; and on
the 5th of September at eleven o’clock (the hand of the
clock pointed to eleven), I shall come to receive the
money.”

“I shall expect you,” returned Morrel; “and I will pay you
— or I shall be dead.” These last words were uttered in so
low a tone that the stranger could not hear them. The bills
were renewed, the old ones destroyed, and the poor
ship-owner found himself with three months before him to
collect his resources. The Englishman received his thanks
with the phlegm peculiar to his nation; and Morrel,
overwhelming him with grateful blessings, conducted him to
the staircase. The stranger met Julie on the stairs; she
pretended to be descending, but in reality she was waiting
for him. “Oh, sir” — said she, clasping her hands.

“Mademoiselle,” said the stranger, “one day you will receive
a letter signed `Sinbad the Sailor.’ Do exactly what the
letter bids you, however strange it may appear.”

“Yes, sir,” returned Julie.

“Do you promise?”

“I swear to you I will.”

“It is well. Adieu, mademoiselle. Continue to be the good,
sweet girl you are at present, and I have great hopes that
heaven will reward you by giving you Emmanuel for a
husband.”

Julie uttered a faint cry, blushed like a rose, and leaned
against the baluster. The stranger waved his hand, and
continued to descend. In the court he found Penelon, who,
with a rouleau of a hundred francs in either hand, seemed
unable to make up his mind to retain them. “Come with me, my
friend,” said the Englishman; “I wish to speak to you.”

 

The extension provided for by the agent of Thomson & French,
at the moment when Morrel expected it least, was to the poor
shipowner so decided a stroke of good fortune that he almost
dared to believe that fate was at length grown weary of
wasting her spite upon him. The same day he told his wife,
Emmanuel, and his daughter all that had occurred; and a ray
of hope, if not of tranquillity, returned to the family.
Unfortunately, however, Morrel had not only engagements with
the house of Thomson & French, who had shown themselves so
considerate towards him; and, as he had said, in business he
had correspondents, and not friends. When he thought the
matter over, he could by no means account for this generous
conduct on the part of Thomson & French towards him; and
could only attribute it to some such selfish argument as
this: — “We had better help a man who owes us nearly
300,000 francs, and have those 300,000 francs at the end of
three months than hasten his ruin, and get only six or eight
per cent of our money back again.” Unfortunately, whether
through envy or stupidity, all Morrel’s correspondents did
not take this view; and some even came to a contrary
decision. The bills signed by Morrel were presented at his
office with scrupulous exactitude, and, thanks to the delay
granted by the Englishman, were paid by Cocles with equal
punctuality. Cocles thus remained in his accustomed
tranquillity. It was Morrel alone who remembered with alarm,
that if he had to repay on the 15th the 50,000 francs of M.
de Boville, and on the 30th the 32,500 francs of bills, for
which, as well as the debt due to the inspector of prisons,
he had time granted, he must be a ruined man.

The opinion of all the commercial men was that, under the
reverses which had successively weighed down Morrel, it was
impossible for him to remain solvent. Great, therefore, was
the astonishment when at the end of the month, he cancelled
all his obligations with his usual punctuality. Still
confidence was not restored to all minds, and the general
opinion was that the complete ruin of the unfortunate
shipowner had been postponed only until the end of the
month. The month passed, and Morrel made extraordinary
efforts to get in all his resources. Formerly his paper, at
any date, was taken with confidence, and was even in
request. Morrel now tried to negotiate bills at ninety days
only, and none of the banks would give him credit.
Fortunately, Morrel had some funds coming in on which he
could rely; and, as they reached him, he found himself in a
condition to meet his engagements when the end of July came.
The agent of Thomson & French had not been again seen at
Marseilles; the day after, or two days after his visit to
Morrel, he had disappeared; and as in that city he had had
no intercourse but with the mayor, the inspector of prisons,
and M. Morrel, his departure left no trace except in the
memories of these three persons. As to the sailors of the
Pharaon, they must have found snug berths elsewhere, for
they also had disappeared.

Captain Gaumard, recovered from his illness, had returned
from Palma. He delayed presenting himself at Morrel’s, but
the owner, hearing of his arrival, went to see him. The
worthy shipowner knew, from Penelon’s recital, of the
captain’s brave conduct during the storm, and tried to
console him. He brought him also the amount of his wages,
which Captain Gaumard had not dared to apply for. As he
descended the staircase, Morrel met Penelon, who was going
up. Penelon had, it would seem, made good use of his money,
for he was newly clad. When he saw his employer, the worthy
tar seemed much embarrassed, drew on one side into the
corner of the landing-place, passed his quid from one cheek
to the other, stared stupidly with his great eyes, and only
acknowledged the squeeze of the hand which Morrel as usual
gave him by a slight pressure in return. Morrel attributed
Penelon’s embarrassment to the elegance of his attire; it
was evident the good fellow had not gone to such an expense
on his own account; he was, no doubt, engaged on board some
other vessel, and thus his bashfulness arose from the fact
of his not having, if we may so express ourselves, worn
mourning for the Pharaon longer. Perhaps he had come to tell
Captain Gaumard of his good luck, and to offer him
employment from his new master. “Worthy fellows!” said
Morrel, as he went away, “may your new master love you as I
loved you, and be more fortunate than I have been!”

August rolled by in unceasing efforts on the part of Morrel
to renew his credit or revive the old. On the 20th of August
it was known at Marseilles that he had left town in the
mailcoach, and then it was said that the bills would go to
protest at the end of the month, and that Morrel had gone
away and left his chief clerk Emmanuel, and his cashier
Cocles, to meet the creditors. But, contrary to all
expectation, when the 31st of August came, the house opened
as usual, and Cocles appeared behind the grating of the
counter, examined all bills presented with the usual
scrutiny, and, from first to last, paid all with the usual
precision. There came in, moreover, two drafts which M.
Morrel had fully anticipated, and which Cocles paid as
punctually as the bills which the shipowner had accepted.
All this was incomprehensible, and then, with the tenacity
peculiar to prophets of bad news, the failure was put off
until the end of September. On the 1st, Morrel returned; he
was awaited by his family with extreme anxiety, for from
this journey to Paris they hoped great things. Morrel had
thought of Danglars, who was now immensely rich, and had
lain under great obligations to Morrel in former days, since
to him it was owing that Danglars entered the service of the
Spanish banker, with whom he had laid the foundations of his
vast wealth. It was said at this moment that Danglars was
worth from six to eight millions of francs, and had
unlimited credit. Danglars, then, without taking a crown
from his pocket, could save Morrel; he had but to pass his
word for a loan, and Morrel was saved. Morrel had long
thought of Danglars, but had kept away from some instinctive
motive, and had delayed as long as possible availing himself
of this last resource. And Morrel was right, for he returned
home crushed by the humiliation of a refusal. Yet, on his
arrival, Morrel did not utter a complaint, or say one harsh
word. He embraced his weeping wife and daughter, pressed
Emmanuel’s hand with friendly warmth, and then going to his
private room on the second floor had sent for Cocles.
“Then,” said the two women to Emmanuel, “we are indeed
ruined.”

It was agreed in a brief council held among them, that Julie
should write to her brother, who was in garrison at Nimes,
to come to them as speedily as possible. The poor women felt
instinctively that they required all their strength to
support the blow that impended. Besides, Maximilian Morrel,
though hardly two and twenty, had great influence over his
father. He was a strong-minded, upright young man. At the
time when he decided on his profession his father had no
desire to choose for him, but had consulted young
Maximilian’s taste. He had at once declared for a military
life, and had in consequence studied hard, passed
brilliantly through the Polytechnic School, and left it as
sub-lieutenant of the 53d of the line. For a year he had
held this rank, and expected promotion on the first vacancy.
In his regiment Maximilian Morrel was noted for his rigid
observance, not only of the obligations imposed on a
soldier, but also of the duties of a man; and he thus gained
the name of “the stoic.” We need hardly say that many of
those who gave him this epithet repeated it because they had
heard it, and did not even know what it meant. This was the
young man whom his mother and sister called to their aid to
sustain them under the serious trial which they felt they
would soon have to endure. They had not mistaken the gravity
of this event, for the moment after Morrel had entered his
private office with Cocles, Julie saw the latter leave it
pale, trembling, and his features betraying the utmost
consternation. She would have questioned him as he passed by
her, but the worthy creature hastened down the staircase
with unusual precipitation, and only raised his hands to
heaven and exclaimed, “Oh, mademoiselle, mademoiselle, what
a dreadful misfortune! Who could ever have believed it!” A
moment afterwards Julie saw him go up-stairs carrying two or
three heavy ledgers, a portfolio, and a bag of money.

Morrel examined the ledgers, opened the portfolio, and
counted the money. All his funds amounted to 6,000, or 8,000
francs, his bills receivable up to the 5th to 4,000 or
5,000, which, making the best of everything, gave him 14,000
francs to meet debts amounting to 287,500 francs. He had not
even the means for making a possible settlement on account.
However, when Morrel went down to his dinner, he appeared
very calm. This calmness was more alarming to the two women
than the deepest dejection would have been. After dinner
Morrel usually went out and used to take his coffee at the
Phocaean club, and read the Semaphore; this day he did not
leave the house, but returned to his office.

As to Cocles, he seemed completely bewildered. For part of
the day he went into the court-yard, seated himself on a
stone with his head bare and exposed to the blazing sun.
Emmanuel tried to comfort the women, but his eloquence
faltered. The young man was too well acquainted with the
business of the house, not to feel that a great catastrophe
hung over the Morrel family. Night came, the two women had
watched, hoping that when he left his room Morrel would come
to them, but they heard him pass before their door, and
trying to conceal the noise of his footsteps. They listened;
he went into his sleeping-room, and fastened the door
inside. Madame Morrel sent her daughter to bed, and half an
hour after Julie had retired, she rose, took off her shoes,
and went stealthily along the passage, to see through the
keyhole what her husband was doing. In the passage she saw a
retreating shadow; it was Julie, who, uneasy herself, had
anticipated her mother. The young lady went towards Madame
Morrel.

“He is writing,” she said. They had understood each other
without speaking. Madame Morrel looked again through the
keyhole, Morrel was writing; but Madame Morrel remarked,
what her daughter had not observed, that her husband was
writing on stamped paper. The terrible idea that he was
writing his will flashed across her; she shuddered, and yet
had not strength to utter a word. Next day M. Morrel seemed
as calm as ever, went into his office as usual, came to his
breakfast punctually, and then, after dinner, he placed his
daughter beside him, took her head in his arms, and held her
for a long time against his bosom. In the evening, Julie
told her mother, that although he was apparently so calm,
she had noticed that her father’s heart beat violently. The
next two days passed in much the same way. On the evening of
the 4th of September, M. Morrel asked his daughter for the
key of his study. Julie trembled at this request, which
seemed to her of bad omen. Why did her father ask for this
key which she always kept, and which was only taken from her
in childhood as a punishment? The young girl looked at
Morrel.

“What have I done wrong, father,” she said, “that you should
take this key from me?”

“Nothing, my dear,” replied the unhappy man, the tears
starting to his eyes at this simple question, — “nothing,
only I want it.” Julie made a pretence to feel for the key.
“I must have left it in my room,” she said. And she went
out, but instead of going to her apartment she hastened to
consult Emmanuel. “Do not give this key to your father,”
said he, “and to-morrow morning, if possible, do not quit
him for a moment.” She questioned Emmanuel, but he knew
nothing, or would not say what he knew. During the night,
between the 4th and 5th of September, Madame Morrel remained
listening for every sound, and, until three o’clock in the
morning, she heard her husband pacing the room in great
agitation. It was three o’clock when he threw himself on the
bed. The mother and daughter passed the night together. They
had expected Maximilian since the previous evening. At eight
o’clock in the morning Morrel entered their chamber. He was
calm; but the agitation of the night was legible in his pale
and careworn visage. They did not dare to ask him how he had
slept. Morrel was kinder to his wife, more affectionate to
his daughter, than he had ever been. He could not cease
gazing at and kissing the sweet girl. Julie, mindful of
Emmanuel’s request, was following her father when he quitted
the room, but he said to her quickly, — “Remain with your
mother, dearest.” Julie wished to accompany him. “I wish you
to do so,” said he.

This was the first time Morrel had ever so spoken, but he
said it in a tone of paternal kindness, and Julie did not
dare to disobey. She remained at the same spot standing mute
and motionless. An instant afterwards the door opened, she
felt two arms encircle her, and a mouth pressed her
forehead. She looked up and uttered an exclamation of joy.

“Maximilian, my dearest brother!” she cried. At these words
Madame Morrel rose, and threw herself into her son’s arms.
“Mother,” said the young man, looking alternately at Madame
Morrel and her daughter, “what has occurred — what has
happened? Your letter has frightened me, and I have come
hither with all speed.”

“Julie,” said Madame Morrel, making a sign to the young man,
“go and tell your father that Maximilian has just arrived.”
The young lady rushed out of the apartment, but on the first
step of the staircase she found a man holding a letter in
his hand.

“Are you not Mademoiselle Julie Morrel?” inquired the man,
with a strong Italian accent.

“Yes, sir,” replied Julie with hesitation; “what is your
pleasure? I do not know you.”

“Read this letter,” he said, handing it to her. Julie
hesitated. “It concerns the best interests of your father,”
said the messenger.

The young girl hastily took the letter from him. She opened
it quickly and read: —

“Go this moment to the Allees de Meillan, enter the house
No. 15, ask the porter for the key of the room on the fifth
floor, enter the apartment, take from the corner of the
mantelpiece a purse netted in red silk, and give it to your
father. It is important that he should receive it before
eleven o’clock. You promised to obey me implicitly. Remember
your oath.

“Sinbad the Sailor.”

The young girl uttered a joyful cry, raised her eyes, looked
round to question the messenger, but he had disappeared. She
cast her eyes again over the note to peruse it a second
time, and saw there was a postscript. She read: —

“It is important that you should fulfil this mission in
person and alone. If you go accompanied by any other person,
or should any one else go in your place, the porter will
reply that he does not know anything about it.”

This postscript decreased greatly the young girl’s
happiness. Was there nothing to fear? was there not some
snare laid for her? Her innocence had kept her in ignorance
of the dangers that might assail a young girl of her age.
But there is no need to know danger in order to fear it;
indeed, it may be observed, that it is usually unknown
perils that inspire the greatest terror.

Julie hesitated, and resolved to take counsel. Yet, through
a singular impulse, it was neither to her mother nor her
brother that she applied, but to Emmanuel. She hastened down
and told him what had occurred on the day when the agent of
Thomson & French had come to her father’s, related the scene
on the staircase, repeated the promise she had made, and
showed him the letter. “You must go, then, mademoiselle,”
said Emmanuel.

“Go there?” murmured Julie.

“Yes; I will accompany you.”

“But did you not read that I must be alone?” said Julie.

“And you shall be alone,” replied the young man. “I will
await you at the corner of the Rue de Musee, and if you are
so long absent as to make me uneasy, I will hasten to rejoin
you, and woe to him of whom you shall have cause to complain
to me!”

“Then, Emmanuel?” said the young girl with hesitation, “it
is your opinion that I should obey this invitation?”

“Yes. Did not the messenger say your father’s safety
depended upon it?”

“But what danger threatens him, then, Emmanuel?” she asked.

Emmanuel hesitated a moment, but his desire to make Julie
decide immediately made him reply.

“Listen,” he said; “to-day is the 5th of September, is it
not?”

“Yes.”

“To-day, then, at eleven o’clock, your father has nearly
three hundred thousand francs to pay?”

“Yes, we know that.”

“Well, then,” continued Emmanuel, “we have not fifteen
thousand francs in the house.”

“What will happen then?”

“Why, if to-day before eleven o’clock your father has not
found someone who will come to his aid, he will be compelled
at twelve o’clock to declare himself a bankrupt.”

“Oh, come, then, come!” cried she, hastening away with the
young man. During this time, Madame Morrel had told her son
everything. The young man knew quite well that, after the
succession of misfortunes which had befallen his father,
great changes had taken place in the style of living and
housekeeping; but he did not know that matters had reached
such a point. He was thunderstruck. Then, rushing hastily
out of the apartment, he ran up-stairs, expecting to find
his father in his study, but he rapped there in vain.

While he was yet at the door of the study he heard the
bedroom door open, turned, and saw his father. Instead of
going direct to his study, M. Morrel had returned to his
bed-chamber, which he was only this moment quitting. Morrel
uttered a cry of surprise at the sight of his son, of whose
arrival he was ignorant. He remained motionless on the spot,
pressing with his left hand something he had concealed under
his coat. Maximilian sprang down the staircase, and threw
his arms round his father’s neck; but suddenly he recoiled,
and placed his right hand on Morrel’s breast. “Father,” he
exclaimed, turning pale as death, “what are you going to do
with that brace of pistols under your coat?”

“Oh, this is what I feared!” said Morrel.

“Father, father, in heaven’s name,” exclaimed the young man,
“what are these weapons for?”

“Maximilian,” replied Morrel, looking fixedly at his son,
“you are a man, and a man of honor. Come, and I will explain
to you.”

And with a firm step Morrel went up to his study, while
Maximilian followed him, trembling as he went. Morrel opened
the door, and closed it behind his son; then, crossing the
anteroom, went to his desk on which he placed the pistols,
and pointed with his finger to an open ledger. In this
ledger was made out an exact balance-sheet of his affair’s.
Morrel had to pay, within half an hour, 287,500 francs. All
he possessed was 15,257 francs. “Read!” said Morrel.

The young man was overwhelmed as he read. Morrel said not a
word. What could he say? What need he add to such a
desperate proof in figures? “And have you done all that is
possible, father, to meet this disastrous result?” asked the
young man, after a moment’s pause. “I have,” replied Morrel.

“You have no money coming in on which you can rely?”

“None.”

“You have exhausted every resource?”

“All.”

“And in half an hour,” said Maximilian in a gloomy voice,
“our name is dishonored!”

“Blood washes out dishonor,” said Morrel.

“You are right, father; I understand you.” Then extending
his hand towards one of the pistols, he said, “There is one
for you and one for me — thanks!” Morrel caught his hand.
“Your mother — your sister! Who will support them?” A
shudder ran through the young man’s frame. “Father,” he
said, “do you reflect that you are bidding me to live?”

“Yes, I do so bid you,” answered Morrel, “it is your duty.
You have a calm, strong mind, Maximilian. Maximilian, you
are no ordinary man. I make no requests or commands; I only
ask you to examine my position as if it were your own, and
then judge for yourself.”

The young man reflected for a moment, then an expression of
sublime resignation appeared in his eyes, and with a slow
and sad gesture he took off his two epaulets, the insignia
of his rank. “Be it so, then, my father,” he said, extending
his hand to Morrel, “die in peace, my father; I will live.”
Morrel was about to cast himself on his knees before his
son, but Maximilian caught him in his arms, and those two
noble hearts were pressed against each other for a moment.
“You know it is not my fault,” said Morrel. Maximilian
smiled. “I know, father, you are the most honorable man I
have ever known.”

“Good, my son. And now there is no more to be said; go and
rejoin your mother and sister.”

“My father,” said the young man, bending his knee, “bless
me!” Morrel took the head of his son between his two hands,
drew him forward, and kissing his forehead several times
said, “Oh, yes, yes, I bless you in my own name, and in the
name of three generations of irreproachable men, who say
through me, `The edifice which misfortune has destroyed,
providence may build up again.’ On seeing me die such a
death, the most inexorable will have pity on you. To you,
perhaps, they will accord the time they have refused to me.
Then do your best to keep our name free from dishonor. Go to
work, labor, young man, struggle ardently and courageously;
live, yourself, your mother and sister, with the most rigid
economy, so that from day to day the property of those whom
I leave in your hands may augment and fructify. Reflect how
glorious a day it will be, how grand, how solemn, that day
of complete restoration, on which you will say in this very
office, `My father died because he could not do what I have
this day done; but he died calmly and peaceably, because in
dying he knew what I should do.'”

“My father, my father!” cried the young man, “why should you
not live?”

“If I live, all would be changed; if I live, interest would
be converted into doubt, pity into hostility; if I live I am
only a man who his broken his word, failed in his
engagements — in fact, only a bankrupt. If, on the
contrary, I die, remember, Maximilian, my corpse is that of
an honest but unfortunate man. Living, my best friends would
avoid my house; dead, all Marseilles will follow me in tears
to my last home. Living, you would feel shame at my name;
dead, you may raise your head and say, `I am the son of him
you killed, because, for the first time, he has been
compelled to break his word.'”

The young man uttered a groan, but appeared resigned.

“And now,” said Morrel, “leave me alone, and endeavor to
keep your mother and sister away.”

“Will you not see my sister once more?” asked Maximilian. A
last but final hope was concealed by the young man in the
effect of this interview, and therefore he had suggested it.
Morrel shook his head. “I saw her this morning, and bade her
adieu.”

“Have you no particular commands to leave with me, my
father?” inquired Maximilian in a faltering voice.

“Yes; my son, and a sacred command.”

“Say it, my father.”

“The house of Thomson & French is the only one who, from
humanity, or, it may be, selfishness — it is not for me to
read men’s hearts — has had any pity for me. Its agent, who
will in ten minutes present himself to receive the amount of
a bill of 287,500 francs, I will not say granted, but
offered me three months. Let this house be the first repaid,
my son, and respect this man.”

“Father, I will,” said Maximilian.

“And now, once more, adieu,” said Morrel. “Go, leave me; I
would be alone. You will find my will in the secretary in my
bedroom.”

The young man remained standing and motionless, having but
the force of will and not the power of execution.

“Hear me, Maximilian,” said his father. “Suppose I was a
soldier like you, and ordered to carry a certain redoubt,
and you knew I must be killed in the assault, would you not
say to me, as you said just now, `Go, father; for you are
dishonored by delay, and death is preferable to shame!'”

“Yes, yes,” said the young man, “yes;” and once again
embracing his father with convulsive pressure, he said, “Be
it so, my father.”

And he rushed out of the study. When his son had left him,
Morrel remained an instant standing with his eyes fixed on
the door; then putting forth his arm, he pulled the bell.
After a moment’s interval, Cocles appeared.

It was no longer the same man — the fearful revelations of
the three last days had crushed him. This thought — the
house of Morrel is about to stop payment — bent him to the
earth more than twenty years would otherwise have done.

“My worthy Cocles,” said Morrel in a tone impossible to
describe, “do you remain in the ante-chamber. When the
gentleman who came three months ago — the agent of Thomson
& French — arrives, announce his arrival to me.” Cocles
made no reply; he made a sign with his head, went into the
anteroom, and seated himself. Morrel fell back in his chair,
his eyes fixed on the clock; there were seven minutes left,
that was all. The hand moved on with incredible rapidity, he
seemed to see its motion.

What passed in the mind of this man at the supreme moment of
his agony cannot be told in words. He was still
comparatively young, he was surrounded by the loving care of
a devoted family, but he had convinced himself by a course
of reasoning, illogical perhaps, yet certainly plausible,
that he must separate himself from all he held dear in the
world, even life itself. To form the slightest idea of his
feelings, one must have seen his face with its expression of
enforced resignation and its tear-moistened eyes raised to
heaven. The minute hand moved on. The pistols were loaded;
he stretched forth his hand, took one up, and murmured his
daughter’s name. Then he laid it down seized his pen, and
wrote a few words. It seemed to him as if he had not taken a
sufficient farewell of his beloved daughter. Then he turned
again to the clock, counting time now not by minutes, but by
seconds. He took up the deadly weapon again, his lips parted
and his eyes fixed on the clock, and then shuddered at the
click of the trigger as he cocked the pistol. At this moment
of mortal anguish the cold sweat came forth upon his brow, a
pang stronger than death clutched at his heart-strings. He
heard the door of the staircase creak on its hinges — the
clock gave its warning to strike eleven — the door of his
study opened; Morrel did not turn round — he expected these
words of Cocles, “The agent of Thomson & French.”

He placed the muzzle of the pistol between his teeth.
Suddenly he heard a cry — it was his daughter’s voice. He
turned and saw Julie. The pistol fell from his hands. “My
father!” cried the young girl, out of breath, and half dead
with joy — “saved, you are saved!” And she threw herself
into his arms, holding in her extended hand a red, netted
silk purse.

“Saved, my child!” said Morrel; “what do you mean?”

“Yes, saved — saved! See, see!” said the young girl.

Morrel took the purse, and started as he did so, for a vague
remembrance reminded him that it once belonged to himself.
At one end was the receipted bill for the 287,000 francs,
and at the other was a diamond as large as a hazel-nut, with
these words on a small slip of parchment: — Julie’s Dowry.

Morrel passed his hand over his brow; it seemed to him a
dream. At this moment the clock struck eleven. He felt as if
each stroke of the hammer fell upon his heart. “Explain, my
child,” he said, “Explain, my child,” he said, “explain —
where did you find this purse?”

“In a house in the Allees de Meillan, No. 15, on the corner
of a mantelpiece in a small room on the fifth floor.”

“But,” cried Morrel, “this purse is not yours!” Julie handed
to her father the letter she had received in the morning.

“And did you go alone?” asked Morrel, after he had read it.

“Emmanuel accompanied me, father. He was to have waited for
me at the corner of the Rue de Musee, but, strange to say,
he was not there when I returned.”

“Monsieur Morrel!” exclaimed a voice on the stairs. —
“Monsieur Morrel!”

“It is his voice!” said Julie. At this moment Emmanuel
entered, his countenance full of animation and joy. “The
Pharaon!” he cried; “the Pharaon!”

“What — what — the Pharaon! Are you mad, Emmanuel? You
know the vessel is lost.”

“The Pharaon, sir — they signal the Pharaon! The Pharaon is
entering the harbor!” Morrel fell back in his chair, his
strength was failing him; his understanding weakened by such
events, refused to comprehend such incredible, unheard-of,
fabulous facts. But his son came in. “Father,” cried
Maximilian, “how could you say the Pharaon was lost? The
lookout has signalled her, and they say she is now coming
into port.”

“My dear friends,” said Morrel, “if this be so, it must be a
miracle of heaven! Impossible, impossible!”

But what was real and not less incredible was the purse he
held in his hand, the acceptance receipted — the splendid
diamond.

“Ah, sir,” exclaimed Cocles, “what can it mean? — the
Pharaon?”

“Come, dear ones,” said Morrel, rising from his seat, “let
us go and see, and heaven have pity upon us if it be false
intelligence!” They all went out, and on the stairs met
Madame Morrel, who had been afraid to go up into the study.
In a moment they were at the Cannebiere. There was a crowd
on the pier. All the crowd gave way before Morrel. “The
Pharaon, the Pharaon!” said every voice.

And, wonderful to see, in front of the tower of Saint-Jean,
was a ship bearing on her stern these words, printed in
white letters, “The Pharaon, Morrel & Son, of Marseilles.”
She was the exact duplicate of the other Pharaon, and
loaded, as that had been, with cochineal and indigo. She
cast anchor, clued up sails, and on the deck was Captain
Gaumard giving orders, and good old Penelon making signals
to M. Morrel. To doubt any longer was impossible; there was
the evidence of the senses, and ten thousand persons who
came to corroborate the testimony. As Morrel and his son
embraced on the pier-head, in the presence and amid the
applause of the whole city witnessing this event, a man,
with his face half-covered by a black beard, and who,
concealed behind the sentry-box, watched the scene with
delight, uttered these words in a low tone: “Be happy, noble
heart, be blessed for all the good thou hast done and wilt
do hereafter, and let my gratitude remain in obscurity like
your good deeds.”

And with a smile expressive of supreme content, he left his
hiding-place, and without being observed, descended one of
the flights of steps provided for debarkation, and hailing
three times, shouted “Jacopo, Jacopo, Jacopo!” Then a launch
came to shore, took him on board, and conveyed him to a
yacht splendidly fitted up, on whose deck he sprung with the
activity of a sailor; thence he once again looked towards
Morrel, who, weeping with joy, was shaking hands most
cordially with all the crowd around him, and thanking with a
look the unknown benefactor whom he seemed to be seeking in
the skies. “And now,” said the unknown, “farewell kindness,
humanity, and gratitude! Farewell to all the feelings that
expand the heart! I have been heaven’s substitute to
recompense the good — now the god of vengeance yields to me
his power to punish the wicked!” At these words he gave a
signal, and, as if only awaiting this signal, the yacht
instantly put out to sea.

Towards the beginning of the year 1838, two young men
belonging to the first society of Paris, the Vicomte Albert
de Morcerf and the Baron Franz d’Epinay, were at Florence.
They had agreed to see the Carnival at Rome that year, and
that Franz, who for the last three or four years had
inhabited Italy, should act as cicerone to Albert. As it is
no inconsiderable affair to spend the Carnival at Rome,
especially when you have no great desire to sleep on the
Piazza del Popolo, or the Campo Vaccino, they wrote to
Signor Pastrini, the proprietor of the Hotel de Londres,
Piazza di Spagna, to reserve comfortable apartments for
them. Signor Pastrini replied that he had only two rooms and
a parlor on the third floor, which he offered at the low
charge of a louis per diem. They accepted his offer; but
wishing to make the best use of the time that was left,
Albert started for Naples. As for Franz, he remained at
Florence, and after having passed a few days in exploring
the paradise of the Cascine, and spending two or three
evenings at the houses of the Florentine nobility, he took a
fancy into his head (having already visited Corsica, the
cradle of Bonaparte) to visit Elba, the waiting-place of
Napoleon.

One evening he cast off the painter of a sailboat from the
iron ring that secured it to the dock at Leghorn, wrapped
himself in his coat and lay down, and said to the crew, —
“To the Island of Elba!” The boat shot out of the harbor
like a bird and the next morning Franz disembarked at
Porto-Ferrajo. He traversed the island, after having
followed the traces which the footsteps of the giant have
left, and re-embarked for Marciana. Two hours after he again
landed at Pianosa, where he was assured that red partridges
abounded. The sport was bad; Franz only succeeded in killing
a few partridges, and, like every unsuccessful sportsman, he
returned to the boat very much out of temper. “Ah, if your
excellency chose,” said the captain, “you might have capital
sport.”

“Where?”

“Do you see that island?” continued the captain, pointing to
a conical pile rising from the indigo sea.

“Well, what is this island?”

“The Island of Monte Cristo.”

“But I have no permission to shoot over this island.”

“Your excellency does not require a permit, for the island
is uninhabited.”

“Ah, indeed!” said the young man. “A desert island in the
midst of the Mediterranean must be a curiosity.”

“It is very natural; this island is a mass of rocks, and
does not contain an acre of land capable of cultivation.”

“To whom does this island belong?”

“To Tuscany.”

“What game shall I find there!”

“Thousands of wild goats.”

“Who live upon the stones, I suppose,” said Franz with an
incredulous smile.

“No, but by browsing the shrubs and trees that grow out of
the crevices of the rocks.”

“Where can I sleep?”

“On shore in the grottos, or on board in your cloak;
besides, if your excellency pleases, we can leave as soon as
you like — we can sail as well by night as by day, and if
the wind drops we can use our oars.”

As Franz had sufficient time, and his apartments at Rome
were not yet available, he accepted the proposition. Upon
his answer in the affirmative, the sailors exchanged a few
words together in a low tone. “Well,” asked he, “what now?
Is there any difficulty in the way?”

“No.” replied the captain, “but we must warn your excellency
that the island is an infected port.”

“What do you mean?”

“Monte Cristo although uninhabited, yet serves occasionally
as a refuge for the smugglers and pirates who come from
Corsica, Sardinia, and Africa, and if it becomes known that
we have been there, we shall have to perform quarantine for
six days on our return to Leghorn.”

“The deuce! That puts a different face on the matter. Six
days! Why, that’s as long as the Almighty took to make the
world! Too long a wait — too long.”

“But who will say your excellency has been to Monte Cristo?”

“Oh, I shall not,” cried Franz.

“Nor I, nor I,” chorused the sailors.

“Then steer for Monte Cristo.”

The captain gave his orders, the helm was put up, and the
boat was soon sailing in the direction of the island. Franz
waited until all was in order, and when the sail was filled,
and the four sailors had taken their places — three
forward, and one at the helm — he resumed the conversation.
“Gaetano,” said he to the captain, “you tell me Monte Cristo
serves as a refuge for pirates, who are, it seems to me, a
very different kind of game from the goats.”

“Yes, your excellency, and it is true.”

“I knew there were smugglers, but I thought that since the
capture of Algiers, and the destruction of the regency,
pirates existed only in the romances of Cooper and Captain
Marryat.”

“Your excellency is mistaken; there are pirates, like the
bandits who were believed to have been exterminated by Pope
Leo XII., and who yet, every day, rob travellers at the
gates of Rome. Has not your excellency heard that the French
charge d’affaires was robbed six months ago within five
hundred paces of Velletri?”

“Oh, yes, I heard that.”

“Well, then, if, like us, your excellency lived at Leghorn,
you would hear, from time to time, that a little merchant
vessel, or an English yacht that was expected at Bastia, at
Porto-Ferrajo, or at Civita Vecchia, has not arrived; no one
knows what has become of it, but, doubtless, it has struck
on a rock and foundered. Now this rock it has met has been a
long and narrow boat, manned by six or eight men, who have
surprised and plundered it, some dark and stormy night, near
some desert and gloomy island, as bandits plunder a carriage
in the recesses of a forest.”

“But,” asked Franz, who lay wrapped in his cloak at the
bottom of the boat, “why do not those who have been
plundered complain to the French, Sardinian, or Tuscan
governments?”

“Why?” said Gaetano with a smile.

“Yes, why?”

“Because, in the first place, they transfer from the vessel
to their own boat whatever they think worth taking, then
they bind the crew hand and foot, they attach to every one’s
neck a four and twenty pound ball, a large hole is chopped
in the vessel’s bottom, and then they leave her. At the end
of ten minutes the vessel begins to roll heavily and settle
down. First one gun’l goes under, then the other. Then they
lift and sink again, and both go under at once. All at once
there’s a noise like a cannon — that’s the air blowing up
the deck. Soon the water rushes out of the scupper-holes
like a whale spouting, the vessel gives a last groan, spins
round and round, and disappears, forming a vast whirlpool in
the ocean, and then all is over, so that in five minutes
nothing but the eye of God can see the vessel where she lies
at the bottom of the sea. Do you understand now,” said the
captain, “why no complaints are made to the government, and
why the vessel never reaches port?”

It is probable that if Gaetano had related this previous to
proposing the expedition, Franz would have hesitated, but
now that they had started, he thought it would be cowardly
to draw back. He was one of those men who do not rashly
court danger, but if danger presents itself, combat it with
the most unalterable coolness. Calm and resolute, he treated
any peril as he would an adversary in a duel, — calculated
its probable method of approach; retreated, if at all, as a
point of strategy and not from cowardice; was quick to see
an opening for attack, and won victory at a single thrust.
“Bah!” said he, “I have travelled through Sicily and
Calabria — I have sailed two months in the Archipelago, and
yet I never saw even the shadow of a bandit or a pirate.”

“I did not tell your excellency this to deter you from your
project,” replied Gaetano, “but you questioned me, and I
have answered; that’s all.”

“Yes, and your conversation is most interesting; and as I
wish to enjoy it as long as possible, steer for Monte
Cristo.”

The wind blew strongly, the boat made six or seven knots an
hour, and they were rapidly reaching the end of their
voyage. As they drew near the island seemed to lift from the
sea, and the air was so clear that they could already
distinguish the rocks heaped on one another, like cannon
balls in an arsenal, with green bushes and trees growing in
the crevices. As for the sailors, although they appeared
perfectly tranquil yet it was evident that they were on the
alert, and that they carefully watched the glassy surface
over which they were sailing, and on which a few
fishing-boats, with their white sails, were alone visible.
They were within fifteen miles of Monte Cristo when the sun
began to set behind Corsica, whose mountains appeared
against the sky, showing their rugged peaks in bold relief;
this mass of rock, like the giant Adamastor, rose dead
ahead, a formidable barrier, and intercepting the light that
gilded its massive peaks so that the voyagers were in
shadow. Little by little the shadow rose higher and seemed
to drive before it the last rays of the expiring day; at
last the reflection rested on the summit of the mountain,
where it paused an instant, like the fiery crest of a
volcano, then gloom gradually covered the summit as it had
covered the base, and the island now only appeared to be a
gray mountain that grew continually darker; half an hour
after, the night was quite dark.

Fortunately, the mariners were used to these latitudes, and
knew every rock in the Tuscan Archipelago; for in the midst
of this obscurity Franz was not without uneasiness —
Corsica had long since disappeared, and Monte Cristo itself
was invisible; but the sailors seemed, like the lynx, to see
in the dark, and the pilot who steered did not evince the
slightest hesitation. An hour had passed since the sun had
set, when Franz fancied he saw, at a quarter of a mile to
the left, a dark mass, but he could not precisely make out
what it was, and fearing to excite the mirth of the sailors
by mistaking a floating cloud for land, he remained silent;
suddenly a great light appeared on the strand; land might
resemble a cloud, but the fire was not a meteor. “What is
this light?” asked he.

“Hush!” said the captain; “it is a fire.”

“But you told me the island was uninhabited?”

“I said there were no fixed habitations on it, but I said
also that it served sometimes as a harbor for smugglers.”

“And for pirates?”

“And for pirates,” returned Gaetano, repeating Franz’s
words. “It is for that reason I have given orders to pass
the island, for, as you see, the fire is behind us.”

“But this fire?” continued Franz. “It seems to me rather
reassuring than otherwise; men who did not wish to be seen
would not light a fire.”

“Oh, that goes for nothing,” said Gaetano. “If you can guess
the position of the island in the darkness, you will see
that the fire cannot be seen from the side or from Pianosa,
but only from the sea.”

“You think, then, this fire indicates the presence of
unpleasant neighbors?”

“That is what we must find out,” returned Gaetano, fixing
his eyes on this terrestrial star.

“How can you find out?”

“You shall see.” Gaetano consulted with his companions, and
after five minutes’ discussion a manoeuvre was executed
which caused the vessel to tack about, they returned the way
they had come, and in a few minutes the fire disappeared,
hidden by an elevation of the land. The pilot again changed
the course of the boat, which rapidly approached the island,
and was soon within fifty paces of it. Gaetano lowered the
sail, and the boat came to rest. All this was done in
silence, and from the moment that their course was changed
not a word was spoken.

Gaetano, who had proposed the expedition, had taken all the
responsibility on himself; the four sailors fixed their eyes
on him, while they got out their oars and held themselves in
readiness to row away, which, thanks to the darkness, would
not be difficult. As for Franz, he examined his arms with
the utmost coolness; he had two double-barrelled guns and a
rifle; he loaded them, looked at the priming, and waited
quietly. During this time the captain had thrown off his
vest and shirt, and secured his trousers round his waist;
his feet were naked, so he had no shoes and stockings to
take off; after these preparations he placed his finger on
his lips, and lowering himself noiselessly into the sea,
swam towards the shore with such precaution that it was
impossible to hear the slightest sound; he could only be
traced by the phosphorescent line in his wake. This track
soon disappeared; it was evident that he had touched the
shore. Every one on board remained motionless for half an
hour, when the same luminous track was again observed, and
the swimmer was soon on board. “Well?” exclaimed Franz and
the sailors in unison.

“They are Spanish smugglers,” said he; “they have with them
two Corsican bandits.”

“And what are these Corsican bandits doing here with Spanish
smugglers?”

“Alas,” returned the captain with an accent of the most
profound pity, “we ought always to help one another. Very
often the bandits are hard pressed by gendarmes or
carbineers; well, they see a vessel, and good fellows like
us on board, they come and demand hospitality of us; you
can’t refuse help to a poor hunted devil; we receive them,
and for greater security we stand out to sea. This costs us
nothing, and saves the life, or at least the liberty, of a
fellow-creature, who on the first occasion returns the
service by pointing out some safe spot where we can land our
goods without interruption.”

“Ah!” said Franz, “then you are a smuggler occasionally,
Gaetano?”

“Your excellency, we must live somehow,” returned the other,
smiling impenetrably.

“Then you know the men who are now on Monte Cristo?”

“Oh, yes, we sailors are like freemasons, and recognize each
other by signs.”

“And do you think we have nothing to fear if we land?”

“Nothing at all; smugglers are not thieves.”

“But these two Corsican bandits?” said Franz, calculating
the chances of peril.

“It is not their fault that they are bandits, but that of
the authorities.”

“How so?”

“Because they are pursued for having made a stiff, as if it
was not in a Corsican’s nature to revenge himself.”

“What do you mean by having made a stiff? — having
assassinated a man?” said Franz, continuing his
investigation.

“I mean that they have killed an enemy, which is a very
different thing,” returned the captain.

“Well,” said the young man, “let us demand hospitality of
these smugglers and bandits. Do you think they will grant
it?”

“Without doubt.”

“How many are they?”

“Four, and the two bandits make six.”

“Just our number, so that if they prove troublesome, we
shall be able to hold them in check; so, for the last time,
steer to Monte Cristo.”

“Yes, but your excellency will permit us to take all due
precautions.”

“By all means, be as wise as Nestor and as prudent as
Ulysses; I do more than permit, I exhort you.”

“Silence, then!” said Gaetano.

Every one obeyed. For a man who, like Franz, viewed his
position in its true light, it was a grave one. He was alone
in the darkness with sailors whom he did not know, and who
had no reason to be devoted to him; who knew that he had
several thousand francs in his belt, and who had often
examined his weapons, — which were very beautiful, — if
not with envy, at least with curiosity. On the other hand,
he was about to land, without any other escort than these
men, on an island which had, indeed, a very religious name,
but which did not seem to Franz likely to afford him much
hospitality, thanks to the smugglers and bandits. The
history of the scuttled vessels, which had appeared
improbable during the day, seemed very probable at night;
placed as he was between two possible sources of danger, he
kept his eye on the crew, and his gun in his hand. The
sailors had again hoisted sail, and the vessel was once more
cleaving the waves. Through the darkness Franz, whose eyes
were now more accustomed to it, could see the looming shore
along which the boat was sailing, and then, as they rounded
a rocky point, he saw the fire more brilliant than ever, and
about it five or six persons seated. The blaze illumined the
sea for a hundred paces around. Gaetano skirted the light,
carefully keeping the boat in the shadow; then, when they
were opposite the fire, he steered to the centre of the
circle, singing a fishing song, of which his companions sung
the chorus. At the first words of the song the men seated
round the fire arose and approached the landing-place, their
eyes fixed on the boat, evidently seeking to know who the
new-comers were and what were their intentions. They soon
appeared satisfied and returned (with the exception of one,
who remained at the shore) to their fire, at which the
carcass of a goat was roasting. When the boat was within
twenty paces of the shore, the man on the beach, who carried
a carbine, presented arms after the manner of a sentinel,
and cried, “Who comes there?” in Sardinian. Franz coolly
cocked both barrels. Gaetano then exchanged a few words with
this man which the traveller did not understand, but which
evidently concerned him. “Will your excellency give your
name, or remain incognito?” asked the captain.

“My name must rest unknown, — merely say I am a Frenchman
travelling for pleasure.” As soon as Gaetano had transmitted
this answer, the sentinel gave an order to one of the men
seated round the fire, who rose and disappeared among the
rocks. Not a word was spoken, every one seemed occupied,
Franz with his disembarkment, the sailors with their sails,
the smugglers with their goat; but in the midst of all this
carelessness it was evident that they mutually observed each
other. The man who had disappeared returned suddenly on the
opposite side to that by which he had left; he made a sign
with his head to the sentinel, who, turning to the boat,
said, “S’accommodi.” The Italian s’accommodi is
untranslatable; it means at once, “Come, enter, you are
welcome; make yourself at home; you are the master.” It is
like that Turkish phrase of Moliere’s that so astonished the
bourgeois gentleman by the number of things implied in its
utterance. The sailors did not wait for a second invitation;
four strokes of the oar brought them to land; Gaetano sprang
to shore, exchanged a few words with the sentinel, then his
comrades disembarked, and lastly came Franz. One of his guns
was swung over his shoulder, Gaetano had the other, and a
sailor held his rifle; his dress, half artist, half dandy,
did not excite any suspicion, and, consequently, no
disquietude. The boat was moored to the shore, and they
advanced a few paces to find a comfortable bivouac; but,
doubtless, the spot they chose did not suit the smuggler who
filled the post of sentinel, for he cried out, “Not that
way, if you please.”

Gaetano faltered an excuse, and advanced to the opposite
side, while two sailors kindled torches at the fire to light
them on their way. They advanced about thirty paces, and
then stopped at a small esplanade surrounded with rocks, in
which seats had been cut, not unlike sentry-boxes. Around in
the crevices of the rocks grew a few dwarf oaks and thick
bushes of myrtles. Franz lowered a torch, and saw by the
mass of cinders that had accumulated that he was not the
first to discover this retreat, which was, doubtless, one of
the halting-places of the wandering visitors of Monte
Cristo. As for his suspicions, once on terra firma, once
that he had seen the indifferent, if not friendly,
appearance of his hosts, his anxiety had quite disappeared,
or rather, at sight of the goat, had turned to appetite. He
mentioned this to Gaetano, who replied that nothing could be
more easy than to prepare a supper when they had in their
boat, bread, wine, half a dozen partridges, and a good fire
to roast them by. “Besides,” added he, “if the smell of
their roast meat tempts you, I will go and offer them two of
our birds for a slice.”

“You are a born diplomat,” returned Franz; “go and try.”

Meanwhile the sailors had collected dried sticks and
branches with which they made a fire. Franz waited
impatiently, inhaling the aroma of the roasted meat, when
the captain returned with a mysterious air.

“Well,” said Franz, “anything new? — do they refuse?”

“On the contrary,” returned Gaetano, “the chief, who was
told you were a young Frenchman, invites you to sup with
him.”

“Well,” observed Franz, “this chief is very polite, and I
see no objection — the more so as I bring my share of the
supper.”

“Oh, it is not that; he has plenty, and to spare, for
supper; but he makes one condition, and rather a peculiar
one, before he will receive you at his house.”

“His house? Has he built one here, then?”

“No; but he has a very comfortable one all the same, so they
say.”

“You know this chief, then?”

“I have heard talk of him.”

“Favorably or otherwise?”

“Both.”

“The deuce! — and what is this condition?”

“That you are blindfolded, and do not take off the bandage
until he himself bids you.” Franz looked at Gaetano, to see,
if possible, what he thought of this proposal. “Ah,” replied
he, guessing Franz’s thought, “I know this is a serious
matter.”

“What should you do in my place?”

“I, who have nothing to lose, — I should go.”

“You would accept?”

“Yes, were it only out of curiosity.”

“There is something very peculiar about this chief, then?”

“Listen,” said Gaetano, lowering his voice, “I do not know
if what they say is true” — he stopped to see if any one
was near.

“What do they say?”

“That this chief inhabits a cavern to which the Pitti Palace
is nothing.”

“What nonsense!” said Franz, reseating himself.

“It is no nonsense; it is quite true. Cama, the pilot of the
Saint Ferdinand, went in once, and he came back amazed,
vowing that such treasures were only to be heard of in fairy
tales.”

“Do you know,” observed Franz, “that with such stories you
make me think of Ali Baba’s enchanted cavern?”

“I tell you what I have been told.”

“Then you advise me to accept?”

“Oh, I don’t say that; your excellency will do as you
please; I should be sorry to advise you in the matter.”
Franz pondered the matter for a few moments, concluded that
a man so rich could not have any intention of plundering him
of what little he had, and seeing only the prospect of a
good supper, accepted. Gaetano departed with the reply.
Franz was prudent, and wished to learn all he possibly could
concerning his host. He turned towards the sailor, who,
during this dialogue, had sat gravely plucking the
partridges with the air of a man proud of his office, and
asked him how these men had landed, as no vessel of any kind
was visible.

“Never mind that,” returned the sailor, “I know their
vessel.”

“Is it a very beautiful vessel?”

“I would not wish for a better to sail round the world.”

“Of what burden is she?”

“About a hundred tons; but she is built to stand any
weather. She is what the English call a yacht.”

“Where was she built?”

“I know not; but my own opinion is she is a Genoese.”

“And how did a leader of smugglers,” continued Franz,
“venture to build a vessel designed for such a purpose at
Genoa?”

“I did not say that the owner was a smuggler,” replied the
sailor.

“No; but Gaetano did, I thought.”

“Gaetano had only seen the vessel from a distance, he had
not then spoken to any one.”

“And if this person be not a smuggler, who is he?”

“A wealthy signor, who travels for his pleasure.”

“Come,” thought Franz, “he is still more mysterious, since
the two accounts do not agree.”

“What is his name?”

“If you ask him he says Sinbad the Sailor; but I doubt if it
be his real name.”

“Sinbad the Sailor?”

“Yes.”

“And where does he reside?”

“On the sea.”

“What country does he come from?”

“I do not know.”

“Have you ever seen him?”

“Sometimes.”

“What sort of a man is he?”

“Your excellency will judge for yourself.”

“Where will he receive me?”

“No doubt in the subterranean palace Gaetano told you of.”

“Have you never had the curiosity, when you have landed and
found this island deserted, to seek for this enchanted
palace?”

“Oh, yes, more than once, but always in vain; we examined
the grotto all over, but we never could find the slightest
trace of any opening; they say that the door is not opened
by a key, but a magic word.”

“Decidedly,” muttered Franz, “this is an Arabian Nights’
adventure.”

“His excellency waits for you,” said a voice, which he
recognized as that of the sentinel. He was accompanied by
two of the yacht’s crew. Franz drew his handkerchief from
his pocket, and presented it to the man who had spoken to
him. Without uttering a word, they bandaged his eyes with a
care that showed their apprehensions of his committing some
indiscretion. Afterwards he was made to promise that he
would not make the least attempt to raise the bandage. He
promised. Then his two guides took his arms, and he went on,
guided by them, and preceded by the sentinel. After going
about thirty paces, he smelt the appetizing odor of the kid
that was roasting, and knew thus that he was passing the
bivouac; they then led him on about fifty paces farther,
evidently advancing towards that part of the shore where
they would not allow Gaetano to go — a refusal he could now
comprehend. Presently, by a change in the atmosphere, he
knew that they were entering a cave; after going on for a
few seconds more he heard a crackling, and it seemed to him
as though the atmosphere again changed, and became balmy and
perfumed. At length his feet touched on a thick and soft
carpet, and his guides let go their hold of him. There was a
moment’s silence, and then a voice, in excellent French,
although, with a foreign accent, said, “Welcome, sir. I beg
you will remove your bandage.” It may be supposed, then,
Franz did not wait for a repetition of this permission, but
took off the handkerchief, and found himself in the presence
of a man from thirty-eight to forty years of age, dressed in
a Tunisian costume — that is to say, a red cap with a long
blue silk tassel, a vest of black cloth embroidered with
gold, pantaloons of deep red, large and full gaiters of the
same color, embroidered with gold like the vest, and yellow
slippers; he had a splendid cashmere round his waist, and a
small sharp and crooked cangiar was passed through his
girdle. Although of a paleness that was almost livid, this
man had a remarkably handsome face; his eyes were
penetrating and sparkling; his nose, quite straight, and
projecting direct from the brow, was of the pure Greek type,
while his teeth, as white as pearls, were set off to
admiration by the black mustache that encircled them.

His pallor was so peculiar, that it seemed to pertain to one
who had been long entombed, and who was incapable of
resuming the healthy glow and hue of life. He was not
particularly tall, but extremely well made, and, like the
men of the south, had small hands and feet. But what
astonished Franz, who had treated Gaetano’s description as a
fable, was the splendor of the apartment in which he found
himself. The entire chamber was lined with crimson brocade,
worked with flowers of gold. In a recess was a kind of
divan, surmounted with a stand of Arabian swords in silver
scabbards, and the handles resplendent with gems; from the
ceiling hung a lamp of Venetian glass, of beautiful shape
and color, while the feet rested on a Turkey carpet, in
which they sunk to the instep; tapestry hung before the door
by which Franz had entered, and also in front of another
door, leading into a second apartment which seemed to be
brilliantly illuminated. The host gave Franz time to recover
from his surprise, and, moreover, returned look for look,
not even taking his eyes off him. “Sir,” he said, after a
pause, “a thousand excuses for the precaution taken in your
introduction hither; but as, during the greater portion of
the year, this island is deserted, if the secret of this
abode were discovered. I should doubtless, find on my return
my temporary retirement in a state of great disorder, which
would be exceedingly annoying, not for the loss it
occasioned me, but because I should not have the certainty I
now possess of separating myself from all the rest of
mankind at pleasure. Let me now endeavor to make you forget
this temporary unpleasantness, and offer you what no doubt
you did not expect to find here — that is to say, a
tolerable supper and pretty comfortable beds.”

“Ma foi, my dear sir,” replied Franz, “make no apologies. I
have always observed that they bandage people’s eyes who
penetrate enchanted palaces, for instance, those of Raoul in
the `Huguenots,’ and really I have nothing to complain of,
for what I see makes me think of the wonders of the `Arabian
Nights.'”

“Alas, I may say with Lucullus, if I could have anticipated
the honor of your visit, I would have prepared for it. But
such as is my hermitage, it is at your disposal; such as is
my supper, it is yours to share, if you will. Ali, is the
supper ready?” At this moment the tapestry moved aside, and
a Nubian, black as ebony, and dressed in a plain white
tunic, made a sign to his master that all was prepared in
the dining-room. “Now,” said the unknown to Franz, “I do not
know if you are of my opinion, but I think nothing is more
annoying than to remain two or three hours together without
knowing by name or appellation how to address one another.
Pray observe, that I too much respect the laws of
hospitality to ask your name or title. I only request you to
give me one by which I may have the pleasure of addressing
you. As for myself, that I may put you at your ease, I tell
you that I am generally called `Sinbad the Sailor.'”

“And I,” replied Franz, “will tell you, as I only require
his wonderful lamp to make me precisely like Aladdin, that I
see no reason why at this moment I should not be called
Aladdin. That will keep us from going away from the East
whither I am tempted to think I have been conveyed by some
good genius.”

“Well, then, Signor Aladdin,” replied the singular
amphitryon, “you heard our repast announced, will you now
take the trouble to enter the dining-room, your humble
servant going first to show the way?” At these words, moving
aside the tapestry, Sinbad preceded his guest. Franz now
looked upon another scene of enchantment; the table was
splendidly covered, and once convinced of this important
point he cast his eyes around him. The dining-room was
scarcely less striking than the room he had just left; it
was entirely of marble, with antique bas-reliefs of
priceless value; and at the four corners of this apartment,
which was oblong, were four magnificent statues, having
baskets in their hands. These baskets contained four
pyramids of most splendid fruit; there were Sicily
pine-apples, pomegranates from Malaga, oranges from the
Balearic Isles, peaches from France, and dates from Tunis.
The supper consisted of a roast pheasant garnished with
Corsican blackbirds; a boar’s ham with jelly, a quarter of a
kid with tartar sauce, a glorious turbot, and a gigantic
lobster. Between these large dishes were smaller ones
containing various dainties. The dishes were of silver, and
the plates of Japanese china.

Franz rubbed his eyes in order to assure himself that this
was not a dream. Ali alone was present to wait at table, and
acquitted himself so admirably, that the guest complimented
his host thereupon. “Yes,” replied he, while he did the
honors of the supper with much ease and grace — “yes, he is
a poor devil who is much devoted to me, and does all he can
to prove it. He remembers that I saved his life, and as he
has a regard for his head, he feels some gratitude towards
me for having kept it on his shoulders.” Ali approached his
master, took his hand, and kissed it.

“Would it be impertinent, Signor Sinbad,” said Franz, “to
ask you the particulars of this kindness?”

“Oh, they are simple enough,” replied the host. “It seems
the fellow had been caught wandering nearer to the harem of
the Bey of Tunis than etiquette permits to one of his color,
and he was condemned by the bey to have his tongue cut out,
and his hand and head cut off; the tongue the first day, the
hand the second, and the head the third. I always had a
desire to have a mute in my service, so learning the day his
tongue was cut out, I went to the bey, and proposed to give
him for Ali a splendid double-barreled gun which I knew he
was very desirous of having. He hesitated a moment, he was
so very desirous to complete the poor devil’s punishment.
But when I added to the gun an English cutlass with which I
had shivered his highness’s yataghan to pieces, the bey
yielded, and agreed to forgive the hand and head, but on
condition that the poor fellow never again set foot in
Tunis. This was a useless clause in the bargain, for
whenever the coward sees the first glimpse of the shores of
Africa, he runs down below, and can only be induced to
appear again when we are out of sight of that quarter of the
globe.”

Franz remained a moment silent and pensive, hardly knowing
what to think of the half-kindness, half-cruelty, with which
his host related the brief narrative. “And like the
celebrated sailor whose name you have assumed,” he said, by
way of changing the conversation, “you pass your life in
travelling?”

“Yes. I made a vow at a time when I little thought I should
ever be able to accomplish it,” said the unknown with a
singular smile; “and I made some others also which I hope I
may fulfil in due season.” Although Sinbad pronounced these
words with much calmness, his eyes gave forth gleams of
extraordinary ferocity.

“You have suffered a great deal, sir?” said Franz
inquiringly.

Sinbad started and looked fixedly at him, as he replied,
“What makes you suppose so?”

“Everything,” answered Franz, — “your voice, your look,
your pallid complexion, and even the life you lead.”

“I? — I live the happiest life possible, the real life of a
pasha. I am king of all creation. I am pleased with one
place, and stay there; I get tired of it, and leave it; I am
free as a bird and have wings like one; my attendants obey
my slightest wish. Sometimes I amuse myself by delivering
some bandit or criminal from the bonds of the law. Then I
have my mode of dispensing justice, silent and sure, without
respite or appeal, which condemns or pardons, and which no
one sees. Ah, if you had tasted my life, you would not
desire any other, and would never return to the world unless
you had some great project to accomplish there.”

“Revenge, for instance!” observed Franz.

The unknown fixed on the young man one of those looks which
penetrate into the depth of the heart and thoughts. “And why
revenge?” he asked.

“Because,” replied Franz, “you seem to me like a man who,
persecuted by society, has a fearful account to settle with
it.”

“Ah,” responded Sinbad, laughing with his singular laugh
which displayed his white and sharp teeth. “You have not
guessed rightly. Such as you see me I am, a sort of
philosopher, and one day perhaps I shall go to Paris to
rival Monsieur Appert, and the little man in the blue
cloak.”

“And will that be the first time you ever took that
journey?”

“Yes; it will. I must seem to you by no means curious, but I
assure you that it is not my fault I have delayed it so long
— it will happen one day or the other.”

“And do you propose to make this journey very shortly?”

“I do not know; it depends on circumstances which depend on
certain arrangements.”

“I should like to be there at the time you come, and I will
endeavor to repay you, as far as lies in my power, for your
liberal hospitality displayed to me at Monte Cristo.”

“I should avail myself of your offer with pleasure,” replied
the host, “but, unfortunately, if I go there, it will be, in
all probability, incognito.”

The supper appeared to have been supplied solely for Franz,
for the unknown scarcely touched one or two dishes of the
splendid banquet to which his guest did ample justice. Then
Ali brought on the dessert, or rather took the baskets from
the hands of the statues and placed them on the table.
Between the two baskets he placed a small silver cup with a
silver cover. The care with which Ali placed this cup on the
table roused Franz’s curiosity. He raised the cover and saw
a kind of greenish paste, something like preserved angelica,
but which was perfectly unknown to him. He replaced the lid,
as ignorant of what the cup contained as he was before he
had looked at it, and then casting his eyes towards his host
he saw him smile at his disappointment. “You cannot guess,”
said he, “what there is in that small vase, can you?”

“No, I really cannot.”

“Well, then, that green preserve is nothing less than the
ambrosia which Hebe served at the table of Jupiter.”

“But,” replied Franz, “this ambrosia, no doubt, in passing
through mortal hands has lost its heavenly appellation and
assumed a human name; in vulgar phrase, what may you term
this composition, for which, to tell the truth, I do not
feel any particular desire?”

“Ah, thus it is that our material origin is revealed,” cried
Sinbad; “we frequently pass so near to happiness without
seeing, without regarding it, or if we do see and regard it,
yet without recognizing it. Are you a man for the
substantials, and is gold your god? taste this, and the
mines of Peru, Guzerat, and Golconda are opened to you. Are
you a man of imagination — a poet? taste this, and the
boundaries of possibility disappear; the fields of infinite
space open to you, you advance free in heart, free in mind,
into the boundless realms of unfettered revery. Are you
ambitious, and do you seek after the greatnesses of the
earth? taste this, and in an hour you will be a king, not a
king of a petty kingdom hidden in some corner of Europe like
France, Spain, or England, but king of the world, king of
the universe, king of creation; without bowing at the feet
of Satan, you will be king and master of all the kingdoms of
the earth. Is it not tempting what I offer you, and is it
not an easy thing, since it is only to do thus? look!” At
these words he uncovered the small cup which contained the
substance so lauded, took a teaspoonful of the magic
sweetmeat, raised it to his lips, and swallowed it slowly
with his eyes half shut and his head bent backwards. Franz
did not disturb him whilst he absorbed his favorite
sweetmeat, but when he had finished, he inquired, — “What,
then, is this precious stuff?”

“Did you ever hear,” he replied, “of the Old Man of the
Mountain, who attempted to assassinate Philip Augustus?”

“Of course I have.”

“Well, you know he reigned over a rich valley which was
overhung by the mountain whence he derived his picturesque
name. In this valley were magnificent gardens planted by
Hassen-ben-Sabah, and in these gardens isolated pavilions.
Into these pavilions he admitted the elect, and there, says
Marco Polo, gave them to eat a certain herb, which
transported them to Paradise, in the midst of ever-blooming
shrubs, ever-ripe fruit, and ever-lovely virgins. What these
happy persons took for reality was but a dream; but it was a
dream so soft, so voluptuous, so enthralling, that they sold
themselves body and soul to him who gave it to them, and
obedient to his orders as to those of a deity, struck down
the designated victim, died in torture without a murmur,
believing that the death they underwent was but a quick
transition to that life of delights of which the holy herb,
now before you had given them a slight foretaste.”

“Then,” cried Franz, “it is hashish! I know that — by name
at least.”

“That is it precisely, Signor Aladdin; it is hashish — the
purest and most unadulterated hashish of Alexandria, — the
hashish of Abou-Gor, the celebrated maker, the only man, the
man to whom there should be built a palace, inscribed with
these words, `A grateful world to the dealer in happiness.'”

“Do you know,” said Franz, “I have a very great inclination
to judge for myself of the truth or exaggeration of your
eulogies.”

“Judge for yourself, Signor Aladdin — judge, but do not
confine yourself to one trial. Like everything else, we must
habituate the senses to a fresh impression, gentle or
violent, sad or joyous. There is a struggle in nature
against this divine substance, — in nature which is not
made for joy and clings to pain. Nature subdued must yield
in the combat, the dream must succeed to reality, and then
the dream reigns supreme, then the dream becomes life, and
life becomes the dream. But what changes occur! It is only
by comparing the pains of actual being with the joys of the
assumed existence, that you would desire to live no longer,
but to dream thus forever. When you return to this mundane
sphere from your visionary world, you would seem to leave a
Neapolitan spring for a Lapland winter — to quit paradise
for earth — heaven for hell! Taste the hashish, guest of
mine — taste the hashish.”

Franz’s only reply was to take a teaspoonful of the
marvellous preparation, about as much in quantity as his
host had eaten, and lift it to his mouth. “Diable!” he said,
after having swallowed the divine preserve. “I do not know
if the result will be as agreeable as you describe, but the
thing does not appear to me as palatable as you say.”

“Because your palate his not yet been attuned to the
sublimity of the substances it flavors. Tell me, the first
time you tasted oysters, tea, porter, truffles, and sundry
other dainties which you now adore, did you like them? Could
you comprehend how the Romans stuffed their pheasants with
assafoetida, and the Chinese eat swallows’ nests? Eh? no!
Well, it is the same with hashish; only eat for a week, and
nothing in the world will seem to you to equal the delicacy
of its flavor, which now appears to you flat and
distasteful. Let us now go into the adjoining chamber, which
is your apartment, and Ali will bring us coffee and pipes.”
They both arose, and while he who called himself Sinbad —
and whom we have occasionally named so, that we might, like
his guest, have some title by which to distinguish him —
gave some orders to the servant, Franz entered still another
apartment. It was simply yet richly furnished. It was round,
and a large divan completely encircled it. Divan, walls,
ceiling, floor, were all covered with magnificent skins as
soft and downy as the richest carpets; there were
heavy-maned lion-skins from Atlas, striped tiger-skins from
Bengal; panther-skins from the Cape, spotted beautifully,
like those that appeared to Dante; bear-skins from Siberia,
fox-skins from Norway, and so on; and all these skins were
strewn in profusion one on the other, so that it seemed like
walking over the most mossy turf, or reclining on the most
luxurious bed. Both laid themselves down on the divan;
chibouques with jasmine tubes and amber mouthpieces were
within reach, and all prepared so that there was no need to
smoke the same pipe twice. Each of them took one, which Ali
lighted and then retired to prepare the coffee. There was a
moment’s silence, during which Sinbad gave himself up to
thoughts that seemed to occupy him incessantly, even in the
midst of his conversation; and Franz abandoned himself to
that mute revery, into which we always sink when smoking
excellent tobacco, which seems to remove with its fume all
the troubles of the mind, and to give the smoker in exchange
all the visions of the soul. Ali brought in the coffee. “How
do you take it?” inquired the unknown; “in the French or
Turkish style, strong or weak, sugar or none, cool or
boiling? As you please; it is ready in all ways.”

“I will take it in the Turkish style,” replied Franz.

“And you are right,” said his host; “it shows you have a
tendency for an Oriental life. Ah, those Orientals; they are
the only men who know how to live. As for me,” he added,
with one of those singular smiles which did not escape the
young man, “when I have completed my affairs in Paris, I
shall go and die in the East; and should you wish to see me
again, you must seek me at Cairo, Bagdad, or Ispahan.”

“Ma foi,” said Franz, “it would be the easiest thing in the
world; for I feel eagle’s wings springing out at my
shoulders, and with those wings I could make a tour of the
world in four and twenty hours.”

“Ah, yes, the hashish is beginning its work. Well, unfurl
your wings, and fly into superhuman regions; fear nothing,
there is a watch over you; and if your wings, like those of
Icarus, melt before the sun, we are here to ease your fall.”
He then said something in Arabic to Ali, who made a sign of
obedience and withdrew, but not to any distance. As to Franz
a strange transformation had taken place in him. All the
bodily fatigue of the day, all the preoccupation of mind
which the events of the evening had brought on, disappeared
as they do at the first approach of sleep, when we are still
sufficiently conscious to be aware of the coming of slumber.
His body seemed to acquire an airy lightness, his perception
brightened in a remarkable manner, his senses seemed to
redouble their power, the horizon continued to expand; but
it was not the gloomy horizon of vague alarms, and which he
had seen before he slept, but a blue, transparent, unbounded
horizon, with all the blue of the ocean, all the spangles of
the sun, all the perfumes of the summer breeze; then, in the
midst of the songs of his sailors, — songs so clear and
sonorous, that they would have made a divine harmony had
their notes been taken down, — he saw the Island of Monte
Cristo, no longer as a threatening rock in the midst of the
waves, but as an oasis in the desert; then, as his boat drew
nearer, the songs became louder, for an enchanting and
mysterious harmony rose to heaven, as if some Loreley had
decreed to attract a soul thither, or Amphion, the
enchanter, intended there to build a city.

At length the boat touched the shore, but without effort,
without shock, as lips touch lips; and he entered the grotto
amidst continued strains of most delicious melody. He
descended, or rather seemed to descend, several steps,
inhaling the fresh and balmy air, like that which may be
supposed to reign around the grotto of Circe, formed from
such perfumes as set the mind a dreaming, and such fires as
burn the very senses; and he saw again all he had seen
before his sleep, from Sinbad, his singular host, to Ali,
the mute attendant; then all seemed to fade away and become
confused before his eyes, like the last shadows of the magic
lantern before it is extinguished, and he was again in the
chamber of statues, lighted only by one of those pale and
antique lamps which watch in the dead of the night over the
sleep of pleasure. They were the same statues, rich in form,
in attraction, and poesy, with eyes of fascination, smiles
of love, and bright and flowing hair. They were Phryne,
Cleopatra, Messalina, those three celebrated courtesans.
Then among them glided like a pure ray, like a Christian
angel in the midst of Olympus, one of those chaste figures,
those calm shadows, those soft visions, which seemed to veil
its virgin brow before these marble wantons. Then the three
statues advanced towards him with looks of love, and
approached the couch on which he was reposing, their feet
hidden in their long white tunics, their throats bare, hair
flowing like waves, and assuming attitudes which the gods
could not resist, but which saints withstood, and looks
inflexible and ardent like those with which the serpent
charms the bird; and then he gave way before looks that held
him in a torturing grasp and delighted his senses as with a
voluptuous kiss. It seemed to Franz that he closed his eyes,
and in a last look about him saw the vision of modesty
completely veiled; and then followed a dream of passion like
that promised by the Prophet to the elect. Lips of stone
turned to flame, breasts of ice became like heated lava, so
that to Franz, yielding for the first time to the sway of
the drug, love was a sorrow and voluptuousness a torture, as
burning mouths were pressed to his thirsty lips, and he was
held in cool serpent-like embraces. The more he strove
against this unhallowed passion the more his senses yielded
to its thrall, and at length, weary of a struggle that taxed
his very soul, he gave way and sank back breathless and
exhausted beneath the kisses of these marble goddesses, and
the enchantment of his marvellous dream.

 

When Franz returned to himself, he seemed still to be in a
dream. He thought himself in a sepulchre, into which a ray
of sunlight in pity scarcely penetrated. He stretched forth
his hand, and touched stone; he rose to his seat, and found
himself lying on his bournous in a bed of dry heather, very
soft and odoriferous. The vision had fled; and as if the
statues had been but shadows from the tomb, they had
vanished at his waking. He advanced several paces towards
the point whence the light came, and to all the excitement
of his dream succeeded the calmness of reality. He found
that he was in a grotto, went towards the opening, and
through a kind of fanlight saw a blue sea and an azure sky.
The air and water were shining in the beams of the morning
sun; on the shore the sailors were sitting, chatting and
laughing; and at ten yards from them the boat was at anchor,
undulating gracefully on the water. There for some time he
enjoyed the fresh breeze which played on his brow, and
listened to the dash of the waves on the beach, that left
against the rocks a lace of foam as white as silver. He was
for some time without reflection or thought for the divine
charm which is in the things of nature, specially after a
fantastic dream; then gradually this view of the outer
world, so calm, so pure, so grand, reminded him of the
illusiveness of his vision, and once more awakened memory.
He recalled his arrival on the island, his presentation to a
smuggler chief, a subterranean palace full of splendor, an
excellent supper, and a spoonful of hashish. It seemed,
however, even in the very face of open day, that at least a
year had elapsed since all these things had passed, so deep
was the impression made in his mind by the dream, and so
strong a hold had it taken of his imagination. Thus every
now and then he saw in fancy amid the sailors, seated on a
rock, or undulating in the vessel, one of the shadows which
had shared his dream with looks and kisses. Otherwise, his
head was perfectly clear, and his body refreshed; he was
free from the slightest headache; on the contrary, he felt a
certain degree of lightness, a faculty for absorbing the
pure air, and enjoying the bright sunshine more vividly than
ever.

He went gayly up to the sailors, who rose as soon as they
perceived him; and the patron, accosting him, said, “The
Signor Sinbad has left his compliments for your excellency,
and desires us to express the regret he feels at not being
able to take his leave in person; but he trusts you will
excuse him, as very important business calls him to Malaga.”

“So, then, Gaetano,” said Franz, “this is, then, all
reality; there exists a man who has received me in this
island, entertained me right royally, and his departed while
I was asleep?”

“He exists as certainly as that you may see his small yacht
with all her sails spread; and if you will use your glass,
you will, in all probability, recognize your host in the
midst of his crew.” So saying, Gaetano pointed in a
direction in which a small vessel was making sail towards
the southern point of Corsica. Franz adjusted his telescope,
and directed it towards the yacht. Gaetano was not mistaken.
At the stern the mysterious stranger was standing up looking
towards the shore, and holding a spy-glass in his hand. He
was attired as he had been on the previous evening, and
waved his pocket-handkerchief to his guest in token of
adieu. Franz returned the salute by shaking his handkerchief
as an exchange of signals. After a second, a slight cloud of
smoke was seen at the stern of the vessel, which rose
gracefully as it expanded in the air, and then Franz heard a
slight report. “There, do you hear?” observed Gaetano; “he
is bidding you adieu.” The young man took his carbine and
fired it in the air, but without any idea that the noise
could be heard at the distance which separated the yacht
from the shore.

“What are your excellency’s orders?” inquired Gaetano.

“In the first place, light me a torch.”

“Ah, yes, I understand,” replied the patron, “to find the
entrance to the enchanted apartment. With much pleasure,
your excellency, if it would amuse you; and I will get you
the torch you ask for. But I too have had the idea you have,
and two or three times the same fancy has come over me; but
I have always given it up. Giovanni, light a torch,” he
added, “and give it to his excellency.”

Giovanni obeyed. Franz took the lamp, and entered the
subterranean grotto, followed by Gaetano. He recognized the
place where he had awaked by the bed of heather that was
there; but it was in vain that he carried his torch all
round the exterior surface of the grotto. He saw nothing,
unless that, by traces of smoke, others had before him
attempted the same thing, and, like him, in vain. Yet he did
not leave a foot of this granite wall, as impenetrable as
futurity, without strict scrutiny; he did not see a fissure
without introducing the blade of his hunting sword into it,
or a projecting point on which he did not lean and press in
the hopes it would give way. All was vain; and he lost two
hours in his attempts, which were at last utterly useless.
At the end of this time he gave up his search, and Gaetano
smiled.

When Franz appeared again on the shore, the yacht only
seemed like a small white speck on the horizon. He looked
again through his glass, but even then he could not
distinguish anything. Gaetano reminded him that he had come
for the purpose of shooting goats, which he had utterly
forgotten. He took his fowling-piece, and began to hunt over
the island with the air of a man who is fulfilling a duty,
rather than enjoying a pleasure; and at the end of a quarter
of an hour he had killed a goat and two kids. These animals,
though wild and agile as chamois, were too much like
domestic goats, and Franz could not consider them as game.
Moreover, other ideas, much more enthralling, occupied his
mind. Since, the evening before, he had really been the hero
of one of the tales of the “Thousand and One Nights,” and he
was irresistibly attracted towards the grotto. Then, in
spite of the failure of his first search, he began a second,
after having told Gaetano to roast one of the two kids. The
second visit was a long one, and when he returned the kid
was roasted and the repast ready. Franz was sitting on the
spot where he was on the previous evening when his
mysterious host had invited him to supper; and he saw the
little yacht, now like a sea-gull on the wave, continuing
her flight towards Corsica. “Why,” he remarked to Gaetano,
“you told me that Signor Sinbad was going to Malaga, while
it seems he is in the direction of Porto-Vecchio.”

“Don’t you remember,” said the patron, “I told you that
among the crew there were two Corsican brigands?”

“True; and he is going to land them,” added Franz.

“Precisely so,” replied Gaetano. “Ah, he is one who fears
neither God nor Satan, they say, and would at any time run
fifty leagues out of his course to do a poor devil a
service.”

“But such services as these might involve him with the
authorities of the country in which he practices this kind
of philanthropy,” said Franz.

“And what cares he for that,” replied Gaetano with a laugh,
“or any authorities? He smiles at them. Let them try to
pursue him! Why, in the first place, his yacht is not a
ship, but a bird, and he would beat any frigate three knots
in every nine; and if he were to throw himself on the coast,
why, is he not certain of finding friends everywhere?”

It was perfectly clear that the Signor Sinbad, Franz’s host,
had the honor of being on excellent terms with the smugglers
and bandits along the whole coast of the Mediterranean, and
so enjoyed exceptional privileges. As to Franz, he had no
longer any inducement to remain at Monte Cristo. He had lost
all hope of detecting the secret of the grotto; he
consequently despatched his breakfast, and, his boat being
ready, he hastened on board, and they were soon under way.
At the moment the boat began her course they lost sight of
the yacht, as it disappeared in the gulf of Porto-Vecchio.
With it was effaced the last trace of the preceding night;
and then supper, Sinbad, hashish, statues, — all became a
dream for Franz. The boat sailed on all day and all night,
and next morning, when the sun rose, they had lost sight of
Monte Cristo. When Franz had once again set foot on shore,
he forgot, for the moment at least, the events which had
just passed, while he finished his affairs of pleasure at
Florence, and then thought of nothing but how he should
rejoin his companion, who was awaiting him at Rome.

He set out, and on the Saturday evening reached the Eternal
City by the mail-coach. An apartment, as we have said, had
been retained beforehand, and thus he had but to go to
Signor Pastrini’s hotel. But this was not so easy a matter,
for the streets were thronged with people, and Rome was
already a prey to that low and feverish murmur which
precedes all great events; and at Rome there are four great
events in every year, — the Carnival, Holy Week, Corpus
Christi, and the Feast of St. Peter. All the rest of the
year the city is in that state of dull apathy, between life
and death, which renders it similar to a kind of station
between this world and the next — a sublime spot, a
resting-place full of poetry and character, and at which
Franz had already halted five or six times, and at each time
found it more marvellous and striking. At last he made his
way through the mob, which was continually increasing and
getting more and more turbulent, and reached the hotel. On
his first inquiry he was told, with the impertinence
peculiar to hired hackney-coachmen and inn-keepers with
their houses full, that there was no room for him at the
Hotel de Londres. Then he sent his card to Signor Pastrini,
and asked for Albert de Morcerf. This plan succeeded; and
Signor Pastrini himself ran to him, excusing himself for
having made his excellency wait, scolding the waiters,
taking the candlestick from the porter, who was ready to
pounce on the traveller and was about to lead him to Albert,
when Morcerf himself appeared.

The apartment consisted of two small rooms and a parlor. The
two rooms looked onto the street — a fact which Signor
Pastrini commented upon as an inappreciable advantage. The
rest of the floor was hired by a very rich gentleman who was
supposed to be a Sicilian or Maltese; but the host was
unable to decide to which of the two nations the traveller
belonged. “Very good, signor Pastrini,” said Franz; “but we
must have some supper instantly, and a carriage for tomorrow
and the following days.”

“As to supper,” replied the landlord, “you shall be served
immediately; but as for the carriage” —

“What as to the carriage?” exclaimed Albert. “Come, come,
Signor Pastrini, no joking; we must have a carriage.”

“Sir,” replied the host, “we will do all in our power to
procure you one — this is all I can say.”

“And when shall we know?” inquired Franz.

“To-morrow morning,” answered the inn-keeper.

“Oh, the deuce! then we shall pay the more, that’s all, I
see plainly enough. At Drake’s or Aaron’s one pays
twenty-five lire for common days, and thirty or thirty-five
lire a day more for Sundays and feast days; add five lire a
day more for extras, that will make forty, and there’s an
end of it.”

“I am afraid if we offer them double that we shall not
procure a carriage.”

“Then they must put horses to mine. It is a little worse for
the journey, but that’s no matter.”

“There are no horses.” Albert looked at Franz like a man who
hears a reply he does not understand.

“Do you understand that, my dear Franz — no horses?” he
said, “but can’t we have post-horses?”

“They have been all hired this fortnight, and there are none
left but those absolutely requisite for posting.”

“What are we to say to this?” asked Franz.

“I say, that when a thing completely surpasses my
comprehension, I am accustomed not to dwell on that thing,
but to pass to another. Is supper ready, Signor Pastrini?”

“Yes, your excellency.”

“Well, then, let us sup.”

“But the carriage and horses?” said Franz.

“Be easy, my dear boy; they will come in due season; it is
only a question of how much shall be charged for them.”
Morcerf then, with that delighted philosophy which believes
that nothing is impossible to a full purse or well-lined
pocketbook, supped, went to bed, slept soundly, and dreamed
he was racing all over Rome at Carnival time in a coach with
six horses.

 

The next morning Franz woke first, and instantly rang the
bell. The sound had not yet died away when Signor Pastrini
himself entered.

“Well, excellency,” said the landlord triumphantly, and
without waiting for Franz to question him, “I feared
yesterday, when I would not promise you anything, that you
were too late — there is not a single carriage to be had —
that is, for the last three days of the carnival.”

“Yes,” returned Franz, “for the very three days it is most
needed.”

“What is the matter?” said Albert, entering; “no carriage to
be had?”

“Just so,” returned Franz, “you have guessed it.”

“Well, your Eternal City is a nice sort of place.”

“That is to say, excellency,” replied Pastrini, who was
desirous of keeping up the dignity of the capital of the
Christian world in the eyes of his guest, “that there are no
carriages to be had from Sunday to Tuesday evening, but from
now till Sunday you can have fifty if you please.”

“Ah, that is something,” said Albert; “to-day is Thursday,
and who knows what may arrive between this and Sunday?”

“Ten or twelve thousand travellers will arrive,” replied
Franz, “which will make it still more difficult.”

“My friend,” said Morcerf, “let us enjoy the present without
gloomy forebodings for the future.”

“At least we can have a window?”

“Where?”

“In the Corso.”

“Ah, a window!” exclaimed Signor Pastrini, — “utterly
impossible; there was only one left on the fifth floor of
the Doria Palace, and that has been let to a Russian prince
for twenty sequins a day.”

The two young men looked at each other with an air of
stupefaction.

“Well,” said Franz to Albert, “do you know what is the best
thing we can do? It is to pass the Carnival at Venice; there
we are sure of obtaining gondolas if we cannot have
carriages.”

“Ah, the devil, no,” cried Albert; “I came to Rome to see
the Carnival, and I will, though I see it on stilts.”

“Bravo! an excellent idea. We will disguise ourselves as
monster pulchinellos or shepherds of the Landes, and we
shall have complete success.”

“Do your excellencies still wish for a carriage from now to
Sunday morning?”

“Parbleu!” said Albert, “do you think we are going to run
about on foot in the streets of Rome, like lawyer’s clerks?”

“I hasten to comply with your excellencies’ wishes; only, I
tell you beforehand, the carriage will cost you six piastres
a day.”

“And, as I am not a millionaire, like the gentleman in the
next apartments,” said Franz, “I warn you, that as I have
been four times before at Rome, I know the prices of all the
carriages; we will give you twelve piastres for to-day,
tomorrow, and the day after, and then you will make a good
profit.”

“But, excellency” — said Pastrini, still striving to gain
his point.

“Now go,” returned Franz, “or I shall go myself and bargain
with your affettatore, who is mine also; he is an old friend
of mine, who has plundered me pretty well already, and, in
the hope of making more out of me, he will take a less price
than the one I offer you; you will lose the preference, and
that will be your fault.”

“Do not give yourselves the trouble, excellency,” returned
Signor Pastrini, with the smile peculiar to the Italian
speculator when he confesses defeat; “I will do all I can,
and I hope you will be satisfied.”

“And now we understand each other.”

“When do you wish the carriage to be here?”

“In an hour.”

“In an hour it will be at the door.”

An hour after the vehicle was at the door; it was a hack
conveyance which was elevated to the rank of a private
carriage in honor of the occasion, but, in spite of its
humble exterior, the young men would have thought themselves
happy to have secured it for the last three days of the
Carnival. “Excellency,” cried the cicerone, seeing Franz
approach the window, “shall I bring the carriage nearer to
the palace?”

Accustomed as Franz was to the Italian phraseology, his
first impulse was to look round him, but these words were
addressed to him. Franz was the “excellency,” the vehicle
was the “carriage,” and the Hotel de Londres was the
“palace.” The genius for laudation characteristic of the
race was in that phrase.

Franz and Albert descended, the carriage approached the
palace; their excellencies stretched their legs along the
seats; the cicerone sprang into the seat behind. “Where do
your excellencies wish to go?” asked he.

“To Saint Peter’s first, and then to the Colosseum,”
returned Albert. But Albert did not know that it takes a day
to see Saint Peter’s, and a month to study it. The day was
passed at Saint Peter’s alone. Suddenly the daylight began
to fade away; Franz took out his watch — it was half-past
four. They returned to the hotel; at the door Franz ordered
the coachman to be ready at eight. He wished to show Albert
the Colosseum by moonlight, as he had shown him Saint
Peter’s by daylight. When we show a friend a city one has
already visited, we feel the same pride as when we point out
a woman whose lover we have been. He was to leave the city
by the Porta del Popolo, skirt the outer wall, and re-enter
by the Porta San Giovanni; thus they would behold the
Colosseum without finding their impressions dulled by first
looking on the Capitol, the Forum, the Arch of Septimus
Severus, the Temple of Antoninus and Faustina, and the Via
Sacra. They sat down to dinner. Signor Pastrini had promised
them a banquet; he gave them a tolerable repast. At the end
of the dinner he entered in person. Franz thought that he
came to hear his dinner praised, and began accordingly, but
at the first words he was interrupted. “Excellency,” said
Pastrini, “I am delighted to have your approbation, but it
was not for that I came.”

“Did you come to tell us you have procured a carriage?”
asked Albert, lighting his cigar.

“No; and your excellencies will do well not to think of that
any longer; at Rome things can or cannot be done; when you
are told anything cannot he done, there is an end of it.”

“It is much more convenient at Paris, — when anything
cannot be done, you pay double, and it is done directly.”

“That is what all the French say,” returned Signor Pastrini,
somewhat piqued; “for that reason, I do not understand why
they travel.”

“But,” said Albert, emitting a volume of smoke and balancing
his chair on its hind legs, “only madmen, or blockheads like
us, ever do travel. Men in their senses do not quit their
hotel in the Rue du Helder, their walk on the Boulevard de
Gand, and the Cafe de Paris.” It is of course understood
that Albert resided in the aforesaid street, appeared every
day on the fashionable walk, and dined frequently at the
only restaurant where you can really dine, that is, if you
are on good terms with its frequenters. Signor Pastrini
remained silent a short time; it was evident that he was
musing over this answer, which did not seem very clear.
“But,” said Franz, in his turn interrupting his host’s
meditations, “you had some motive for coming here, may I beg
to know what it was?”

“Ah, yes; you have ordered your carriage at eight o’clock
precisely?”

“I have.”

“You intend visiting Il Colosseo.”

“You mean the Colosseum?”

“It is the same thing. You have told your coachman to leave
the city by the Porta del Popolo, to drive round the walls,
and re-enter by the Porta San Giovanni?”

“These are my words exactly.”

“Well, this route is impossible.”

“Impossible!”

“Very dangerous, to say the least.”

“Dangerous! — and why?”

“On account of the famous Luigi Vampa.”

“Pray, who may this famous Luigi Vampa be?” inquired Albert;
“he may be very famous at Rome, but I can assure you he is
quite unknown at Paris.”

“What! do you not know him?”

“I have not that honor.”

“You have never heard his name?”

“Never.”

“Well, then, he is a bandit, compared to whom the Decesaris
and the Gasparones were mere children.”

“Now then, Albert,” cried Franz, “here is a bandit for you
at last.”

“I forewarn you, Signor Pastrini, that I shall not believe
one word of what you are going to tell us; having told you
this, begin.”

“Once upon a time” —

“Well, go on.” Signor Pastrini turned toward Franz, who
seemed to him the more reasonable of the two; we must do him
justice, — he had had a great many Frenchmen in his house,
but had never been able to comprehend them. “Excellency,”
said he gravely, addressing Franz, “if you look upon me as a
liar, it is useless for me to say anything; it was for your
interest I” —

“Albert does not say you are a liar, Signor Pastrini,” said
Franz, “but that he will not believe what you are going to
tell us, — but I will believe all you say; so proceed.”

“But if your excellency doubt my veracity” —

“Signor Pastrini,” returned Franz, “you are more susceptible
than Cassandra, who was a prophetess, and yet no one
believed her; while you, at least, are sure of the credence
of half your audience. Come, sit down, and tell us all about
this Signor Vampa.”

“I had told your excellency he is the most famous bandit we
have had since the days of Mastrilla.”

“Well, what has this bandit to do with the order I have
given the coachman to leave the city by the Porta del
Popolo, and to re-enter by the Porta San Giovanni?”

“This,” replied Signor Pastrini, “that you will go out by
one, but I very much doubt your returning by the other.”

“Why?” asked Franz.

“Because, after nightfall, you are not safe fifty yards from
the gates.”

“On your honor is that true?” cried Albert.

“Count,” returned Signor Pastrini, hurt at Albert’s repeated
doubts of the truth of his assertions, “I do not say this to
you, but to your companion, who knows Rome, and knows, too,
that these things are not to be laughed at.”

“My dear fellow,” said Albert, turning to Franz, “here is an
admirable adventure; we will fill our carriage with pistols,
blunderbusses, and double-barrelled guns. Luigi Vampa comes
to take us, and we take him — we bring him back to Rome,
and present him to his holiness the Pope, who asks how he
can repay so great a service; then we merely ask for a
carriage and a pair of horses, and we see the Carnival in
the carriage, and doubtless the Roman people will crown us
at the Capitol, and proclaim us, like Curtius and the veiled
Horatius, the preservers of their country.” Whilst Albert
proposed this scheme, Signor Pastrini’s face assumed an
expression impossible to describe.

“And pray,” asked Franz, “where are these pistols,
blunderbusses, and other deadly weapons with which you
intend filling the carriage?”

“Not out of my armory, for at Terracina I was plundered even
of my hunting-knife.”

“I shared the same fate at Aquapendente.”

“Do you know, Signor Pastrini,” said Albert, lighting a
second cigar at the first, “that this practice is very
convenient for bandits, and that it seems to be due to an
arrangement of their own.” Doubtless Signor Pastrini found
this pleasantry compromising, for he only answered half the
question, and then he spoke to Franz, as the only one likely
to listen with attention. “Your excellency knows that it is
not customary to defend yourself when attacked by bandits.”

“What!” cried Albert, whose courage revolted at the idea of
being plundered tamely, “not make any resistance!”

“No, for it would be useless. What could you do against a
dozen bandits who spring out of some pit, ruin, or aqueduct,
and level their pieces at you?”

“Eh, parbleu! — they should kill me.”

The inn-keeper turned to Franz with an air that seemed to
say, “Your friend is decidedly mad.”

“My dear Albert,” returned Franz, “your answer is sublime,
and worthy the `Let him die,’ of Corneille, only, when
Horace made that answer, the safety of Rome was concerned;
but, as for us, it is only to gratify a whim, and it would
be ridiculous to risk our lives for so foolish a motive.”
Albert poured himself out a glass of lacryma Christi, which
he sipped at intervals, muttering some unintelligible words.

“Well, Signor Pastrini,” said Franz, “now that my companion
is quieted, and you have seen how peaceful my intentions
are, tell me who is this Luigi Vampa. Is he a shepherd or a
nobleman? — young or old? — tall or short? Describe him,
in order that, if we meet him by chance, like Bugaboo John
or Lara, we may recognize him.”

“You could not apply to any one better able to inform you on
all these points, for I knew him when he was a child, and
one day that I fell into his hands, going from Ferentino to
Alatri, he, fortunately for me, recollected me, and set me
free, not only without ransom, but made me a present of a
very splendid watch, and related his history to me.”

“Let us see the watch,” said Albert.

Signor Pastrini drew from his fob a magnificent Breguet,
bearing the name of its maker, of Parisian manufacture, and
a count’s coronet.

“Here it is,” said he.

“Peste,” returned Albert, “I compliment you on it; I have
its fellow” — he took his watch from his waistcoat pocket
— “and it cost me 3,000 francs.”

“Let us hear the history,” said Franz, motioning Signor
Pastrini to seat himself.

“Your excellencies permit it?” asked the host.

“Pardieu!” cried Albert, “you are not a preacher, to remain
standing!”

The host sat down, after having made each of them a
respectful bow, which meant that he was ready to tell them
all they wished to know concerning Luigi Vampa. “You tell
me,” said Franz, at the moment Signor Pastrini was about to
open his mouth, “that you knew Luigi Vampa when he was a
child — he is still a young man, then?”

“A young man? he is only two and twenty; — he will gain
himself a reputation.”

“What do you think of that, Albert? — at two and twenty to
be thus famous?”

“Yes, and at his age, Alexander, Caesar, and Napoleon, who
have all made some noise in the world, were quite behind
him.”

“So,” continued Franz, “the hero of this history is only two
and twenty?”

“Scarcely so much.”

“Is he tall or short?”

“Of the middle height — about the same stature as his
excellency,” returned the host, pointing to Albert.

“Thanks for the comparison,” said Albert, with a bow.

“Go on, Signor Pastrini,” continued Franz, smiling at his
friend’s susceptibility. “To what class of society does he
belong?”

“He was a shepherd-boy attached to the farm of the Count of
San-Felice, situated between Palestrina and the lake of
Gabri; he was born at Pampinara, and entered the count’s
service when he was five years old; his father was also a
shepherd, who owned a small flock, and lived by the wool and
the milk, which he sold at Rome. When quite a child, the
little Vampa displayed a most extraordinary precocity. One
day, when he was seven years old, he came to the curate of
Palestrina, and asked to be taught to read; it was somewhat
difficult, for he could not quit his flock; but the good
curate went every day to say mass at a little hamlet too
poor to pay a priest and which, having no other name, was
called Borgo; he told Luigi that he might meet him on his
return, and that then he would give him a lesson, warning
him that it would be short, and that he must profit as much
as possible by it. The child accepted joyfully. Every day
Luigi led his flock to graze on the road that leads from
Palestrina to Borgo; every day, at nine o’clock in the
morning, the priest and the boy sat down on a bank by the
wayside, and the little shepherd took his lesson out of the
priest’s breviary. At the end of three months he had learned
to read. This was not enough — he must now learn to write.
The priest had a writing teacher at Rome make three
alphabets — one large, one middling, and one small; and
pointed out to him that by the help of a sharp instrument he
could trace the letters on a slate, and thus learn to write.
The same evening, when the flock was safe at the farm, the
little Luigi hastened to the smith at Palestrina, took a
large nail, heated and sharpened it, and formed a sort of
stylus. The next morning he gathered an armful of pieces of
slate and began. At the end of three months he had learned
to write. The curate, astonished at his quickness and
intelligence, made him a present of pens, paper, and a
penknife. This demanded new effort, but nothing compared to
the first; at the end of a week he wrote as well with this
pen as with the stylus. The curate related the incident to
the Count of San-Felice, who sent for the little shepherd,
made him read and write before him, ordered his attendant to
let him eat with the domestics, and to give him two piastres
a month. With this, Luigi purchased books and pencils. He
applied his imitative powers to everything, and, like
Giotto, when young, he drew on his slate sheep, houses, and
trees. Then, with his knife, he began to carve all sorts of
objects in wood; it was thus that Pinelli, the famous
sculptor, had commenced.

“A girl of six or seven — that is, a little younger than
Vampa — tended sheep on a farm near Palestrina; she was an
orphan, born at Valmontone and was named Teresa. The two
children met, sat down near each other, let their flocks
mingle together, played, laughed, and conversed together; in
the evening they separated the Count of San-Felice’s flock
from those of Baron Cervetri, and the children returned to
their respective farms, promising to meet the next morning.
The next day they kept their word, and thus they grew up
together. Vampa was twelve, and Teresa eleven. And yet their
natural disposition revealed itself. Beside his taste for
the fine arts, which Luigi had carried as far as he could in
his solitude, he was given to alternating fits of sadness
and enthusiasm, was often angry and capricious, and always
sarcastic. None of the lads of Pampinara, Palestrina, or
Valmontone had been able to gain any influence over him or
even to become his companion. His disposition (always
inclined to exact concessions rather than to make them) kept
him aloof from all friendships. Teresa alone ruled by a
look, a word, a gesture, this impetuous character, which
yielded beneath the hand of a woman, and which beneath the
hand of a man might have broken, but could never have been
bended. Teresa was lively and gay, but coquettish to excess.
The two piastres that Luigi received every month from the
Count of San-Felice’s steward, and the price of all the
little carvings in wood he sold at Rome, were expended in
ear-rings, necklaces, and gold hairpins. So that, thanks to
her friend’s generosity, Teresa was the most beautiful and
the best-attired peasant near Rome. The two children grew up
together, passing all their time with each other, and giving
themselves up to the wild ideas of their different
characters. Thus, in all their dreams, their wishes, and
their conversations, Vampa saw himself the captain of a
vessel, general of an army, or governor of a province.
Teresa saw herself rich, superbly attired, and attended by a
train of liveried domestics. Then, when they had thus passed
the day in building castles in the air, they separated their
flocks, and descended from the elevation of their dreams to
the reality of their humble position.

“One day the young shepherd told the count’s steward that he
had seen a wolf come out of the Sabine mountains, and prowl
around his flock. The steward gave him a gun; this was what
Vampa longed for. This gun had an excellent barrel, made at
Breschia, and carrying a ball with the precision of an
English rifle; but one day the count broke the stock, and
had then cast the gun aside. This, however, was nothing to a
sculptor like Vampa; he examined the broken stock,
calculated what change it would require to adapt the gun to
his shoulder, and made a fresh stock, so beautifully carved
that it would have fetched fifteen or twenty piastres, had
he chosen to sell it. But nothing could be farther from his
thoughts. For a long time a gun had been the young man’s
greatest ambition. In every country where independence has
taken the place of liberty, the first desire of a manly
heart is to possess a weapon, which at once renders him
capable of defence or attack, and, by rendering its owner
terrible, often makes him feared. From this moment Vampa
devoted all his leisure time to perfecting himself in the
use of his precious weapon; he purchased powder and ball,
and everything served him for a mark — the trunk of some
old and moss-grown olive-tree, that grew on the Sabine
mountains; the fox, as he quitted his earth on some
marauding excursion; the eagle that soared above their
heads: and thus he soon became so expert, that Teresa
overcame the terror she at first felt at the report, and
amused herself by watching him direct the ball wherever he
pleased, with as much accuracy as if he placed it by hand.

“One evening a wolf emerged from a pine-wood hear which they
were usually stationed, but the wolf had scarcely advanced
ten yards ere he was dead. Proud of this exploit, Vampa took
the dead animal on his shoulders, and carried him to the
farm. These exploits had gained Luigi considerable
reputation. The man of superior abilities always finds
admirers, go where he will. He was spoken of as the most
adroit, the strongest, and the most courageous contadino for
ten leagues around; and although Teresa was universally
allowed to be the most beautiful girl of the Sabines, no one
had ever spoken to her of love, because it was known that
she was beloved by Vampa. And yet the two young people had
never declared their affection; they had grown together like
two trees whose roots are mingled, whose branches
intertwined, and whose intermingled perfume rises to the
heavens. Only their wish to see each other had become a
necessity, and they would have preferred death to a day’s
separation. Teresa was sixteen, and Vampa seventeen. About
this time, a band of brigands that had established itself in
the Lepini mountains began to be much spoken of. The
brigands have never been really extirpated from the
neighborhood of Rome. Sometimes a chief is wanted, but when
a chief presents himself he rarely has to wait long for a
band of followers.

“The celebrated Cucumetto, pursued in the Abruzzo, driven
out of the kingdom of Naples, where he had carried on a
regular war, had crossed the Garigliano, like Manfred, and
had taken refuge on the banks of the Amasine between Sonnino
and Juperno. He strove to collect a band of followers, and
followed the footsteps of Decesaris and Gasperone, whom he
hoped to surpass. Many young men of Palestrina, Frascati,
and Pampinara had disappeared. Their disappearance at first
caused much disquietude; but it was soon known that they had
joined Cucumetto. After some time Cucumetto became the
object of universal attention; the most extraordinary traits
of ferocious daring and brutality were related of him. One
day he carried off a young girl, the daughter of a surveyor
of Frosinone. The bandit’s laws are positive; a young girl
belongs first to him who carries her off, then the rest draw
lots for her, and she is abandoned to their brutality until
death relieves her sufferings. When their parents are
sufficiently rich to pay a ransom, a messenger is sent to
negotiate; the prisoner is hostage for the security of the
messenger; should the ransom be refused, the prisoner is
irrevocably lost. The young girl’s lover was in Cucumetto’s
troop; his name was Carlini. When she recognized her lover,
the poor girl extended her arms to him, and believed herself
safe; but Carlini felt his heart sink, for he but too well
knew the fate that awaited her. However, as he was a
favorite with Cucumetto, as he had for three years
faithfully served him, and as he had saved his life by
shooting a dragoon who was about to cut him down, he hoped
the chief would have pity on him. He took Cucumetto one
side, while the young girl, seated at the foot of a huge
pine that stood in the centre of the forest, made a veil of
her picturesque head-dress to hide her face from the
lascivious gaze of the bandits. There he told the chief all
— his affection for the prisoner, their promises of mutual
fidelity, and how every night, since he had been near, they
had met in some neighboring ruins.

“It so happened that night that Cucumetto had sent Carlini
to a village, so that he had been unable to go to the place
of meeting. Cucumetto had been there, however, by accident,
as he said, and had carried the maiden off. Carlini besought
his chief to make an exception in Rita’s favor, as her
father was rich, and could pay a large ransom. Cucumetto
seemed to yield to his friend’s entreaties, and bade him
find a shepherd to send to Rita’s father at Frosinone.
Carlini flew joyfully to Rita, telling her she was saved,
and bidding her write to her father, to inform him what had
occurred, and that her ransom was fixed at three hundred
piastres. Twelve hours’ delay was all that was granted —
that is, until nine the next morning. The instant the letter
was written, Carlini seized it, and hastened to the plain to
find a messenger. He found a young shepherd watching his
flock. The natural messengers of the bandits are the
shepherds who live between the city and the mountains,
between civilized and savage life. The boy undertook the
commission, promising to be in Frosinone in less than an
hour. Carlini returned, anxious to see his mistress, and
announce the joyful intelligence. He found the troop in the
glade, supping off the provisions exacted as contributions
from the peasants; but his eye vainly sought Rita and
Cucumetto among them. He inquired where they were, and was
answered by a burst of laughter. A cold perspiration burst
from every pore, and his hair stood on end. He repeated his
question. One of the bandits rose, and offered him a glass
filled with Orvietto, saying, `To the health of the brave
Cucumetto and the fair Rita.’ At this moment Carlini heard a
woman’s cry; he divined the truth, seized the glass, broke
it across the face of him who presented it, and rushed
towards the spot whence the cry came. After a hundred yards
he turned the corner of the thicket; he found Rita senseless
in the arms of Cucumetto. At the sight of Carlini, Cucumetto
rose, a pistol in each hand. The two brigands looked at each
other for a moment — the one with a smile of lasciviousness
on his lips, the other with the pallor of death on his brow.
A terrible battle between the two men seemed imminent; but
by degrees Carlini’s features relaxed, his hand, which had
grasped one of the pistols in his belt, fell to his side.
Rita lay between them. The moon lighted the group.

“`Well,’ said Cucumetto, `have you executed your
commission?’

“`Yes, captain,’ returned Carlini. `At nine o’clock
to-morrow Rita’s father will be here with the money.’ — `It
is well; in the meantime, we will have a merry night; this
young girl is charming, and does credit to your taste. Now,
as I am not egotistical, we will return to our comrades and
draw lots for her.’ — `You have determined, then, to
abandon her to the common law?” said Carlini.

“`Why should an exception be made in her favor?’

“`I thought that my entreaties’ —

“`What right have you, any more than the rest, to ask for an
exception?’ — `It is true.’ — `But never mind,’ continued
Cucumetto, laughing, `sooner or later your turn will come.’
Carlini’s teeth clinched convulsively.

“`Now, then,’ said Cucumetto, advancing towards the other
bandits, `are you coming?’ — `I follow you.’

“Cucumetto departed, without losing sight of Carlini, for,
doubtless, he feared lest he should strike him unawares; but
nothing betrayed a hostile design on Carlini’s part. He was
standing, his arms folded, near Rita, who was still
insensible. Cucumetto fancied for a moment the young man was
about to take her in his arms and fly; but this mattered
little to him now Rita had been his; and as for the money,
three hundred piastres distributed among the band was so
small a sum that he cared little about it. He continued to
follow the path to the glade; but, to his great surprise,
Carlini arrived almost as soon as himself. `Let us draw
lots! let us draw lots!’ cried all the brigands, when they
saw the chief.

“Their demand was fair, and the chief inclined his head in
sign of acquiescence. The eyes of all shone fiercely as they
made their demand, and the red light of the fire made them
look like demons. The names of all, including Carlini, were
placed in a hat, and the youngest of the band drew forth a
ticket; the ticket bore the name of Diovolaccio. He was the
man who had proposed to Carlini the health of their chief,
and to whom Carlini replied by breaking the glass across his
face. A large wound, extending from the temple to the mouth,
was bleeding profusely. Diovalaccio, seeing himself thus
favored by fortune, burst into a loud laugh. `Captain,’ said
he, `just now Carlini would not drink your health when I
proposed it to him; propose mine to him, and let us see if
he will be more condescending to you than to me.’ Every one
expected an explosion on Carlini’s part; but to their great
surprise, he took a glass in one hand and a flask in the
other, and filling it, — `Your health, Diavolaccio,’ said
he calmly, and he drank it off, without his hand trembling
in the least. Then sitting down by the fire, `My supper,’
said he; `my expedition has given me an appetite.’ — `Well
done, Carlini!’ cried the brigands; `that is acting like a
good fellow;’ and they all formed a circle round the fire,
while Diavolaccio disappeared. Carlini ate and drank as if
nothing had happened. The bandits looked on with
astonishment at this singular conduct until they heard
footsteps. They turned round, and saw Diavolaccio bearing
the young girl in his arms. Her head hung back, and her long
hair swept the ground. As they entered the circle, the
bandits could perceive, by the firelight, the unearthly
pallor of the young girl and of Diavolaccio. This apparition
was so strange and so solemn, that every one rose, with the
exception of Carlini, who remained seated, and ate and drank
calmly. Diavolaccio advanced amidst the most profound
silence, and laid Rita at the captain’s feet. Then every one
could understand the cause of the unearthly pallor in the
young girl and the bandit. A knife was plunged up to the
hilt in Rita’s left breast. Every one looked at Carlini; the
sheath at his belt was empty. `Ah, ah,’ said the chief, `I
now understand why Carlini stayed behind.’ All savage
natures appreciate a desperate deed. No other of the bandits
would, perhaps, have done the same; but they all understood
what Carlini had done. `Now, then,’ cried Carlini, rising in
his turn, and approaching the corpse, his hand on the butt
of one of his pistols, `does any one dispute the possession
of this woman with me?’ — `No,’ returned the chief, `she is
thine.’ Carlini raised her in his arms, and carried her out
of the circle of firelight. Cucumetto placed his sentinels
for the night, and the bandits wrapped themselves in their
cloaks, and lay down before the fire. At midnight the
sentinel gave the alarm, and in an instant all were on the
alert. It was Rita’s father, who brought his daughter’s
ransom in person. `Here,’ said he, to Cucumetto, `here are
three hundred piastres; give me back my child. But the
chief, without taking the money, made a sign to him to
follow. The old man obeyed. They both advanced beneath the
trees, through whose branches streamed the moonlight.
Cucumetto stopped at last, and pointed to two persons
grouped at the foot of a tree.

“`There,’ said he, `demand thy child of Carlini; he will
tell thee what has become of her;’ and he returned to his
companions. The old man remained motionless; he felt that
some great and unforeseen misfortune hung over his head. At
length he advanced toward the group, the meaning of which he
could not comprehend. As he approached, Carlini raised his
head, and the forms of two persons became visible to the old
man’s eyes. A woman lay on the ground, her head resting on
the knees of a man, who was seated by her; as he raised his
head, the woman’s face became visible. The old man
recognized his child, and Carlini recognized the old man. `I
expected thee,’ said the bandit to Rita’s father. —
`Wretch!’ returned the old man, `what hast thou done?’ and
he gazed with terror on Rita, pale and bloody, a knife
buried in her bosom. A ray of moonlight poured through the
trees, and lighted up the face of the dead. — `Cucumetto
had violated thy daughter,’ said the bandit; `I loved her,
therefore I slew her; for she would have served as the sport
of the whole band.’ The old man spoke not, and grew pale as
death. `Now,’ continued Carlini, `if I have done wrongly,
avenge her;’ and withdrawing the knife from the wound in
Rita’s bosom, he held it out to the old man with one hand,
while with the other he tore open his vest. — `Thou hast
done well!’ returned the old man in a hoarse voice; `embrace
me, my son.’ Carlini threw himself, sobbing like a child,
into the arms of his mistress’s father. These were the first
tears the man of blood had ever wept. `Now,’ said the old
man, `aid me to bury my child.’ Carlini fetched two
pickaxes; and the father and the lover began to dig at the
foot of a huge oak, beneath which the young girl was to
repose. When the grave was formed, the father kissed her
first, and then the lover; afterwards, one taking the head,
the other the feet, they placed her in the grave. Then they
knelt on each side of the grave, and said the prayers of the
dead. Then, when they had finished, they cast the earth over
the corpse, until the grave was filled. Then, extending his
hand, the old man said; `I thank you, my son; and now leave
me alone.’ — `Yet’ — replied Carlini. — `Leave me, I
command you.’ Carlini obeyed, rejoined his comrades, folded
himself in his cloak, and soon appeared to sleep as soundly
as the rest. It had been resolved the night before to change
their encampment. An hour before daybreak, Cucumetto aroused
his men, and gave the word to march. But Carlini would not
quit the forest, without knowing what had become of Rita’s
father. He went toward the place where he had left him. He
found the old man suspended from one of the branches of the
oak which shaded his daughter’s grave. He then took an oath
of bitter vengeance over the dead body of the one and the
tomb of the other. But he was unable to complete this oath,
for two days afterwards, in an encounter with the Roman
carbineers, Carlini was killed. There was some surprise,
however, that, as he was with his face to the enemy, he
should have received a ball between his shoulders. That
astonishment ceased when one of the brigands remarked to his
comrades that Cucumetto was stationed ten paces in Carlini’s
rear when he fell. On the morning of the departure from the
forest of Frosinone he had followed Carlini in the darkness,
and heard this oath of vengeance, and, like a wise man,
anticipated it. They told ten other stories of this bandit
chief, each more singular than the other. Thus, from Fondi
to Perusia, every one trembles at the name of Cucumetto.

“These narratives were frequently the theme of conversation
between Luigi and Teresa. The young girl trembled very much
at hearing the stories; but Vampa reassured her with a
smile, tapping the butt of his good fowling-piece, which
threw its ball so well; and if that did not restore her
courage, he pointed to a crow, perched on some dead branch,
took aim, touched the trigger, and the bird fell dead at the
foot of the tree. Time passed on, and the two young people
had agreed to be married when Vampa should be twenty and
Teresa nineteen years of age. They were both orphans, and
had only their employers’ leave to ask, which had been
already sought and obtained. One day when they were talking
over their plans for the future, they heard two or three
reports of firearms, and then suddenly a man came out of the
wood, near which the two young persons used to graze their
flocks, and hurried towards them. When he came within
hearing, he exclaimed. `I am pursued; can you conceal me?’
They knew full well that this fugitive must be a bandit; but
there is an innate sympathy between the Roman brigand and
the Roman peasant and the latter is always ready to aid the
former. Vampa, without saying a word, hastened to the stone
that closed up the entrance to their grotto, drew it away,
made a sign to the fugitive to take refuge there, in a
retreat unknown to every one, closed the stone upon him, and
then went and resumed his seat by Teresa. Instantly
afterwards four carbineers, on horseback, appeared on the
edge of the wood; three of them appeared to be looking for
the fugitive, while the fourth dragged a brigand prisoner by
the neck. The three carbineers looked about carefully on
every side, saw the young peasants, and galloping up, began
to question them. They had seen no one. `That is very
annoying,’ said the brigadier; for the man we are looking
for is the chief.’ — `Cucumetto?’ cried Luigi and Teresa at
the same moment.

“`Yes,’ replied the brigadier; `and as his head is valued at
a thousand Roman crowns, there would have been five hundred
for you, if you had helped us to catch him.’ The two young
persons exchanged looks. The brigadier had a moment’s hope.
Five hundred Roman crowns are three thousand lire, and three
thousand lire are a fortune for two poor orphans who are
going to be married.

“`Yes, it is very annoying,’ said Vampa; `but we have not
seen him.’

“Then the carbineers scoured the country in different
directions, but in vain; then, after a time, they
disappeared. Vampa then removed the stone, and Cucumetto
came out. Through the crevices in the granite he had seen
the two young peasants talking with the carbineers, and
guessed the subject of their parley. He had read in the
countenances of Luigi and Teresa their steadfast resolution
not to surrender him, and he drew from his pocket a purse
full of gold, which he offered to them. But Vampa raised his
head proudly; as to Teresa, her eyes sparkled when she
thought of all the fine gowns and gay jewellery she could
buy with this purse of gold.

“Cucumetto was a cunning fiend, and had assumed the form of
a brigand instead of a serpent, and this look from Teresa
showed to him that she was a worthy daughter of Eve, and he
returned to the forest, pausing several times on his way,
under the pretext of saluting his protectors. Several days
elapsed, and they neither saw nor heard of Cucumetto. The
time of the Carnival was at hand. The Count of San-Felice
announced a grand masked ball, to which all that were
distinguished in Rome were invited. Teresa had a great
desire to see this ball. Luigi asked permission of his
protector, the steward, that she and he might be present
amongst the servants of the house. This was granted. The
ball was given by the Count for the particular pleasure of
his daughter Carmela, whom he adored. Carmela was precisely
the age and figure of Teresa, and Teresa was as handsome as
Carmela. On the evening of the ball Teresa was attired in
her best, her most brilliant ornaments in her hair, and
gayest glass beads, — she was in the costume of the women
of Frascati. Luigi wore the very picturesque garb of the
Roman peasant at holiday time. They both mingled, as they
had leave to do, with the servants and peasants.

“The festa was magnificent; not only was the villa
brilliantly illuminated, but thousands of colored lanterns
were suspended from the trees in the garden; and very soon
the palace overflowed to the terraces, and the terraces to
the garden-walks. At each cross-path was an orchestra, and
tables spread with refreshments; the guests stopped, formed
quadrilles, and danced in any part of the grounds they
pleased. Carmela was attired like a woman of Sonnino. Her
cap was embroidered with pearls, the pins in her hair were
of gold and diamonds, her girdle was of Turkey silk, with
large embroidered flowers, her bodice and skirt were of
cashmere, her apron of Indian muslin, and the buttons of her
corset were of jewels. Two of her companions were dressed,
the one as a woman of Nettuno, and the other as a woman of
La Riccia. Four young men of the richest and noblest
families of Rome accompanied them with that Italian freedom
which has not its parallel in any other country in the
world. They were attired as peasants of Albano, Velletri,
Civita-Castellana, and Sora. We need hardly add that these
peasant costumes, like those of the young women, were
brilliant with gold and jewels.

“Carmela wished to form a quadrille, but there was one lady
wanting. Carmela looked all around her, but not one of the
guests had a costume similar to her own, or those of her
companions. The Count of San-Felice pointed out Teresa, who
was hanging on Luigi’s arm in a group of peasants. `Will you
allow me, father?’ said Carmela. — `Certainly,’ replied the
count, `are we not in Carnival time?’ — Carmela turned
towards the young man who was talking with her, and saying a
few words to him, pointed with her finger to Teresa. The
young man looked, bowed in obedience, and then went to
Teresa, and invited her to dance in a quadrille directed by
the count’s daughter. Teresa felt a flush pass over her
face; she looked at Luigi, who could not refuse his assent.
Luigi slowly relinquished Teresa’s arm, which he had held
beneath his own, and Teresa, accompanied by her elegant
cavalier, took her appointed place with much agitation in
the aristocratic quadrille. Certainly, in the eyes of an
artist, the exact and strict costume of Teresa had a very
different character from that of Carmela and her companions;
and Teresa was frivolous and coquettish, and thus the
embroidery and muslins, the cashmere waist-girdles, all
dazzled her, and the reflection of sapphires and diamonds
almost turned her giddy brain.

“Luigi felt a sensation hitherto unknown arising in his
mind. It was like an acute pain which gnawed at his heart,
and then thrilled through his whole body. He followed with
his eye each movement of Teresa and her cavalier; when their
hands touched, he felt as though he should swoon; every
pulse beat with violence, and it seemed as though a bell
were ringing in his ears. When they spoke, although Teresa
listened timidly and with downcast eyes to the conversation
of her cavalier, as Luigi could read in the ardent looks of
the good-looking young man that his language was that of
praise, it seemed as if the whole world was turning round
with him, and all the voices of hell were whispering in his
ears ideas of murder and assassination. Then fearing that
his paroxysm might get the better of him, he clutched with
one hand the branch of a tree against which he was leaning,
and with the other convulsively grasped the dagger with a
carved handle which was in his belt, and which, unwittingly,
he drew from the scabbard from time to time. Luigi was
jealous! He felt that, influenced by her ambitions and
coquettish disposition, Teresa might escape him.

“The young peasant girl, at first timid and scared, soon
recovered herself. We have said that Teresa was handsome,
but this is not all; Teresa was endowed with all those wild
graces which are so much more potent than our affected and
studied elegancies. She had almost all the honors of the
quadrille, and if she were envious of the Count of
San-Felice’s daughter, we will not undertake to say that
Carmela was not jealous of her. And with overpowering
compliments her handsome cavalier led her back to the place
whence he had taken her, and where Luigi awaited her. Twice
or thrice during the dance the young girl had glanced at
Luigi, and each time she saw that he was pale and that his
features were agitated, once even the blade of his knife,
half drawn from its sheath, had dazzled her eyes with its
sinister glare. Thus, it was almost tremblingly that she
resumed her lover’s arm. The quadrille had been most
perfect, and it was evident there was a great demand for a
repetition, Carmela alone objecting to it, but the Count of
San-Felice besought his daughter so earnestly, that she
acceded. One of the cavaliers then hastened to invite
Teresa, without whom it was impossible for the quadrille to
be formed, but the young girl had disappeared. The truth
was, that Luigi had not felt the strength to support another
such trial, and, half by persuasion and half by force, he
had removed Teresa toward another part of the garden. Teresa
had yielded in spite of herself, but when she looked at the
agitated countenance of the young man, she understood by his
silence and trembling voice that something strange was
passing within him. She herself was not exempt from internal
emotion, and without having done anything wrong, yet fully
comprehended that Luigi was right in reproaching her. Why,
she did not know, but yet she did not the less feel that
these reproaches were merited. However, to Teresa’s great
astonishment, Luigi remained mute, and not a word escaped
his lips the rest of the evening. When the chill of the
night had driven away the guests from the gardens, and the
gates of the villa were closed on them for the festa
in-doors, he took Teresa quite away, and as he left her at
her home, he said, —

“`Teresa, what were you thinking of as you danced opposite
the young Countess of San-Felice?’ — `I thought,’ replied
the young girl, with all the frankness of her nature, `that
I would give half my life for a costume such as she wore.’

“`And what said your cavalier to you?’ — `He said it only
depended on myself to have it, and I had only one word to
say.’

“`He was right,’ said Luigi. `Do you desire it as ardently
as you say?’ — `Yes.’ — `Well, then, you shall have it!’

“The young girl, much astonished, raised her head to look at
him, but his face was so gloomy and terrible that her words
froze to her lips. As Luigi spoke thus, he left her. Teresa
followed him with her eyes into the darkness as long as she
could, and when he had quite disappeared, she went into the
house with a sigh.

“That night a memorable event occurred, due, no doubt, to
the imprudence of some servant who had neglected to
extinguish the lights. The Villa of San-Felice took fire in
the rooms adjoining the very apartment of the lovely
Carmela. Awakened in the night by the light of the flames,
she sprang out of bed, wrapped herself in a dressing-gown,
and attempted to escape by the door, but the corridor by
which she hoped to fly was already a prey to the flames. She
then returned to her room, calling for help as loudly as she
could, when suddenly her window, which was twenty feet from
the ground, was opened, a young peasant jumped into the
chamber, seized her in his arms, and with superhuman skill
and strength conveyed her to the turf of the grass-plot,
where she fainted. When she recovered, her father was by her
side. All the servants surrounded her, offering her
assistance. An entire wing of the villa was burnt down; but
what of that, as long as Carmela was safe and uninjured? Her
preserver was everywhere sought for, but he did not appear;
he was inquired after, but no one had seen him. Carmela was
greatly troubled that she had not recognized him. As the
count was immensely rich, excepting the danger Carmela had
run, — and the marvellous manner in which she had escaped,
made that appear to him rather a favor of providence than a
real misfortune, — the loss occasioned by the conflagration
was to him but a trifle.

“The next day, at the usual hour, the two young peasants
were on the borders of the forest. Luigi arrived first. He
came toward Teresa in high spirits, and seemed to have
completely forgotten the events of the previous evening. The
young girl was very pensive, but seeing Luigi so cheerful,
she on her part assumed a smiling air, which was natural to
her when she was not excited or in a passion. Luigi took her
arm beneath his own, and led her to the door of the grotto.
Then he paused. The young girl, perceiving that there was
something extraordinary, looked at him steadfastly.
`Teresa,’ said Luigi, `yesterday evening you told me you
would give all the world to have a costume similar to that
of the count’s daughter.’ — `Yes,’ replied Teresa with
astonishment; `but I was mad to utter such a wish.’ — `And
I replied, “Very well, you shall have it.”‘ — `Yes,’
replied the young girl, whose astonishment increased at
every word uttered by Luigi, `but of course your reply was
only to please me.’

“`I have promised no more than I have given you, Teresa,’
said Luigi proudly. `Go into the grotto and dress yourself.’
At these words he drew away the stone, and showed Teresa the
grotto, lighted up by two wax lights, which burnt on each
side of a splendid mirror; on a rustic table, made by Luigi,
were spread out the pearl necklace and the diamond pins, and
on a chair at the side was laid the rest of the costume.

“Teresa uttered a cry of joy, and, without inquiring whence
this attire came, or even thanking Luigi, darted into the
grotto, transformed into a dressing-room. Luigi pushed the
stone behind her, for on the crest of a small adjacent hill
which cut off the view toward Palestrina, he saw a traveller
on horseback, stopping a moment, as if uncertain of his
road, and thus presenting against the blue sky that perfect
outline which is peculiar to distant objects in southern
climes. When he saw Luigi, he put his horse into a gallop
and advanced toward him. Luigi was not mistaken. The
traveller, who was going from Palestrina to Tivoli, had
mistaken his way; the young man directed him; but as at a
distance of a quarter of a mile the road again divided into
three ways, and on reaching these the traveller might again
stray from his route, he begged Luigi to be his guide. Luigi
threw his cloak on the ground, placed his carbine on his
shoulder, and freed from his heavy covering, preceded the
traveller with the rapid step of a mountaineer, which a
horse can scarcely keep up with. In ten minutes Luigi and
the traveller reached the cross-roads. On arriving there,
with an air as majestic as that of an emperor, he stretched
his hand towards that one of the roads which the traveller
was to follow. — “That is your road, excellency, and now
you cannot again mistake.’ — `And here is your recompense,’
said the traveller, offering the young herdsman some small
pieces of money.

“`Thank you,’ said Luigi, drawing back his hand; `I render a
service, I do not sell it.’ — `Well,’ replied the
traveller, who seemed used to this difference between the
servility of a man of the cities and the pride of the
mountaineer, `if you refuse wages, you will, perhaps, accept
a gift.’ — `Ah, yes, that is another thing.’ — `Then,’
said the traveller, `take these two Venetian sequins and
give them to your bride, to make herself a pair of
earrings.’

“`And then do you take this poniard,’ said the young
herdsman; `you will not find one better carved between
Albano and Civita-Castellana.’

“`I accept it,’ answered the traveller, `but then the
obligation will be on my side, for this poniard is worth
more than two sequins.’ — `For a dealer perhaps; but for
me, who engraved it myself, it is hardly worth a piastre.’

“`What is your name?’ inquired the traveller. — `Luigi
Vampa,’ replied the shepherd, with the same air as he would
have replied, Alexander, King of Macedon. — `And yours?’ —
`I,’ said the traveller, `am called Sinbad the Sailor.'”
Franz d’Epinay started with surprise.

“Sinbad the Sailor.” he said.

“Yes,” replied the narrator; “that was the name which the
traveller gave to Vampa as his own.”

“Well, and what may you have to say against this name?”
inquired Albert; “it is a very pretty name, and the
adventures of the gentleman of that name amused me very much
in my youth, I must confess.” — Franz said no more. The
name of Sinbad the Sailor, as may well be supposed, awakened
in him a world of recollections, as had the name of the
Count of Monte Cristo on the previous evening.

“Proceed!” said he to the host.

“Vampa put the two sequins haughtily into his pocket, and
slowly returned by the way he had gone. As he came within
two or three hundred paces of the grotto, he thought he
heard a cry. He listened to know whence this sound could
proceed. A moment afterwards he thought he heard his own
name pronounced distinctly. The cry proceeded from the
grotto. He bounded like a chamois, cocking his carbine as he
went, and in a moment reached the summit of a hill opposite
to that on which he had perceived the traveller. Three cries
for help came more distinctly to his ear. He cast his eyes
around him and saw a man carrying off Teresa, as Nessus, the
centaur, carried Dejanira. This man, who was hastening
towards the wood, was already three-quarters of the way on
the road from the grotto to the forest. Vampa measured the
distance; the man was at least two hundred paces in advance
of him, and there was not a chance of overtaking him. The
young shepherd stopped, as if his feet had been rooted to
the ground; then he put the butt of his carbine to his
shoulder, took aim at the ravisher, followed him for a
second in his track, and then fired. The ravisher stopped
suddenly, his knees bent under him, and he fell with Teresa
in his arms. The young girl rose instantly, but the man lay
on the earth struggling in the agonies of death. Vampa then
rushed towards Teresa; for at ten paces from the dying man
her legs had failed her, and she had dropped on her knees,
so that the young man feared that the ball that had brought
down his enemy, had also wounded his betrothed. Fortunately,
she was unscathed, and it was fright alone that had overcome
Teresa. When Luigi had assured himself that she was safe and
unharmed, he turned towards the wounded man. He had just
expired, with clinched hands, his mouth in a spasm of agony,
and his hair on end in the sweat of death. His eyes remained
open and menacing. Vampa approached the corpse, and
recognized Cucumetto. From the day on which the bandit had
been saved by the two young peasants, he had been enamoured
of Teresa, and had sworn she should be his. From that time
he had watched them, and profiting by the moment when her
lover had left her alone, had carried her off, and believed
he at length had her in his power, when the ball, directed
by the unerring skill of the young herdsman, had pierced his
heart. Vampa gazed on him for a moment without betraying the
slightest emotion; while, on the contrary, Teresa,
shuddering in every limb, dared not approach the slain
ruffian but by degrees, and threw a hesitating glance at the
dead body over the shoulder of her lover. Suddenly Vampa
turned toward his mistress: — `Ah,’ said he — `good, good!
You are dressed; it is now my turn to dress myself.’

“Teresa was clothed from head to foot in the garb of the
Count of San-Felice’s daughter. Vampa took Cucumetto’s body
in his arms and conveyed it to the grotto, while in her turn
Teresa remained outside. If a second traveller had passed,
he would have seen a strange thing, — a shepherdess
watching her flock, clad in a cashmere grown, with ear-rings
and necklace of pearls, diamond pins, and buttons of
sapphires, emeralds, and rubies. He would, no doubt, have
believed that he had returned to the times of Florian, and
would have declared, on reaching Paris, that he had met an
Alpine shepherdess seated at the foot of the Sabine Hill. At
the end of a quarter of an hour Vampa quitted the grotto;
his costume was no less elegant than that of Teresa. He wore
a vest of garnet-colored velvet, with buttons of cut gold; a
silk waistcoat covered with embroidery; a Roman scarf tied
round his neck; a cartridge-box worked with gold, and red
and green silk; sky-blue velvet breeches, fastened above the
knee with diamond buckles; garters of deerskin, worked with
a thousand arabesques, and a hat whereon hung ribbons of all
colors; two watches hung from his girdle, and a splendid
poniard was in his belt. Teresa uttered a cry of admiration.
Vampa in this attire resembled a painting by Leopold Robert,
or Schnetz. He had assumed the entire costume of Cucumetto.
The young man saw the effect produced on his betrothed, and
a smile of pride passed over his lips. — `Now,’ he said to
Teresa, `are you ready to share my fortune, whatever it may
be?’ — `Oh, yes!’ exclaimed the young girl
enthusiastically. — `And follow me wherever I go?’ — `To
the world’s end.’ — `Then take my arm, and let us on; we
have no time to lose.’ — The young girl did so without
questioning her lover as to where he was conducting her, for
he appeared to her at this moment as handsome, proud, and
powerful as a god. They went towards the forest, and soon
entered it. We need scarcely say that all the paths of the
mountain were known to Vampa; he therefore went forward
without a moment’s hesitation, although there was no beaten
track, but he knew his path by looking at the trees and
bushes, and thus they kept on advancing for nearly an hour
and a half. At the end of this time they had reached the
thickest of the forest. A torrent, whose bed was dry, led
into a deep gorge. Vampa took this wild road, which,
enclosed between two ridges, and shadowed by the tufted
umbrage of the pines, seemed, but for the difficulties of
its descent, that path to Avernus of which Virgil speaks.
Teresa had become alarmed at the wild and deserted look of
the plain around her, and pressed closely against her guide,
not uttering a syllable; but as she saw him advance with
even step and composed countenance, she endeavored to
repress her emotion. Suddenly, about ten paces from them, a
man advanced from behind a tree and aimed at Vampa. — `Not
another step,’ he said, `or you are a dead man.’ — `What,
then,’ said Vampa, raising his hand with a gesture of
disdain, while Teresa, no longer able to restrain her alarm,
clung closely to him, `do wolves rend each other?’ — `Who
are you?’ inquired the sentinel. — `I am Luigi Vampa,
shepherd of the San-Felice farm.’ — `What do you want?’ —
`I would speak with your companions who are in the glade at
Rocca Bianca.’ — `Follow me, then,’ said the sentinel; `or,
as you know your way, go first.’ — Vampa smiled
disdainfully at this precaution on the part of the bandit,
went before Teresa, and continued to advance with the same
firm and easy step as before. At the end of ten minutes the
bandit made them a sign to stop. The two young persons
obeyed. Then the bandit thrice imitated the cry of a crow; a
croak answered this signal. — `Good!’ said the sentry, `you
may now go on.’ — Luigi and Teresa again set forward; as
they went on Teresa clung tremblingly to her lover at the
sight of weapons and the glistening of carbines through the
trees. The retreat of Rocca Bianca was at the top of a small
mountain, which no doubt in former days had been a volcano
— an extinct volcano before the days when Remus and Romulus
had deserted Alba to come and found the city of Rome. Teresa
and Luigi reached the summit, and all at once found
themselves in the presence of twenty bandits. `Here is a
young man who seeks and wishes to speak to you,’ said the
sentinel. — `What has he to say?’ inquired the young man
who was in command in the chief’s absence. — `I wish to say
that I am tired of a shepherd’s life,’ was Vampa’s reply. —
`Ah, I understand,’ said the lieutenant; `and you seek
admittance into our ranks?’ — `Welcome!’ cried several
bandits from Ferrusino, Pampinara, and Anagni, who had
recognized Luigi Vampa. — `Yes, but I came to ask something
more than to be your companion.’ — `And what may that be?’
inquired the bandits with astonishment. — `I come to ask to
be your captain,’ said the young man. The bandits shouted
with laughter. `And what have you done to aspire to this
honor?’ demanded the lieutenant. — `I have killed your
chief, Cucumetto, whose dress I now wear; and I set fire to
the villa San-Felice to procure a wedding-dress for my
betrothed.’ An hour afterwards Luigi Vampa was chosen
captain, vice Cucumetto deceased.”

“Well, my dear Albert,” said Franz, turning towards his
friend; “what think you of citizen Luigi Vampa?”

“I say he is a myth,” replied Albert, “and never had an
existence.”

“And what may a myth be?” inquired Pastrini.

“The explanation would be too long, my dear landlord,”
replied Franz.

“And you say that Signor Vampa exercises his profession at
this moment in the environs of Rome?”

“And with a boldness of which no bandit before him ever gave
an example.”

“Then the police have vainly tried to lay hands on him?”

“Why, you see, he has a good understanding with the
shepherds in the plains, the fishermen of the Tiber, and the
smugglers of the coast. They seek for him in the mountains,
and he is on the waters; they follow him on the waters, and
he is on the open sea; then they pursue him, and he has
suddenly taken refuge in the islands, at Giglio, Guanouti,
or Monte Cristo; and when they hunt for him there, he
reappears suddenly at Albano, Tivoli, or La Riccia.”

“And how does he behave towards travellers?”

“Alas! his plan is very simple. It depends on the distance
he may be from the city, whether he gives eight hours,
twelve hours, or a day wherein to pay their ransom; and when
that time has elapsed he allows another hour’s grace. At the
sixtieth minute of this hour, if the money is not
forthcoming, he blows out the prisoner’s brains with a
pistol-shot, or plants his dagger in his heart, and that
settles the account.”

“Well, Albert,” inquired Franz of his companion, “are you
still disposed to go to the Colosseum by the outer wall?”

“Quite so,” said Albert, “if the way be picturesque.” The
clock struck nine as the door opened, and a coachman
appeared. “Excellencies,” said he, “the coach is ready.”

“Well, then,” said Franz, “let us to the Colosseum.”

“By the Porta del Popolo or by the streets, your
excellencies?”

“By the streets, morbleu, by the streets!” cried Franz.

“Ah, my dear fellow,” said Albert, rising, and lighting his
third cigar, “really, I thought you had more courage.” So
saying, the two young men went down the staircase, and got
into the carriage.

Franz had so managed his route, that during the ride to the
Colosseum they passed not a single ancient ruin, so that no
preliminary impression interfered to mitigate the colossal
proportions of the gigantic building they came to admire.
The road selected was a continuation of the Via Sistina;
then by cutting off the right angle of the street in which
stands Santa Maria Maggiore and proceeding by the Via Urbana
and San Pietro in Vincoli, the travellers would find
themselves directly opposite the Colosseum. This itinerary
possessed another great advantage, — that of leaving Franz
at full liberty to indulge his deep reverie upon the subject
of Signor Pastrini’s story, in which his mysterious host of
Monte Cristo was so strangely mixed up. Seated with folded
arms in a corner of the carriage, he continued to ponder
over the singular history he had so lately listened to, and
to ask himself an interminable number of questions touching
its various circumstances without, however, arriving at a
satisfactory reply to any of them. One fact more than the
rest brought his friend “Sinbad the Sailor” back to his
recollection, and that was the mysterious sort of intimacy
that seemed to exist between the brigands and the sailors;
and Pastrini’s account of Vampa’s having found refuge on
board the vessels of smugglers and fishermen, reminded Franz
of the two Corsican bandits he had found supping so amicably
with the crew of the little yacht, which had even deviated
from its course and touched at Porto-Vecchio for the sole
purpose of landing them. The very name assumed by his host
of Monte Cristo and again repeated by the landlord of the
Hotel de Londres, abundantly proved to him that his island
friend was playing his philanthropic part on the shores of
Piombino, Civita-Vecchio, Ostia, and Gaeta, as on those of
Corsica, Tuscany, and Spain; and further, Franz bethought
him of having heard his singular entertainer speak both of
Tunis and Palermo, proving thereby how largely his circle of
acquaintances extended.

But however the mind of the young man might be absorbed in
these reflections, they were at once dispersed at the sight
of the dark frowning ruins of the stupendous Colosseum,
through the various openings of which the pale moonlight
played and flickered like the unearthly gleam from the eyes
of the wandering dead. The carriage stopped near the Meta
Sudans; the door was opened, and the young men, eagerly
alighting, found themselves opposite a cicerone, who
appeared to have sprung up from the ground, so unexpected
was his appearance.

The usual guide from the hotel having followed them, they
had paid two conductors, nor is it possible, at Rome, to
avoid this abundant supply of guides; besides the ordinary
cicerone, who seizes upon you directly you set foot in your
hotel, and never quits you while you remain in the city,
there is also a special cicerone belonging to each monument
— nay, almost to each part of a monument. It may,
therefore, be easily imagined there is no scarcity of guides
at the Colosseum, that wonder of all ages, which Martial
thus eulogizes: “Let Memphis cease to boast the barbarous
miracles of her pyramids, and the wonders of Babylon be
talked of no more among us; all must bow to the superiority
of the gigantic labor of the Caesars, and the many voices of
Fame spread far and wide the surpassing merits of this
incomparable monument.”

As for Albert and Franz, they essayed not to escape from
their ciceronian tyrants; and, indeed, it would have been so
much the more difficult to break their bondage, as the
guides alone are permitted to visit these monuments with
torches in their hands. Thus, then, the young men made no
attempt at resistance, but blindly and confidingly
surrendered themselves into the care and custody of their
conductors. Albert had already made seven or eight similar
excursions to the Colosseum, while his less favored
companion trod for the first time in his life the classic
ground forming the monument of Flavius Vespasian; and, to
his credit be it spoken, his mind, even amid the glib
loquacity of the guides, was duly and deeply touched with
awe and enthusiastic admiration of all he saw; and certainly
no adequate notion of these stupendous ruins can be formed
save by such as have visited them, and more especially by
moonlight, at which time the vast proportions of the
building appear twice as large when viewed by the mysterious
beams of a southern moonlit sky, whose rays are sufficiently
clear and vivid to light the horizon with a glow equal to
the soft twilight of an eastern clime. Scarcely, therefore,
had the reflective Franz walked a hundred steps beneath the
interior porticoes of the ruin, than, abandoning Albert to
the guides (who would by no means yield their prescriptive
right of carrying their victims through the routine
regularly laid down, and as regularly followed by them, but
dragged the unconscious visitor to the various objects with
a pertinacity that admitted of no appeal, beginning, as a
matter of course, with the Lions’ Den, and finishing with
Caesar’s “Podium,”), to escape a jargon and mechanical
survey of the wonders by which he was surrounded, Franz
ascended a half-dilapidated staircase, and, leaving them to
follow their monotonous round, seated himself at the foot of
a column, and immediately opposite a large aperture, which
permitted him to enjoy a full and undisturbed view of the
gigantic dimensions of the majestic ruin.

Franz had remained for nearly a quarter of an hour perfectly
hidden by the shadow of the vast column at whose base he had
found a resting-place, and from whence his eyes followed the
motions of Albert and his guides, who, holding torches in
their hands, had emerged from a vomitarium at the opposite
extremity of the Colosseum, and then again disappeared down
the steps conducting to the seats reserved for the Vestal
virgins, resembling, as they glided along, some restless
shades following the flickering glare of so many
ignes-fatui. All at once his ear caught a sound resembling
that of a stone rolling down the staircase opposite the one
by which he had himself ascended. There was nothing
remarkable in the circumstance of a fragment of granite
giving way and falling heavily below; but it seemed to him
that the substance that fell gave way beneath the pressure
of a foot, and also that some one, who endeavored as much as
possible to prevent his footsteps from being heard, was
approaching the spot where he sat. Conjecture soon became
certainty, for the figure of a man was distinctly visible to
Franz, gradually emerging from the staircase opposite, upon
which the moon was at that moment pouring a full tide of
silvery brightness.

The stranger thus presenting himself was probably a person
who, like Franz, preferred the enjoyment of solitude and his
own thoughts to the frivolous gabble of the guides. And his
appearance had nothing extraordinary in it; but the
hesitation with which he proceeded, stopping and listening
with anxious attention at every step he took, convinced
Franz that he expected the arrival of some person. By a sort
of instinctive impulse, Franz withdrew as much as possible
behind his pillar. About ten feet from the spot where he and
the stranger were, the roof had given way, leaving a large
round opening, through which might be seen the blue vault of
heaven, thickly studded with stars. Around this opening,
which had, possibly, for ages permitted a free entrance to
the brilliant moonbeams that now illumined the vast pile,
grew a quantity of creeping plants, whose delicate green
branches stood out in bold relief against the clear azure of
the firmament, while large masses of thick, strong fibrous
shoots forced their way through the chasm, and hung floating
to and fro, like so many waving strings. The person whose
mysterious arrival had attracted the attention of Franz
stood in a kind of half-light, that rendered it impossible
to distinguish his features, although his dress was easily
made out. He wore a large brown mantle, one fold of which,
thrown over his left shoulder, served likewise to mask the
lower part of his countenance, while the upper part was
completely hidden by his broad-brimmed hat. The lower part
of his dress was more distinctly visible by the bright rays
of the moon, which, entering through the broken ceiling,
shed their refulgent beams on feet cased in elegantly made
boots of polished leather, over which descended fashionably
cut trousers of black cloth.

From the imperfect means Franz had of judging, he could only
come to one conclusion, — that the person whom he was thus
watching certainly belonged to no inferior station of life.
Some few minutes had elapsed, and the stranger began to show
manifest signs of impatience, when a slight noise was heard
outside the aperture in the roof, and almost immediately a
dark shadow seemed to obstruct the flood of light that had
entered it, and the figure of a man was clearly seen gazing
with eager scrutiny on the immense space beneath him; then,
as his eye caught sight of him in the mantle, he grasped a
floating mass of thickly matted boughs, and glided down by
their help to within three or four feet of the ground, and
then leaped lightly on his feet. The man who had performed
this daring act with so much indifference wore the
Transtevere costume. “I beg your excellency’s pardon for
keeping you waiting,” said the man, in the Roman dialect,
“but I don’t think I’m many minutes after my time, ten
o’clock his just struck on the Lateran.”

“Say not a word about being late,” replied the stranger in
purest Tuscan; “’tis I who am too soon. But even if you had
caused me to wait a little while, I should have felt quite
sure that the delay was not occasioned by any fault of
yours.”

“Your excellency is perfectly right in so thinking,” said
the man; “I came here direct from the Castle of St. Angelo,
and I had an immense deal of trouble before I could get a
chance to speak to Beppo.”

“And who is Beppo?”

“Oh, Beppo is employed in the prison, and I give him so much
a year to let me know what is going on within his holiness’s
castle.”

“Indeed! You are a provident person, I see.”

“Why, you see, no one knows what may happen. Perhaps some of
these days I may be entrapped, like poor Peppino and may be
very glad to have some little nibbling mouse to gnaw the
meshes of my net, and so help me out of prison.”

“Briefly, what did you glean?”

“That two executions of considerable interest will take
place the day after to-morrow at two o’clock, as is
customary at Rome at the commencement of all great
festivals. One of the culprits will be mazzolato;* he is an
atrocious villain, who murdered the priest who brought him
up, and deserves not the smallest pity. The other sufferer
is sentenced to be decapitato;** and he, your excellency, is
poor Peppino.”

* Knocked on the head.
** Beheaded.

“The fact is, that you have inspired not only the pontifical
government, but also the neighboring states, with such
extreme fear, that they are glad of all opportunity of
making an example.”

“But Peppino did not even belong to my band: he was merely a
poor shepherd, whose only crime consisted in furnishing us
with provisions.”

“Which makes him your accomplice to all intents and
purposes. But mark the distinction with which he is treated;
instead of being knocked on the head as you would be if once
they caught hold of you, he is simply sentenced to be
guillotined, by which means, too, the amusements of the day
are diversified, and there is a spectacle to please every
spectator.”

“Without reckoning the wholly unexpected one I am preparing
to surprise them with.”

“My good friend,” said the man in the cloak, “excuse me for
saying that you seem to me precisely in the mood to commit
some wild or extravagant act.”

“Perhaps I am; but one thing I have resolved on, and that
is, to stop at nothing to restore a poor devil to liberty,
who has got into this scrape solely from having served me. I
should hate and despise myself as a coward did I desert the
brave fellow in his present extremity.”

“And what do you mean to do?”

“To surround the scaffold with twenty of my best men, who,
at a signal from me, will rush forward directly Peppino is
brought for execution, and, by the assistance of their
stilettos, drive back the guard, and carry off the
prisoner.”

“That seems to me as hazardous as uncertain, and convinces
me that my scheme is far better than yours.”

“And what is your excellency’s project?”

“Just this. I will so advantageously bestow 2,000 piastres,
that the person receiving them shall obtain a respite till
next year for Peppino; and during that year, another
skilfully placed 1,000 piastres will afford him the means of
escaping from his prison.”

“And do you feel sure of succeeding?”

“Pardieu!” exclaimed the man in the cloak, suddenly
expressing himself in French.

“What did your excellency say?” inquired the other.

“I said, my good fellow, that I would do more single-handed
by the means of gold than you and all your troop could
effect with stilettos, pistols, carbines, and blunderbusses
included. Leave me, then, to act, and have no fears for the
result.”

“At least, there can be no harm in myself and party being in
readiness, in case your excellency should fail.”

“None whatever. Take what precautions you please, if it is
any satisfaction to you to do so; but rely upon my obtaining
the reprieve I seek.”

“Remember, the execution is fixed for the day after
tomorrow, and that you have but one day to work in.”

“And what of that? Is not a day divided into twenty-four
hours, each hour into sixty minutes, and every minute
sub-divided into sixty seconds? Now in 86,400 seconds very
many things can be done.”

“And how shall I know whether your excellency has succeeded
or not.”

“Oh, that is very easily arranged. I have engaged the three
lower windows at the Cafe Rospoli; should I have obtained
the requisite pardon for Peppino, the two outside windows
will be hung with yellow damasks, and the centre with white,
having a large cross in red marked on it.”

“And whom will you employ to carry the reprieve to the
officer directing the execution?”

“Send one of your men, disguised as a penitent friar, and I
will give it to him. His dress will procure him the means of
approaching the scaffold itself, and he will deliver the
official order to the officer, who, in his turn, will hand
it to the executioner; in the meantime, it will be as well
to acquaint Peppino with what we have determined on, if it
be only to prevent his dying of fear or losing his senses,
because in either case a very useless expense will have been
incurred.”

“Your excellency,” said the man, “you are fully persuaded of
my entire devotion to you, are you not?”

“Nay, I flatter myself that there can be no doubt of it,”
replied the cavalier in the cloak.

“Well, then, only fulfil your promise of rescuing Peppino,
and henceforward you shall receive not only devotion, but
the most absolute obedience from myself and those under me
that one human being can render to another.”

“Have a care how far you pledge yourself, my good friend,
for I may remind you of your promise at some, perhaps, not
very distant period, when I, in my turn, may require your
aid and influence.”

“Let that day come sooner or later, your excellency will
find me what I have found you in this my heavy trouble; and
if from the other end of the world you but write me word to
do such or such a thing, you may regard it as done, for done
it shall be, on the word and faith of” —

“Hush!” interrupted the stranger; “I hear a noise.”

“‘Tis some travellers, who are visiting the Colosseum by
torchlight.”

“‘Twere better we should not be seen together; those guides
are nothing but spies, and might possibly recognize you;
and, however I may be honored by your friendship, my worthy
friend, if once the extent of our intimacy were known, I am
sadly afraid both my reputation and credit would suffer
thereby.”

“Well, then, if you obtain the reprieve?”

“The middle window at the Cafe Rospoli will be hung with
white damask, bearing a red cross.”

“And if you fail?”

“Then all three windows will have yellow draperies.”

“And then?”

“And then, my good fellow, use your daggers in any way you
please, and I further promise you to be there as a spectator
of your prowess.”

“We understand each other perfectly, then. Adieu, your
excellency; depend upon me as firmly as I do upon you.”

Saying these words, the Transteverin disappeared down the
staircase, while his companion, muffling his features more
closely than before in the folds of his mantle, passed
almost close to Franz, and descended to the arena by an
outward flight of steps. The next minute Franz heard himself
called by Albert, who made the lofty building re-echo with
the sound of his friend’s name. Franz, however, did not obey
the summons till he had satisfied himself that the two men
whose conversation he had overheard were at a sufficient
distance to prevent his encountering them in his descent. In
ten minutes after the strangers had departed, Franz was on
the road to the Piazza de Spagni, listening with studied
indifference to the learned dissertation delivered by
Albert, after the manner of Pliny and Calpurnius, touching
the iron-pointed nets used to prevent the ferocious beasts
from springing on the spectators. Franz let him proceed
without interruption, and, in fact, did not hear what was
said; he longed to be alone, and free to ponder over all
that had occurred. One of the two men, whose mysterious
meeting in the Colosseum he had so unintentionally
witnessed, was an entire stranger to him, but not so the
other; and though Franz had been unable to distinguish his
features, from his being either wrapped in his mantle or
obscured by the shadow, the tones of his voice had made too
powerful an impression on him the first time he had heard
them for him ever again to forget them, hear them when or
where he might. It was more especially when this man was
speaking in a manner half jesting, half bitter, that Franz’s
ear recalled most vividly the deep sonorous, yet
well-pitched voice that had addressed him in the grotto of
Monte Cristo, and which he heard for the second time amid
the darkness and ruined grandeur of the Colosseum. And the
more he thought, the more entire was his conviction, that
the person who wore the mantle was no other than his former
host and entertainer, “Sinbad the Sailor.”

Under any other circumstances, Franz would have found it
impossible to resist his extreme curiosity to know more of
so singular a personage, and with that intent have sought to
renew their short acquaintance; but in the present instance,
the confidential nature of the conversation he had overheard
made him, with propriety, judge that his appearance at such
a time would be anything but agreeable. As we have seen,
therefore, he permitted his former host to retire without
attempting a recognition, but fully promising himself a rich
indemnity for his present forbearance should chance afford
him another opportunity. In vain did Franz endeavor to
forget the many perplexing thoughts which assailed him; in
vain did he court the refreshment of sleep. Slumber refused
to visit his eyelids and the night was passed in feverish
contemplation of the chain of circumstances tending to prove
the identity of the mysterious visitant to the Colosseum
with the inhabitant of the grotto of Monte Cristo; and the
more he thought, the firmer grew his opinion on the subject.
Worn out at length, he fell asleep at daybreak, and did not
awake till late. Like a genuine Frenchman, Albert had
employed his time in arranging for the evening’s diversion;
he had sent to engage a box at the Teatro Argentino; and
Franz, having a number of letters to write, relinquished the
carriage to Albert for the whole of the day. At five o’clock
Albert returned, delighted with his day’s work; he had been
occupied in leaving his letters of introduction, and had
received in return more invitations to balls and routs than
it would be possible for him to accept; besides this, he had
seen (as he called it) all the remarkable sights at Rome.
Yes, in a single day he had accomplished what his more
serious-minded companion would have taken weeks to effect.
Neither had he neglected to ascertain the name of the piece
to be played that night at the Teatro Argentino, and also
what performers appeared in it.

The opera of “Parisina” was announced for representation,
and the principal actors were Coselli, Moriani, and La
Specchia. The young men, therefore, had reason to consider
themselves fortunate in having the opportunity of hearing
one of the best works by the composer of “Lucia di
Lammermoor,” supported by three of the most renowned
vocalists of Italy. Albert had never been able to endure the
Italian theatres, with their orchestras from which it is
impossible to see, and the absence of balconies, or open
boxes; all these defects pressed hard on a man who had had
his stall at the Bouffes, and had shared a lower box at the
Opera. Still, in spite of this, Albert displayed his most
dazzling and effective costumes each time he visited the
theatres; but, alas, his elegant toilet was wholly thrown
away, and one of the most worthy representatives of Parisian
fashion had to carry with him the mortifying reflection that
he had nearly overrun Italy without meeting with a single
adventure.

Sometimes Albert would affect to make a joke of his want of
success; but internally he was deeply wounded, and his
self-love immensely piqued, to think that Albert de Morcerf,
the most admired and most sought after of any young person
of his day, should thus be passed over, and merely have his
labor for his pains. And the thing was so much the more
annoying, as, according to the characteristic modesty of a
Frenchman, Albert had quitted Paris with the full conviction
that he had only to show himself in Italy to carry all
before him, and that upon his return he should astonish the
Parisian world with the recital of his numerous
love-affairs. Alas, poor Albert! none of those interesting
adventures fell in his way; the lovely Genoese, Florentines,
and Neapolitans were all faithful, if not to their husbands,
at least to their lovers, and thought not of changing even
for the splendid appearance of Albert de Morcerf; and all he
gained was the painful conviction that the ladies of Italy
have this advantage over those of France, that they are
faithful even in their infidelity. Yet he could not restrain
a hope that in Italy, as elsewhere, there might be an
exception to the general rule. Albert, besides being an
elegant, well-looking young man, was also possessed of
considerable talent and ability; moreover, he was a viscount
— a recently created one, certainly, but in the present day
it is not necessary to go as far back as Noah in tracing a
descent, and a genealogical tree is equally estimated,
whether dated from 1399 or merely 1815; but to crown all
these advantages, Albert de Morcerf commanded an income of
50,000 livres, a more than sufficient sum to render him a
personage of considerable importance in Paris. It was
therefore no small mortification to him to have visited most
of the principal cities in Italy without having excited the
most trifling observation. Albert, however, hoped to
indemnify himself for all these slights and indifferences
during the Carnival, knowing full well that among the
different states and kingdoms in which this festivity is
celebrated, Rome is the spot where even the wisest and
gravest throw off the usual rigidity of their lives, and
deign to mingle in the follies of this time of liberty and
relaxation.

The Carnival was to commence on the morrow; therefore Albert
had not an instant to lose in setting forth the programme of
his hopes, expectations, and claims to notice. With this
design he had engaged a box in the most conspicuous part of
the theatre, and exerted himself to set off his personal
attractions by the aid of the most rich and elaborate
toilet. The box taken by Albert was in the first circle;
although each of the three tiers of boxes is deemed equally
aristocratic, and is, for this reason, generally styled the
“nobility’s boxes,” and although the box engaged for the two
friends was sufficiently capacious to contain at least a
dozen persons, it had cost less than would be paid at some
of the French theatres for one admitting merely four
occupants. Another motive had influenced Albert’s selection
of his seat, — who knew but that, thus advantageously
placed, he might not in truth attract the notice of some
fair Roman, and an introduction might ensue that would
procure him the offer of a seat in a carriage, or a place in
a princely balcony, from which he might behold the gayeties
of the Carnival? These united considerations made Albert
more lively and anxious to please than he had hitherto been.
Totally disregarding the business of the stage, he leaned
from his box and began attentively scrutinizing the beauty
of each pretty woman, aided by a powerful opera-glass; but,
alas, this attempt to attract notice wholly failed; not even
curiosity had been excited, and it was but too apparent that
the lovely creatures, into whose good graces he was desirous
of stealing, were all so much engrossed with themselves,
their lovers, or their own thoughts, that they had not so
much as noticed him or the manipulation of his glass.

The truth was, that the anticipated pleasures of the
Carnival, with the “holy week” that was to succeed it, so
filled every fair breast, as to prevent the least attention
being bestowed even on the business of the stage. The actors
made their entries and exits unobserved or unthought of; at
certain conventional moments, the spectators would suddenly
cease their conversation, or rouse themselves from their
musings, to listen to some brilliant effort of Moriani’s, a
well-executed recitative by Coselli, or to join in loud
applause at the wonderful powers of La Specchia; but that
momentary excitement over, they quickly relapsed into their
former state of preoccupation or interesting conversation.
Towards the close of the first act, the door of a box which
had been hitherto vacant was opened; a lady entered to whom
Franz had been introduced in Paris, where indeed, he had
imagined she still was. The quick eye of Albert caught the
involuntary start with which his friend beheld the new
arrival, and, turning to him, he said hastily, “Do you know
the woman who has just entered that box?”

“Yes; what do you think of her?”

“Oh, she is perfectly lovely — what a complexion! And such
magnificent hair! Is she French?”

“No; a Venetian.”

“And her name is — “

“Countess G—- .”

“Ah, I know her by name!” exclaimed Albert; “she is said to
possess as much wit and cleverness as beauty. I was to have
been presented to her when I met her at Madame Villefort’s
ball.”

“Shall I assist you in repairing your negligence?” asked
Franz.

“My dear fellow, are you really on such good terms with her
as to venture to take me to her box?”

“Why, I have only had the honor of being in her society and
conversing with her three or four times in my life; but you
know that even such an acquaintance as that might warrant my
doing what you ask.” At that instant, the countess perceived
Franz, and graciously waved her hand to him, to which he
replied by a respectful inclination of the head. “Upon my
word,” said Albert, “you seem to be on excellent terms with
the beautiful countess.”

“You are mistaken in thinking so,” returned Franz calmly;
“but you merely fall into the same error which leads so many
of our countrymen to commit the most egregious blunders, —
I mean that of judging the habits and customs of Italy and
Spain by our Parisian notions; believe me, nothing is more
fallacious than to form any estimate of the degree of
intimacy you may suppose existing among persons by the
familiar terms they seem upon; there is a similarity of
feeling at this instant between ourselves and the countess
— nothing more.”

“Is there, indeed, my good fellow? Pray tell me, is it
sympathy of heart?”

“No; of taste,” continued Franz gravely.

“And in what manner has this congeniality of mind been
evinced?”

“By the countess’s visiting the Colosseum, as we did last
night, by moonlight, and nearly alone.”

“You were with her, then?”

“I was.”

“And what did you say to her?”

“Oh, we talked of the illustrious dead of whom that
magnificent ruin is a glorious monument!”

“Upon my word,” cried Albert, “you must have been a very
entertaining companion alone, or all but alone, with a
beautiful woman in such a place of sentiment as the
Colosseum, and yet to find nothing better a talk about than
the dead! All I can say is, if ever I should get such a
chance, the living should be my theme.”

“And you will probably find your theme ill-chosen.”

“But,” said Albert, breaking in upon his discourse, “never
mind the past; let us only remember the present. Are you not
going to keep your promise of introducing me to the fair
subject of our remarks?”

“Certainly, directly the curtain falls on the stage.”

“What a confounded time this first act takes. I believe, on
my soul, that they never mean to finish it.”

“Oh, yes, they will; only listen to that charming finale.
How exquisitely Coselli sings his part.”

“But what an awkward, inelegant fellow he is.”

“Well, then, what do you say to La Specchia? Did you ever
see anything more perfect than her acting?”

“Why, you know, my dear fellow, when one has been accustomed
to Malibran and Sontag, such singers as these don’t make the
same impression on you they perhaps do on others.”

“At least, you must admire Moriani’s style and execution.”

“I never fancied men of his dark, ponderous appearance
singing with a voice like a woman’s.”

“My good friend,” said Franz, turning to him, while Albert
continued to point his glass at every box in the theatre,
“you seem determined not to approve; you are really too
difficult to please.” The curtain at length fell on the
performances, to the infinite satisfaction of the Viscount
of Morcerf, who seized his hat, rapidly passed his fingers
through his hair, arranged his cravat and wristbands, and
signified to Franz that he was waiting for him to lead the
way. Franz, who had mutely interrogated the countess, and
received from her a gracious smile in token that he would be
welcome, sought not to retard the gratification of Albert’s
eager impatience, but began at once the tour of the house,
closely followed by Albert, who availed himself of the few
minutes required to reach the opposite side of the theatre
to settle the height and smoothness of his collar, and to
arrange the lappets of his coat. This important task was
just completed as they arrived at the countess’s box. At the
knock, the door was immediately opened, and the young man
who was seated beside the countess, in obedience to the
Italian custom, instantly rose and surrendered his place to
the strangers, who, in turn, would be expected to retire
upon the arrival of other visitors.

Franz presented Albert as one of the most distinguished
young men of the day, both as regarded his position in
society and extraordinary talents; nor did he say more than
the truth, for in Paris and the circle in which the viscount
moved, he was looked upon and cited as a model of
perfection. Franz added that his companion, deeply grieved
at having been prevented the honor of being presented to the
countess during her sojourn in Paris, was most anxious to
make up for it, and had requested him (Franz) to remedy the
past misfortune by conducting him to her box, and concluded
by asking pardon for his presumption in having taken it upon
himself to do so. The countess, in reply, bowed gracefully
to Albert, and extended her hand with cordial kindness to
Franz; then, inviting Albert to take the vacant seat beside
her, she recommended Franz to take the next best, if he
wished to view the ballet, and pointed to the one behind her
own chair. Albert was soon deeply engrossed in discoursing
upon Paris and Parisian matters, speaking to the countess of
the various persons they both knew there. Franz perceived
how completely he was in his element; and, unwilling to
interfere with the pleasure he so evidently felt, took up
Albert’s glass, and began in his turn to survey the
audience. Sitting alone, in the front of a box immediately
opposite, but situated on the third row, was a woman of
exquisite beauty, dressed in a Greek costume, which
evidently, from the ease and grace with which she wore it,
was her national attire. Behind her, but in deep shadow, was
the outline of a masculine figure; but the features of this
latter personage it was not possible to distinguish. Franz
could not forbear breaking in upon the apparently
interesting conversation passing between the countess and
Albert, to inquire of the former if she knew who was the
fair Albanian opposite, since beauty such as hers was well
worthy of being observed by either sex. “All I can tell
about her,” replied the countess, “is, that she has been at
Rome since the beginning of the season; for I saw her where
she now sits the very first night of the season, and since
then she has never missed a performance. Sometimes she is
accompanied by the person who is now with her, and at others
she is merely attended by a black servant.”

“And what do you think of her personal appearance?”

“Oh, I consider her perfectly lovely — she is just my idea
of what Medora must have been.”

Franz and the countess exchanged a smile, and then the
latter resumed her conversation with Albert, while Franz
returned to his previous survey of the house and company.
The curtain rose on the ballet, which was one of those
excellent specimens of the Italian school, admirably
arranged and put on the stage by Henri, who has established
for himself a great reputation throughout Italy for his
taste and skill in the choreographic art — one of those
masterly productions of grace, method, and elegance in which
the whole corps de ballet, from the principal dancers to the
humblest supernumerary, are all engaged on the stage at the
same time; and a hundred and fifty persons may be seen
exhibiting the same attitude, or elevating the same arm or
leg with a simultaneous movement, that would lead you to
suppose that but one mind, one act of volition, influenced
the moving mass — the ballet was called “Poliska.” However
much the ballet might have claimed his attention, Franz was
too deeply occupied with the beautiful Greek to take any
note of it; while she seemed to experience an almost
childlike delight in watching it, her eager, animated looks
contrasting strongly with the utter indifference of her
companion, who, during the whole time the piece lasted,
never even moved, not even when the furious, crashing din
produced by the trumpets, cymbals, and Chinese bells sounded
their loudest from the orchestra. Of this he took no heed,
but was, as far as appearances might be trusted, enjoying
soft repose and bright celestial dreams. The ballet at
length came to a close, and the curtain fell amid the loud,
unanimous plaudits of an enthusiastic and delighted
audience.

Owing to the very judicious plan of dividing the two acts of
the opera with a ballet, the pauses between the performances
are very short, the singers in the opera having time to
repose themselves and change their costume, when necessary,
while the dancers are executing their pirouettes and
exhibiting their graceful steps. The overture to the second
act began; and, at the first sound of the leader’s bow
across his violin, Franz observed the sleeper slowly arise
and approach the Greek girl, who turned around to say a few
words to him, and then, leaning forward again on the railing
of her box, she became as absorbed as before in what was
going on. The countenance of the person who had addressed
her remained so completely in the shade, that, though Franz
tried his utmost, he could not distinguish a single feature.
The curtain rose, and the attention of Franz was attracted
by the actors; and his eyes turned from the box containing
the Greek girl and her strange companion to watch the
business of the stage.

Most of my readers are aware that the second act of
“Parisina” opens with the celebrated and effective duet in
which Parisina, while sleeping, betrays to Azzo the secret
of her love for Ugo. The injured husband goes through all
the emotions of jealousy, until conviction seizes on his
mind, and then, in a frenzy of rage and indignation, he
awakens his guilty wife to tell her that he knows her guilt
and to threaten her with his vengeance. This duet is one of
the most beautiful, expressive and terrible conceptions that
has ever emanated from the fruitful pen of Donizetti. Franz
now listened to it for the third time; yet its notes, so
tenderly expressive and fearfully grand as the wretched
husband and wife give vent to their different griefs and
passions, thrilled through the soul of Franz with an effect
equal to his first emotions upon hearing it. Excited beyond
his usual calm demeanor, Franz rose with the audience, and
was about to join the loud, enthusiastic applause that
followed; but suddenly his purpose was arrested, his hands
fell by his sides, and the half-uttered “bravos” expired on
his lips. The occupant of the box in which the Greek girl
sat appeared to share the universal admiration that
prevailed; for he left his seat to stand up in front, so
that, his countenance being fully revealed, Franz had no
difficulty in recognizing him as the mysterious inhabitant
of Monte Cristo, and the very same person he had encountered
the preceding evening in the ruins of the Colosseum, and
whose voice and figure had seemed so familiar to him. All
doubt of his identity was now at an end; his singular host
evidently resided at Rome. The surprise and agitation
occasioned by this full confirmation of Franz’s former
suspicion had no doubt imparted a corresponding expression
to his features; for the countess, after gazing with a
puzzled look at his face, burst into a fit of laughter, and
begged to know what had happened. “Countess,” returned
Franz, totally unheeding her raillery, “I asked you a short
time since if you knew any particulars respecting the
Albanian lady opposite; I must now beseech you to inform me
who and what is her husband?”

“Nay,” answered the countess, “I know no more of him than
yourself.”

“Perhaps you never before noticed him?”

“What a question — so truly French! Do you not know that we
Italians have eyes only for the man we love?”

“True,” replied Franz.

“All I can say is,” continued the countess, taking up the
lorgnette, and directing it toward the box in question,
“that the gentleman, whose history I am unable to furnish,
seems to me as though he had just been dug up; he looks more
like a corpse permitted by some friendly grave-digger to
quit his tomb for a while, and revisit this earth of ours,
than anything human. How ghastly pale he is!”

“Oh, he is always as colorless as you now see him,” said
Franz.

“Then you know him?” almost screamed the countess. “Oh, pray
do, for heaven’s sake, tell us all about — is he a vampire,
or a resuscitated corpse, or what?”

“I fancy I have seen him before; and I even think he
recognizes me.”

“And I can well understand,” said the countess, shrugging up
her beautiful shoulders, as though an involuntary shudder
passed through her veins, “that those who have once seen
that man will never be likely to forget him.” The sensation
experienced by Franz was evidently not peculiar to himself;
another, and wholly uninterested person, felt the same
unaccountable awe and misgiving. “Well.” inquired Franz,
after the countess had a second time directed her lorgnette
at the box, “what do you think of our opposite neighbor?”

“Why, that he is no other than Lord Ruthven himself in a
living form.” This fresh allusion to Byron* drew a smile to
Franz’s countenance; although he could but allow that if
anything was likely to induce belief in the existence of
vampires, it would be the presence of such a man as the
mysterious personage before him.

“I must positively find out who and what he is,” said Franz,
rising from his seat.

“No, no,” cried the countess; “you must not leave me. I
depend upon you to escort me home. Oh, indeed, I cannot
permit you to go.”

* Scott, of course: “The son of an ill-fated sire, and the
father of a yet more unfortunate family, bore in his looks
that cast of inauspicious melancholy by which the
physiognomists of that time pretended to distinguish those
who were predestined to a violent and unhappy death.” — The
Abbot, ch. xxii.

“Is it possible,” whispered Franz, “that you entertain any
fear?”

“I’ll tell you,” answered the countess. “Byron had the most
perfect belief in the existence of vampires, and even
assured me that he had seen them. The description he gave me
perfectly corresponds with the features and character of the
man before us. Oh, he is the exact personification of what I
have been led to expect! The coal-black hair, large bright,
glittering eyes, in which a wild, unearthly fire seems
burning, — the same ghastly paleness. Then observe, too,
that the woman with him is altogether unlike all others of
her sex. She is a foreigner — a stranger. Nobody knows who
she is, or where she comes from. No doubt she belongs to the
same horrible race he does, and is, like himself, a dealer
in magical arts. I entreat of you not to go near him — at
least to-night; and if to-morrow your curiosity still
continues as great, pursue your researches if you will; but
to-night you neither can nor shall. For that purpose I mean
to keep you all to myself.” Franz protested he could not
defer his pursuit till the following day, for many reasons.
“Listen to me,” said the countess, “and do not be so very
headstrong. I am going home. I have a party at my house
to-night, and therefore cannot possibly remain till the end
of the opera. Now, I cannot for one instant believe you so
devoid of gallantry as to refuse a lady your escort when she
even condescends to ask you for it.”

There was nothing else left for Franz to do but to take up
his hat, open the door of the box, and offer the countess
his arm. It was quite evident, by her manner, that her
uneasiness was not feigned; and Franz himself could not
resist a feeling of superstitious dread — so much the
stronger in him, as it arose from a variety of corroborative
recollections, while the terror of the countess sprang from
an instinctive belief, originally created in her mind by the
wild tales she had listened to till she believed them
truths. Franz could even feel her arm tremble as he assisted
her into the carriage. Upon arriving at her hotel, Franz
perceived that she had deceived him when she spoke of
expecting company; on the contrary, her own return before
the appointed hour seemed greatly to astonish the servants.
“Excuse my little subterfuge,” said the countess, in reply
to her companion’s half-reproachful observation on the
subject; “but that horrid man had made me feel quite
uncomfortable, and I longed to be alone, that I might
compose my startled mind.” Franz essayed to smile. “Nay,”
said she, “do not smile; it ill accords with the expression
of your countenance, and I am sure it does not spring from
your heart. However, promise me one thing.”

“What is it?”

“Promise me, I say.”

“I will do anything you desire, except relinquish my
determination of finding out who this man is. I have more
reasons than you can imagine for desiring to know who he is,
from whence he came, and whither he is going.”

“Where he comes from I am ignorant; but I can readily tell
you where he is going to, and that is down below, without
the least doubt.”

“Let us only speak of the promise you wished me to make,”
said Franz.

“Well, then, you must give me your word to return
immediately to your hotel, and make no attempt to follow
this man to-night. There are certain affinities between the
persons we quit and those we meet afterwards. For heaven’s
sake, do not serve as a conductor between that man and me.
Pursue your chase after him to-morrow as eagerly as you
please; but never bring him near me, if you would not see me
die of terror. And now, good-night; go to your rooms, and
try to sleep away all recollections of this evening. For my
own part, I am quite sure I shall not be able to close my
eyes.” So saying, the countess quitted Franz, leaving him
unable to decide whether she were merely amusing herself at
his expense, or whether her fears and agitations were
genuine.

Upon his return to the hotel, Franz found Albert in his
dressing-gown and slippers, listlessly extended on a sofa,
smoking a cigar. “My dear fellow.” cried he, springing up,
“is it really you? Why, I did not expect to see you before
to-morrow.”

“My dear Albert,” replied Franz, “I am glad of this
opportunity to tell you, once and forever, that you
entertain a most erroneous notion concerning Italian women.
I should have thought the continual failures you have met
with in all your own love affairs might have taught you
better by this time.”

“Upon my soul, these women would puzzle the very Devil to
read them aright. Why, here — they give you their hand —
they press yours in return — they keep up a whispering
conversation — permit you to accompany them home. Why, if a
Parisian were to indulge in a quarter of these marks of
flattering attention, her reputation would be gone forever.”

“And the very reason why the women of this fine country put
so little restraint on their words and actions, is because
they live so much in public, and have really nothing to
conceal. Besides, you must have perceived that the countess
was really alarmed.”

“At what? At the sight of that respectable gentleman sitting
opposite to us in the same box with the lovely Greek girl?
Now, for my part, I met them in the lobby after the
conclusion of the piece; and hang me, if I can guess where
you took your notions of the other world from. I can assure
you that this hobgoblin of yours is a deuced fine-looking
fellow — admirably dressed. Indeed, I feel quite sure, from
the cut of his clothes, they are made by a first-rate Paris
tailor — probably Blin or Humann. He was rather too pale,
certainly; but then, you know, paleness is always looked
upon as a strong proof of aristocratic descent and
distinguished breeding.” Franz smiled; for he well
remembered that Albert particularly prided himself on the
entire absence of color in his own complexion.

“Well, that tends to confirm my own ideas,” said Franz,
“that the countess’s suspicions were destitute alike of
sense and reason. Did he speak in your hearing? and did you
catch any of his words?”

“I did; but they were uttered in the Romaic dialect. I knew
that from the mixture of Greek words. I don’t know whether I
ever told you that when I was at college I was rather —
rather strong in Greek.”

“He spoke the Romaic language, did he?”

“I think so.”

“That settles it,” murmured Franz. “‘Tis he, past all
doubt.”

“What do you say?”

“Nothing, nothing. But tell me, what were you thinking about
when I came in?”

“Oh, I was arranging a little surprise for you.”

“Indeed. Of what nature?”

“Why, you know it is quite impossible to procure a
carriage.”

“Certainly; and I also know that we have done all that human
means afforded to endeavor to get one.”

“Now, then, in this difficulty a bright idea has flashed
across my brain.” Franz looked at Albert as though he had
not much confidence in the suggestions of his imagination.
“I tell you what, Sir Franz,” cried Albert, “you deserve to
be called out for such a misgiving and incredulous glance as
that you were pleased to bestow on me just now.”

“And I promise to give you the satisfaction of a gentleman
if your scheme turns out as ingenious as you assert.”

“Well, then, hearken to me.”

“I listen.”

“You agree, do you not, that obtaining a carriage is out of
the question?”

“I do.”

“Neither can we procure horses?”

“True; we have offered any sum, but have failed.”

“Well, now, what do you say to a cart? I dare say such a
thing might be had.”

“Very possibly.”

“And a pair of oxen?”

“As easily found as the cart.”

“Then you see, my good fellow, with a cart and a couple of
oxen our business can be managed. The cart must be
tastefully ornamented; and if you and I dress ourselves as
Neapolitan reapers, we may get up a striking tableau, after
the manner of that splendid picture by Leopold Robert. It
would add greatly to the effect if the countess would join
us in the costume of a peasant from Puzzoli or Sorrento. Our
group would then be quite complete, more especially as the
countess is quite beautiful enough to represent a madonna.”

“Well,” said Franz, “this time, Albert, I am bound to give
you credit for having hit upon a most capital idea.”

“And quite a national one, too,” replied Albert with
gratified pride. “A mere masque borrowed from our own
festivities. Ha, ha, ye Romans! you thought to make us,
unhappy strangers, trot at the heels of your processions,
like so many lazzaroni, because no carriages or horses are
to be had in your beggarly city. But you don’t know us; when
we can’t have one thing we invent another.”

“And have you communicated your triumphant idea to anybody?”

“Only to our host. Upon my return home I sent for him, and I
then explained to him what I wished to procure. He assured
me that nothing would be easier than to furnish all I
desired. One thing I was sorry for; when I bade him have the
horns of the oxen gilded, he told me there would not be
time, as it would require three days to do that; so you see
we must do without this little superfluity.”

“And where is he now?”

“Who?”

“Our host.”

“Gone out in search of our equipage, by to-morrow it might
be too late.”

“Then he will be able to give us an answer to-night.”

“Oh, I expect him every minute.” At this instant the door
opened, and the head of Signor Pastrini appeared.
“Permesso?” inquired he.

“Certainly — certainly,” cried Franz. “Come in, mine host.”

“Now, then,” asked Albert eagerly, “have you found the
desired cart and oxen?”

“Better than that!” replied Signor Pastrini, with the air of
a man perfectly well satisfied with himself.

“Take care, my worthy host,” said Albert, “better is a sure
enemy to well.”

“Let your excellencies only leave the matter to me,”
returned Signor Pastrini in a tone indicative of unbounded
self-confidence.

“But what have you done?” asked Franz. “Speak out, there’s a
worthy fellow.”

“Your excellencies are aware,” responded the landlord,
swelling with importance, “that the Count of Monte Cristo is
living on the same floor with yourselves!”

“I should think we did know it,” exclaimed Albert, “since it
is owing to that circumstance that we are packed into these
small rooms, like two poor students in the back streets of
Paris.”

“When, then, the Count of Monte Cristo, hearing of the
dilemma in which you are placed, has sent to offer you seats
in his carriage and two places at his windows in the Palazzo
Rospoli.” The friends looked at each other with unutterable
surprise.

“But do you think,” asked Albert, “that we ought to accept
such offers from a perfect stranger?”

“What sort of person is this Count of Monte Cristo?” asked
Franz of his host. “A very great nobleman, but whether
Maltese or Sicilian I cannot exactly say; but this I know,
that he is noble as a Borghese and rich as a gold-mine.”

“It seems to me,” said Franz, speaking in an undertone to
Albert, “that if this person merited the high panegyrics of
our landlord, he would have conveyed his invitation through
another channel, and not permitted it to be brought to us in
this unceremonious way. He would have written — or” —

At this instant some one knocked at the door. “Come in,”
said Franz. A servant, wearing a livery of considerable
style and richness, appeared at the threshold, and, placing
two cards in the landlord’s hands, who forthwith presented
them to the two young men, he said, “Please to deliver
these, from the Count of Monte Cristo to Viscomte Albert de
Morcerf and M. Franz d’Epinay. The Count of Monte Cristo,”
continued the servant, “begs these gentlemen’s permission to
wait upon them as their neighbor, and he will be honored by
an intimation of what time they will please to receive him.”

“Faith, Franz,” whispered Albert, “there is not much to find
fault with here.”

“Tell the count,” replied Franz, “that we will do ourselves
the pleasure of calling on him.” The servant bowed and
retired.

“That is what I call an elegant mode of attack,” said
Albert, “You were quite correct in what you said, Signor
Pastrini. The Count of Monte Cristo is unquestionably a man
of first-rate breeding and knowledge of the world.”

“Then you accept his offer?” said the host.

“Of course we do,” replied Albert. “Still, I must own I am
sorry to be obliged to give up the cart and the group of
reapers — it would have produced such an effect! And were
it not for the windows at the Palazzo Rospoli, by way of
recompense for the loss of our beautiful scheme, I don’t
know but what I should have held on by my original plan.
What say you, Franz?”

“Oh, I agree with you; the windows in the Palazzo Rospoli
alone decided me.” The truth was, that the mention of two
places in the Palazzo Rospoli had recalled to Franz the
conversation he had overheard the preceding evening in the
ruins of the Colosseum between the mysterious unknown and
the Transteverin, in which the stranger in the cloak had
undertaken to obtain the freedom of a condemned criminal;
and if this muffled-up individual proved (as Franz felt sure
he would) the same as the person he had just seen in the
Teatro Argentino, then he should be able to establish his
identity, and also to prosecute his researches respecting
him with perfect facility and freedom. Franz passed the
night in confused dreams respecting the two meetings he had
already had with his mysterious tormentor, and in waking
speculations as to what the morrow would produce. The next
day must clear up every doubt; and unless his near neighbor
and would-be friend, the Count of Monte Cristo, possessed
the ring of Gyges, and by its power was able to render
himself invisible, it was very certain he could not escape
this time. Eight o’clock found Franz up and dressed, while
Albert, who had not the same motives for early rising, was
still soundly asleep. The first act of Franz was to summon
his landlord, who presented himself with his accustomed
obsequiousness.

“Pray, Signor Pastrini,” asked Franz, “is not some execution
appointed to take place to-day?”

“Yes, your excellency; but if your reason for inquiry is
that you may procure a window to view it from, you are much
too late.”

“Oh, no,” answered Franz, “I had no such intention; and even
if I had felt a wish to witness the spectacle, I might have
done so from Monte Pincio — could I not?”

“Ah!” exclaimed mine host, “I did not think it likely your
excellency would have chosen to mingle with such a rabble as
are always collected on that hill, which, indeed, they
consider as exclusively belonging to themselves.”

“Very possibly I may not go,” answered Franz; “but in case I
feel disposed, give me some particulars of to-day’s
executions.”

“What particulars would your excellency like to hear?”

“Why, the number of persons condemned to suffer, their
names, and description of the death they are to die.”

“That happens just lucky, your excellency! Only a few
minutes ago they brought me the tavolettas.”

“What are they?”

“Sort of wooden tablets hung up at the corners of streets
the evening before an execution, on which is pasted up a
paper containing the names of the condemned persons, their
crimes, and mode of punishment. The reason for so publicly
announcing all this is, that all good and faithful Catholics
may offer up their prayers for the unfortunate culprits,
and, above all, beseech of heaven to grant them a sincere
repentance.”

“And these tablets are brought to you that you may add your
prayers to those of the faithful, are they?” asked Franz
somewhat incredulously.

“Oh, dear, no, your excellency! I have not time for
anybody’s affairs but my own and those of my honorable
guests; but I make an agreement with the man who pastes up
the papers, and he brings them to me as he would the
playbills, that in case any person staying at my hotel
should like to witness an execution, he may obtain every
requisite information concerning the time and place etc.”

“Upon my word, that is a most delicate attention on your
part, Signor Pastrini,” cried Franz.

“Why, your excellency,” returned the landlord, chuckling and
rubbing his hands with infinite complacency, “I think I may
take upon myself to say I neglect nothing to deserve the
support and patronage of the noble visitors to this poor
hotel.”

“I see that plainly enough, my most excellent host, and you
may rely upon me to proclaim so striking a proof of your
attention to your guests wherever I go. Meanwhile, oblige me
by a sight of one of these tavolettas.”

“Nothing can be easier than to comply with your excellency’s
wish,” said the landlord, opening the door of the chamber;
“I have caused one to be placed on the landing, close by
your apartment.” Then, taking the tablet from the wall, he
handed it to Franz, who read as follows: —

“`The public is informed that on Wednesday, February 23d,
being the first day of the Carnival, executions will take
place in the Piazza del Popolo, by order of the Tribunal of
the Rota, of two persons, named Andrea Rondola, and Peppino,
otherwise called Rocca Priori; the former found guilty of
the murder of a venerable and exemplary priest, named Don
Cesare Torlini, canon of the church of St. John Lateran; and
the latter convicted of being an accomplice of the atrocious
and sanguinary bandit, Luigi Vampa, and his band. The
first-named malefactor will be subjected to the mazzuola,
the second culprit beheaded. The prayers of all good
Christians are entreated for these unfortunate men, that it
may please God to awaken them to a sense of their guilt, and
to grant them a hearty and sincere repentance for their
crimes.'”

This was precisely what Franz had heard the evening before
in the ruins of the Colosseum. No part of the programme
differed, — the names of the condemned persons, their
crimes, and mode of punishment, all agreed with his previous
information. In all probability, therefore, the Transteverin
was no other than the bandit Luigi Vampa himself, and the
man shrouded in the mantle the same he had known as “Sinbad
the Sailor,” but who, no doubt, was still pursuing his
philanthropic expedition in Rome, as he had already done at
Porto-Vecchio and Tunis. Time was getting on, however, and
Franz deemed it advisable to awaken Albert; but at the
moment he prepared to proceed to his chamber, his friend
entered the room in perfect costume for the day. The
anticipated delights of the Carnival had so run in his head
as to make him leave his pillow long before his usual hour.
“Now, my excellent Signor Pastrini,” said Franz, addressing
his landlord, “since we are both ready, do you think we may
proceed at once to visit the Count of Monte Cristo?”

“Most assuredly,” replied he. “The Count of Monte Cristo is
always an early riser; and I can answer for his having been
up these two hours.”

“Then you really consider we shall not be intruding if we
pay our respects to him directly?”

“Oh, I am quite sure. I will take all the blame on myself if
you find I have led you into an error.”

“Well, then, if it be so, are you ready, Albert?”

“Perfectly.”

“Let us go and return our best thanks for his courtesy.”

“Yes, let us do so.” The landlord preceded the friends
across the landing, which was all that separated them from
the apartments of the count, rang at the bell, and, upon the
door being opened by a servant, said, “I signori Francesi.”

The domestic bowed respectfully, and invited them to enter.
They passed through two rooms, furnished in a luxurious
manner they had not expected to see under the roof of Signor
Pastrini, and were shown into an elegantly fitted-up
drawing-room. The richest Turkey carpets covered the floor,
and the softest and most inviting couches, easy-chairs, and
sofas, offered their high-piled and yielding cushions to
such as desired repose or refreshment. Splendid paintings by
the first masters were ranged against the walls,
intermingled with magnificent trophies of war, while heavy
curtains of costly tapestry were suspended before the
different doors of the room. “If your excellencies will
please to be seated,” said the man, “I will let the count
know that you are here.”

And with these words he disappeared behind one of the
tapestried portieres. As the door opened, the sound of a
guzla reached the ears of the young men, but was almost
immediately lost, for the rapid closing of the door merely
allowed one rich swell of harmony to enter. Franz and Albert
looked inquiringly at each oth